211M MR 052 02 X009 0030

1
HOJA DE REVISIONES
1 Emisión para el Cliente Julio-2009 LSS IPG IPG
0 Emisión para revisión interna Mayo-2009 LSS IPG CAS ------

Revisado Aprobado
Rev. Descripción Fecha Autor Cliente
por por
2
INDICE
PAG.
1.0. - Contactos …………………………………………………………………………………………….................. 3
2.0. - Introducción ………………………………………………………………………………......................... 6

2.1. - Presentación ……………………………………………………………………….................... 6
2.2. - Descripción General ……………………………………………………………….............. 6
3.0. - Objetivo .……………………………………………………………………………………............................ 9
4.0. - Características Técnicas del Equipo .......................................................... 10

4.1. - Carro de Mantenimiento ………………………………………………………................ 10
4.2. - Componentes ………………………………………………………………………................... 10
4.3. - Instrumentos ………………………………………………………………………................... 11
5.0. - Instrucciones para la Instalación, Operación y Mantenimiento ................. 12

5.1. - Montaje del Carro …………………………………………………………………….............. 12
5.2. - Sistema Eléctrico ………………………………………………………………….................. 32
5.3. - Puesta en Marcha y Operación ………………………………………………………...... 37
5.4. - Mantenimiento ………………………………………………………………………................. 41
6.0. - Instrucciones de Seguridad y Prevención de Accidentes .......................... 42

6.1. - Introducción ……………………………………………………………………….................... 42
6.2. - Riesgos de Accidentes …………………………………………………………................. 42
6.3. - Prevención de Accidentes ……………………………………………………………......... 43
6.4. - Sirena ……………………………………………………………………………......................... 43
6.5. - Baliza .………………………………………………………………………………....................... 43
6.6. - Disposiciones Generales de Seguridad ……………………………................. 44
7.0. - Anexos ……………………………………………………………………………………............................. 45

7.1. - Planos Mecánicos, Eléctricos y de Canalización
7.2. - Listado de Pernos y Tabla de Torques
7.3. - Listas de Chequeo Mecánico y Eléctrico
7.4. - Listado de Partes
7.5. - Manuales y Catálogos de Fabricantes
TABLA GENERAL
DE CONTENIDOS
1. - Contactos
2. - Introducción
3. - Objetivo
4. - Características técnicas de los equipos
5. - Instrucciones para la instalación, Operación y Mantenimiento
6. - Instrucciones para la seguridad y la prevención de accidentes
7. - Anexo 7.1 - Planos mecánicos, eléctricos y de canalización
8. - Anexo 7.2 - Listado de pernos y Tabla de torques
9. - Anexo 7.3 - Listados de chequeo mecánico y eléctrico
10. - Anexo 7.4 - Listado de partes
11. - Anexo 7.5 - Manuales y catálogos vendors
3
1.0. - CONTACTOS
1.1. - Introducción
Antes de proceder con la instalación de equipo, lea el presente manual en su totalidad. Aquí usted encontrará la
información técnica acerca de cada equipo y sus componentes, las instrucciones para el montaje, operación y
mantenimiento de los mismos y, lo más importante, información referente la seguridad del personal que
participará en las actividades anteriormente mencionadas y para la prevención de accidentes (capítulo 6).
Tenga presente que, de no prestar atención a la información aquí entregada,

el resultado podría ser un accidente con resultado de lesión.
1.2. – Búsqueda de Información y Asistencia Técnica.
Esta sección del manual le entrega el procedimiento y las herramientas que usted necesita, para obtener en
forma rápida y eficiente información técnica, asistencia técnica, servicio de emergencia en la solución de
problemas y, otros aspectos tales como el extenso conocimiento y experiencia que FLSmidth Minerals posee
sobre el tema.
1.2.1. – Información de Contactos
Nuestro sitio WEB, www.flsmidth.com contiene información actualizada acerca de números telefónicos y
direcciones e-mails de nuestros encargados de servicio y supervisores, en cada una de nuestras localizaciones
globales del grupo FLSmidth.
Nota: Si usted llama o se contacta vía e-mail con uno de los números o direcciones listadas más abajo,
asegúrese de informar a la recepcionista con quién usted desea tomar contacto (Personal del Departamento de
Ingeniería, del Departamento de Servicio al Cliente o del Departamento de Repuestos y Servicios).
Si usted no está seguro cuál es la compañía del grupo FLSmidth Minerals responsable del servicio de su planta,
por favor tome contacto con nuestra “FLSmidth Minerals USA Inc. Sede Mundial”
► FLSmidth Minerals USA Inc. (Sede Mundial)

Fono : 1-610-264-69 00
Fax : 1-610-264-69 96
E-mail : FLS-US@flsmidth.com
Sitio Web : http:/www.flsmidthminerals.com
► FLSmidth Minerals Chile (Departamento de Ingeniería)

Fono : 56-2-290 00 00
Celular : 56-99-479 56 15
E-mail : alfonso.espinoza@flsmidth.com
► FLSmidth Minerals Chile (Servicio al Cliente)

Fono : 56-2-328 29 20
Celular : 56-99-479 56 19
E-mail : eugenio.cruzat@flsmidth.com
4
1.3. – Solicitud Repuestos
Nuestros Representantes del Departamento de Servicio al Cliente, están entrenados para encontrar y
suministrar el repuesto o parte correcta para su equipo o máquina. Si bien es cierto existen repuestos
o partes similares eso no significa que estos sean idénticamente iguales. Por otra parte, aunque
muchas máquinas tienen la misma designación, muchas de sus partes y/o componentes han sido
diseñados para una aplicación especifica y no son compatibles con partes análogas de otra máquina
de igual o similar designación.
El “Listado de Partes” incluido en el presente manual, contiene información detallada que usted y su
representante del servicio al cliente de FLSmidth requieren para identificar el correcto y único
repuesto de reemplazo para su equipo diseñado y construido por FLSmidth. Este listado contiene
entre otros, referencias a planos, especificaciones de material, normas aplicables y, información
importante acerca de cada componente y conjunto.
Para facilitar el trabajo de identificación del o de los repuestos requeridos, en el “ANEXO 7.4.” del
presente manual, se han incluido dos “Listados de Repuestos Recomendados”, el primero de ellos
elaborado para la etapa de puesta en marcha del equipo y, el segundo para cuando se haya cumplido
un año de funcionamiento.
Los listados señalados en el párrafo anterior, han sido emitidos basados en el conocimiento y
experiencia en terreno que FLSmidth posee. El siguiente es un esquema del listado de repuestos
empleado en el presente manual.
1.2.2. – Como identificar un repuesto en el listado de partes
Hay tres (3) números claves para identificar cualquier repuesto a suministrar por FLSmidth Minerals:
a. - Número de Contrato:
Este número corresponde al número de la Orden de Compra emitida para identificar el
contrato y, se encuentra en la tapa del Listado de Partes con la siguiente denominación:
O.C. No. 211M-MR-052-02.
b. - Número de Proyecto FLSmidth:

Este número se muestra también en la tapa del Listado de Partes y se denomina:
PR-28010
c. - Número del Listado de Partes:

El Número del Listado de Partes es: 28010ME01LP01. Este número se muestra siempre
en la tapa del listado de partes y, en la parte superior derecha de cada página.
Carro Mantenimiento Excéntrica Número 28010ME01LP01 Sección 01.01

LISTADO DE PARTES
Componentes Hidráulicos Código Producto Hoja Nº 09
PLANO Nº CODIGO PESO TOTAL

DESCRIPCION CANT CODIGO FLSmidth
PRODUCTO Nº MATERIAL (KG)
01 Unidad Hidráulica 01
02 Motor Eléctrico 1 02
03 Estanque Aceite 500 lt. 1 03
04 Bomba Hidráulica 1 04
5
d. – Número del Elemento: Esto es esencialmente un número que determina la ubicación de

un conjunto o parte específico en el Listado de Partes. El número del elemento es un
número de ocho (8) dígitos formado como sigue:
● Número de la Sección: Es un número de cuatro (4) dígitos de la forma “xx.yy” y

se muestra en el extremo superior derecho de cada página.
● Número de Página: Es un número de dos (2) dígitos de la forma “xx” que

comienza con 01 y continúa secuencialmente hasta que todos
los ítems que pertenecen a la sección hayan sido listados.
● Número de Posición: Es un número de dos (2) dígitos en forma de “xx” y, está

ubicado en ambos lados del listado.
El número del elemento se construye combinando los tres números arriba mencionados. A
manera de ejemplo se muestra el número del ítem 04 mostrado en el listado de la página
anterior:
Elemento: Bomba Hidráulica

Número del Elemento: 01.01.09.04
El ítem está en la Sección número 01.01, en la hoja número 09 y en la posición 04.
La anterior información se entrega como un resumen de manejo rápido. Si usted necesita

información más detallada, por favor no dude en comunicarse con su representante local
del servicio al cliente de FLSmidth.
6
2.0. - INTRODUCCION
2.1. - Presentación
La empresa “AkerSolutions” encargada de desarrollar el proyecto “ESPERANZA” propiedad de la

Minera Esperanza, a adjudicado, a través de la orden de compra Nº 211M-MR-052-02, a la
empresa FLSmidth Minerals S.A. el diseño y manufactura de un Carro para el mantenimiento de la
Excéntrica de un Chancador Primario Modelo 60” X 113” TRAYLOR y del tipo “NT”.
El presente manual abarca tópicos tales como la descripción del diseño, la instalación, operación y
mantenimiento, así como también reglas e instrucciones de seguridad emitidas para el manejo del
siguiente equipo:
TAG DEL EQUIPO Nº CANT DESCRIPCION
Carro para el Mantenimiento de la Excéntrica de un

211-ZM-001 01 Chancador Primario Modelo 60”x113” Tipo NT
Y fue desarrollado tratando de simular de la mejor manera posible las condiciones de operación que el
equipo tendrá en la planta.
Si algún o algunos de los temas aquí expuestos no son lo suficientemente claros o, si el usuario desea
agregar, cambiar o quitar información, por favor tomar contacto con FLSmidth a fin de discutir el o los
temas en discordia.
2.2. - Descripción General
El diseño del Carro de Mantenimiento se realizó teniendo en cuenta principalmente su función. Las
características de diseño del Chancador Primario no permiten desmontar la Excéntrica usando solo
una grúa de levante y, la única forma de de remover y/o reinstalar este elemento es haciéndolo a
través del extremo inferior del Chancador. La función del Carro es entonces, permitir extraer la
Excéntrica desde el Chancador para su mantenimiento.
Normalmente el Carro está inactivo dentro de una bóveda de concreto, ubicado en el nivel inferior del
Chancador, colgado desde un par vigas “I” a través de cuatro (4) troles, dos de ellos motorizados que
permiten desplazarlo.
Las dimensiones y pesos principales del Carro son:
Largo (incluido el pasillo de acceso) : 10.465 mm

Ancho : 6.900 mm
Alto (con las guías retraídas) : 4.851 mm
Peso vacío : 17.300 Kg
Peso con carga máxima : 34.493 Kg
El Carro está construido con vigas de acero del tipo IP, UPN y perfiles de acero del tipo L y tipo □.
Todos los componentes estructurales son de acero ASTMA-36 ES.
Para el acceso al interior del carro y al panel de control y operación se ha instalado una pasarela
puente metálica plegable y, que cuando el carro no está operando permite ser incorporada al carro
mismo.
7
DIMENSIONES GENERALES CARRO DE MANTENIMIENTO EXCENTRICA

8
9
3.0. – OBJETIVO
Este manual está destinado a establecer las normas, especificaciones

técnicas y procedimientos a aplicar en la instalación, operación y
mantenimiento del Carro de Mantenimiento de la Excéntrica del Chancador
Primario propiedad de la Minera Esperanza.
Nuestra recomendación es cumplir con las normas y seguir los

procedimientos e instrucciones aquí presentadas a fin de asegurar una
buena performance de los equipos.
10
4.0. - CARACTERISTICAS TECNICAS DEL EQUIPO
4.1. – Carro para el Mantenimiento de Excéntrica - TAG Nº: 211-ZM-001
ESPECIFICACIONES GENERALES
Carga Neta de Diseño Kg/lb 33,970 / 74,890
Material ASTM A-36 ES
Velocidad Mínima de Traslación m/min 4.0
Velocidad Máxima de Traslación m/min 16.0
Velocidad Máxima Cilindros Hidráulicos m/min 4.0 a 16.0
Largo mm 10.465
Ancho mm 6.900
Alto mm 4.851
Peso sin Carga Kg/Lb 15,000 / 33070
Cantidad 01
4.2. – Características Técnicas de los Componentes Principales
4.2.1. - Trolley Motorizado 4.2.2. - Trolley Conducido

Capacidad 12.5 Ton Capacidad 12.5 Ton
Velocidad 4 a 16 m/min Ancho del ala 140-230 mm
Potencia 0.12/0.55 Kw Cantidad usada 2 ea
Consumo de corriente 0.85/1.3 Amp
Ancho del ala 140-230 mm
Suministro 380 / 50 V / Hz
Control 48 VAC
Cantidad usada 2 e/a
4.2.3. – Cilindros Hidráulicos 4.2.4. – Unidad Hidráulica

Tipo Telescópico Presión 2700 PSI
Capacidad levantamiento 12.5 Ton Caudal 28 y 8 GPM
Presión de trabajo 140 a 180 bar Alimentación 380 VAC Trifásico
Presión de prueba 270 bar Potencia 50 Hp
Carrera 4,174 mm Volumen del estanque 450 litros
Número de etapas 4 e/a Nota: Para mayor información acerca de este
Cantidad usada 2 e/a equipo refiérase al manual del fabricante
Nota: Flanche, Trunnion y 2 Rodamientos “VIGNOLA” incluido en el anexo 7.5.
están incluidos
11
4.2. – Características Técnicas de los Componentes Principales (continuación)
4.2.5. – Huinche Hidráulico WH-0600 4.2.6. – Cilindro Freno Hidráulico

Capacidad carga del tambor 5.890 N Tipo Doble acción
Velocidad de giro del tambor 10 rpm Carrera 4 pulgadas
Carga de rotura del cable 6.000 Kg Cantidad usada 2 e/a
Presión máxima en la
75 bar
conexión hidráulica
4.3. – INSTRUMENTOS
4.3.1. - Baliza 4.3.2. - Sirena

Voltaje de operación 220 V Voltaje de operación 220 V
Tipo de corriente AC Tipo de corriente AC
12
5.0. - INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO
5.1. – Montaje del Carro
5.1.1. – Recepción
Revise y verifique que Ud. haya recibido la totalidad de los componentes del carro. Para tal objeto,
consulte la Lista de Piezas y/o la Lista de Empaque (Packing List) correspondiente.
Los componentes del equipo deben ser revisados visualmente a fin de detectar posibles daños
ocurridos durante su transporte o manipulación. Si se observa algún daño, por favor contáctese
inmediatamente con FLSmidth Minerals Chile o su representante para informar el daño detectado y
obtener su autorización para continuar con el montaje y/o el empleo de la(s) parte(s) y/o pieza(s)
dañada(s).
5.1.2.- Montaje en el Terreno
Antes de montar el equipo tenga en cuenta los siguientes aspectos:
1.- Verifique que todas las partes y piezas estén en el área que se eligió para instalar el equipo.
2.- Verifique que los planos y las especificaciones técnicas que describen el proceso de montaje estén
incluidos en el manual.
3.- Confirme que todas las estructuras, vigas y perfiles estén debidamente marcadas y de acuerdo
con lo estipulado en los planos de montaje incluidos en el presente manual.
4.- Importante: Verifique los elementos estructurales (rieles) donde se instalará el Carro y
en los cuales deslizará estén paralelos y nivelados. Revise los rieles por daños o
deformaciones que puedan impedir el correcto desplazamiento del carro.
Tolerancias permitidas para todas las instancias del arme: +/- 2 mm.
Las instrucciones que a continuación se entregan son sugerencias dadas por

FLSmidth para el montaje del Carro. El procedimiento correcto para concretar
Nota 1:
la instalación del equipo dependerá de las reales condiciones que la compañía
propietaria tenga en su recinto.
Con el fin de obtener una referencia para el montaje, el Carro ha sido dividido
Nota 2:
en “Plataformas y Paneles” como se muestra en el diagrama que sigue.
13
5.1.2.1. – Montaje de la Plataforma Inferior (Plano de Referencia Nº: 28010ME01MT1)
Nota Importante: El montaje debe ser realizado sobre una superficie plana y
correctamente nivelada. Diferencia máxima permitida en elevación
para efectos de nivelación: 2 mm.
Listado de componentes de la Plataforma Inferior:
IT CODIGO COMPONENTE NOMBRE DEL COMPONENTE CANT

1 FA04-ER3 Enrejado lateral derecho 01
2 FA04-ER4 Enrejado lateral izquierdo 01
3 FA03-V2 Viga frontal 01
4 FA03-V3 Viga trasera 01
5 FA05-D2 Diagonal 02
6 FA05-V4 Viga interior 02
7 FA10-ER7 Plataforma unidad hidráulica 01
8 FA25-PP1 Plancha diamantada 01
a. - Una vez reunidos todos los componentes de la plataforma inferior proceder a armar de
acuerdo a lo indicado en los planos de montaje Nº: 28010ME01MT1 (Ver anexo 7.1.), el
Listado de Pernos y la Tabla de Torques (Ver anexo 7.2.)
b. - Revise la nivelación de la plataforma usando un nivel óptico.

Nota Importante:
Diferencia máxima permitida en elevación: 2 mm.
c. - Verifique la cuadratura de la plataforma midiendo la longitud de de la diagonales.

Nota Importante.
La diferencia entre ambas dimensiones no debe ser mayor que 2 mm.
d. - Una vez que se consiga la cuadratura de la plataforma, apriete todos los pernos aplicando el
torque correspondiente de acuerdo a la tabla de torques incluida en el anexo 7.2.
e. - Vuelva a revisar la nivelación y cuadratura de la plataforma. Si una de ellas o ambas se han

perdido, suelte todos los pernos y repita los pasos a.-, b.-, c.- y e.-.
Estas operaciones se deberán repetir hasta que se logre conseguir una plataforma
cuadrada y nivelada dentro de la tolerancia señalada y con sus pernos
correctamente torqueados.
14
Figura Nº 1. - Vista Isométrica de la Plataforma Inferior Armada
f. - Instale las placas diamantadas que cubren la plataforma, tome como referencia el plano de
montaje Nº 28010ME01MT2 (Ver anexo 7.1).
Todas las plancha deben ser soldadas a la estructura
- Tipo de Soldadura: De acuerdo a la norma AWS A 5.1
- Dimensión de la soldadura: 4 x 4 x L= 50mm / Paso= 200mm
- Nota importante: Después de haber soldado, se debe retocar con pintura

las zonas trabajadas.
15
5.1.2.2. – Montaje de las Mesas Fijas y Cilindros Hidráulicos

(Plano de Referencia Nº: 28010ME01MT2)
a. - Monte las Mesas Fijas (FA13-M1) sobre la plataforma inferior (Ver plano Nº 28010ME01MT2),
instale los pernos y apriételos aplicando el torque correspondiente (Ver tabla de torques en
anexo 7.2.)
b. - Antes de instalar los cilindros (TAW-6ZZ1-ZZ2)en la mesas fijas, proceda a llenarlos con
aceite hidráulico de acuerdo a las siguientes instrucciones:
1. - Coloque los cilindros en posición horizontal. Deje las perforaciones de llenado

hacia arriba.
2. - Remueva el tapón y llene los cilindros con el aceite hidráulico, hasta que el
líquido comience desparramar.
3. - Instale el tapón nuevamente.
c. - Verifique que los descansos están instalados en ambos cilindros, sino proceda a instalarlos.
Una vez instalados monte los cilindros en las mesas fijas.
Figura Nº 2. - Vista Isométrica de las Mesas Fijas y Cilindros Hidráulicos instalados

16
5.1.2.3. – Montaje de la Plataforma Superior (Plano de Referencia Nº 28010ME01MT3)
Importante: El montaje de la plataforma superior se debe realizar sobre una superficie

plana y nivelada. Diferencia máxima permitida en elevación para efectos de
nivelación: 2 mm.
Listado de componentes de la Plataforma Superior:

1 FA07-ER1 Enrejado lateral izquierdo 01
2 FA07-ER2 Enrejado lateral derecho 01
3 FA08-ER6 Viga trasera 01
4 FA08-ER5 Viga delantera 01
5 GAE-1AA1-AA1 Trolley motriz 02
6 TAW-2AA1-ZZ1 Trolley conducido 02
7 FA26-SP1 Soporte para trolley 04
8 FA27-FR1 Freno hidráulico 02
9 FA21-PA1 Pasador 08
a.- Una vez reunidas todas las partes componentes proceder a armar la plataforma superior
tomando como referencia el plano de montaje Nº 28010ME01MT3 (Ver anexo 7.1.)
b.-
Revise la nivelación de la plataforma usando un nivel óptico.
Nota Importante:
Diferencia máxima permitida en elevación: 2 mm.
c.-
Verifique la cuadratura de la plataforma midiendo la longitud de de la diagonales.
Nota Importante:
La diferencia entre ambas dimensiones no debe ser mayor que 2 mm.

d.-
Una vez que se consiga la cuadratura de la plataforma, apriete todos los pernos aplicando el
torque correspondiente de acuerdo a la tabla de torques incluida en el anexo 7.2.
e. -
Vuelva a revisar la nivelación y cuadratura de la plataforma. Si una de ellas o ambas se han
perdido, suelte todos los pernos y repita los pasos a.-, b.-, c.- y e.-.
Estas operaciones se deberán repetir hasta que se logre conseguir una plataforma
cuadrada y nivelada dentro de la tolerancia señalada y con sus pernos
correctamente torqueados.
f.- Monte los soportes de los trolleys sobre los extremos de las vigas FA08-ER5 y FA08-ER6
(Ver figura siguiente)
17
Figura Nº 3. - Vista Isométrica de los Soportes de Trolleys instalados
g.- Monte los frenos hidráulicos (Código FA27-FR1) en los soportes soldados a la viga
FA08-ER6 (Ver plano de referencia Nº 28010ME01MT5).
Figura Nº 4. - Montaje de los Frenos Hidráulicos

18
h.- Monte los trolleys (Códigos: GAE-1AA1-AA1 y TAW-2AA1-ZZ1) en los soportes de trolleys
(Ver plano de referencia Nº 28010ME01MT3) utilizando para tal fin los pasadores código
FA26-PA1 y, asegure el ensamble instalando seguros SEEGER en el extremo ranurado de
ellos. Los trolleys motorizados deben quedar instalados en los soportes de la viga FA08-ER5
y los conducidos en los soportes de la viga FA08-ER6.
Apriete los pernos suavemente, NO APLIQUE TORQUE
Figura Nº 5. - Vista Isométrica de la Plataforma Superior Armada
5.1.2.4. – Montaje de las Columnas y Diagonales (Ver plano de montaje 28010ME01MT4)
Listado de columnas y diagonales:

1 FA14-COL1 Columna Nº 1 01
19
Listado de columnas y diagonales (continuación):

a. - Monte las columnas (de la 1 a la 6) de acuerdo a lo mostrado en el plano de montaje

Nº 28010ME01MT4.
Inicialmente apriete los pernos aplicando solo la mitad del torque correspondiente.
b. - Monte las diagonales de acuerdo a lo mostrado en el plano de montaje Nº 28010ME01MT4.

Figura Nº 6. - Vista Isométrica del Montaje de Columnas y Diagonales

20
c. - Monte el panel superior sobre las columnas ya instaladas (Ver plano de montaje
Nº 28010ME 01MT5).
d. - APLOME todo el conjunto y apriete los pernos aplicando el torque correspondiente (Ver tabla
de torques en anexo 7.2.)
e. - Instale la escalera vertical (Código: FA23-ES1) de acuerdo a lo indicado en el plano de

montaje Nº 28010ME01MT5
Figura Nº 7. - Vista Isométrica de la Estructura del Carro ensamblada

21
5.1.2.6. – Montaje de las Guías Fijas, Viga para Tecle, Mesa Móvil y Guías Móviles
(Planos de referencia: 28010ME01MT6 Y 28010ME01MT7)
Listado de de componentes:

1 FA18-GF1 Guías fijas 04
2 FA20-M2 Mesa móvil 01
3 FA20-M3 Guías móviles 04
4 FA21-PA2 Pasador de unión entre mesa y cilindros hidráulicos 02
5 SK27-V1 Viga para Tecle 01
a. - Monte la viga para tecle SK27-VI apernándola a la viga FA08-ER6

b. - Monte las cuatro (4) guías fijas (FA18-GF1)amarrándolas a la estructura con los pernos
correspondientes (Ver plano Nº 28010ME01MT6)
c. - Dé solo un suave apriete a los pernos de amarre de las guías.
Figura Nº 8. - Vista Isométrica - Montaje de las Guías Fijas

22
d. - Para montar la mesa móvil en el carro, levante la mesa sobre la estructura del carro y luego
introduzca las guías amarradas a las patas de la mesa en las guías fijas.
e. - Inserte la cuatro guías móviles (FA20-M3), en las guías fijas
f. - APLOME las guías y aplique un apriete suave a los pernos.
g. - Una vez que el montaje está listo (montadas las guías fijas, la mesa móvil y las guías
móviles) engrase las guías fijas. Suba y baje la mesa móvil para asegurar que esta se desliza
sin problema en las guías fijas. Realice esta operación usando una grúa o un dispositivo
mecánico.
Si hay problemas de deslizamiento entre la mesa y las guías, se debe reajustar el sistema
hasta lograr el efecto deseado.
Figura Nº 9. - Montaje Mesa Móvil y Guías Móviles

23
h. - Verificado lo anterior, dé el apriete final a los pernos de amarre del ensamble móvil, aplicando
en torque correspondiente (Ver tabla de torques en el anexo 2).
i. - Conecte los cilindros hidráulicos, instalados en la mesa fija, a la mesa móvil usando para tal
fin los pasadores código FA21-PA2. Asegure el ensamble instalando seguros SEEGER en los
extremos ranurados de los pasadores.
5.1.2.7. – Montaje del Carro en los Rieles del Edificio

(Plano de Referencia Nº 28010ME01MT8)
a. - Verifique el correcto alineamiento de los rieles instalados en la caverna.

b. - Desmonte los trolleys desde el carro
c. - Monte los trolleys en los rieles por donde deslizará el carro.
No olvide que los trolleys motorizados deben ir montados en la viga FA08-ER5 y, los trolleys
conducidos se deben montar en la viga FA08-ER6.
d. - La figura siguiente muestra las dimensiones a considerar al momento de ajustar los trolleys
al riel por donde rodará el carro. El ancho de la abertura se ajusta insertando golillas
espaciadoras SIMETRICAMENTE.
Figura Nº 10. - Montaje de los Trolleys en el Riel donde el Carro deslizará

24
e. - Cuelgue el carro desde los trolleys usando para tal propósito los pasadores (código FA26-
PA1). Asegure el ensamble instalando seguros SEEGER en el extremo ranurado de los
pasadores.
Figura Nº 11. - Montaje del Carro en Rieles de Deslizamiento
5.1.2.8. – Montaje de los Componentes Eléctricos

(Planos de Referencia: 28010EL01DC01, 28010EL01DC01)
a. - Instale y/o conecte todos los componentes electromecánicos (Trolleys, Tableros, Huinche,
Luces, Instrumentos, etc.) de acuerdo a los planos más arriba indicados.
b. - Realice la canalización eléctrica y el tendido eléctrico.
5.1.2.9. – Conexiones Eléctricas

(Planos de Referencia: 28010EL01DA01, 28010EL01DA02)
a. - Realice todas las conexiones eléctricas tomando como referencia los planos más arriba
indicados.
25
5.1.2.10. - Montaje de los Componentes Hidráulicos

(Planos de Referencia: 28010ME01CN01, 28010ME01CN02, 28010ME01CN03,
28010ME01CN04 y 28010ME01CN05)
a. - Monte la unidad hidráulica y los cilindros de los frenos tomando como referencia los planos
más arriba indicados.
b. - Realice la canalización hidráulica y todas las conexiones hidráulicas
NOTA: Encuentre mayor información referente a la unidad hidráulica en el “Manual de

Operaciones” emitido por el fabricante (Ver Anexo 7.5. Manual de Operaciones para Central
Oleo-hidráulica).
c. - Instale el brazo Soporte (Código: SK25-BV1) para montar posteriormente la válvula

direccional de accionamiento manual.
Figura Nº 12. - Montaje del Brazo Soporte de la Válvula Direccional

26
5.1.2.11. – Montaje de la Plataforma Sobre-Estructura

(Plano de Referencia: 28010ME01MT11)
Listado de componentes:

1 FA28-PT1 Panel Plataforma Sobre-estructura 01
FA28-PT2 Panel Plataforma Sobre-estructura 01
2 FA29-PT2 Panel Plataforma Sobre-estructura 01
FA29-PT3 Panel Plataforma Sobre-estructura 01
a. - Montar los paneles de la plataforma sobre-estructura. Fije los paneles a la estructura con los
pernos correspondientes (Ver plano 28010ME01MT11).
Figura Nº 13 - Montaje de la Plataforma Superior

27
5.1.2.12. – Montaje de las Barandas (Planos de Referencia: 28010ME01MT9,

28010ME01MT11)

1 FA11-BD1 Baranda superior Nº 1 02
2 FA11-BD2 Baranda superior Nº 2 02
3 FA09-BD3 Baranda planta baja Nº 3 02
a. - Montar las barandas de la planta baja: Barandas Nº 3, Nº 5 y Nº 6, en cada uno de los

paneles laterales del carro. Fije las barandas a la estructura con los pernos correspondientes
(Plano 28010ME01MT9).
b. - Montar las barandas de la planta alta: Barandas Nº 1 Y Nº 2. Fije las barandas a la
estructura con los pernos correspondientes (Plano 28010ME01MT11).
Figura Nº 14. - Montaje de las Barandas Superior e Inferior

28
5.1.2.12. – Montaje de la Pasarela de Acceso

(Plano de Referencia: 28010ME01MT10)

1 FA31-PS4 Brazo fijo 01
2 FA24-PS3 Brazo pivote 01
3 FA24-PS1 Pasarela 01
Pasador de unión entre pasarela
4 FA24-PS2 01
FA24-PS2 y la estructura del carro
5 FA24-PS2 Pasarela 01
6 PASADOR Pasador de unión entre pasarelas 01
7 SK29-CAÑ2 Cañería 01
8 SK29-BAR1 Pasador 01
9 SK29-CAÑ1 Cañería 01
10 SK28-BAR1 Barra sistema tensor 02
11 SK28-BAR2 Barra sistema tensor 02
a. - Para instalar la pasarela comience montando el brazo fijo (FA31-PS4) en la estructura del
carro. Fije este elemento a la estructura con los pernos correspondientes.
Figura Nº 15. - Montaje del Brazo Fijo de la Pasarela de Acceso
b. - Unir la pasarela FA24-PS2 a la estructura del carro utilizando para tal fin el pasador FA24-
PS2. Fije la pasarela a la estructura del carro instalando en los agujeros de cada extremo
del pasador una golilla y una chaveta partida.
29
Figura Nº 16. - Montaje de la Pasarela FA24-PS2
c. - Instalar el brazo móvil FA24-PS3 en la pasarela FA24-PS1 utilizando para tal fin el pasador
código FA24-PA3. Fije el brazo móvil a la pasarela instalando en los agujeros de cada
extremo del pasador una golilla y una chaveta partida.
Figura Nº 17. - Montaje del Brazo Móvil FA24-AR2 en la Pasarela FA24-PS1

30
c. - Unir ambas pasarelas, FA24-PS1 y FA24-PS2 utilizando para tal fin el PASADOR, y la
cañería SK29-CAÑ2. Fije la unión instalando en los agujeros de cada extremo del pasador
una golilla y una chaveta partida.
Figura Nº 18. - Unión de ambas Pasarelas
c. - Unir ambos brazos, Brazo Fijo y Brazo Móvil utilizando para tal fin el segundo pasador
FA24-PA3. Fije la unión instalando en los agujeros de cada extremo del pasador una golilla
y una chaveta partida.
d. - Montar el Sistema Tensor compuesto por: las barras SK28-BAR1, SK28-BAR2 y SK29-
BAR1 y la cañería SK29-CAÑ1. Una vez instalado el Sistema Tensor, monte los 6 (seis)
RESORTES TENSORES.
31
Figura Nº 19. - Montaje del Sistema Tensor
e. - Montar el huinche hidráulico en la placa soporte (Código FA23-SWI) ubicada en la viga

FA08-ER5, de la plataforma superior.
Figura Nº 20. - Soporte del Huinche

32
5.2. – Sistema Eléctrico
5.2.1. – Descripción del Sistema Eléctrico

Planos de Referencia: 28010EL01DC01, 28010EL01DC02, 28010EL01DA01,
28010EL01DA02, Incluidos en el anexo 7.1.
5.2.1.1. – Componentes del Sistema Hidráulico
Descripción del Componente Descripción de la Función del Componente

a. - Motor para conexión en Este motor trabaja en conjunto con un par de bombas hidráulicas,
estrella las que permiten por una parte subir o bajar por medio de un par
60Vac/50Hz/1500rpm/68A de cilindros hidráulicos la mesa móvil del sistema de izamiento y
por otra el funcionamiento de los cilindros hidráulicos de los
frenos del carro y el funcionamiento del huinche hidráulico.
b. - Cilindros Hidráulicos Cilindros hidráulicos de cuatro (4) etapas cuya función es levantar
la mesa móvil hasta la zona de desmontaje de la excéntrica y,
bajar la mesa móvil cargada con la excéntrica. Presión de trabajo
máxima 200 Bar (2900 PSI) para 25 Toneladas.
c. - Cilindros de Frenos Cilindros de freno para enclavar o des-enclavar el carro en la
posición de trabajo.
d. - Componentes de la Unidad Hidráulica
d.1. - Válvula Direccional Para 120 Vac de alimentación. Esta válvula es comandada desde
Comandada por el Tablero de Fuerza y Control. Permite subir o bajar la mesa
Solenoide 4/3 móvil del sistema de izamiento.
d.2. - Válvula Direccional Para 120 Vac de alimentación. Esta válvula permite activar los
Comandada por cilindros de freno para enclavar o des-enclavar el carro en la
Solenoide 4/3 posición de trabajo y activar el huinche para subir o bajar el
puente de acceso al carro.
d.3. - Válvula de Alivio con Esta válvula habilita el sistema para operar la mesa móvil.
Comando por
Solenoide, Retorno
con Resorte 2/2
d.4. - Válvula de Alivio con Esta válvula habilita el sistema para operar los cilindros de los
Comando por frenos hidráulicos y operar el huinche hidráulico.
Solenoide, Retorno
con Resorte 2/2
d.5. - Termostato Dispositivo de seguridad conectado al circuito de control del
equipo. Detecta cualquier incremento anormal de temperatura en
el fluido hidráulico. Cuando esto ocurre y el motor de la bomba
está trabajando, el termostato cierra un contacto de control
(TRIP) deteniendo el motor. Solo se podrá dar nuevamente
partida al motor de la bomba cuando la temperatura del fluido
hidráulico haya disminuido y el termostato vuelva a su posición
normal.
33

d.6. - Dispositivo Limitador El carro cuenta con dos (2) limitadores de carrera para las alturas
de Carrera máxima y minima de la mesa móvil. Ambos permiten controlar las
alturas superior e inferior de trabajo del carro. El limitador de
carrera inferior una vez activado permite trasladar el carro de un
lugar a otro.
d.7. - Sensores Inductivos Estos sensores permiten detener el comando - Freno Activado -
para Frenos una vez que ambos cilindros han llegado a sus extremos de
Activados y operación. Los sensores inductivos que indican que el freno se
Desactivados encuentra activado permiten además, trabajar con los cilindros
hidráulicos para subir o bajar la mesa móvil. Los sensores que se
activan una vez que los cilindros de freno se retractan, permiten
el comando de traslado del carro.
5.2.1.2. – Sistema de Movimiento y Traslado del Carro

a. - Motor Eléctrico para Estos son motores de dos velocidades que permiten trasladar el
Trolleys carro de un punto a otro. Las velocidades de trabajo son 4 y 16
(m/min.) y, pueden trabajar en ambos sentidos. El comando es
por medio de una botonera de control a distancia.
b. – Botonera de Control a Esta botonera tiene dos (2) pulsadores, cada uno con doble
Distancia contacto. El primer pulsador permite por medio de uno de sus
contactos funcionar los motores a la velocidad mas baja, la
velocidad mas alta se logra apretando el mismo pulsador a su
segunda posición. El segundo pulsador permite realizar las
mismas operaciones pero en reversa.
c. – Limitadores de Carrera Estos limitadores de carrera tienen la función de abrir el circuito
para máximos recorridos de control para los motores de los trolleys, una vez que los
del Carro limitadores de carrera se activan con el tope mecánico dispuesto
para tal operación.
d. - Limitador de Carrera para Fija el tope de la posición del puente de acceso al carro cuando
la subida del puente de este es izado.
acceso al carro
5.2.1.3. – Tablero Eléctrico de Fuerza y Control

a. – Partidor Directo Para motor de 50HP. Este partidor cuenta con un contactor, un
relé térmico y un termo-magnético general para el tablero.
b. – Partidor Inversor de Giro Con dos (2) velocidades para los motores de los trolleys. En el
presente caso se cuenta con 4 contactores para el inversor de
giro, 2 para cada motor, y un tercer contacto tetra-polar para
cada motor, usado para el cambio de velocidad baja a velocidad
alta.
c. – Botonera de Parada de Este dispositivo actúa sobre el circuito de control anulándolo ante
Emergencia cualquier acción.
34
5.2.1.4. – Sistemas de Control

a. - Selector de las funciones Este dispositivo permite seleccionar la función que se desea
PLATAFORMA/FRENO- activar. Hacia la izquierda habilita la opción de subir o bajar la
HUINCHE mesa móvil. Hacia la derecha habilita la opción de trabajar con los
frenos de carro y el huinche hidráulico.
b. - Pulsadores para subir o Una vez presionado el pulsador permite subir el puente de acceso
bajar el puente de acceso al al carro, es de color “VERDE” y se indica como “SUBIR
carro PLATAFORMA ACCESO”. El segundo pulsador permite bajar el
puente de acceso, es de color “ROJO” y está indicado como
“BAJAR PLATAFORMA ACCESO”. Ambas operaciones requieren
que la unidad hidráulica esté en funcionamiento.
c. – Pulsadores para activar y Una vez presionado el pulsador permite activar los frenos para
desactivar los frenos del enclavar el carro, es de color “VERDE” y se indica como “FRENO
carro ACTIVADO”. El segundo pulsador permite desactivar los frenos,
es de color “ROJO” y está indicado como “FRENO
DESACTIVADO”. Ambas operaciones requieren que la unidad
hidráulica esté en funcionamiento.
d. – Pulsadores de Partida y El pulsador de partida permite poner en funcionamiento el motor
Parada Motor Bomba de la unidad hidráulica, es de color “VERDE” y se indica con el
Hidráulica nombre “PARTIR MOTOR UNIDAD HIDRAULICA”. El pulsador
de parada permite detener el motor de la unidad hidráulica, es de
color “ROJO” y está señalado como “PARAR MOTOR UNIDAD
HIDRAULICA”.
e. – Selector para autorizar al Este dispositivo permite activar la válvula solenoide para los
comando hidráulico para modos subir y bajar. El selector tiene tres (3) posiciones: 1 para
subir o bajar la mesa móvil subir “SUBIR” - 0 “Central” - y 2 para bajar “BAJAR”.
f. – Españoleta On/Off Este dispositivo permite abrir o cerrar el circuito de alimentación
Tablero de Fuerza y Control hacia el termo-magnético general desde el exterior. Cuenta
además con la posibilidad de bloquear, por intermedio de un
candado, el circuito de fuerza para permitir trabajos de
mantención al interior del carro.
g. - Luces Pilotos
g.01. - Piloto - Equipo Al energizar el circuito de control, este piloto nos indica que el
Energizado equipo en su parte control esta apto para operar.
g.02. - Piloto - Alta Si la temperatura en el estanque hidráulico sube sobre los 60º C,
Temperatura el termostato cierra su circuito de control y envía una señal al
Estanque Hidráulico tablero eléctrico. Recibida la señal el motor de la bomba deja de
funcionar.
g.03. - Piloto - Parada de Activada esta botonera, esta actúa sobre un relé de control al
Emergencia Activado interior del tablero, lo que impide continuar trabajando con el
carro.
g.04. - Piloto - Opción Subir Este piloto indica que el selector “Subir - Bajar” a sido accionado
la Mesa Móvil a la posición de subida permitiendo de esta manera accionar
eléctricamente la válvula solenoide para posteriormente por
medio del comando hidráulico realizar la operación de subir la
mesa móvil.
35
g. - Luces Pilotos (continuación)
g.05. - Piloto - Opción Bajar Este piloto indica que el selector “Subir - Bajar” a sido accionado
la Mesa Móvil a la posición de bajad permitiendo de esta manera accionar
eléctricamente la válvula solenoide para posteriormente por
medio del comando hidráulico realizar la operación de bajar la
mesa móvil.
g.06. - Piloto - Máxima Este piloto indica que la mesa móvil ha alcanzado su nivel máximo
Altura Mesa Móvil de altura.
g.07. - Piloto - Mínima Altura Este piloto indica que la mesa móvil ha descendido a su nivel más
Mesa Móvil bajo.
g.08. - Piloto - Sobrecarga Este piloto indica que el motor del trolley Nº1 a sobrepasado su
Motor Trolley Nº1 corriente nominal.
g.09. - Piloto - Sobrecarga Este piloto indica que el motor del trolley Nº2 a sobrepasado su
Motor Trolley Nº2 corriente nominal.
g.10. - Piloto - Máximo Este piloto indica que el carro se ha desplazado hasta su máximo
recorrido hacia punto de traslado hacia adelante.
adelante
g.11. - Piloto - Máximo Este piloto indica que el carro se ha desplazado hasta su máximo
recorrido hacia atrás punto de traslado hacia atrás.
g.12. - Piloto - Carro hacia Este piloto indica que el carro se está trasladando hacia adelante.
adelante
g.13. - Piloto - Carro hacia Este piloto indica que el carro se está trasladando hacia atrás.
atrás
Piloto - Motor Este piloto indica que el motor de la bomba hidráulica se
g.14. -
funcionando encuentra en funcionamiento.
g.15. - Piloto - Motor unidad Este piloto indica que el motor de la unidad hidráulica ha
hidráulica en sobrepasado su corriente nominal
sobrecarga
g.16. - Piloto - Carro frenado Este piloto indica que los sensores inductivos del nivel máximo se
encuentran accionados produciendo de esta forma que el carro se
encuentre inhabilitado para ser trasladado y permitiendo el
trabajo de elevación de la mesa móvil.
g.17. - Piloto - Freno Carro Este piloto indica que los sensores inductivos del nivel mínimo se
liberado encuentran accionados produciendo de esta forma que el carro se
encuentre habilitado para ser trasladado e impidiendo el trabajo
de elevación de la mesa móvil.
g.18. - Piloto - Huinche Este piloto indica que el huinche hidráulico se encuentra en
funcionamiento.
36
h. – Baliza
Este componente entra en funcionamiento cuando se realizan las siguientes
maniobras:
h.01. - Cuando el carro es trasladado desde un lugar a otro lugar (Adelante - Atrás)
h.02. - Mientras la mesa móvil es llevada a su nivel más alto o a su nivel más bajo.
i. – Sirena
Este componente entra en funcionamiento por un tiempo controlado por un
temporizador cada vez que:
i.01. - Se pone en servicio el motor de la bomba hidráulica.
i.02. - El carro es trasladado hacia adelante o hacia atrás.
5.2.1.5. – Dispositivo para maniobrar el puente de acceso al carro
a. – Huinche Hidráulico Con una capacidad de levante de 600 kilos, este dispositivo es
usado para levantar el puente acceso e incorporarlo al carro.
b. – Motor Hidráulico del Dispositivo que permite el accionamiento del huinche empleado
huinche para subir y bajar el puente de acceso al carro
5.2.1.6. – Tableros Auxiliares
a. – Tablero de Servicio Con 4x32/380Vac y 3x16A/220Vac enchufes e interruptor para

equipos fluorescentes.
b. – Tablero Junction Box Nº 1 Tablero de conexión cordón Festoon
y Nº 2
5.2.1.7. – Iluminación Carro de Mantenimiento
a. – Cuatro (4) Equipos Iluminación carro de mantenimiento

Fluorescentes
(2x40W/ 220Vac).
b. – Cuatro (4) Luminarias Iluminación carro de mantenimiento
Portátiles
37
5.3. – Puesta en Marcha para Operación
5.3.1. – Inspección antes de la Operación
Antes de poner en marcha el equipo y antes de cualquier movimiento, realice las siguientes
actividades:
1. - Asegúrese que no hay herramientas, elementos extraños o, equipos que no correspondan

dentro del carro o alrededor de el.
2. - Revise que todos los pernos están debidamente apretados.
3. - Revise que todas las barandas y pasamanos están debidamente instalados.
4. - Revise que los trolleys están correctamente instalados en los rieles donde el carro deslizará.
5. - Verifique la condición horizontal de la plataforma donde la excéntrica será depositada.
6. - Revise la unidad hidráulica y todas sus conexiones por posibles pérdidas por fuga del líquido
hidráulico.
7. - Engrase todas y cada una de las guías fijas en toda su extensión para facilitar el
deslizamiento de la mesa móvil.
Grasa Recomendada: CASTROL MOLUB ALLOY 860/460-2
5.3.2. – Ponga en marcha el carro SIN CARGA

(No debe haber carga sobre el equipo)
1. - Ponga en marcha los trolleys motorizados. Verifique que el carro se desliza en los rieles sin
problemas o dificultad a todo lo largo de su recorrido de trabajo.
2. - Cuando el carro alcance el final de su carrera, opere los frenos hidráulicos para verificar su
correcto funcionamiento.
3. - Mientras el equipo está operando, realice una inspección exhaustiva a fin de detectar
cualquier ruido anormal o cualquier des-alineamiento.
4. - Levante y baje la mesa móvil tres (3) o cuatro (4) veces, para verificar el correcto
funcionamiento del sistema hidráulico y el deslizamiento libre de la mesa móvil en las guías
fijas.
5. - Una vez que la prueba del carro sin carga se ha realizado, inspeccione nuevamente para
verificar que todos los pernos están en su lugar y que la estructura no se ha deformado.
6. - Verifique nuevamente la posición horizontal de la plataforma donde la excéntrica será

depositada.
7. - Revise la unidad hidráulica y todas sus conexiones por posibles pérdidas por fuga del líquido
hidráulico.
38
5.3.3. – Puesta en Marcha CON CARGA
El carro ensamblado fue probado totalmente, levantando una carga equivalente al 120% de la carga
nominal en las instalaciones del fabricante. Después del proceso de re-ensamble realizado por su
compañía, siga el siguiente procedimiento para verificar que la estructura mantiene los valores de
resistencia conseguidos en el taller donde fue fabricado:
1. - El operador del carro debe realizar las pruebas de puesta en marcha, fuera del carro y en
una posición segura. Las siguientes son las acciones que el operador debe realizar para
conseguir tal posición:
a. - El operador deberá instalar la Válvula Direccional de Accionamiento Manual
fuera del carro, usando para este propósito mangueras de mayor longitud que las
usadas normalmente para conectarla al sistema hidráulico.
Nota: Las mangueras mencionadas no son proporcionadas por FLSmidth,
son responsabilidad del cliente (largo requerido por cada una de
ellas 8 metros).
b. – Al igual que la Válvula de Accionamiento Manual, el Selector de Ascenso y
Descenso de la mesa móvil debe ser instalado fuera del carro.
Para ambos casos ver la figura siguiente.
Figura Nº 21. - Posición Segura del Operador durante los trabajos de pruebas del Carro
39
2. - Instalar el carro en la posición de trabajo, bajo la grúa.
3. - Levantar el sistema móvil del carro (cilindros hidráulicos, mesa móvil, guías móviles) hasta
la posición extrema superior.
4. - Despejar el carro y el área de trabajo de personas, para evitar accidentes debido a la caída
de material desde el carro y/o sobre el carro.
5. - Cargue sobre el carro la pieza de mayor peso de aquellas que serán usadas en el trabajo
de mantenimiento, cuidando de no aplicar golpes durante la maniobra (deposite la carga
sobre el carro NO la deje caer sobre el carro).
6. - Agregue una pieza adicional sobre el carro con un peso equivalente al 20% de la pieza ya
colocada sobre el carro. Nuevamente cuide de depositar la carga y NO DEJARLA CAER
SOBRE EL CARRO.
7. - Mantenga la mesa, con la carga aplicada, en la posición extrema superior, al menos 15
minutos observando en cada momento si hay alguna variación en la altitud del carro. La
idea es que la mesa mantenga su posición sin que su altura varíe.
8. - Si se observa que la mesa comienza a perder altura, revise el sistema hidráulico por fugas,
reapriete las conexiones.
Si el problema persiste, desmonte la carga, baje la mesa a su posición inferior y,
llame inmediatamente a su “Asistente al Cliente” de FLSmidth.
9. - Transcurrido el tiempo estipulado sin haber observado variación en la altura de la mesa,

remueva la carga de menor peso.
10. - Observar y registrar el valor de la presión que indica el manómetro instalado en la unidad
hidráulica. Este valor será usado como referencia de la presión a aplicar cuando la
excéntrica sea removida del chancador.
REGISTRAR EL VALOR DE PRESION OBTENIDO AQUI:___________________(BAR)
11. - Retire la carga de mayor peso empleada en la prueba.
12. - Revise el carro por posibles fugas en el sistema hidráulico, por pernos sueltos o
deformados, por piezas cortadas o deformadas y por deformaciones estructurales. En caso
de existir algunos de estos problemas, se deberán reparar los daños antes de continuar con
las pruebas.
13. - Una vez que se verifique que está todo en orden, cargar el carro nuevamente; bajar la
mesa móvil, ahora con carga, hasta su posición extrema inferior y trasladar el carro hasta
la posición del chancador. Durante esta operación, verifique que los equipos no muestren
pérdidas por fugas, que no haya interferencia con otros equipos en el recorrido hasta la
nueva posición ni saltos o movimientos bruscos causados por irregularidades u obstáculos
en la ruta de desplazamiento.
14. - Cualquier anomalía, por pequeña que sea y principalmente aquellas que puedan generar
fallas en la estructura o sistema de levante, deben ser inmediatamente informadas a
FLSmidth quién debe proporcionar el procedimiento de corrección de tales problemas.
15. - Si el equipo no evidencia problemas o fallas, entonces está capacitado para operar en
forma continua y con carga normal.
40
5.3.4. – Puesta en Marcha con Carga y Condición de Operación Normal
Las siguientes son instrucciones para la operación del carro:
1. - Antes de la puesta en marcha, ahora en condiciones de operación normal, repetir las

acciones indicadas en el punto 4.3.1.
2. - Si el chequeo realizado no informa problemas, mover el carro hasta la posición bajo el
chancador.
3. - Fijar la posición del carro usando los frenos hidráulicos.
4. - Levantar la mesa móvil hasta tocar la pieza que se va a desmontar.
5. - Despeje el carro y la zona de trabajo de personas, a fin de evitar accidentes por caídas de
material desde el chancador sobre el carro.
6. - Aplique presión con la mesa móvil sobre la pieza que se va a desmontar. El valor de
presión a aplicar es el mismo que se registró en el punto 5.3.3, ítem 10.
La presión aplicada asegurará que la pieza que se está desmontando no caerá
sobre la mesa móvil lo que podría causar desestabilización en el sistema de
levante y en el carro.
7. - Una vez que se ha conseguido la presión deseada, proceder a soltar las tuercas que sujetan
la pieza a desmontar al chancador.
SEPARAR LAS TUERCAS SOLO 2 MILIMETROS DE LA PIEZA A DESMONTAR.
8. - Bajar la mesa móvil con la carga hasta que la pieza a desmontar sea soportada por las
tuercas nuevamente.
9. - Apoyar la mesa móvil sobre la pieza a desmontar y aplique presión sobre ella nuevamente,
esto permitirá continuar soltando las tuercas.
10. - Repetir las operaciones 7, 8 y 9, 2 o 3 veces hasta estar seguro que la pieza a desmontar
puede ser liberada sin problema.
11. - Una vez que la pieza a desmontar ha sido totalmente liberada y soportada correctamente
sobre la mesa móvil, bajar esta última a su posición extrema inferior.
12. - Trasladar el carro y su carga hasta la posición bajo la grúa.
13. - Retirar la pieza desmontada desde el carro con la grúa.

41
5.4. – Mantenimiento
5.4.1. – Inspecciones a Realizar por el Operador y los Especialistas de Mantenimiento
El Carro de Mantenimiento de una Excéntrica, es un equipo básico que está principalmente destinado
a proveer soporte a las prácticas de mantenimiento. Este equipo no será usado en forma permanente,
como un equipo más de producción de la planta, sólo será usado cuando se activen los períodos de
mantenimiento del chancador primario.
Consecuente con esto, el carro estará detenido por largos períodos razón por la cuál este equipo
requiere de un mínimo mantenimiento.
Las siguientes son las tareas a realizar para llevar a cabo un correcto mantenimiento del carro:
1. - Todos los controles deben ser realizados por el Personal del Departamento de Mantenimiento
(Especialistas en Hidráulica, Eléctricos y Mecánicos).
2. - Realizar inspecciones periódicas de cada componente, de acuerdo a las instrucciones de sus

fabricantes (Ver manuales de los fabricantes incluidos en el anexo 7.5.) y revisar la
estructura por posibles deformaciones y/o pernos sueltos o dañados.
3. - Verificar el torque de los pernos de acuerdo a la tabla de torques entregada en el anexo 7.2.
4. - Revise la condición de las ruedas de los trolleys y verifique que las superficies de rodadura
de los rieles por donde el carro se desliza no hayan sufrido daño o deformaciones.
5. - Revise los seguros SEEGERS instalados en los extremos de los ejes que componen los
conjuntos de los trolleys. Si alguno de ellos presenta daño o deformación, deben ser
reemplazados.
6. - Revise pernos, tuercas y pasadores por posibles daños o deformaciones. Si alguno de ellos
presenta daños o deformaciones deben ser reemplazados.
5.4.2. – Mantenimiento de la Unidad Hidráulica
Para el mantenimiento de la Unidad Hidráulica, referirse al “Manual de Instalación,

Operación y Mantenimiento” emitido por el fabricante (Anexo 7.5.).
42
6.0.- INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA SEGURIDAD Y LA PREVENCION DE ACCIDENTES
6.1. - Introducción
El presente manual fue concebido para entregar directrices generales de seguridad para cualquier
operación que se ejecute con el equipo, para su mantenimiento, reparación o actividades de limpieza.
Estas directrices deben ser plenamente acatadas y cumplidas a fin de evitar sucesos que pueden
resultar nocivos o poner en riesgo a personas y/o el equipo.
Los Carros de Mantenimiento de Excéntricas, son considerados “Equipos No Críticos” y no peligrosos

para los usuarios debido al bajo riesgo que ellos implican. Sin embargo es necesario recordar que las
únicas funciones del carro son las de remover y re-instalar la excéntrica del chancador giratorio, por
lo que las etapas de operación de este equipo han sido definidas en ese contexto.
Evitar que el Carro de Mantenimiento de una Excéntrica llegue a convertirse en un generador de

accidentes dependerá principalmente del estricto cumplimiento de las normas y regulaciones
generales contenidas en el presente manual y el correcto criterio que las áreas de mantenimiento al
momento de realizar cualquier trabajo.
6.2. - Riesgos de Accidentes
Como se define en capítulos anteriores, el Carro de Mantenimiento de la Excéntrica se desplaza en

forma recta a lo largo de la ruta de trabajo, suspendido de un par de vigas instaladas en la estructura
de la cueva. Por lo tanto, cuando el carro está moviéndose, NO DEBE HABER PERSONA ALGUNA EN
LA RUTA POR DONDE EL CARRO SE ESTA DESPLAZANDO para evitar así que este golpee o atropelle a
aluna persona.
Aún cuándo la velocidad de traslación del carro es considerada baja (4 a 16 m/mim), para dar mayor
seguridad a la operación se han instalado en el carro elementos tales como una sirena y una baliza
que permitirán poner en alerta a todo el personal cuando el equipo se ponga o esté en movimiento.
Otro detalle importante a considerar, el cuál podría transformarse en un eventual riesgo de accidente,
es el acceso al carro. El acceso al carro se debe realizar siempre a través de la pasarela instalada en
uno de sus paneles laterales. NO ESTA PERMITIDO INGRESAR AL CARRO SALTANDO SOBRE EL, ESTO
PODRÍA PROVOCAR CAIDAS CON EL RESULTADO DE DAÑOS PERSONALES.
Los Accidentes pueden ocurrir por situaciones tales como:

▬ Que el carro impacte a personas que se encuentren en su camino de desplazamiento
y que no hayan estado atentos a las alarmas instaladas (Sirena y Baliza).
▬ Que alguno de los operarios que efectúan el desmontaje o montaje de la excéntrica

desde o en el chancador, caiga desde un nivel alto del carro.
▬ Que los componentes hidráulicos instalados dentro del carro impidan el traslado
libre de los operarios, lo que podría provocar la caída de alguno de ellos con el
correspondiente peligro de accidentarse. Tal situación se ve agravada si las zonas de
trabajo y/o el carro mismo carecen de buena iluminación.
▬ Que al momento de desmontar la excéntrica esta sea liberada sin haber aplicado,
con la mesa móvil, la presión correcta sobre ella.
43
6.3. - Prevención de Accidentes
Los riesgos de accidentes en los Carros de Mantenimiento de una Excéntrica, se pueden evitar,
reducir y controlar con sistemas de protección, defensas apropiadas, normas de seguridad o
directrices que deben ser permanentemente aplicadas por todo el personal que realice algún trabajo
con el carro o en el carro mismo.
Cabe señalar que, a pesar de que existan protecciones y defensas adecuadas en el área de trabajo del
carro, se deben tomar toda clase de precauciones ya que, debido a la condición operacional del carro
no es posible eliminar todos los riesgos.
De acuerdo a lo estipulado en los párrafos anteriores, cualquier persona que requiera realizar un
trabajo con el carro, en el carro o en áreas cercanas al mismo, debe conocer, comprender y cumplir
con todas las Regulaciones y Directrices de Seguridad contenidas en este manual.
Adicionalmente, todo el personal debe saber que las barreras de protección están para evitar caídas
desde diferentes niveles. Por lo tanto ninguno de estos elementos de seguridad deben estar
obstruidos, ser infringidos o neutralizados.
Todas las protecciones (cubiertas, pasamanos y barreras de contención) que han sido instaladas en el
carro son para proteger al personal y no al equipo. No se ubique cerca del carro, mientras este esté
operando.
Cuando se realicen trabajos de reparación o mantenimiento en la unida hidráulica, todas las

protecciones que fueron retiradas para llevar a cabo tales trabajos deben ser re-instaladas o
reemplazadas si están dañados. El trabajo no se considerará terminado hasta que las protecciones
estén debidamente instaladas.
6.4. - Sirena
Uno de los más críticos elementos de seguridad instalados en el carro es la sirena cuyo propósito es
avisar a través de una señal de sonido que el equipo se ha puesto en movimiento. Por lo tanto
siempre que el sonido de la sirena es escuchado se debe abandonar la zona en que el carro se
moverá. La sirena solo operará durante pocos minutos.
El personal debe ayudar a mantener los elementos de seguridad instalados en el carro en buenas
condiciones. Cuando el carro comience a moverse y no se escuche al sonido de aviso de la sirena, se
debe dar aviso inmediato para su reparación o reemplazo.
6.5. - Baliza
La baliza operará permanentemente mientras el carro está en movimiento. Este dispositivo de

seguridad avisará que el carro está en movimiento y, que se debe estar alerta a los diferentes
desplazamientos que este efectúe.
El personal debe ayudar a mantener los elementos de seguridad instalados en el carro en buenas
condiciones. Cuando el carro comience a moverse y no se observe que la baliza funcione, se debe dar
aviso inmediato para su reparación o reemplazo.
44
6.6. - Disposiciones Generales de Seguridad
1. - El Carro para la Mantención de la Excéntrica debe ser posicionado exactamente debajo del
chancador giratorio. Una vez allí se debe fijar la posición del carro usando ambos frenos
hidráulicos. No se debe iniciar ninguna actividad u operación con el sistema de elevación,
hasta que no se haya completado el procedimiento de seguridad detallado en los puntos
anteriores.
2. - Todo, paneles, interruptores de partida o cualquier dispositivo mecánico o eléctrico que estén
incluidos en el carro, deben estar debidamente identificados en español.
3. - Pasillos, vías de acceso, escaleras etc. deben tener sus barandas en buenas condiciones, ser
mantenidas limpias y con buena iluminación.
4. - El personal que trabaja con el carro, aquel que trabaje en él ya sea por reparación o
mantenimiento, en el área donde el carro ha sido instalado, debe estar en conocimiento y
familiarizado de las acciones que se deben realizar y las medidas que se deben tomar para
detenerlo en el caso de una emergencia.
5. - Los sistemas de manejo y conducción del Carro deben estar preferentemente instalados
donde el operador los pueda observar.
La sirena y la baliza son elementos de advertencia de peligro potencial por lo que deben estar
siempre en condición de operar, su ubicación en el carro debe ser tal que el personal en la
zona de trabajo sea capaz de escucharla, en el caso de la sirena, y verla, en el caso de la
baliza, fuerte y claro.
6. - Pasillos, plataforma de acceso, plataformas de trabajo, etc. deben estar y permanecer

siempre limpias y en buenas condiciones.
7. - Los jefes de área, supervisores, jefes de seguridad, deben conocer siempre la ubicación del
personal que está trabajando en el carro en áreas anexas a él.
8. - Las normas y regulaciones contenidas en el presente manual deben ser totalmente conocidas
y cumplidas a cabalidad por el personal que labora en la instalación y, por todos aquellos
externos que prestan servicios a la compañía.
45
ANEXOS
ANEXO 7.1
PLANOS MECANICOS, ELECTRICOS Y DE CANALIZACION
7.1. – Plano de Disposición General
IT Nº DRAWING NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 28010ME01DG01 Eccentric Maintenance Cart - General Arrangement
7.2. – Planos de Montaje

1 28010ME01MT1 Montaje Plataforma Inferior - Isométrica
2 28010ME01MT2 Montaje Mesa Fija, Cilindros Hidráulicos y Parrilla de Piso - Isométrica
3 28010ME01MT3 Montaje Plataforma Superior y Soportes para Trolleys - Isométrica
4 28010ME01MT4 Montaje de Columnas y Diagonales - Isométrica
5 28010ME01MT5 Montaje Plataforma Superior e Inferior, Columnas y Diagonales
6 28010ME01MT6 Montaje Guías Fijas y Viga para Tecle, Escalera - Isométrica
7 28010ME01MT7 Montaje Mesa Móvil y Guías Telescópicas - Isométrica
8 28010ME01MT8 Montaje del Carro en Vigas de Deslizamiento - Isométrica
9 28010ME01MT9 Montaje Barandas Plataforma Inferior y Puerta Acceso Lateral
10 28010ME01MT10 Montaje del Puente - Isométrica
11 28010ME01MT11 Montaje de la Plataforma Sobre-plataforma Superior - Isométrica
7.3. – Planos Eléctricos

1 28010EL01DA01 Diagrama Eléctrico de Fuerza
2 28010EL01DA02 Diagrama Eléctrico de Control
3 28010EL01DC01 Tablero de Fuerza Y Control - Disposición de Componentes
4 28010EL01DC02 Lighting and Electrical Sockets
7.4. – Planos de Canalización Eléctrica

1 28010EL01CN01 ECCENTRIC MAINTENANCE CART
7.5. – Planos de Canalización Hidráulica

1 28010ME01CN01 ECCENTRIC MAINTENANCE CART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
FA03-V3
FA04-ER4
B B
FA05-V4 FA05-D2
C C
FA05-V4
D D
FA05-D2
E E
FA10-ER7 FA04-ER3
FA03-V2
F F
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA
G G
H H
I Rev 0 MVR LS CAS 30/06/2009 Revision in zone / Description I
Scale Drawn Chkd Appr Appr Date Matl kg
PLATAFORMA INFERIOR -ISOMETRICA DO NOT SCALE DRAWING Welds ISO-E
MAINTENANCE CART
TYPE "NT" GYRATORY CHUSHER (60"X113") Pattern number, embossed / countersunk
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE PLATAFORMA INFERIOR Unless otherwise specified, adhere
to General Workshop Instructions No 520530.
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
The information transmitted by this document is the proprietary and
confidential property of FFE MINERALS, and may not be duplicated,
disclosed or utilized without written consent from FFE MINERALS.
28010ME01MT1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
CILINDROS HIDRAULICOS
TAW-6ZZ1-ZZ2
B B
FA13-M1
C C
FA25-PP3
FA25-PP4
FA25-PP2 PLATAFORMA INFERIOR

FA25-PP5
D D
FA25-PP6 FA25-PP7
E E
FA25-PP1
PLATAFORMA UNIDAD HIDRAULICA

DISPOSICION PLANCHAS DE PISO-ISOMETRICA FA10-ER7
F F
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA
G G
H H
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING Welds ISO-E
MAINTENANCE CART
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE MESA FIJA-CILINDROS HIDRAULICOS- Unless otherwise specified, adhere
MONTAJE MESA FIJA- CILINDROS HIDRAULICOS-PARRILLA DE PISO-ISOMETRICA PARRILLA DE PISO to General Workshop Instructions No 520530.
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
B B
C C
D D
SOPORTE TROLLEY
FA26-SP1
E E
FA08-ER6
MONTAJE PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR-MONTAJE SOPORTES TROLLEYS-
VISTA ISOMETRICA
SOPORTE TROLLEY
FA26-SP1
F F
FA07-ER1
G G
SOPORTE TROLLEY
FA26-SP1
H FA07-ER2 H
FA08-ER5
SOPORTE TROLLEY
I FA26-SP1 Rev 0 MVR LS CAS 3/07/2009 Revision in zone / Description I

VISTA EXPLOSIONADA MAINTENANCE CART
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR-SOPORTES Unless otherwise specified, adhere
PARA TROLLEYS to General Workshop Instructions No 520530.
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT3 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
B B
FA14-COL2
FA14-COL3 FA14-COL1
C C
FA15-D7 FA15-D5
FA15-D6 FA15-D3
D D
FA15-COL6
FA15-COL5
E E
FA14-COL4
FA15-D8 FA15-D4
FA15-D13
MONTAJE COLUMNAS Y DIAGONALES-ISOMETRICA FA15-D9
F F
FA15-D11
G G
FA15-D12
FA15-D14
FA15-D10
H H
28010ME01MT1

VISTA EXPLOSIONADA DO NOT SCALE DRAWING Welds ISO-E
MAINTENANCE CART
TYPE "NT" GYRATORY CHUSHER 60"x113" Pattern number, embossed / countersunk
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE DE COLUMNAS-DIAGONALES Unless otherwise specified, adhere
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT4 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
FRENO
28010ME01FA27-FR1
CILINDRO DE FRENO
TAW-4AA2-AA1
B B
PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR
28010ME01MT3
FRENO
28010ME01FA27-FR1
C C
D D
CILINDRO DE FRENO
TAW-4AA2-AA1
ESCALA
E FA23-ES1 E
F F
G G
CONJUNTO COLUMNAS
Y DIAGONALES
28010ME01MT4
MONTAJE PLATAFORMA INFERIOR-SUPERIOR-COLUMNAS

Y DIAGONALES-ISOMETRICA
H H
PLATAFORMA INFERIOR
28010ME01MT2
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA MAINTENANCE CART

TIPE "NT" GYRATORY CHUSHER (60"X113") Pattern number, embossed / countersunk
PLANOS DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR-INFERIOR- Unless otherwise specified, adhere
COLUMNAS Y DIAGONALES to General Workshop Instructions No 520530.
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT5 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
GUIAS FIJAS
FA18-GF1
A A
B B
GUIAS FIJAS
FA18-GF1
C C
D D
VIGA PARA TECLE

E
SK27-V1 E
PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR
28010ME01MT3
F F
G G
MONTAJE GUIAS FIJAS-VIGA PARA TECLE-ISOMETRICA

SOPORTE PARA HUINCHE
FA23-SW1
H H
PLATAFORMA INFERIOR
28010ME01MT2
MAINTENANCE CART
TYPE "NT" GTRATORY CHUSHER (60"X133") Pattern number, embossed / countersunk
PLANO DE FABRICACION
MONTAJE GUIAS FIJAS-VIGA PARA TECLE Unless otherwise specified, adhere
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA
28010ME01MT6 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
GUIAS MOVILES
FA20-M3
B B
C C
GUIAS MOVILES
FA20-M3
D D
MOBILE TABLE
FA20-M2
E E
F F
G G
MONTAJE MESA MOVIL Y GUIAS TELESCOPICAS
H H
MAINTENANCE CART
TYPE "NT" GYRATORY CRUSHER (60"X133") Pattern number, embossed / countersunk
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE MESA MOVIL-GUIAS TELESCOPICAS Unless otherwise specified, adhere
J J
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT7 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
B B
C C
VIGA DESLIZAMIENTO
D D
FRENO HIDRAULICO
TROLLEY CONDUCIDO
TAW-2AA1-ZZ1 VIGA DE DESLIZAMIENTO
E E
TROLLEY MOTORIZADO
GAE-1AA1-AA1 FRENO HIDRAULICO
F F
MONTAJE CARRO EN VIGAS DE DESLIZAMIENTO-ISOMETRICA

PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR
28010ME01MT3
G G
TROLLEY CONDUCIDO
TAW-2AA1-ZZ1
H H
PLATAFORMA INFERIOR
28010ME01MT2 TROLLEY MOTORIZADO
GAE-1AA1-AA1
MAINTENANCE CART
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE CARRO EN VIGAS DE DESLIZAMIENTO Unless otherwise specified, adhere
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT8 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
B B
C C
FA09-BD3
D D
FA09-BD3
E E
F F
MONTAJE BARANDAS PLATAFORMA INFERIOR

Y PUERTA DE ACCESO LATERAL-ISOMETRICA
FA09-BD6 PUERTA LATERAL
FA30-AL
G G
FA09-BD5
H H
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA
MAINTENANCE CART
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE BARANDAS PLATAFORMA INFERIOR- Unless otherwise specified, adhere
Y PUERTA DE ACCESO LATERAL to General Workshop Instructions No 520530.
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT9 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
PASADOR FA24-PS2
SK29-CAÑ2
F F
FA31-PS4
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA
FA24-PS3
SK29-CAÑ1
G G
MONTAJE PUENTE-ISOMETRICA
SK28-BAR2
FA24-PS1 SK28-BAR1
H H
SK29-BAR1
MAINTENANCE CART
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE DEL PUENTE Unless otherwise specified, adhere
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT10 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A A
FA11-BD1
FA11-BD2
B FA28-PT1 B
FA29-PT3
C C
FA11-BD2
FA11-BD1
FA29-PT2
D D
FA28-PT2
E E
F F
G G
H H
VISTA EXPLOSIONADA
PLATAFORMA SOBRE-PLATAFORMA SUPERIOR-

BARANDAS SUPERIORES-ISOMETRICA
MAINTENANCE CART
TYPE "NT" GYRATOTY CHUSHER (60"X113") Pattern number, embossed / countersunk
PLANO DE MONTAJE
MONTAJE PLATAFORMA SOBRE-PLATAFORMA Unless otherwise specified, adhere
SUPERIOR-BARANDAS SUPERIORES to General Workshop Instructions No 520530.
J J
PC
Drawing Number Rev
28010ME01MT11 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14
ANEXO Nº 7.2.
LISTADO DE PERNOS IMPERIALES - USO ESTRUCTURAL
PR-28010
Cliente : AKER SOLUTIONS
Proyecto : ESPERANZA GIRATORY CRUSHER
Equipo : CARRO DE MANTENIMIENTO Revisión 0
Preparado por : P. Aracena Fecha 09-09-2009
Revisado por : I. Pérez Hoja 1 de 6
PERNOS HEXAGONALES TUERCAS HEXAGONALES
DIMENSIONES DE ACUERDO A LA NORMA ANSI B18.2.1 DIMENSIONES DE ACUERDO A LA NORMA ANSI B18.2.2
ROSCA DE ACUERDO LA NORMA ANSI B1.1.CLASE 2A ROSCA DE ACUERDO A LA NORMA ANSI B1.1.CLASE 2B
MATERIAL Y REQUEIMIENTOS MECANICOS: NORMA AST A193/194 MATERIAL Y REQUERIMIENTOS MECANICOS: NORMA AST A193/194
GRADO NORMALIZADO ASTM A325 tipo 1
COMPONENTES CONECTADOS CANTIDAD PERNOS TOTAL ESPESOR DE LA UNION GOLILLAS TUERCAS
MARCA
Ø
ITEM
FIJACION
REGULAR
CONEXION PRINCIPAL DE POR DE
PRESION
GRUESA
PLANA
AUXILIAR (inch) 1 2 3 LENGTH
UNIDO CON CONEXIONES CONEXIONES PERNOS (mm) (mm) (mm) (inch) DESIGNACION
1 FA04-ER3 FA09-BD6 3 2 6 5/8 6 4 A325 2 1
2 FA04-ER4 FA09-BD3 4 2 8 5/8 6 4 A325 2 1
3 FA03-V2 FA09-BD5 3 2 6 5/8 6 4 A325 2 1
4 FA03-V3 FA09-BD3 4 2 8 5/8 6 4 A325 2 1
5 FA04-ER3 FA05-D2 2 2 4 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
6 FA03-V2 FA05-D2 1 2 2 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
7 FA03-V3 FA05-D2 1 2 2 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
8 FA04-V2 FA10-ER7 1 1 1 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
9 FA03-V2 FA10-ER7 3 2 6 5/8 6 12 A325 2 1
10 FA04-ER3 FA05-V4 2 2 4 3/4 6 8 A325 2 1
11 FA04-ER4 FA05-V4 2 2 4 3/4 6 8 A325 2 1
12 FA04-ER3 FA03-V2 1 2 2 3/4 8 6 A325 2 1
13 FA04-ER3 FA03-V3 1 2 2 3/4 8 6 A325 2 1
14 FA04-ER4 FA03-V2 1 2 2 3/4 8 6 A325 2 1
15 FA04-ER4 FA03-V3 1 2 2 3/4 8 6 A325 2 1
16 FA04-ER3 FA03-V2 1 6 6 3/4 6 10 A325 2 1
17 FA04-ER3 FA03-V3 1 6 6 3/4 6 10 A325 2 1
18 FA04-ER4 FA03-V2 1 6 6 3/4 6 10 A325 2 1
ANEXO Nº 7.2.
LISTADO DE PERNOS IMPERIALES USO ESTRUCTURAL
PR-28010
MARCA
Ø
ITEM
FIJACION
REGULAR
PRESION
GRUESA
PLANA
19 FA04-ER4 FA03-V3 1 6 6 3/4 6 10 A325 2 1
20 FA03-V2 FA14-COL4 1 6 6 3/4 10 6 A325 2 1
21 FA04-ER3 FA14-COL4 1 8 8 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
22 FA04-ER3 FA14-COL1 1 4 4 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
23 FA04-ER4 FA14-COL3 1 8 8 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
24 FA04-ER4 FA14-COL2 1 8 8 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
25 FA03-V2 FA14-COL3 1 10 10 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
26 FA03-V2 FA14-COL.p1 1 2 2 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
27 FA03-V3 FA14-COL1 1 10 10 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
28 FA03-V3 FA14-COL2 1 10 10 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
29 FA04-ER3 FA14-COL.p2 4 2 2 3/4 10 10 A325 2 1
30 FA04-ER3 FA13-M1 4 4 16 3/4 16 12 A325 2 1
31 FA04-ER4 FA13-M1 2 4 16 3/4 16 12 A325 2 1
32 FA04-ER3 FA18-GF1 2 4 8 3/4 16 16 A325 2 1
33 FA04-ER4 FA18-GF1 1 4 8 3/4 16 16 A325 2 1
34 FA04-V3 FA15-D4 1 3 3 3/4 8 8 A325 2 1
35 FA03-V3 FA15-D3 1 3 3 1 8 8 A325 2 1
36 FA04-ER4 FA15-D6 1 3 3 1 8 8 A325 2 1
ANEXO Nº 7.2.
PR-28010
MARCA
Ø
ITEM
FIJACION
REGULAR
PRESION
GRUESA
PLANA
37 FA04-ER4 FA15-D8 1 3 3 1 8 8 A325 2 1
38 FA03-V2 FA15-D9 1 3 3 1 8 8 A325 2 1
39 FA04-ER3 FA15-D14 1 3 3 1 8 8 A325 2 1
40 FA07-ER1 FA07-D1 2 2 4 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
41 FA07-ER2 FA07-D1 1 2 2 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
42 FA08-ER5 FA07-D1 1 2 2 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
43 FA08-ER6 FA07-D1 2 2 4 5/8 6 8 A325 2 1
44 FA07-ER1 FA08-ER5 1 2 2 5/8 7 6 A325 2 1
45 FA07-ER2 FA08-ER5 1 2 2 5/8 7 6 A325 2 1
46 FA07-ER1 FA08-ER6 1 2 2 5/8 7 6 A325 2 1
47 FA07-ER2 FA08-ER6 1 2 2 5/8 7 6 A325 2 1
48 FA07-ER1 FA28-PT1 8 2 16 5/8 11 6 A325 2 1
49 FA07-ER2 FA28-PT2 8 2 16 5/8 11 6 A325 2 1
FA29-PT3
50 FA08-ER5 FA28-PT1 5 2 10 5/8 11 6 A325 2 1
FA28-PT2
FA29-PT4
51 FA08-ER6 FA28-PT1 5 2 10 5/8 11 6 A325 2 1
FA28-PT2
ANEXO Nº 7.2.
PR-28010
MARCA
Ø
ITEM
FIJACION
REGULAR
PRESION
GRUESA
PLANA
Plancha
52 FA23-ES1 Diamantada
1 2 2 5/8 10 6 A325 2 1
FA29-PT3
53 FA12-V1 FA28-PT1 7 2 14 5/8 18 6 A325 2 1
FA28-PT2
FA29-PT3
54 FA12-V4 FA28-PT1 7 2 14 5/8 18 6 A325 2 1
FA28-PT2
55 FA23-ES1 FA07-ER2 1 2 2 5/8 10 11 A325 2 1
56 FA08-ER5 FA07-ER1 1 6 6 3/4 8 7 A325 2 1
57 FA08-ER5 FA07-ER2 1 6 6 3/4 8 7 A325 2 1
58 FA08-ER6 FA07-ER1 1 6 6 3/4 8 7 A325 2 1
59 FA08-ER6 FA07-ER2 1 6 6 3/4 8 7 A325 2 1
60 FA07-ER1 FA12-V1 1 6 6 3/4 8 10 A325 2 1
61 FA07-ER1 FA12-V2 1 6 6 3/4 8 10 A325 2 1
62 FA07-ER2 FA12-V1 1 6 6 3/4 8 10 A325 2 1
63 FA07-ER2 FA12-V2 1 6 6 3/4 8 10 A325 2 1
64 FA18-GF1 FA08-ER5 2 4 8 3/4 11 10 A325 2 1
65 FA27-FR1 FA27-FR1 2 4 8 3/4 12 12 A325 2 1
66 FA18-GF1 FA08-ER6 2 4 8 3/4 11 10 A325 2 1
ANEXO Nº 7.2.
PR-28010
MARCA
Ø
ITEM
FIJACION
REGULAR
PRESION
GRUESA
PLANA
67 FA14-COL.p2 FA07-ER1 1 2 2 3/4 10 11 A325 2 1
68 FA14-COL.p1 FA19-V1 1 2 2 3/4 10 18 A325 2 1
FA14-COL2
69 FA14-COL1 1 4 8 3/4 12 18 A325 2 1
FA12-V2
FA14-COL4
70 FA14-COL3 2 4 8 3/4 12 18 A325 2 1
FA12-V1
71 FA18-GF1 FA08-ER5 2 4 8 3/4 11 20 A325 2 1
72 FA18-GF1 FA08-ER6 2 4 8 3/4 11 20 A325 2 1
73 FA14-COL4 FA15-D12 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
74 FA14-COL1 FA15-D3 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
FA15-DA
75 FA15-D3 1 6 6 1 6 8 A325 2 1
FA15-D5
76 FA14-COL2 FA15-D5 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
77 FA14-COL2 FA15-D7 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
78 FA14-COL3 FA15-D6 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
79 FA14-COL3 FA15-D11 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
80 FA14-COL.p1 FA15-D9 1 3 3 1 6 8 A325 2 1
81 FA14-COL.p2 FA15-D13 1 3 3 1 10 8 A325 2 1
ANEXO Nº 7.2.
PR-28010
MARCA
Ø
ITEM
FIJACION
REGULAR
PRESION
GRUESA
PLANA
FA15-D13
82 FA14-D12 1 2 2 1 10 11 A325 2 1
FA15-D14
FA15-D7
83 FA15-D6 1 6 6 1 10 18 A325 2 1
FA15-D8
FA15-D10
84 FA15-D9 1 6 6 1 10 8 A325 2 1
FA15-D11
ANEXO 7.2.
TABLA DE TORQUES PARA PERNOS
Grado BB Grado BC Grado 8

Diámetro Perno TAMAÑO HEX (pulg) Grado 1 or 2 Grado 5 ASTM - A325 ASTM - A354 ASTM - A354 ASTM - A354 ASTM - A490
(pulg) (mm) Max Min lb-pié Nm lb-pié Nm lb-pié Nm lb-pié Nm lb-pié Nm lb-pié Nm lb-pié Nm
1/4 6 1/2 3/8 3 4,07 8 10,8 8 10,8 10 13,6 11 14,9

5/16 8 19/32 15/32 6 8,14 16 21,7 15 20,3 20 27,1 23 31,2
3/8 10 11/16 9/16 11 14,9 28 38 27 36,6 35 47,5 40 54,2
7/16 11 25/32 21/32 18 24,4 46 62,4 43 58,3 56 75,9 65 88,1
1/2 13 7/8 3/4 28 38 70 95 66 89,5 86 117 99 134
9/16 14 31/32 27/32 43 58,3 110 149 106 144 138 187 159 216
5/8 16 1-1/16 15/16 55 74,6 140 190 200 271 131 178 173 234 198 268 250 339
3/4 19 1-1/4 1-1/8 97 132 250 339 355 481 234 317 306 415 350 475 435 590
7/8 22 1 -7/16 1- 5/16 155 210 405 549 570 773 376 510 495 671 566 767 715 970
1 25 1-5/8 1-1/2 230 312 800 814 850 1153 565 766 742 1006 848 1150 1070 1451
1 - 1/8 29 1-13/16 1- 11/16 340 461 770 1044 1060 1437 830 1125 1090 1478 1245 1688 1580 2142
1 - 1/4 32 2 1 - 7/8 480 651 1080 1464 1495 2027 1170 1586 1530 2075 1750 2373 2125 2882
1 - 3/8 35 2-3/16 2 - 1/8 660 895 1470 1933 1960 2658 1580 2142 2075 2814 2375 3220 2780 3770
1 - 1/2 38 2- 3/8 2 - 1/4 860 1.116 1950 2644 2600 3526 2080 2820 2440 3309 3135 4251 3700 5017
1- 5/8 41 2-9/16 2-7/16 2700 3661 3545 4807
1- 3/4 44 2 -3/4 2 -5/8 3400 4610 4465 6054
2 51 3 - 1/8 3 5150 6983 6875 9200
2 - 1/4 57 3 -3/8 3 - 1/2 7500 10170 9815 13309
2 - 1/2 64 3 -7/8 3 -3/4 10300 13967 13600 18442
2 -3/4 70 4 - 1/4 4 - 1/8 13100 17764 16550 22442
3 76 4 -5/8 4 - 1/2 17100 23188 21645 29351
3 - 1/4 83 5 4 7/8 21800 29561 27700 37561
3 - 1/2 89 5 -3/8 5 - 1/4 27500 37290 34760 41134
3 -3/4 95 5 -3/4 5 -5/8 34000 46104 42980 58281
4 102 6 - 1/8 6 41300 56003 52360 71000
PROTOCOLOS DE PRUEBAS
DE PRUEBAS REALIZADAS EN LA MESTRANZA
(RESULTADOS - VALORES DE REFERENCIA)

PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS
REALIZADAS EN TALLER Hoja 1 de 3
Proyecto : Carro de Mantención Excéntrica

Cliente : Aker Solutions
PR : 28010 - Esperanza
Fecha : 09-06-2009
Equipo : Carro de Mantención de la Excéntrica
Datos de Motor Unidad Hidráulica
Potencia Instalada : 37 / 50 Kw/HP Marca : SIEMENS

Corriente Nominal In : 68 A Modelo : 1LG42204AA60
Tensión de Trabajo : 400 V Frame : 225 S
Grado de Protección : 55 IP Aislación : F, utilización en clase B
RPM : 1475 a 400 Vac
Prueba del Motor con 40% de la carga en plataforma

Corriente por Fase Voltaje entre Fases
Fase R Fase S Fase T Fase R-S Fase S-T Fase T-R
Subir 39,4 40,7 39 377 381 389
Bajar
Prueba del Motor con 80% de carga en plataforma

Fase R Fase S Fase R Fase S Fase R Fase S
Subir 43,2 45,2 37,3 378 383 385
Bajar
Prueba del Motor con 120% de carga en plataforma

Subir 53 53,7 51,1 392 396 369
Bajar
Observaciones: :
Realizó : Cristian Bugueño (V y S)

Revisó : Antonio Acuña (FLS)

Fecha : 09-06-2009
Datos de Motor Trolley Nº 1
Potencia Instalada : 0,55 Kw Marca : CE

Corriente Nominal In : 0,85-1,3 A Tipo : VDE0530
Tensión de Trabajo : 380/50 V/Hz t/min : 24/3360 S
Grado de Protección : 55 IP
Prueba de Motor en Vacío hacia Adelante

Subir 0,7 0,6 0,5 391 395 394
Bajar 1,5-0,6 1,2-0,5 1,4-0.4 392 396 394
Prueba de Motor en Vacío hacia Atrás

Subir 0,7 0,9 0,2 392 397 396
Bajar 1,6-0,5 1,6-0,8 1,6-0,1 393 397 396
Observaciones: :


Fecha : 09-06-2009
Datos de Motor Trolley Nº 2
Potencia Instalada : 0,55 Kw Marca : CE

Corriente Nominal In : 0,85-1,3 A Tipo : VDE0530
Tensión de Trabajo : 380/50 V/Hz t/min : 24/3360 S
Grado de Protección : 55 IP
Prueba de Motor en Vacío hacia Adelante

Subir 0,6 0,5 0,1 393 395 393
Bajar 1,4-0,4 1,0-0,2 0,7-0.1 391 394 393
Prueba de Motor en Vacío hacia Atrás

Subir 0,7 0,4 0,5 392 394 393
Bajar 1,3-0,5 1,0-0,3 0,8-0,3 393 395 393
Observaciones: :

FORMATOS PARA REALIZAR PRUEBAS EN TERRENO
LISTA DE CHEQUEO MECANICO
LISTA DE CHEQUEO ELECTRICO

ANEXO Nº 7.3
LISTA DE CHEQUEO Hoja 1 de 3
3.1. – LISTA DE CHEQUEO MECANICO
3.1.1. – Antecedentes Generales para la Prueba
Nombre Firma
Persona encargada
Persona que realiza la prueba
Lugar donde se realiza la prueba
Fecha de la prueba
Nota:
La prueba que se realiza en las instalaciones del cliente complementa a las pruebas
realizadas en la maestranza. El propósito es asegurar que el carro es capaz de levantar
hasta un 20% más del valor de la carga nominal sin que se observen deformaciones,
quebraduras o signos de mal funcionamiento, como resultado de un ensamblado
incorrecto.
La prueba debería ser realizada preferentemente en la posición donde la grúa retirará las
piezas desmontadas del chancador.
IMPORTANTE
1. - El operador debe realizar las pruebas desde un lugar que asegure su
integridad física fuera del carro mismo.
2. - El área alrededor del carro debe ser aislada para evitar posibles accidentes.
3.1.2. – Información General del Equipo
Nombre : Carro para Mantenimiento de Excéntrica

TAG : 211 - ZM - 001
Dimensiones Generales
: Largo: 10.465mm x Ancho: 6900mm x Alto: 4850mm
con Puente Instalado
Dimensiones Generales
Largo: 5.860mm x Ancho: 6900mm x Alto: 4850mm
sin Puente Instalado
Peso : 17.300 Kilos
Fabricante : FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
ANEXO Nº 7.3
3.1.3. – Antecedentes para el Chequeo
Datos Cumple?
Descripción de las tareas Referencia Controlado Unid SI NO Comentarios
Capacidad Nominal 170,000 N El elemento más pesado
Carrera 2.950 mm
Verifique que existe una lista de chequeo
del apriete de los pernos
Verifique que las guías están libres de
obstáculos
Peso total de prueba N 120 +/- 5%
Verifique que el certificado que acredita
que el manómetro está existe.
Presión máxima estimada en la prueba 17,4 MPa
Verifique que el nivel de aceite de la
unidad hidráulica es correcto
Verifique que los frenos están activados y
el carro anclado
Nadie debe estar sobre el carro. ES
¿Hay suficiente espacio para trabajar con
UNA PRUEBE DE SU CORRECTO
seguridad?
ARMADO
3.1.4. – Prueba sin Carga
Datos Cumple?
Descripción de las tareas Referencia Controlado Unid SI NO Comentarios
Carga aplicada 0 N
Presión máxima detectada durante la
< 17,2 MPa
carrera de la mesa móvil
Carrera máxima lograda 2.950 mm
Tiempo que se mantuvo la mesa móvil en
20 min
la posición superior
Tiempo total de carrera 1 min
El carro se desestabiliza NO
¿Se aprecian pérdidas de fluido
NO
hidráulico por fugas?
Corriente del motor de la unidad
< 35 A
hidráulica
¿Se detectaron ruidos anormales o
vibraciones? NO
Temperaturas máximas detectadas en el
< 55 ºC
motor y la bomba
¿Se detectan deformaciones
NO
estructurales?
ANEXO Nº 7.3
3.1.5. – Prueba con 120% de Carga
Datos Cumple?
Descripción de las Tareas Referencia Controlado Unid SI NO Comentarios
Carga aplicada N
Presión máxima detectada durante la
< 17,2 MPa
carrera de la mesa
Carrera máxima alcanzada 2.950 mm
Tiempo que se mantuvo la mesa móvil en
30 min
la posición superior
Tiempo total de carrera 1,2 min
¿Se aprecia que el carro se
NO
desestabiliza?
¿Se aprecian pérdidas de fluido
NO
hidráulico por fugas?
Corriente del motor de la unidad
< 60 A
hidráulica
¿Se detectaron ruidos anormales o
vibraciones? NO
Temperaturas máximas detectadas en el
< 65 ºC
motor y la bomba
¿Se detectan deformaciones
NO
estructurales?
Observaciones :
ANEXO Nº 7.3
3.2. – LISTA DE CHEQUEO ELECTRICO
3.1.1. – Antecedentes Generales para la Prueba
Nombre Firma
Persona encargada
Persona que realiza la prueba
Lugar donde se realiza la prueba
Fecha de la prueba
3.2.2. – Winch Hydraulic Motor Data
Capacity : 600 Kg
Stroke : 7 mm
Model : 2MB6
Part Number : 2RP81P1V1CPPD1VSF3, 8/200
ANEXO Nº 7.3
9.2.3. – Prueba del Motor Eléctrico de la Unidad Hidráulica
Potencia Instalada : 37 / 50 Kw/HP Marca : SIEMENS

Corriente Nominal In : 68 A Modelo : 1LG42204AA60
Tensión de Trabajo : 400 V Frame : 225 S
Grado de Protección : 55 IP Aislación : F, utilización en clase B
RPM : 1475 a 400 Vac
9.2.3.1. – Prueba del Motor con 40% de la carga en plataforma

Levantando
Bajando
9.2.3.2. – Prueba del Motor con 80% de carga en plataforma

Levantando
Bajando
9.2.3.2. – Prueba del Motor con 120% de carga en plataforma

Levantando
Bajando
Nota: Encuentre los valores de referencia en los protocolos de pruebas en taller

adjuntos a esta sección.
Observaciones:
:
ANEXO Nº 7.3.
9.2.4. – Prueba del Motor Trolley Nº 1
Potencia Nominal : 0.12 / 0.55 kW Marca : CE

Corriente Nominal (In) : 0,85 /1,3 A Tipo : VDE0530
Voltaje Nominal / Frecuencia : 380 / 50 V/Hz t/min : 24/3360
Grado de Protección : IP 55
9.2.4.1. – Prueba del Motor con el Carro SIN Carga y hacia ADELANTE

Lento
Rápido
9.2.4.2. – Prueba del Motor con el Carro SIN Carga y hacia ATRAS

Lento
Rápido

Observaciones:
:
ANEXO Nº 7.3.
9.2.5. – Prueba del Motor Trolley Nº 2
Potencia Nominal : 0.12 / 0.55 kW Marca : CE

Corriente Nominal (In) : 0,85 /1,3 A Tipo : VDE0530
Voltaje Nominal / Frecuencia : 380 / 50 V/Hz t/min : 24/3360
Grado de Protección : IP 55
9.2.4.1. – Prueba del Motor con el Carro en Avance sin Carga

Lento
Rápido
9.2.4.2. – Prueba del Motor con el Carro en Retroceso sin carga

Lento
Rápido

Observaciones:
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Proyecto : ESPERANZA
P.O. No. 211M-MR-052-02
LISTADO DE PARTES No: 28010ME01LP01
LISTADO DE PARTES PARA

CARRO DE MANTENIMIENTO DE EXCENTRICA
Proyecto FLSmidth No: PR-28010
ANEXO 7.4.
LISTADO DE PARTES
0 Emisión para revisión interna LSS IPG CAS ------

Revisado Aprobado
Rev. Descripción Fecha Autor Cliente
por por
Carro Mantenimiento Excéntrica NUMERO 28010ME01LP01 SECCION 00.00
ESPERANZA CODIGO
Listado de Revisiones PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
SECCION O TITULO DE LA SECCION
HISTORICO DE REVISIONES
HOJA Nº HOJA
01 01
02 02
03 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
Firma Fecha
ESPERANZA CODIGO
Lista de Secciones PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
DESCRIPCION NUMERO SECCION CANT. PAGINAS
01 Listado de Revisiones 00.00 1 01
02 Listado de Secciones 00.01 1 02
03 Listado de Planos 00.02 2 03
04 Listado de Partes Separado 00.03 1 04
05 Listado Motores 00.04 1 05
06 Requerimientos de Aire & Agua 00.05 1 06
07 Lubricantes Recomendados 00.06 1 07
08 Repuestos Suministrados 00.07 1 08
09 Repuestos Recomendados 00.08 2 09
10 Instrumentos 00.09 1 10
11 Instrucciones 00.10 1 11
12 Listado de Partes 01.01 32 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
X) Linea
Rev. Linea Fecha Nombre Firma

ESPERANZA CODIGO
Listado de Planos PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
DESCRIPCION DOCUMENTO Nº COMENTARIOS
Eccentric Maintenance Cart
01 28010ME01DG01 01
General Arrangement
Plano de Montaje Plataforma Inferior
02 28010ME01MT1 02
Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Plataforma Superior
03 28010ME01MT2 03
Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Mesa Fija
04 28010ME01MT3 04
Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Columnas y
05 28010ME01MT4 05
Diagonales - Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Carro de
06 28010ME01MT5 06
Mantenimiento - Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Guías Fijas, Soporte
07 28010ME01MT6 07
Trolleys, Escalera - Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Mesa Móvil y Guías
08 28010ME01MT7 08
Telescópicas - Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Carro de
09 28010ME01MT8 09
Mantenimiento en Rieles - Isométrica
Plano de Instalación Barandas
10 28010ME01MT9 10
Superior e Inferior - Isométrica
Plano de Montaje de la Pasarela
11 28010ME01MT10 11
Isométrica
Plano de Montaje Plataforma sobre
12 28010ME01MT11 12
Plataforma Superior - Isométrica
13 13
14 Electric Power Diagram 28010EL01DA01 14
15 Electric Control Diagram 28010EL01DA02 15
16 Control and Power Panel Diagram 28010EL01DC01 16
17 Lighting and Electrical Sockets 28010EL01DC02 17
18 18
19 Eccentric Maintenance Cart 28010EL01CN01 Plano Canalización Eléctrica 19
Rev. Línea Fecha Nombre Firma

ESPERANZA CODIGO
Listado de Planos PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 02
03 Eccentric Maintenance Cart 28010ME01CN01 Plano Canalización Hidráulica 03
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
Listado de Partes Separado PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
01 01
02 02
03 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
Listado de Motores PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
01 Motor Trolley Nº1 Manual IOM 01
02 Motor Trolley Nº 2 Manual IOM 02
03 03
04 Motor Hidráulico Huinche Manual IOM 04
05 05
Instruction Manual 37 Kw (50 Hp) / 1,475 rpm
06 Motor Unidad Hidráulica 06
Three-phase Motor 380 V / 50 Hz
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
Requerimientos de Agua y Aire PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
01 01
02 02
03 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
Lubricantes y Aceite Hidráulico PRODUCTO HOJA Nº 01
Grasa para lubricar los motores de los Electric Chain Host Ver manual de operación
01 01
Trolleys. Operating Instructions Sección 11 - LUBRICATION
02 02
Ver Data Sheet del producto
03 Grasa para el engrase de las guías Data Sheet 03
Castrol Molub Alloy 860
04 04
Grasa para la lubricación del motor de Instruction Manual Ver manual de operación
05 05
la unidad hidráulica Three-phase Motor Sección 3 - Mantenimiento
06 06
Ver Data Sheet del producto
07 Aceite Hidráulico Data Sheet 07
Shell / Movil ISO 46 Aceite Sintético
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
Rev. Linea Fecha Nombre Firma

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Repuestos Suministrados HOJA Nº 01
DESCRIPCION CAN DOCUMENTO Nº COMENTARIOS
01 01
02 02
03 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Repuestos Recomendados HOJA Nº 01
DESCRIPCION CAN CODIGO FLSmidth COMENTARIOS
01 Repuestos Mecánicos 01
02 Trolley Motorizado 1 GAE – 1AA1 – AA1 02
03 Trolley Motorizado 1 TAW – 2AA1 – ZZ1 03
04 Huinche Hidráulico 1 TAW – 3AA1 – AA1 04
05 Descansos Cilindros Hidráulicos 4 HAE - 3AA1 - ZZ1 05
06 06
07 Repuestos para la Unidad hidráulica 07
08 Bomba de engranajes 2 TAU - 5AA1 – AA1 08
09 Manómetro 0-3500 psi 4 TAU – 4AA1 – AA1 09
10 Válvulas 4/3,cetop 5 2 TAU – 6AA1 – AA1 10
11 Válvulas 4/3,cetop 5 2 TAU – 7AA1 – ZZ1 11
12 Bobinas 110 v cetop 5 16 TAU – 8AA – ZZ1 12
13 Acoplamiento flexible 2 TAU – 9AA1 – AA1 13

Bobinas 110 v cetop 3 de válvula
14 8 TAU – 10AA1 – AA1 14
de dos etapas
15 Kit de sellos cilindros telescópicos 8 TAU – 11AA1 – ZZ1 15
16 Kit de sellos cilindros de freno 8 TAU – 12AA1 – ZZ1 16
17 Elemento de filtro de retorno 3 TAU – 13AA1 – ZZ1 17
18 Colador de succión 2 TAU – 14AA1 – ZZ1 18
19 Tapa de llenado 1 TAU – 15AA1 – ZZ1 19
20 Indicador de nivel y temperatura 2 TAU – 16AA1 – ZZ1 20
21 Válvulas de contra balance 4 TAU – 18AA1 – ZZ1 21
22 Válvula de seguridad 2 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Repuestos Recomendados HOJA Nº 02
DESCRIPCION CAN CODIGO FLSmidth COMENTARIOS
01 Repuestos Eléctricos 01
02 Baliza 1 HAG – 30AA1 – ZZ1 220 Vac 02
03 Sirena 1 HAG – 31AA1 – ZZ1 220 Vac 03

Para 50HP / 660Vac / 50Hz con
04 Switch Tripolar 1 HAG – 32AA1 – ZZ1 04
bobina de 220Vac.
05 Thermo-magnético 1 HAG – 33AA1 – ZZ1 3 x 100 A / 660 Vac 05
06 Switch Tripolar 1 HAG – 32AB1 – AA1 10 A / 660 Vac 06
07 Switch Cuadripolar 1 HAG – 34AA1 – AA1 10 A / 660 Vac 07

Entrada de 2 fases 660 Vac y
08 Transformador para control 1 HAG – 35AA1 – ZZ1 08
una fase de salida de 220 Vac
Con base y bobina eléctrica 220
09 Relé de Control Tripolar 3 HAG – 36AA1 – ZZ1 09
Vac
Ø 22mm, de color rojo y
10 Piloto 1 HAG – 37AA1 – AA1 10
ampolleta para 200 Vac
Ø 22mm, de color verde y
11 Piloto 1 HAG – 37AA2 – AA1 11
Ø 22mm, tipo bola con cierre de
12 Panel de Parada de Emergencia 1 HAG – 38AA1 – AA1 contacto y contacto auxiliar 1NC- 12
1NC
Ø 22mm, de color verde con su
13 Switch de Partida 1 HAG – 39AA1 – AA1 13
contactor auxiliar NA
Ø 22mm, de color rojo con su
14 Switch de Parada 1 HAG – 40AA1 – AA1 14
contacto auxiliar NC
Ø 22mm, 3 posiciones 1-0-2
15 Switch Selector 1 HAG – 41AA1 – AA1 15
(1NA-0-1NA)
16 Dispositivo Limitador de Carrera 1 HAG – 42ZZ1 – ZZ1 Para trabajo pesado 16
Ø 18mm, 2 contactos, Abertura
17 Sensor de Inducción 1 HAG – 43AA1 – ZZ1 17
Standard NA, 220 Vac feed
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Instrumentos HOJA Nº 01
DESCRIPCION CANT DOCUMENTO Nº COMENTARIOS
01 Baliza 1 Ver catálogo del fabricante 01
02 Sirena 1 Ver catálogo del fabricante 02
03 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

Carro Mantenimiento Excéntrica NUMBER 28010ME01LP01 SECCION 00.10
ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Instrucciones HOJA Nº 01
Manual de Instalación,
01 28010ME01MA000 01
Operación y Mantenimiento
28010ME01MT…
02 Planos de Montaje 02
Desde el MT1 hasta el MT11
03 Plano de Disposición General 28010ME01DG01 03
28010EL01DA01 / DA02
04 Planos Eléctricos 04
28010EL 01DC01 / DC02
Planos de Canalización 28010EL01CN01/CN02/CN03
05 05
Eléctrica CN04/CN05
Planos de Canalización 28010ME01CN01/CN02/CN03
06 06
Hidráulica CN04/CN05
07 07
Manual de Instalación,
08 Operación y Mantenimiento Ver Anexo 7.5. 08
Unidad Hidráulica
09 Manual de los Trolleys Ver Anexo 7.5. 09
Manual del Huinche
10 Ver Anexo 7.5. 10
Hidráulico
11 11
Hydraulic Unit Motor IOM
12 Ver Anexo 7.5. 12
Manual
13 Plano Cilindros Hidráulicos Ver Anexo 7.5. 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Componentes Mecánicos HOJA Nº 01
PLANO Nº Nº PARTE-CODIGO CODIGO TOTAL
DESCRIPCION CANT PRODUCTO Nº DIMENSIONES-FABRICANTE MATERIAL WGT (KG)
Carro de ASTM
01 1 28010ME01DG01 TAG Nº : 211-ZM-001 17,300 01
Mantenimiento A42-27 ES
ASTM
02 Plataforma Inferior 1 28010ME01MT01 A36-01 ES
02
ASTM
03 Enrejado Izquierdo 1 28010ME01FA04 CODE : FA04-ER3 A36-01 ES
03
ASTM
04 Enrejado Derecho 1 28010ME01FA04 CODE : FA04-ER4 A36-01 ES
04
ASTM
05 Viga Trasera 1 28010ME01FA03 CODE : FA03-V3 A36-01 ES
05
ASTM
06 Viga Delantera 1 28010ME01FA03 CODE : FA03-V2 A36-01 ES
06
Plataforma Unidad ASTM

07 1 28010ME01FA10 CODE : FA10-ER7 07
Hidráulica A36-01 ES
ASTM
08 Viga Interior 2 28010ME01FA05 CODE : FA05-V4 A36-01 ES
08
ASTM
09 Diagonal 2 28010ME01FA05 CODE : FA05-D2 A36-01 ES
09
Plancha Diamantada ASTM

10 1 28010ME01FA25 CODE : FA25-PP3 10
Izquierda A36-01 ES
11 1 28010ME01FA25 CODE : FA25-PP1 11
Derecha A36-01 ES
12 1 28010ME01FA25 CODE : FA25-PP2 12
Central A36-01 ES
ASTM
13 Mesa Fija 2 28010ME01FA13 CODE : FA13-M1 A36-01 ES
13
Ver manual fabricante de la

14 Cilindro Hidráulico 2 14
Unidad Hidráulica
15 15
Plataforma ASTM
16 1 28010ME01MT02 16
Superior A36-01 ES
ASTM
17 Enrejado Izquierdo 1 28010ME01FA07 CODE : FA07-ER1 A36-01 ES
17
ASTM
18 Enrejado Derecho 1 28010ME01FA07 CODE : FA07-ER2 A36-01 ES
18
ASTM
19 Viga Trasera 1 28010ME01FA12 CODE : FA12-V1 A36-01 ES
19
ASTM
20 Viga Delantera 1 28010ME01FA12 CODE : FA12-V2 A36-01 ES
20
ASTM
21 Soporte de Trolley 4 28010ME01FA26 CODE : FA26-SP1 A36-01 ES
21
ASTM
22 Freno Hidráulico 2 28010ME01FA27 CODE : FA27-FR1 A36-01 ES
22
Rev Línea Fecha Nombre Firma

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
ASTM
01 Paneles Laterales 4 A42-27 ES
01
ASTM
02 Columna Nº 1 1 28010ME01FA14 CODE : FA14-COL1 A36-01 ES
02
ASTM
03
ASTM
04
ASTM
05
ASTM
06
ASTM
07
ASTM
08 Diagonal Nº1 1 28010ME01FA15 CODE : FA15-D1 A36-01 ES
08
ASTM
09
ASTM
10
ASTM
11
ASTM
12 Semi-Diagonal 2 28010ME01FA15 CODE : FA15-SD25 A36-01 ES
12
ASTM
13
ASTM
14
ASTM
15
16 16
ASTM
17 Mesa Móvil 1 28010ME01FA20 CODE : FA20-M2 A36-01 ES
17
ASTM
18 Guías Fijas 4 28010ME01FA18 CODE : FA18-GF1 A36-01 ES
18
ASTM
19 Guías Móviles 4 28010ME01FA17 CODE : FA17-GM1 A36-01 ES
19
ASTM
20 Escalera Interior 1 28010ME01FA23 CODE : FA23-ST1 A36-01 ES
20
21 21

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
01 Trolley Motorizado 2 Ver Anexo 7 01
02 Trolley Conducido 2 Ver Anexo 7 02
Plataforma de Acceso ASTM

03 1 28010ME01FA24 CODE : FA24-PS1 03
1 A36-01 ES
Plataforma de Acceso ASTM
04 1 28010ME01FA24 CODE : FA24-PS2 04
2 A36-01 ES
05 05
Plataforma Sobre- ASTM

06 1 06
Plataforma A36-01 ES
ASTM
07 Enrejado Izquierdo 1 28010ME01FA28 CODE : FA28-PT1 A36-01 ES
07
ASTM
08 Enrejado Derecho 1 28010ME01FA28 CODE : FA28-PT2 A36-01 ES
08
ASTM
09 Enrejado Trasero 1 28010ME01FA29 CODE : FA29-PT2 A36-01 ES
09
ASTM
10 Enrejado Delantero 1 28010ME01FA29 CODE : FA29-PT2 A36-01 ES
10
11 11
Baranda Izquierda ASTM

12 1 28010ME01FA09 CODE : FA09-BD3 12
Plataforma Inferior A36-01 ES
Baranda Derecha ASTM
13 1 28010ME01FA09 CODE : FA09-BD5 13
Baranda Trasera ASTM
14 1 28010ME01FA09 CODE : FA09-BD3 A36-01 ES
14
Plataforma Inferior
Baranda Delantera ASTM
15 1 28010ME01FA09 CODE : FA09-BD6 15
16 16
Baranda Izquierda ASTM

17 1 28010ME01FA11 CODE : FA11-BD1 17
Plataforma Superior A36-01 ES
Baranda Derecha ASTM
18 1 28010ME01FA11 CODE : FA11-BD1 18
Baranda Trasera ASTM
19 1 28010ME01FA11 CODE : FA11-BD2 19
Baranda Delantera ASTM
20 1 28010ME01FA11 CODE : FA11-BD2 20
21 21

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Unidad Hidráulica HOJA Nº 04
Bomba de engranajes
01 1 3PB65/2PB19DG87 01
dobles
Válvula direccional
02 1 RD-512CA5A4B1 02
manual
Válvula de seguridad
03 2 CT5060AFMUH7110 03
con venting
Manómetro de 0 a
04 1 UCPGC-0631250 04
3500 PSI
Filtro de retorno
05 1 OFRS-60-PPA-10 05
conexión 1-1/2"
Indicador de nivel y
06 1 UC-FLT-321 06
temperatura
07 Tapa de llenado 1 UC-AB-1163-40 07
Colador de succión
08 2 OF3-12-10 08
conexión 1-1/2”
Difusor de descarga
09 1 2202 09
conexión 1-1/2"
Reguladora de flujo
10 2 N1600S 10
en línea 1”
Válvula protectora de
11 2 UC-GI-1486 11
manómetro
12 Termostato 1 RT-107 12
Porta bulbo
13 1 993N3568 13
termostático
Electro-válvula cetop
14 1 DKI-1711 14
5 c. cerrado
Electro-válvula cetop
15 1 DKI-1713 15
5 c. silla invertida
Block de montaje 2
16 1 MR-5-2G 16
estaciones cetop 5
Reguladoras de flujo
17 2 KQ-012 17
modular cetop 5
Válvula de bola para
18 1 324-010 18
evacuación
Acoplamiento flexible
19 1 SWJW225 19
motor bomba
Sub-base de montaje
20 1 BA-518 20
cetop 7
21 21

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Unidad Hidráulica HOJA Nº 05
Electro-válvula
01 1 DPHI-2710/DHM-N 01
pilotada cetop 7 c
Estanque 500 Lt.
02 1 FE-500-VIG 02
acero al carbono
Válvulas de contra-
03 2 MCV1-16-S-6B/35 03
balance en línea
04 Cilindro telescópico 2 5900079 04
05 Conjunto huinche 1 W600KG 05
06 Cilindros de freno 2 Cohmt1vig 06
Conjunto de
07 1 S/D 07
mangueras y tubería
Conjunto de soportes
08 1 S/D 08
para mangueras y
Motor eléctrico 50 Hp
09 1 FLSMIDTH 09
trifásico
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21

ESPERANZA CODIGO
PRODUCTO
211-ZM-001
Componentes Eléctricos HOJA Nº 06
01 Baliza 1 220 Vac 01
02 Sirena 1 220 Vac 02
Para 50HP / 660Vac / 50Hz

03 Switch Tripolar 1 03
con bobina de 220Vac.
04 Thermo-magnético 1 3 x 100 A / 660 Vac 04
05 Switch Tripolar 1 10 A / 660 Vac 05
06 Switch Cuadripolar 1 10 A / 660 Vac 06
Transformador para Entrada de 2 fases 660 Vac

07 1 07
control y una fase de salida de 220
Relé de Control Con base y bobina eléctrica
08 3 08
Tripolar 220 Vac
Ø 22mm, de color rojo y
09 Piloto 1 09
Ø 22mm, de color verde y
10 Piloto 1 10
Panel de Parada de Ø 22mm, tipo bola con
11 1 11
Emergencia cierre de contacto y
Ø 22mm, de color verde
12 Switch de Partida 1 12
con su contactor auxiliar NA
Ø 22mm, de color rojo con
13 Switch de Parada 1 13
su contacto auxiliar NC
Ø 22mm, 3 posiciones 1-0-2
14 Switch Selector 1 14
(1NA-0-1NA)
Dispositivo Limitador
15 1 Para trabajo pesado 15
de Carrera
Ø 18mm, 2 contactos,
16 Sensor de Inducción 1 16
Abertura Standard NA, 220
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21

ANEXO Nº 7.5.
MANUALES Y CATALOGOS
Listado de Manuales y Catálogos Emitidos por Fabricantes de Componentes
IT DESCRIPCION EMITIDO POR
1 Manual de Operaciones para la Central Oleohidráulica VIGNOLA

2 Gear Pumps and Motors - Dealer Spare Parts SALAMI
3 Valves PRINCE
4 Pressure Relief Valves for Pipe Mounting Vickers
5 Pressure Gauges UCC
6 Low & High Pressure ProGuard Filters Vickers
7 Fluid Level Temperature Gauges UCC
8 Filler Breather Filters (Metal) UCC
9 Diffusers UCC
10 Flow Control Valves - Series F and C Parker
11 Gauge Isolator Valves UCC
12 Thermostats Type RT Danfoss
13 Solenoid directional valves type DKE and DKER atos
14 Modular valves type HQ, KQ, JPQ atos
15 Ball Valves STEUBY
16 Guardex Flexible Shaft Drive Couplings GUARDIAN
17 Solenoid directional valves type DPHI, DPHU, DPHO atos
18 Load Control Valves Vickers
19 Cilindro Telescópico Óleo-dinámico PENTA HP
20 Manual Huinche Hidráulico VIGNOLA
21 Plano Cilindro Hidráulico Frenos VIGNOLA
22 Manual Motor Eléctrico SIEMENS
23 Breathers Vickers
24 Hoja de Datos Grasa MOLUB-ALLOY 860 Castrol
25 Hoja de Datos Aceite Hidráulico Mobil SHC Serie 500 Mobil
26 Paper Control para la Contaminación Vickers
27 Manual de Operaciones Trolleys Eléctricos LIFTKET
Importadora Técnica Vignola S.A.I.C.
CLIENTE : FLSMIDTH MINERALS S.A.

O/F Nº : 8756
PROYECTO : CARRO ESPERANZA
POTENCIA : 50 Hp / 1450 RPM / 380 V
CAUDAL : 28 y 8 GPM
PRESION : 2700PSI
DIGITO : 3004315
CENTRO COSTO : 28010
INDICE
1. DESCRIPCION GENERAL
1.1 Introduccion
2. CARACTERISTICAS PRINCIPALES DE LA CENTRAL
3. SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
3.1 Principio de funcionamiento
3.2 Listado de componentes
3.3 Circuito Oleohidráulico
3.4 Listado de componentes críticos
4. PROCEDIMIENTOS DE PUESTA EN MARCHA
5. PLAN DE MANTENIMIENTO OLEOHIDRAULICO

5.1 Recomendaciones generales
5.2 Mantención recomendada
6. LOCALIZACION DE FALLAS Y AVERIAS EN EL

SISTEMAS OLEOHIDRAULICOS
6.1 Normas de seguridad
6.2 Cuadro de fallas
7. CERTIFICADOS ISO
8. APENDICE
9. FICHAS TECNICAS DE COMPONENTES (Revisar CD entregado)
Importadora Técnica Vignola S.A.I.C. 1

1.- INTRODUCCIÓN
El presente manual pretende entregar la información necesaria para que los operadores,
personal de mantención y usuarios en general operen y mantenga, en forma correcta y
adecuada la central oleohidráulica.
Antes de operar el equipo, conviene interiorizarse en su funcionamiento, de las

capacidades y posibilidades, así como también tener presente las reglas de seguridad y
normas de mantención evitando de esta manera las operaciones con riesgo de
accidentes
Una vez puesta en funcionamiento la central óleo hidráulica según las instrucciones,
estamos seguros que usted encontrara en esta central un equipo practico y versátil, de
fácil operación y mantención.
Estimados señores estamos seguros. Que ustedes sabrán apreciar a lo largo del tiempo
la eficiencia y eficacia de la central que acaban de adquirir y que fue fabricada con los
estándares de nuestra compañía VIGNOLA S.A.

2.- CARACTERISTICAS PRINCIPALES DE LA CENTRAL
• Presión : 2700 PSI

• Caudal : 28 Y 8 GPM
• Potencia : 50 Hp
• Alimentación : 380 VAC Trifásico
• Volumen Estanque : 450 LTS
3.- SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
3.1. - Principio de funcionamiento
Para que la central hidráulica esté en condiciones de operar de forma correcta debe
estar con una temperatura por sobre los 10 °C.
Dado la condición de sistema habilitado para trabajar, se pone en funcionamiento el

sistema operado por un motor de 50 hp (29) el cual acciona una bomba de engranaje
dobles (1), esto se consigue mediante un acoplamiento ( 19).
La bomba (1) entrega fluido desde su cuerpo principal a válvula manual ( 2 ) y el

segundo cuerpo entrega fluido al block de válvulas (16) el cual alimenta los cilindros de
freno (26) y el winche hidráulico (25).
Cuando la válvula manual (2) está en su posición centrada, el fluido pasa directo al
estanque, si esta se activa el flujo se dirigirá a la válvula direccional (21).
La válvula manual (2) por ser centro tándem no presenta resistencia al flujo, es decir
bajo esta condiciones el manómetro (4) no marcara presión, este caudal está retornando
al estanque a través de un filtro de retorno (5) con By Pass incorporado en el sistema
como seguridad contra la contaminación que se produce en el interior del circuito.

Avance de cilindros de freno (26)
Este avance se producen al activar el solenoide (a) de la electroválvula (14) la cual da
condición de flechas paralelas, el caudal es dirigido a la válvula controladoras de caudal
(17) las cuales cumplen la función de regular la velocidad de avance de los cilindros de
freno (26), estos al llegar a su posición final y accionándose unos sensores que dan la
condición para que pueda ser activados los solenoides de la electroválvula piloteada
(21) que comanda el avance y retroceso de los cilindros (24).
Retroceso de cilindro de freno (26)

Se activa solenoide (b) de electroválvula (14) permitiendo que los cilindros retrocedan a
su posición de reposo, la velocidad de estos cilindros es controlada por las válvulas
reguladoras de flujo (17) que en esta oportunidad son de forma modular para
economizar en espacio y puntos de fuga.
Avance de cilindros telescópicos (24)

Este avance se produce al activar solenoide de la electroválvula piloteada (21), siendo
esta una electroválvula de dos etapas, en este tipo de válvulas la primera etapa es
comandada por una electroválvula cetop 3.
Al activarse el solenoide (a) de la electroválvula (21), esta pasa a flechas paralelas

enviando el fluido a través de válvulas (7) las cuales cumplen la función de regular el
flujo para la salida y entrada de los cilindros telescópicos (24), luego pasa el fluido a
través de las válvulas de contrabalance (23) las cuales cumplen la función de sostener
la carga a levantar por los cilindros (24).
Su regulación de presión es un 10 % superior a la producida por la carga a levantar.
Para que el sistema baje, se debe activar el solenoide (b) de la electroválvula (21), esta
pasara a flechas cruzadas y enviara el flujo al pilotaje de las válvulas de contrabalance
las cuales se abrirán y permitirán el descenso de la carga sin que esta se acelere, la
velocidad de bajada se regulara por intermedio de las válvulas controladoras de flujo (7).
Retroceso de cilindros telescópicos (24)

Se produce activando el solenoide (b) de la válvula (21), en este trabajo los cilindros (24)
se desplazan producto de la carga ya que estos cilindros son de simple efecto la
velocidad de bajada es controlada por la válvula reguladora de caudal (7).

Válvulas de Contra-balance
Las válvulas de Contrabalance (23) merecen un especial grado de atención ya que se
encargan que la carga no descienda y no se acelere, independiente de la masa
que estén desplazando.
Se deja constancia que fueron ajustadas estas válvulas en forma individual para
sostener una carga de 12 Toneladas.
Accionamiento del Winche hidraulico

En esta aplicación especial, el winche no está diseñado para nada más que el
movimiento del pasillo de acceso al carro de mantenimiento. No está destinado a
levantar cargas ni personas.
Cuando el pasillo necesite subir o bajar debe estar totalmente libre, no se puede
accionar el winche si sobre el pasillo o en la trayectoria de su movimiento hay carga,
personas u obstáculos.
Se debe asegurar el área alrededor del pasillo para evitar que alguien inadvertidamente
se ponga en la trayectoria del movimiento o en la posible zona de la caída en caso de
corte o falla del sistema.
Este empezara a funcionar cuando se accione la bobina (a) de la electroválvula (15) y su

velocidad de avance será regulada por las válvulas (17), que por motivos de espacios y
evitar fugas se colocan de forma modular al igual que las válvulas (17) correspondiente
al control de velocidad de los cilindros de freno (26).
El winche estará protegido para evitar que el pasillo de acceso se caiga o se acelere
mediante válvulas de contrabalence que estarán insertas en el winche como un solo
conjunto.

3.2 Listado de componentes hidráulicos
Ítem Descripción del Componente Numero de Parte Cant Código Marca

1 Bomba de engranajes dobles 3PB65/2PB19DG87 1 0303250 SALAMI
2 Válvula direccional manual RD-512CA5A4B1 1 0322220 PRINCE
3 Válvula de seguridad con venting CT5060AFMUH7110 2 0324205 VICKERS
4 Manómetro de 0 a 3500 PSI UCPGC-0631250 1 0410023 UCC
5 Filtro de retorno conexión 1-1/2" OFRS-60-PPA-10 1 0361403 VICKERS
6 Indicador de nivel y temperatura UC-FLT-321 1 0360074 UCC
7 Tapa de llenado UC-AB-1163-40 1 0360044 UCC
8 Colador de succión conexión 1-1/2” OF3-12-10 2 0361382 VICKERS
9 Difusor de descarga conexión 1-1/2" 2202 1 0360192 AMA
10 Reguladora de flujo en línea 1” N1600S 2 0326336 PARKER
11 Válvula protectora de manómetro UC-GI-1486 2 0326001 UCC
12 Termostato RT-107 1 0103020 DANFOSS
13 Porta bulbo termostático 993N3568 1 0103075 DANFOSS
14 Electroválvula cetop 5 c. cerrado DKI-1711 1 0320835 ATOS
15 Electroválvula cetop 5 c. silla invertida DKI-1713 1 0320833 ATOS
16 Block de montaje 2 estaciones cetop 5 MR-5-2G 1 0320887 ABCO
17 Reguladoras de flujo modular cetop 5 KQ-012 2 0320940 ATOS
18 Válvula de bola para evacuación 324-010 1 0204747 STEUBY
19 Acoplamiento flexible motor bomba SWJW225 1 0326116 GUARDIAN
20 Sub-base de montaje cetop 7 BA-518 1 0320872 ATOS
21 Electroválvula pilotada cetop 7 c abierto DPHI-2710/DHM-N 1 0320855 ATOS
22 Estanque 500 Lt. acero al carbono FE-500-VIG 1 3000001 VIGNOLA
23 Válvulas de contrabalance en línea MCV1-16-S-6B/35 2 3002972 VICKERS
24 Cilindro telescópico 5900079 2 3000002 PENTA
25 Conjunto winche W600KG 1 0310310 VIGNOLA
26 Cilindros de freno Cohmt1vig 2 9800011 VIGNOLA
27 Conjunto de mangueras y tubería S/D 1 S/D VIGNOLA
Conjunto de soportes para mangueras y
28 S/D 1 S/D VIGNOLA
componentes
29 Motor eléctrico 50 Hp trifásico FLSMIDTH 1 S/D SIEMENS

3.3 CIRCUITO HIDRAULICO

3.4.- LISTADO DE COMPONENTES CRITICOS
ITEM DESCRIPCION NUMERO DE PARTE MARCA CANT

1 Bomba de engranajes 3PB65/2PB19DG87 SALAMI 2
2 Manómetro 0-3500 psi UCPGC-0631250 UCC 4
3 Válvulas 4/3,cetop 5 DKI-1711 ATOS 2
4 Válvulas 4/3,cetop 5 DKI-1713 ATOS 2
5 Bobinas 110 v cetop 5 SP-CAI-110VAC ATOS 16
6 Acoplamiento flexible SWJW225 GUARDIAN 2
Bobinas 110 v cetop 3 de válvula de
7 SP-COI-110VAC ATOS 8
dos etapas
8 Kit de sellos cilindros telescópicos KDSPCT PENTA 8
9 Kit de sellos cilindros de freno COHMT1VIGKIT VIGNOLA 8
10 Elemento de filtro de retorno V021-1B1-C10 VICKERS 3
11 Colador de succión OF3-12-10 VICKERS 2
12 Tapa de llenado UC-AB-1163-40 UCC 1
13 Indicador de nivel y Tº UC-FLT-321 UCC 2
14 Válvulas de contra balance MCV1-16-S-6B/35 VICKERS 4
15 Válvula de seguridad CT5060AFMUH7110 VICKERS 2

4.- PROCEDIMIENTOS DE PUESTA EN MARCHA
Para poner en marcha esta central hidráulica se debe seguir los siguientes pasos en el
siguiente orden, ya que cualquier error u omisión puede significar la destrucción de
algún componente de alto costo o provocar un accidente al operador u otra persona que
se encuentre en el área
1. Verificar las conexiones eléctricas tanto del motor como de las válvulas
solenoides, ver sentido de giro de la bomba, en esta central hidráulica la bomba
tiene sentido de giro derecho mirado desde la punta del eje.
2. Comprobar nivel de aceite en estanque, estando en reposo este debe estar

aproximadamente en el extremo superior del nivel de aceite y temperatura que
está ubicado en un costado del estanque. Una vez que se ha puesto en marcha
la bomba las tuberías del circuito se llenaran de aceite verificar nivel de estanque
nuevamente ya que parte de este quedara en las líneas. PRECAUCION
RELLENAR SI ES NECESARIO NO RELLENAR CON ACEITE DE MARCAS
DISTINTAS.
3. El aceite recomendado es un aceite mineral SAE 46.
4. Al poner en funcionamiento deben desregular la válvula de sobre presión, acto

seguido, poner en marcha la unidad, una vez estabilizado el sistema, comenzar
ajustar la válvula de seguridad, esta válvula se ajusta accionando la válvula 3/2
normal abierta (3).
5. Asegurarse de que no hayan conexiones de tuberías a válvulas sueltas, ni algún

componente mal montado como: Manómetros, filtros, válvulas, mangueras y
acoples rápidos si los hubiese.
6. En caso de haber desmontado motor eléctrico deben verificar alineamiento de

motor con respecto a la bomba.
7. Verificar que todos los componentes hidráulicos se encuentren en la posición de

reposo o normal.
8. Compruebe que todos los componentes hidráulicos estén en su posición normal.
Nota: Si usted necesita una copia de los textos 4.1 al 4.6, imprima apéndice 8

4.1. - DATOS GENERALES DE PRUEBAS
Nombre Firma
Persona responsable
Persona quien recibe la prueba
Lugar donde se realizan las pruebas
Fecha de las Pruebas
Nota Importante:
Las pruebas del carro realizadas en planta, complementan las pruebas realizadas en
nuestra empresa. El objetivo de realizar estas pruebas es asegurar que el carro sea
capaz de levantar la carga para la cual fue diseñado más un 20% como seguridad, no
debiendo observar grietas, fisuras que den señale un mal diseño estructural y no
hidráulico.
Preferentemente las pruebas debiesen ser realizadas fuera del carro para asegurar la
integridad del operador.
El área alrededor y bajo el carro para ser probado, debe ser aislada con el fin de evitar
accidentes.
4.2. - INFORMACION GENERAL DEL EQUIPO
Nombre : Unidad hidráulica Carro Esperanza

Orden de trabajo Nº : 8756
Centro de costo : 28010
Digito : 3004315
Potencia : 50 HP
Caudal : 28 y 8 GPM
Presión : 2700 PSI
Capacidad Nominal : 24 T
Carrera del cilindro telescópico : 166”
Carrera del cilindro de freno : 4”
Capacidad Winche hidráulico : 600 Kg.

4.3. - LISTA DE COMPROBACION DE MONTAJE
Evaluación Obedece
Descripción de Componentes Referencia Revisado Unid Si No Comentarios
La válvula de bola debe estar totalmente cerrada.
Compruebe que el nivel de aceite este sobre el
indicador (9)
Aceite que se debe utilizar, ISO 46
Compruebe que la válvula de seguridad este
abierta
Temperatura Mínima de trabajo 10 °C
Compruebe que la conexión eléctrica este de
adecuada, para que la bomba gire con sentido
horario
Voltaje del Motor eléctrico 380 V
Comprobar fuente de energía
Voltaje válvula direccional (14) 110 V

Compruebe que el movimiento de la válvula
manual este correcto
Compruebe fugas y estado de mangueras
Comprobar que todas las conexiones estén
apretadas
Comprobar que las conexiones de la válvula 14
con la válvula de control de flujo 15 estén
conectadas de la misma manara como se indica
en el plano hidráulico
Compruebe que las conexión de las válvulas de
control de flujo 15 estén conectadas con los
cilindro de freno 16 como lo indica el plano
hidráulico
Comprobar que las conexiones de la válvula
cetop 7 estén conectadas como indica el plano
con respecto a las reguladoras de flujo.
Comprobar que las conexiones entre las válvulas
de contra-balance y las reguladoras de flujo
estén como lo indica el plano hidráulico.
Comprobar las conexiones de las válvulas
contra-balance respecto a las entradas de los
cilindros hidráulicos telescópicos

Evaluación Obedece
Descripción de Componentes Referencia Revisado Unid Si No Comentarios
Asegurarse que los pilotajes de las válvulas de
contra-balance estén conectados como lo indica
el plano hidráulico.
Comprobar que las conexiones de la bomba
secundaria como la de la primaria estén
conectadas como indica el plano hidráulico
Comprobar las conexiones del filtro de retorno
Comprobar que el pórtico B de la válvula manual
este bloqueado

4.4. - PRUEBAS A REALIZAR SIN CARGA
Evaluación Obedece
Ficha de Descripción Referencia Revisado Unid Si No Comentarios
Carga aplicada 0 TON
Accione la válvula de los cilindros de freno y
regule la presión del sistema a 2700 PSI
Accione la válvula direccional de los cilindros
de freno y regule la velocidad de avance y
retroceso de estos.
Comprobar el nivel de aceite
Registrar la temperatura máxima obtenida
durante la prueba
Tiempo que duró la prueba
¿Se encontraron ruidos extraños?
¿Se visualizaron movimientos repentinos y
extraños?

4.5. - PRUEBAS CON CARGA AL 120%
Evaluación Obedece
Tabla de Descripción Referencia Revisado Unid Si No Comentarios
Carga aplicada 28.8 TON
Accione la válvula de los cilindros de freno y
regule la presión del sistema a 2700 PSI
Registrar la temperatura máxima obtenida durante
la prueba
Tiempo que duró la prueba
¿Se visualizaron movimientos y/o ruidos extraños?
4.6 TENER PRECAUCION ANTES DE COMENZAR UNA NUEVA

OPERACION
ANTES DE COMENZAR UNA NUEVA OPERACION SE

DEBE REPETIR ELPUNTO 4.2 DE FORMA COMPLETA

5.- PLAN DE MANTENIMIENTO HIDRAULICO
5.1.- SUGERENCIAS GENERALES
1. Lo más importante es la limpieza del sistema hidráulico.
2. Cada vez que se abra el estanque debe limpiarse y sellarse.
3. No debe realizarse operaciones de esmerilado o soldadura en áreas donde están

siendo instalados los componentes hidráulicos.
4. Todos los cilindros, válvulas, bombas, etc. Deberían ser sellados o tapados hasta
el momento de usarlos. Estos se refiere a las conexiones de entrada y salidas
que tengan estos componentes.
5. Alcoholes o solventes minerales se deben mantener en recipientes cerrados.
6. Debe usarse aire a presión para la limpieza de los fittings u otros componentes
del sistema. El aire debe estar filtrado y seco para prevenir contaminación de las
partes.
7. Examinar las cañerías, fittings y mangueras antes de usarlas para estar seguros
de que no haya rebabas de metal, suciedad o resto de soldadura.
8. Todos los extremos de cañería y tubos deben estar en perfecto estado para evitar
restricciones y flujo turbulento.
9. No usar cintas de teflón sobre conexiones de hilo recto.
10. Cuando instale la bomba o motor siempre alinee las mitades del acoplamiento lo
más cerrado posible, alrededor de 0.007’’.
11. Cuando utilice acoplamiento flexibles siga las recomendaciones o instrucciones

del fabricante o deje una tolerancia entre 1/32’’ a 1/16’’ entre las mitades de los
acoplamientos.
12. Al introducir el acoplamiento al eje de motor o bomba no lo haga girar, este debe
entrar en forma deslizante usando a veces aceite caliente.
13. Cuando instale el acoplamiento sobre ejes estriados, use un lubricante spray.
Este previene el desgaste prematuro y aumenta la vida útil del mismo.

5.2.- MANTENCION RECOMENDADA
Un sistema hidráulico bien instalado y ajustado durante el montaje y la puesta en

marcha asegura una larga vida sin fallas y no necesita cuidados especiales de
mantención.
El principio básico de un buen manejo es la absoluta necesidad de chequear

continuamente la cantidad y el estado de fluido de transmisión de potencia y el estado
del circuito Oleohidráulico libre de contaminantes; de eso depende la confiabilidad de
cada máquina y sistema Oleohidráulico.
El plan de mantenimiento está compuesto de varias pequeñas operaciones, las cuales

deben ser ejecutadas cada cierto tiempo para que sean efectivas. Por eso es muy
importante que estas operaciones de control y chequeo, aunque simples, estén
planificadas y en listadas sobre la máquina o tarjeta de instalación. Sobre estas tarjetas
el personal de mantención registrará el servicio realizado y los problemas que hayan
encontrado.

¾ Se recomiendan las siguientes operaciones periódicas:
1. Limpieza externa mensual: A través de esta acción se puede encontrar

fácilmente cualquier pérdida de aceite, detectar el problema y proceder a su
reparación.
2. Chequeo de filtro de aire: Reemplace el elemento si es necesario, el chequeo

periódico puede ser cambiado, de acuerdo a la experiencia directa del
encargado de mantención o de las condiciones ambientales.
3. Chequeo de los filtros de aceite: Como siempre se ha dicho esta operación es

de máxima importancia. Debe realizarse al menos una vez por semana. En
máquinas importantes se deben usar filtro con indicadores de saturación visuales
o eléctricos, de esa forma la señal de falla puede ser indicada en la sala de
control y así evitar la posibilidad de olvido de mantención.
4. Nivel de Aceite: Tiene que ser hecho donde el nivel es mínimo. La mantención o
detección es fácil al colocar sensores eléctricos de niveles máximos y mínimos.
5. Control de temperatura de aceite: El deterioro del fluido con la temperatura es

una causa de las fallas de la máquina hidráulica.
Hasta 60 °C. La velocidad de oxidación puede considerarse constante, desde
ese punto hacia arriba, cada 10 º C la velocidad de oxidación aumenta al doble.
6. Cambio de Aceite: El aceite debe cambiarse cuando los análisis de aceite así lo
indiquen, estos análisis arrojan si se mantienen las propiedades físicas y
químicas de los aceites al igual que el nivel de contaminación, se recuerda que el
75 % de las fallas en los sistemas hidráulicos se deben a que algunos de los
parámetros nombrados pierde propiedades. Cuando se cambia el aceite, se debe
hacer una limpieza profunda del estanque y un flushing del circuito si el aceite se
ha degradado o se han cambiado tuberías.

7. Bombas, Válvulas Solenoide y Componentes de Regulación: Deben ser
tratados separadamente, si es posible planificar una serie de chequeos en
tiempos predeterminados, los cuales puedan ayudar para verificar si el servicio o
mantención es necesaria. En un sistema lo más importante es la unidad motor
bomba, para poder chequear el flujo de la bomba se debe hacer con el sistema
en operación para verificar pérdidas; el resultado de estas operaciones nos
indicará el grado de eficiencia y luego el estado de uso o desgaste.
El mismo caso se aplica para las válvulas solenoide, por ejemplo un chequeo
cada seis meses de las pérdidas en las válvulas con un estándar no puede
ayudar a tomar la decisión si el componente debe ser reemplazado.
Es necesario que la máquina desde su puesta en marcha, cuente con una

cantidad de repuestos tipo botiquín de primeros auxilios. Debe estar siempre
completo y con la cantidad suficiente como sea necesario.

¾ Revisiones mensuales:
1. Revisión de todo el circuito oleohidráulico (Unidad de potencia, Piping, Cilindros,

etc.).
2. Visualizar estado de mangueras, cañerías, soportes y componentes.
3. Cada 200 hrs extraer muestras de aceite para analizar y según los resultados si
se requiere cambiar el aceite.
4. Simular cortes de energía para probar el sistema de emergencia, pulsando el

“botón de emergencia”.
5. Realizar el cambio de filtro de retorno y presión: Cada 2000 hrs o cuando el

indicador de saturación lo indique.
6. Cambio de filtro de aire cada 1000 hrs o cuando el indicador de saturación lo

indique.
7. Revisar constantemente el nivel de aceite del estanque. Si el nivel está por

debajo del visor, rellenar y eliminar posibles fugas del sistema.
8. Verificar la temperatura del aceite desde el termómetro. La temperatura ideal del

sistema debe promediar los 49 a 52 °C. Si la temperatura supera los 68°C, se
debe analizar la posibilidad de incorporar intercambiadores de calor de agua
aceite o aire aceite según el medio en el cual se esté trabajando.

6.- LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS DE CENTRAL HIDRAULICA
6.1. – SOLUCIONES LOGICAS EN SISTEMAS HIDRAULICOS
El objeto de este apéndice es de proporcionar un acercamiento lógico a la solución de

sistema oleohidráulicos.
Probablemente la mayor ayuda a las soluciones es tener la confianza de conocer y

entender el sistema. Ya que cada componente tiene un objetivo en el sistema, la
construcción y las características de operaciones de cada uno claramente deberían ser
entendidas. Por ejemplo, sabiendo que un solenoide controla una válvula direccional y
este está defectuoso, debemos saber que podemos realizar la operación de forma
manual, este procedimiento ahorrará tiempo considerable en el proceso mientras se
repara o cambia el solenoide defectuoso.
Es también importante saber y conocer las capacidades máximas del sistema hidráulico
con el que se está trabajando (50 Hp, Caudal 30 gpm y Presión 2700 PSI). Cada
componente en el sistema tiene un máximo la velocidad nominal, el momento de
rotación, o la presión. Si el sistema es exigido más allá de los datos específicos, la
posibilidad de falla aumenta enormemente.
Deben saber y conocer las presiones correctas de operaciones del sistema hidráulico
con el que se está trabajando y siempre se debe estar comprobado a través de un
manómetro que estará instalado en el circuito (Ver ítem 3.3).
El realizar un procedimiento sencillo de como trasladar un sistema o cambiar una pieza

suelta puede causar problemas. Los puntos que se mencionan más abajo ayudarán a
evitar complicaciones innecesarias o tenciones de emergencia, lo cual se traduce en el
aumento del costo de una mantención.
• Cada componente en el sistema debe ser seleccionado de buena forma, ya que

será una parte incorporada del sistema. Como un ejemplo, si se coloca el colador
se succión incorrecto al tamaño necesario de la bomba que se está usando
puede causar cavitación con los daños y problemas que esto implica en la bomba
y en el circuito.

• Las tuberías de succión, retorno, presión, pilotajes y drenajes deberían ser del
tamaño correcto y sin curvas que provoquen restricciones y se traduzcan en
pérdidas de presión innecesarias y aumento de la temperatura y velocidades del
sistema oleohidráulico.
La capacidad de reconocer indicadores de problema en un sistema específico, por lo

general es adquirida con la experiencia. Para ayudar a este proceso, conozca y analice
el sistema oleohidráulico.
Aunque la solución y la reparación sean normales y fáciles de manejar en un sistema

oleohidráulico, el tiempo de parada para mantenciones puede ser reducido al mínimo.
Realizando frecuentemente y con regularidad los tres puntos más abajo mencionados.
• Mantenga una cantidad suficiente de aceite hidráulico, en lo posible rellenar el

depósito a través de una maquina filtradora para asegurarse de la limpieza de
este. Además debe tener una viscosidad adecuada o correcta.
• Cambie los filtros y limpie el estanque antes de colocarle el aceite nuevo o micro-
filtrado.
• Asegurarse que todas las conexiones queden apretadas, así se evitará que el
aire se introduzca en el sistema (Aireación).
Siempre que se esté realizando una mantención en el sistema hidráulico o en

cualquier tipo de maquinas, la consideración más importante a tener en cuenta es la de
seguridad. Aunque siempre se esté en capacitaciones de seguridad y se tengan
practicar de buenos hábitos de lo que esto significa, la tensión en una situación de
interrupción puede significar que un riesgo potencial sea pasado por alto. Por esta
razón, es una buena idea el establecer procedimiento de mantención, como el que se
muestra en las reglas básicas de seguridad

REGLAS BASICAS DE SEGURIDAD
HACER DECENDER O ASEGURAR

MECANICAMENTE TODAS LAS CARGAS
SUSPENDIDAS
DESCOMPRIMIR TODO EL SISTEMA
AISLAR EL SISTEMA DE CONTROL ELECTRICO

DESCONECTAR SISTEMA E INSTALAR
CANDADO DE SEGURIDAD

6.2. - Tabla y diagrama de falla
Guía de localización de averías en el sistema hidráulico
CAUSA
SINTOMAS EN ORDEN PROBABLE DE
OCURRENCIA
A. RUIDO EXCESIVO EN LA BOMBA 1. 2. 3. 4.
RUIDO EXCESIVO EN LA VALVULA

B. 5. 6.
DE SEGURIDAD
EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA EN LA
C. 1. 7. 4.
BOMBA
EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA EN EL
D. 8. 9. 10. 11.
CILINDRO
EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA EN EL
E. 12. 7. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
ACEITE
SIN FLUJO DE ACEITE EN SISTEMA
F. 18. 19. 20. 21. 4.
HIDRAULICO
FLUJO INSUFICIENTE DE ACEITE EN
G. 22. 23. 24.
SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
SIN PRESIÓN DE ACEITE EN
H. 25.
SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
PRESIÓN DE ACEITE INSUFICIENTE

I. 26. 27.
EN SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
PRESIÓN DE ACEITE ERRATICA EN

J. 28. 29.
SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
PRESIÓN DE ACEITE EXCESIVA EN
K. 30. 31.
SISTEMA HIDRAULICO
L. SIN MOVIMIENTO 32 33 34
M. MOVIMIENTO LENTO 35 36 37 38

Causas y Soluciones
CAUSA SOLUCIONES
a. Revise la tubería de succión
b. Revise el filtro de succión
c. Lave el filtro de succión en solventes
compatibles con el fluido del sistema hidráulico.
d. Lave los elementos contaminantes en la línea
de succión
1. Cavitación
e. Limpie el respirador del estanque
f. Cambie el aceite del sistema
g. Cambie el motor a una velocidad adecuada
para la bomba
h. Revise la temperatura del aceite
a. Apriete la tubería de la succión
b. Revise el nivel de aceite del estanque
2. Aireación c. Remueva el aire del sistema
d. Reemplace el retén del eje de la bomba
a. Revise el acoplamiento motor-bomba
3. Eje mal alineado
b. Revise el pie de montaje o campana
4. Bomba dañada a. Cambie la bomba
5. Baja capacidad de carga a. Ajuste la válvula de seguridad
a. Revise y limpie la válvula de seguridad
6. Desgaste en obturador y asiento
b. Cambie la válvula de seguridad
7. Regulación de presión demasiada alta a. Ajuste la válvula de seguridad a la presión
en la válvula de seguridad. necesaria.
8. Aceite con alta temperatura a. Revise la válvula de seguridad
9. Regulación de presión incorrecta en la
a. Revise y ajuste la válvula de seguridad
válvula de seguridad.
a. Ajuste la máxima carga hasta la carga del
10. Carga excesiva
diseño
a. Revise los sellos del pistón
11. Cilindro con desgaste o dañado
b. Cambie

CAUSA SOLUCIONES
12. Presión de funcionamiento
a. Ajuste a la presión necesaria.
demasiado alta
a. Realice un micro filtrado
13. Aceite sucio o bajo nivel b. Rellene el nivel
c. Cambie el aceite
14. Viscosidad incorrecta del aceite a. Cambie el aceite
15. Condiciones incorrectas en la
a. Incorpore un intercambiador de calor
refrigeración
16. Elementos con desgaste a. Cambie los elementos dañados
a. Revise el sistema eléctrico
17. Termostato dañado
b. Cambie el termostato
a. Revise el filtro de succión
b. Revise el nivel de aceite
18. La bomba no aspira el aceite c.- Reemplace los filtros dañados
d. Limpie la línea de succión colapsada
e. Limpie el respirador del estanque
19. Acoplamiento dañado a. Reemplazar
20. Dirección del flujo inverso a. Revise la polaridad del motor eléctrico
21. Descarga de la bomba a través de la
a. Revise la válvula de seguridad
válvula de alivio
22. Bajo flujo a través del regulador de
a. Revise el regulador de flujo
flujo
a. Revise los sellos de los elementos
23. Pérdidas internas
b. Cambie los kit de sellos
24. Regulación de la válvula de

seguridad muy cerca de la regulación de a. Ajuste la válvula a la presión necesaria
trabajo
a. Revise el nivel de aceite
25. Fuente de flujo de aceite
b. Revise el acoplamiento motor-bomba

CAUSA SOLUCIONES
26. Válvula de seguridad abierta a. Ajuste la válvula a la presión necesaria
a. Repare la bomba o el cilindro
27. Bomba o cilindro dañado
b. Cambie la bomba o el cilindro
28. Válvula de seguridad con desgaste a. Cambie la válvula de seguridad
a. Realice un micro filtrado
29. Contaminación en el fluido
b. Cambie el aceite
30. Válvula de alivio mal ajustada a. Ajuste la válvula de seguridad
31. Válvula de seguridad con desgaste a. Cambie los elementos
a. Ajuste la válvula de seguridad
32. Sin flujo, sin presión b. Revise el nivel de aceite
c. Revise los reguladores de flujo
33. Mal funcionamiento del sistema a. Revise el sistema eléctrico

mecánico, eléctrico o hidráulico. b. Revise el sistema de control hidráulico
34. Acoplamiento dañado a. Cambie el acoplamiento
35. Bajo flujo a. Ajuste la válvula de regulación de flujo
a. Revise los calefactores
36. Viscosidad del aceite demasiado alta b. Revise el sistema eléctrico
c. Revise el termostato
37. Presión insuficiente a. Ajuste la válvula de seguridad
38. Sin lubricación en la guías o en las a. Lubrique las partes móviles en forma correcta y
juntas del equipo. efectiva.
a. Cambie el kit de sellos
39. Falla en las empaquetaduras del b. Revise interiormente el tubo

cilindro c. Revise el vástago
d. Cambie el cilindro

8. - APENDICE
8.1. - DATOS GENERALES DE PRUEBAS
Nombre Firma responsable

Persona a cargo
Persona que realice la prueba
Lugar donde se realice la prueba
Fecha de prueba
Nota Importante:
Las pruebas del carro realizadas en planta, complementan las pruebas realizadas en
nuestra empresa. El objetivo de realizar estas pruebas es asegurar que el carro sea
capaz de levantar la carga para la cual fue diseñado más un 20% como seguridad, no
debiendo observar grietas, fisuras que den señale un mal diseño estructural y no
hidráulico.
Preferentemente las pruebas debiesen ser realizadas fuera del carro para asegurar la
integridad del operador.
El área alrededor y bajo el carro para ser probado, debe ser aislada con el fin de evitar
accidentes.

8.2. - EQUIPMENT GENERAL INFORMACIÓN
Nombre : Carro Esperanza

Orden de trabajo Nº : 8756
Centro de costo : 28010
Digito : 3004315
Potencia : 50 HP
Caudal : 28 y 8 GPM
Presión : 2700 PSI
Capacidad Nominal : 24 T
Carrera del cilindro telescópico : 166”
Carrera del cilindro de freno : 4”
Capacidad del Winche hidráulico : 600 Kg.

Hoja 1 de 2
Evaluación Obedece
Descripción de los Componentes Referencia Revisado unid SI NO Comentarios
La válvula de bola debe estar
totalmente cerrada.
Compruebe que el nivel de aceite
este sobre el indicador (9)
Aceite que se debe utilizar, ISO 46
Compruebe que la válvula de
seguridad este abierta
Temperatura Mínima de trabajo 10 °C
Compruebe que la conexión
eléctrica este de adecuada, para
que la bomba gire con sentido
horario
Voltaje del Motor eléctrico 380 V
Comprobar fuente de energía
Compruebe que el movimiento de la
válvula manual este correcto
Compruebe fugas y estado de
mangueras
Comprobar que todas las
conexiones estén apretadas
Comprobar que las conexiones de
la válvula 14 con la válvula de
control de flujo 15 estén conectadas
de la misma manara como se indica
en el plano hidráulico
Compruebe que las conexión de las
válvulas de control de flujo 15 estén
conectadas con los cilindro de freno
16 como lo indica el plano hidráulico
la válvula cetop 7 estén conectadas
como indica el plano con respecto a
las reguladoras de flujo.
Comprobar que las conexiones
entre las válvulas de contra-balance
y las reguladoras de flujo estén
como lo indica el plano hidráulico.

Hoja 2 de 2
Evaluación Obedece
Comprobar las conexiones de las
válvulas contra-balance respecto a
las entradas de los cilindros
hidráulicos telescópicos
Asegurarse que los pilotajes de las
válvulas de contra-balance estén
conectados como lo indica el plano
hidráulico.
la bomba secundaria como la de la
primaria estén conectadas como
indica el plano hidráulico
Comprobar las conexiones del filtro
de retorno
Comprobar que el pórtico B de la
válvula manual este bloqueado

8.4. - PRUEBAS A REALIZAR SIN CARGA
Hoja 1 de 1
Evaluación Obedece
Carga aplicada 0 TON
Accione la válvula de los cilindros
de freno y regule la presión del
sistema a 2700 PSI
Accione la válvula direccional de los
cilindros de freno y regule la
velocidad de avance y retroceso de
estos.
Registrar la temperatura máxima
obtenida durante la prueba
Tiempo que duro la prueba
Se visualizaron movimientos
repentinos y extraños?

8.5. - PRUEBAS A REALIZAR CON CARGA AL 120%
Hoja 1 de 1
Evaluación Obedece
Carga aplicada 28.8 TON
Accione la válvula de los cilindros
de freno y regule la presión del
sistema a 2700 PSI
Registrar la temperatura máxima
obtenida durante la prueba
Tiempo que duro la prueba
Se visualizaron movimientos
repentinos y extraños?
8.6. - TENER PRECAUCION ANTES DE COMENZAR UNA NUEVA OPERACION
ANTES DE COMENZAR UNA NUEVA OPERACION SE

DEBE REPETIR ELPUNTO 4.2 DE FORMA COMPLETA

DEALER - SPARE PARTS
GEAR PUMPS AND MOTORS

"B" SERIES
GROUP 3.5
E0.18.0902.05.01 TM
3.5 PC PUMP GROUP 3.5
Description of the new product identification label
Based on the firm certification ISO 9001 - UNI EN 29001, section 4.8 (identification
and tracebility of the product), we have adopted a new identification label starting
from the 1st march 1995. Pls, see following example:
A Only for pumps 2PB and 2PZ

(except triple 2PB) the identification product
B is marked on the top of the pump body
as shown here below:
C D
E F G
SALAMI 09/02
MADE IN ITALY 4010998
A = Product short descritpion (eg. VD8A/FDD/U4G). 612271211 nr. 13
B = Customer part number. 2PB 19S B25 B5
C = Salami part number (eg. 6235 0025 0).
D = Production code (for Salami management) Product short description.
E = Rotation sense (only for pumps). Salami part number and progressive number of assembling.
Production code (for Salami management).
F = Production date (see data sheet here below)
Mounth and year of made: maybe in the future you can find this
G = Progressive number of assembling. type of production date in the label beside too.
Rotation sense.
1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
JANUARY 0A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8M 9M 0M 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M
FEBRUARY 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8N 9N 0N 1N 2N 3N 4N 5N
MARCH 0C 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8P 9P 0P 1P 2P 3P 4P 5P
APRIL 0D 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8Q 9Q 0Q 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 5Q
MAY 0E 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8R 9R 0R 1R 2R 3R 4R 5R
JUNE 0F 1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8S 9S 0S 1S 2S 3S 4S 5S
JULY 0G 1G 2G 3G 4G 5G 6G 7G 8T 9T 0T 1T 2T 3T 4T 5T
AUGUST 0H 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8U 9U 0U 1U 2U 3U 4U 5U
SEPTEMBER 0I 1I 2I 3I 4I 5I 6I 7I 8V 9V 0V 1V 2V 3V 4V 5V
OCTOBER 0J 1J 2J 3J 4J 5J 6J 7J 8Z 9Z 0Z 1Z 2Z 3Z 4Z 5Z
NOVEMBER 0K 1K 2K 3K 4K 5K 6K 7K 8X 9X 0X 1X 2X 3X 4X 5X
DECEMBER 0L 1L 2L 3L 4L 5L 6L 7L 8Y 9Y 0Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y
1
GROUP 3.5 3.5 PC PUMP
TIGHTENING TORQUE
OUR SCREWS AND TIE-RODS HAVE ALWAYS

HEATING TREATMENT OF BLACK BURNISHING
PUMP TYPE SCREW TYPE TORQUE
SIZE SERIE DIAMETER CLASS Nm
FOR SCREWS ZINC PLATED REDUCE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF 10%

B
1 M8 x1.25 8.8 20.5-25.5
SINGLE
B
1 M8 x1.25 10.9 33-35
MULTIPLE
B
2 M10x1.5 8.8 47-51
SINGLE
B
2 M10x1.5 10.9 50-55
MULTIPLE
B
2.5 M12 8.8 70-75
SINGLE
B
2.5 M12 10.9 75-80
MULTIPLE
TE 10.9
3 B M10 47-51
TCEI 12.9
3.5 C M12 8.8 74-85
SCREW 180
3 H M14 10.9 150-160
TIE ROD
2
Rotation changing instructions for pumps GROUP 2 - 2.5 - 3 - 3.5
Before starting, be sure that the pump is COVER

cleaned externally as well as the working
area to avoid that particles dangerous for
pump working can find their way into the
pump. DRIVING GEAR
Pump represented is aclockwise rotation
pump.
To obtain an anti_clockwise rotation read
carefully the following instructions. FLANGE
Picture "A" Picture "A"
1 - Loosen and fully unscrew the clamp BODY
bolts.
2 - Lay the pump on the working area in
order to have the mounting flange
turned upside. THRUST PLATE
3 - Coat the shaft extension with grease to
avoid damaging the shaft seal.
4 - Remove the flange and lay it on the
working area; Picture "B"
verify that the seal is correctly located BOLT
in the body seat.
Picture "B"
1 - Mark the position of the bushing and
eventually the thrust plate, relative to BUSHING
the body.
2 - Remove the bushing, thrust plate and
the driving gear taking care to avoid Picture "C"
driven gear axial shifts. DRIVEN GEAR
Picture "C"
1 - Draw out the driven gear from its housing,
taking care to avoid rear cover axial
shifts.
2 - Re-locate the driven gear in the position
previously occupied by the driving gear.
Picture "D"
1 - Re-locate the driving gear in the position Picture "D"
previously occupied by the driven gear.
Picture "E"
1 - Replace the bushing and thrust plate
taking care that:
- marks are located as on the picture
- surface containing the seal is visible
- seal and its protection are correctly
located Pict. "E"
Picture "F"
1 - Clean body and mounting flange refaced
surfaces.
2 - Verify that the two plugs are located in
the body.
3 - Refit the mounting flange, turned 180°
from its original position.
4 - Replace the clamp bolts and tighten
crosswise evenly to a torque of 40 - 45
Nm for 2PB, 2.5PB, 45 - 50 Nm for Pict. "F"
3PB, 3.5PB.
5 - Check that the shaft rotates freely.
6 - Mark on the flange the new direction of
rotation.
IMPORTANT: TO AVOID A PERFORMANCE LOSS DO NOT CHANGE MOTOR ROTATION

3
P48P3 - Clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation codes
[ 2.37 ]
f 60.3
cm3/rev - cu.in./rev
55/3.34
64/3.85
75/4.55
87/5.36
The pump shown

above is for
anti-clockwise
rotation
cm3/rev - cu.in./rev P48P3 P48P3
55/3.34 6114 1201 1 6114 1201 2

64/3.85 6114 1301 1 6114 1301 2
75/4.55 6114 1401 1 6114 1401 2
87/5.36 6114 7068 1 6114 7068 2
4
P49P4 Clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation codes
Version interchangeable with 4PB
75/4.55
87/5.36
98/6.03
The pump shown

above is for
anti-clockwise
rotation
cm3/rev - cu.in./rev P49P4 P49P4
75/4.55 6114 1501 1 6114 1501 2

87/5.36 6114 1601 1 6114 1601 2
98/6.03 6114 1701 1 6114 1701 2
5
Neutral bodies codes - Commercial code "N"
55/3.34
64/3.85
75/4.55
87/5.36
98/6.03
6
Code R114 9254 0 - Tandem kit for 3.5PC/3PB - P63R
M12 (8 X)
'Cover side' Plate (3,5PB)
7
Code R114 9259 0 - Tandem kit for 3.5PC/2PB - North America
M8 (4 X)
'Flange side' Plate
'Cover side' Plate
8
Code R114 9260 0 - Tandem kit for 3.5PC/3PB - North America
M10 (4X)
"Flange side" plate

"Cover side" plate
9
Seal kits
For the assembling drawings of this seal kits

you can find its in our web site: WWW.SALAMI.IT
Inside a protected area you must serch:
ASSEMBLING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A-B
A-B
3.5P/MC - PUMPS AND UNIDIRECTIONAL MOTORS

SEAL KIT CODES
SHAFT - FLANGE SEAL KITS SEAL KITS
TYPES CODES MATERIALS
48P3 R114 925 70 BUNA
48P3 R114 925 80 VITON
For the assembling drawings of this seal kits

you can find its in our web site: WWW.SALAMI.IT
Inside a protected area you must serch:
ASSEMBLING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A-B
A-B
3.5MRC -BIDIRECTIONAL MOTORS

SEAL KIT CODES
SHAFT - FLANGE SEAL KITS SEAL KITS
TYPES CODES MATERIALS
48P3 R114 925 60 BUNA
48P3 R114 925 61 VITON
10
TM
SALAMI spa
via Emilia Ovest 1006
41100 Modena Italy
telefono 059 387411
telefax 059 387500
export@salami.it - www.salami.it
SALAMI ITALIA srl

strada Pelosa 183
S. Pietro in Trigogna VI Italy
telefono 0444 240080
telefax 0444 240204
salami.italia@salami.it
SALAMI ESPAÑA
Barcelona
telefono 93-6665451
telefax 93-6667826
salami1@terra.es
SALAMI FRANCE
Lyon
telefono 04 78 80 99 41
telefax 04 78 80 36 69
e.pasian@wanadoo.fr
149 So. Chenango St. Ext.,

GREEN, NY 13778
Tel.: 001-607-6565702
Fax.:001-607-6565704
info@salamihydraulics.com
INDEX
MODEL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................... PAGE
Series 20 20 GPM Stack Type Directional Control Valve ..............................................V3
Series 20 20 GPM Solenoid Operated Work Section ................................................ V11
Model SV 12 GPM Stack Type Directional Control Valve ........................................... V13
Model SV 12 GPM Solenoid Operated Work Section ................................................ V24
Stack Valve Assembly Quotation Request Form ....................................... V30
CAD File Request Form ............................................................................ V31
RD5100 30 GPM Single Spool Mono-Block Directional Control Valve ................... V32
RD5200 25 GPM Two Spool Mono-Block Direction Control Valve .......................... V32
RD5300 25 GPM Three Spool Mono-Block Directional Control Valve ..................... V32
RD5000 Solenoid Operated 1, 2, or 3 Spool Mono-Block Valve .............................. V40
LVS 11 GPM Two Spool Mono-Block Loader Valve .......................................... V44
LVT 10 GPM Two Spool Mono-Block Loader Valve .......................................... V46
LVR 14 GPM Two Spool Mono-Block Loader Valve .......................................... V47
LS3000 25 GPM Single Spool Log Splitter Control Valve ...................................... V49
VALVES
FR10-3P Priority Flow Regulator 15 GPM ................................................................ V53
RD-100 30 GPM Adjustable Flow Control .............................................................. V54
RD-1900 30 GPM Adjustable Flow Control .............................................................. V54
RD-400 30 GPM Priority Divider, Fixed Flow.......................................................... V56
RD-500 30 GPM Priority Divider, Adjustable Flow ................................................. V56
RD-200 30 GPM Proportional Divider, Fixed Ratio ................................................ V58
RD-300 30 GPM Proportional Divider with Reverse Flow ...................................... V58
RD-500P 30 GPM Proportional Divider, Adjustable Ratio ........................................ V58
RD-1000S 30 GPM Sequence Valve .......................................................................... V58
RV 30 GPM Inline Relief Valve ........................................................................ V60
DRV 30 GPM Double Relief Valve ..................................................................... V60
RD-1800 20 GPM Ball/Spring Relief ........................................................................ V62
RD-900 30 GPM Single Selector Valve .................................................................. V62
MODEL SS 20 GPM Single Selector Valve .................................................................. V63
MODEL DS 40 GPM Double Selector Valve ................................................................. V64
RD-1400 30 GPM Lock Valve, Double Pilot Check .................................................. V65
RD-1600 20 GPM Pilot-Operated Check Valve ........................................................ V65
CATV 01-04-09-01
PRINCE MANUFACTURING CORPORATION/WORLD HEADQUARTERS • P.O. BOX 7000 • NORTH SIOUX CITY, SOUTH DAKOTA 57049-7000
V2 URL: www.princehyd.com • E-MAIL: prince@princehyd.com • PHONE (605) 235-1220 • FAX (605) 235-1082
O.E.M. CUSTOMER SERVICE: (605) 235-1220 • FAX (605) 235-1082 DISTRIBUTOR CUSTOMER SERVICE: PHONE (605) 235-1220 • FAX (605) 217-6300
Directional Control Valves
SECTIONAL BODY
VALVES
Series “20””
STANDARD FEATURES
• 1 -10 Work Sections • Extra Fine Spool Metering
• Power Beyond Capability • Reversible Handle
• Load Checks on Each Work Port • Hard Chrome Plated Spools
• A Float Section can be Installed in any Location in Valve Assembly
• Interchangeable Mounting With Other Popular “20” gpm Stack Valves
• Optional Work Section with Pilot Operated Checks
SPECIFICATIONS
Parallel or Tandem Circuit Foot Mounting
Pressure Rating Weight
Maximum Operating Pressure ........ 3500 psi Inlet Cover ............................ Approx 6 lbs
Maximum Tank Pressure ................ 500 psi Outlet Cover ...................... Approx 3.5 lbs
Work Section ...................... Approx 9 lbs PRINCE MFG. CORP.
4600 S. Lewis Blvd.
Nominal Flow Rating ...................... 20 gpm Maximum Operating Temp ........... 180°F Box 537
Please Refer to Pressure Drop Charts. Sioux City, IA 51102
Phone (712) 277-4061
Allowable Pressure Loss thru Valve Filtration: Fluid cleanliness should meet
Determines the Maximum flow. the ISO 4406 17/14 level. As a minimum,
10 micron filtration is recommended.
CATV 01-04-09-01
URL: www.princehyd.com • E-MAIL: prince@princehyd.com • PHONE (605) 235-1220 • FAX (605) 235-1082
V3
ORDERING INFORMATION:
The following is a listing of valve sections available from stock on a standard basis.
STANDARD SECTIONS AVAILABLE:
STANDARD INLET SECTIONS
ALL SECTIONS HAVE BOTH TOP AND SIDE INLET AND TANK PORTS
PART NO. RELIEF TYPE AND SETTING PORT SIZE
2012A NO RELIEF #12 SAE ORB
2012C SHIM ADJUSTABLE 1351-1750 PSI, SET AT 1750 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE ORB
2012D SHIM ADJUSTABLE 1751-2200 PSI, SET AT 2200 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE ORB
2012E SHIM ADJUSTABLE 2201-3000 PSI, SET AT 2500 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE ORB
2012G ADJUSTABLE 1351-1750 PSI, SET AT 1750 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE ORB
2012H ADJUSTABLE 1750-2200 PSI, SET AT 2200 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE ORB
2012J ADJUSTABLE 2201-3000 PSI, SET AT 2500 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE ORB
STANDARD PARALLEL CIRCUIT WORK SECTIONS

ALL WORK SECTIONS HAVE #10 SAE ORB PORTS, LOAD CHECKS, AND STANDARD LEVER HANDLES.
MODELS WITH PORT RELIEFS ARE SHIM ADJUSTABLE.
PART NO. SPOOL TYPE AND ACTION PORT RELIEFS
20P1AA1AA 3-WAY SINGLE ACTING W/SPRING CENTER PLUGGED
20P1BA1AA 4-WAY DOUBLE ACTING W/SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS BLOCKED IN NEUTRAL) PLUGGED
20P1BB1AA 4-WAY DOUBLE ACTING W/3 POSITION DETENT (WORK PORTS BLOCKED IN NEUTRAL) PLUGGED
20P1CA1AA 4-WAY FREE FLOW MOTOR W/SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS OPEN TO TANK IN NEUTRAL) PLUGGED
20P1CB1AA 4-WAY FREE FLOW MOTOR W/3 POSITION DETENT (WORK PORTS OPEN TO TANK IN NEUTRAL) PLUGGED
20P1DD1AA 4-WAY 4 POSITION FLOAT W/SPRING CENTER AND FLOAT DETENT PLUGGED
20P1BA1DD 4-WAY DOUBLE ACTING W/SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS BLOCKED IN NEUTRAL) 2200 PSI
20P1CA1DD 4-WAY FREE FLOW MOTOR W/SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS OPEN TO TANK IN NEUTRAL) 2200 PSI
20P1DD1DD 4-WAY 4 POSITION FLOAT W/SPRING CENTER AND FLOAT DETENT 2200 PSI
20L1CA1 4-WAY 3 POSITION W/SPRING CENTER AND P.O. CHECKS NONE
STANDARD TANDEM CIRCUIT WORK SECTIONS

20T1BA1AA 4-WAY DOUBLE ACTING W/ SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS BLOCKED IN NEUTRAL) PLUGGED
20T1BA1DD 4-WAY DOUBLE ACTING W/ SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS BLOCKED IN NEUTRAL) 2200 PSI
VALVES
20T1CA1AA 4-WAY FREE FLOW MOTOR W/ SPRING CENTER (WORK PORTS OPEN TO TANK IN NEUTRAL) PLUGGED
STANDARD OUTLET SECTIONS

ALL SECTIONS HAVE SIDE OUTLET
PART NO. EXHAUST OPTION PORT SIZE
20E21 OPEN CENTER OUTLET W/ CONVERSION PLUG #12 SAE ORB
20E22 POWER BEYOND OUTLET W/ #10 SAE POWER BEYOND PORT #12 SAE ORB
20E23 CLOSED CENTER OUTLET #12 SAE ORB
TIE ROD KITS

PART NO. WORK SECTIONS PART NO. WORK SECTIONS
TIE ROD TORQUE 660402001 1 SECTION 660402006 6 SECTION
30-32 ft-lbs 660402002 2 SECTION 660402007 7 SECTION
660402003 3 SECTION 660402008 8 SECTION
660402004 4 SECTION 660402009 9 SECTION
660402005 5 SECTION 660402010 10 SECTION
HARDWARE AND SEAL KITS PORT

PORTRELIEF
RELIEFCARTRIDGES
CARTRIDGES INLET
INLETRELIEF
RELIEFCARTRIDGES
CARTRIDGES
660190003 SPRING CENTER KIT 660290002 NO RELIEF LOAD CHECK PLUG 660290001 NO RELIEF PLUG
660190004 3 POSITION DETENT KIT 660290301 SHIM ADJ. 500-1350 PSI 660290101 SHIM ADJ. 500-1350 PSI
660190005 FRICTION DETENT KIT SET AT 1350 PSI SET AT 1350 PSI
660190001 VERTICAL HANDLE, LINK & PINS 660290303 SHIM ADJ.1351 -1750 PSI 660290103 SHIM ADJ.1351 -1750 PSI
660190002 STD. HANDLE, LINK & PINS SET AT 1750 PSI SET AT 1750 PSI
660190006 COMPLETE VERT. HANDLE KIT 660290305 SHIM ADJ.1751 -2200 PSI 660290105 SHIM ADJ.1751 -2200 PSI
660190007 COMPLETE STD. HANDLE KIT SET AT 2200 PSI SET AT 2200 PSI
660290004 POWER BEYOND PLUG #10 SAE 660290307 SHIM ADJ. 2201-3000 PSI 660290107 SHIM ADJ. 2201-3000 PSI
660290005 CLOSED CENTER PLUG SET AT 2500 PSI SET AT 2500 PSI
660290006 OPEN CENTER OUTLET PLUG 660290401 ADJUSTABLE 500-1350 PSI 660290201 ADJUSTABLE 500-1350 PSI
660585001 WORK SECTION SEAL KIT SET AT 1350 PSI SET AT 1350 PSI
660585002 INLET SECTION SEAL KIT 660290403 ADJUSTABLE 1351 -1750 PSI 660290203 ADJUSTABLE 1351 -1750 PSI
660585003 OUTLET SECTION SEAL KIT SET AT 1750 PSI SET AT 1750 PSI
660585004 SEAL KIT 0-RINGS BETWEEN 660290405 ADJUSTABLE 1751-2200 PSI 660290205 ADJUSTABLE 1751-2200 PSI
SECTION ONLY. SET AT 2200 PSI SET AT 2200 PSI
672000201 .006 SHIM FOR RELIEF 660290407 ADJUSTABLE 2201-3000 PSI 660290207 ADJUSTABLE 2201-3000 PSI
672000202 .010 SHIM FOR RELIEF SET AT 2500 PSI RELIEF SET AT 2500 PSI RELIEF
672000203 .018 SHIM FOR RELIEF
672000205 .041 SHIM FOR RELIEF RELIEF CARTRIDGES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE CARTRIDGES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE
WITH STAINLESS STEEL RELIEF SPRINGS. STAINLESS STEEL RELIEF SPRINGS.
CATV 01-04-09-01
SPECIAL SECTIONS AVAILABLE: Valves other than standard models listed can be made to order. Use
order code Matrix below to generate a model number that meets your
requirements. If you prefer, contact your Sales Representative with your
specific requirements and a model number will be assigned for you. This
model number can then be used for future orders. A minimum order
quantity will apply to special valves. Please consult Sales Representative.
WORK SECTION 20XXXXXXX

WORK SECTION TYPE PORT RELIEF “B”
P-STANDARD PARALLEL
T-TANDEM CENTER PORT RELIEF “A”
L-PARALLEL WITH BUILT IN A - NO RELIEF
PILOT OPERATED CHECKS** B - SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 500-1350 PSI SET AT 1350
C - SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1351-1750 PSI SET AT 1750
PORT SIZE D - SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1751-2200 PSI SET AT 2200
1. #10 SAE (7/8-14 THREAD) E - SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 2201-3000 PSI SET AT 2500
2. #8 SAE (3/4-16 THREAD F - ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 500-1350 PSI SET AT 1350*
3. #12 SAE (1 1/16-12 THREAD) G - ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1351-1750 PSI SET AT 1750*
4. 1/2 NPTF (2000 PSI MAX) H - ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1751-2200 PSI SET AT 2200*
5. 3/8 NPTF (2000 PSI MAX) J - ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 2201-3000 PSI SET AT 2500*
SPOOL TYPE K - ANTI-CAVITATION CHECK
L - PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV SHIM ADJ 500-1350 PSI SET AT 1350
A - 3 WAY 3 POSITION M- PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV SHIM ADJ 1351-1750 PSI SET AT 1750
B - 4 WAY 3 POSITION N - PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV SHIM ADJ 1751-2200 PSI SET AT 2200
C - 4 WAY 3 POSITION FREE FLOW MOTOR R - PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV SHIM ADJ 2201-3000 PSI SET AT 2500
D - 4 WAY 4 POSITION FLOAT S - PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV ADJUSTABLE 500-1350 PSI SET AT 1350*
E - 3 WAY 3 POSITION FREE FLOW MOTOR T - PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV ADJUSTABLE 1351-1750 PSI SET AT 1750*
SPOOL ACTIONS W- PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV ADJUSTABLE 1751-2200 PSI SET AT 2200*
Y - PORT RELIEF/ANTI-CAV ADJUSTABLE 2201-3000 PSI SET AT 2500*
A - SPRING CENTER TO NEUTRAL
B - 3 POSITION DETENT *ADJUSTABLE PORT RELIEF CARTRIDGES CANNOT
C - FRICTION DETENT BE USED ON THE “A” PORT END OF WORK SECTION
D - FLOAT DETENT WHEN THE STANDARD LEVER HANDLE IS USED
HANDLE OPTIONS BECAUSE OF INTERFERENCE
1 - STANDARD LEVER HANDLE*
VALVES
2 - LESS HANDLE ONLY FOR WORK PORT RELIEF SETTING OTHER THAN STANDARD
3 - LESS COMPLETE HANDLE
20P1BA1DH-18-20
4 - VERTICAL LEVER HANDLE* “B” PORT RELIEF PRESSURE IN HUNDREDS
*LEVERS ARE COATED WITH BLACK RUBBER EXAMPLE: 20=2000 PSI
7 - BLANK FOR OPTIONAL JOYSTICK HANDLE “A” PORT RELIEF PRESSURE IN HUNDREDS
** L WORK SECTION REQUIRES SPOOL TYPE C & PORT RELIEFS NOT AVAILABLE. EXAMPLE: 18=1800 PSI
INLET SECTION 20lXX - XXXX OUTLET SECTION 20EXX

INLET TYPE OUTLET TYPE
l - STANDARD INLET E - STANDARD OUTLET
PORT SIZE PORT SIZE
1. #10 SAE (7/8-14 THREAD)
1. #10 SAE (7/8-14 THREAD)
2. #12 SAE (1 1/16-12 THREAD)
2. #12 SAE (1 1/16-12 THREAD)
3. 3/4 NPTF (2000 PSI MAX)
3. 3/4 NPTF (2000 PSI MAX)
RELIEF OPTION EXHAUST OPTIONS
A- NO RELIEF
B- SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 500-1350 PSI 1-STANDARD OPEN CENTER OUTLET
RELIEF WITH CONVERSION PLUG
C- SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1351-1750 PSI SETTINGS: THE
D- SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1751-2200 PSI 2-POWER BEYOND OUTLET WITH
LAST FOUR #10 SAE POWER BEYOND PORT
E- SHIM ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 2201-3000 PSI DIGITS
F- ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 500-1350 PSI 3-CLOSED CENTER OUTLET o
REPRESENT
G- ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1351-1750 PSI THE RELIEF o
H- ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 1751-2200 PSI Often used with no relief. Review application
SETTING IN PSI
J - ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 2201-3000 PSI
K- ADJUSTABLE RELIEF 3001-3500
VALVE ASSEMBLIES
The Series 20 sectional body directional control valve can be ordered as separate sections as outlined or as a complete factory tested
assembly. This will need to be specified with each order. An assembly model number will be assigned at the time of the order. This assembly
number can then be used for future orders.
ASSEMBLY MODEL NUMBER 20A - X X X X
XXXX = Sequence of Numbers. This number will be assigned to final valve to be assembled and tested at the factory. Each new order or
quote will be assigned a new assembly model number. Please use quotation request form the end of the SV Section.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V5
CROSS SECTION OF 20P1BA1DA PARALLEL WORK SECTION
VALVES
SPOOLS AND SPOOL ATTACHMENTS
CATV 01-04-09-01
CROSS SECTION OF TANDEM WORK SECTION AND LOCK SECTION
THE LOCK SECTION BODY A WORK PORT THE CASTING NUMBER

B WORK PORT A WORK PORT
HAS AN “L” ON THE LEFT B WORK PORT “C–638” IS ON THE
SIDE OF THE “B” WORK RIGHT SIDE OF WORK
THE TANDEM SECTION SECTION BODY
THE CASTING NUMBER PORT
BODY HAS AN “T” ON
THE LEFT SIDE OF “C–637” IS ON THE
THE “B” WORK PORT RIGHT SIDE OF WORK
SECTION BODY
TANDEM SECTION LOCK SECTION
COMBINED PARALLEL/
MODEL 20P PARALLEL CIRCUIT MODEL 20T TANDEM CIRCUITS
TANDEM CIRCUITS
Parallel circuit construction is the most Tandem circuit construction is also referred to Parallel and tandem circuit work sections can
common. When any one of the spools in a as priority circuit. When the spool of a section be combined in the same valve bank. Below
valve bank is shifted it blocks off the open is shifted, oil is cut off to all downstream the 1st and last sections are parallel and the
center passage. The oil then flows into the sections. Thus the section nearest to the inlet 2nd is tandem. The 1st parallel section has
parallel circuit core making oil available to all has priority over the other sections in the priority over the other two. The 2nd and 3rd
spools. If more than one spool is fully shifted valve bank. If more than one spool is fully sections are in parallel with each other. If the
then oil will go to the section with the lowest shifted all the oil will go to the section nearest spool of the 1st section is shifted it will cut off
pressure requirements. It is possible, to the inlet. Metering the up stream section will oil to the other two. If the spools of the 2nd and
however, to meter flow to the spool with the allow two sections to operate at the same 3rd section are both shifted oil will go to the
least load and power two unequal loads. The time. The schematic below shows a three one with the least resistance. It should be
schematic below shows a three section section tandem circuit stack valve. noted that it is the section just prior to the
parallel circuit stack valve. tandem section that has priority, not the
tandem section. Further if a parallel section is
placed just after a tandem, the two sections will
be in a parallel.
VALVES
LOAD CHECK OPEN CENTER APPLICATIONS CLOSED CENTER APPLICATIONS
Each work port of the Series 20 stack valve The standard Series 20 stack valve is open The Series 20 stack valve can be converted to
has a separate load check. The load check center. When the spools are in neutral closed center by adding the closed center plug
prevents the fall of a cylinder as the spool is hydraulic oil is directed from the inlet to the to the outlet section. This blocks off the open
shifted. It also prevents the backflow of oil from outlet (or power beyond) through the open center core when the spools are in neutral.
the work port to the inlet. The pump must build center core. Moving one or more spools closes These systems often use a variable displace-
up enough pressure to overcome the pressure off the open center core and directs oil to the ment pressure compensated pump that limits
on the work port caused by the weight of the work ports. Open center systems most often the maximum pressure. When spools are in
load before the cylinder can move. contain fixed displacement pumps like The neutral system pressure is maintained at inlet
Prince SP series gear pumps. of the valve. A relief is normally not required or
PLEASE NOTE that the load check has must be set at a higher pressure than the
nothing to do with how well the valve will hold PLEASE NOTE that the maximum pressure in pump compensator.
up a cylinder with the spool in neutral. The load an open center system is controlled by a relief
check is functional only when the spool is valve. The Series 20 inlet sections are available PLEASE NOTE that this closed center option
shifted. with a built in inlet relief for this purpose. does not provide for the drain off of standby
spool leakage. This can allow a very small
amount of oil to enter the work ports when in
neutral.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V7
INLET COVER DIMENSIONS WORK SECTIONS DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONAL DATA OUTLET COVER DIMENSIONS

VALVES
NUMBER OF WORK SECTIONS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A 2.50 4.25 6.00 7.75 9.50 11.25 13.00 14.75 16.50 18.25
B 4.88 6.63 8.38 10.13 11.88 13.63 15.38 17.13 18.88 20.63
CATV 01-04-09-01
WORK PORT RELIEF CARTRIDGES INLET RELIEF CARTRIDGES
OPTION K ANTI-CAVITATION CHECK OPTION A NO RELIEF
This option allows oil to be drawn from the tank When no main inlet relief is required the no relief
core into the work port if there is a vacuum on the plug is installed. All inlet sections have the relief
work port. This vacuum would be caused by a
overrunning motor or cylinder. The check will be cavity machined so a inlet relief can be installed in
open whenever the pressure in the tank core is the field.
higher than that in the work port. OPTIONS B, C, D, AND E, SHIM ADJUSTABLE INLET RELIEF
OPTIONS B, C, D, AND E, SHIM ADJUSTABLE PORT RELIEF These options provide for an internally shim
adjustable main inlet relief. The relief is a h
A port relief can be installed to limit the pressure ydraulically dampened differential poppet
at the work port to less than the system design. This provides for smooth quiet
pressure. Also, it can be installed to provide operation in a relief that is moderately tolerant
spike pressure protection when the spool is in to contamination. The pressure of these reliefs
the neutral position. The pressure of these can be changed, within the specified range, by changing shims.
reliefs can be changed by changing shims. This relief is also available with stainless steel relief springs, consult
OPTIONS F, G, H, AND J, ADJUSTABLE PORT RELIEF factory.
This is the same

differential poppet type OPTIONS F, G, H, AND J, ADJUSTABLE RELIEF
relief as above but
externally adjustable This is the same relief as
within the specified above except it is externally
range. adjustable, within the
specified range.
OUTLET SECTION OPTIONS HANDLE OPTIONS

NOTE: HANDLES ARE COATED
WITH BLACK RUBBER
VALVES
OPTION 1 STANDARD OPEN CENTER WITH
CONVERSION PLUG
This is the standard outlet option. This option allows for conversion in
the field for power beyond or closed center applications. When the
spools are in neutral the inlet is unloaded to tank.
OPTION 3 CLOSED CENTER OUTLET
This option provides for closed center operation. This is typically used
with a variable displacement pressure compensated pump or in a
system with an unloading valve. When the spools are in neutral the inlet
port is blocked.
OPTION 2 POWER BEYOND WITH #10 SAE BEYOND PORT
This option provides for a high pressure power beyond port. This would
be used if a valve is to be added downstream. The outlet must be
connected to tank. When the spools are in neutral the inlet is con-
nected to power beyond port.
SERIES 20 COMBINATION 3 WAY AND 20TM 3 A A 1 E A - X X X X

COMBINED FLOW MID-INLET SECTION PORT SIZE*
SPOOL ACTION* DIGITS
HANDLE OPTIONS * SPECIFY A
NON-STANDARD
MID-INLET RELIEF RELIEF
RELIEF TYPE STANDARD SETTING OPTION NO. PRESSURE IN
PSI. LEAVE
NO RELIEF A
BLANK FOR
1350 PSI @ 10 GPM B STANDARD
SHIM ADJUSTABLE 1750 PSI @ 10 GPM C SETTING.
2200 PSI @ 10 GPM D
2500 PSI @ 10 GPM E
ADJUSTABLE 1350 PSI @ 10 GPM F WORK PORT
(not available with 1750 PSI @ 10 GPM G RELIEF *
handle option 1) 2200 PSI @ 10 GPM H
2500 PSI @ 10 GPM J
*See Series 20 Tandem Center work section order code for additional options.
Description: This section acts as a combination mid-inlet and 3 way 3 position section. The
mid-inlet provides an inlet port for a second pump mid stream in the stack valve. The A port
is the mid-inlet port and provides combined flow for this section and any downstream
sections. The B port and the rest of the section function the same as a 3 way 3 position
section. When shifted any upstream sections take priority of the main inlet flow over
*See Series 20 Tandem Center work section for downstream sections. Both an inlet relief and a mid-inlet relief are required to provide relief
dimensional data.
protection when both upstream and downstream sections are shifted.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V9
JOYSTICK HANDLE FOR SERIES 20
options 1 through 4). The drawing to the left shows two

joysticks with offset handles installed on a six section valve.
6
A typical handle to spool movement pattern is shown.
SECT
Different patterns are also available. The Joystick handle
5
SECT
can be used with standard three position spools or with
4
SECT
four position float spools. If work port reliefs are required
3
SECT
on the joystick end of a section, the relief cartridges must
2
be the shim adjustable type. When two joysticks are
SECT
installed on the same valve assembly, it is recommended
SECT 1
that there be two standard section between them to prevent
handle interference.
When ordering a valve assembly, please refer to the following
This is a special handle for the SERIES 20 stack valve
part numbers and indicate which sections the handle is to
that allows the spools of two adjacent sections to be
be installed on. The part numbers refer to the complete
operated by one common handle. The spools can be
joystick assembly required to control two valve sections.
operated independently or simultaneously depending on
Use the same part numbers to order kits for field installation.
handle movement. The option is typically used on spring
center to neutral sections. Normally, the handle is installed
at the factory on sections ordered with handle option 7. JOYSTICK ASSEMBLY W/ STRAIGHT HANDLE:
However, the handle can also be installed in the field on PART NUMBER 660190016
valves originally equipped with standard handles (handle JOYSTICK ASSEMBLY W/ OFFSET HANDLE:
PART NUMBER 660190017
TEST DATA
VALVES
PSI
PSI
GPM GPM
ONE WAY WORK PORT RESTRICTOR FOR 20

SERIES SECTIONS
This restrictor will restrict oil in one direction and allow
free flow in the opposite direction. This restrictor
consists of an orifice plate that simply drops into the #8
SAE or #10 SAE work port of a 20P, 20T, or 20L work
section.
PSI
Restricted Free
FlDW Flow
ORDERING INFORMATION
HEX BRASS RESTRICTOR #8 670805XXX
GPM HEX BRASS RESTRICTOR #10 670811000

The last three digits of part number
Oil 140 SUS at 110 degrees F. The pressure drop curves are the orifice size in thousandths of an inch.
are representative, but the actual pressure drop will vary
EXAMPLE: 670805062 .62 ORIFICE
some from valve to valve. More detailed test data is 670805125 .125 ORIFICE
available upon request. 670805000 NO ORIFICE
CATV 01-04-09-01
SERIES “20” SOLENOID OPERATED WORK SECTION
SPECIFICATIONS:
1-9 SECTIONS
20 GPM
INTERNAL PILOT
INTERNAL DRAIN
VALVES
CATV 01-04-09-01
V11
SERIES “20” SOLENOID OPERATED WORK SECTION
The Solenoid Operated Series 20 Work Section allows remote electrical on-off or manual control. The Solenoid Operated
Section contains two, 3 way-2 position solenoid cartridge valves and a pilot operated piston attached to the main control
spool. When both solenoids are de-energized both sides of the pilot piston are open to tank pressure and the spool
remains spring centered. When solenoid “A” is energized, pilot pressure is applied to one side of the pilot piston causing
the spool to shift from the neutral position to work port “A”. When solenoid “B” is energized, pilot pressure is applied to
the other side of the pilot piston causing the spool to shift to work port “B”. Internal pilot lines provide pilot pressure to the
solenoid actuator. Pilot pressure to initiate spool shift is generated by a “Pressure Build-Up Valve” that is installed in the
Utility Section, which must be installed between the last section and the outlet cover, (see Order Code). Two versions of
the Pressure Build-up Valve are offered. Options 1 & 2 supply approximately 300 PSI pilot pressure to the solenoid
actuator. Load induced pressure is required to complete the spool shift and hold the spool in the shifted position. For
over center or light load applications a restrictor installed in the work port or line may be required. Any manual sections
must be upstream of any solenoid sections in the stock valve assembly. Consult your sales representative for your
application.
SOLENOID OPERATED WORK SECTION

20XXXXXXX-SXXX
WORK SECTION TYPE

P - Standard Parallel
COIL VOLTAGE & TERMINATION *
S12Q, 12 VDC Double Spade
PORT SIZE S12L, 12 VDC Double Wire
1. #10 SAE (7/8-14 THREAD) S12H, 12 VDC DIN 43650
2. #8 SAE (3/4-16 THREAD) S12W, 12VDC Weather Pack®
3. #12 SAE (1 1/16-12 THREAD) S24Q, 24 VDC Double Spade
4. 1/2 NPTF (2000 PSI MAX) S24L, 24 VDC Double Wire
S24H, 24 VDC DIN 43650
SPOOL TYPE S11C, 120 VAC Conduit
VALVES
A - 3 - Way 3-Position S11H, 120 VAC DIN 43650

B - 4 - Way 3-Position
C - 4 - Way 3 Position Free Flow Motor
PORT RELIEF “B” OPTION
SPOOL ACTION A - Relief Cavity Plugged
A - Spring Center B - Shim Adjustable Relief 500-1350 PSI Set at 1350
C - Shim Adjustable Relief 1351-1750 PSI Set at 1750
HANDLE OPTION D - Shim Adjustable Relief 1751-2200 PSI Set at 2200
5. Solenoid Operated Only (No Lever) E - Shim Adjustable Relief 2201-3000 PSI Set at 2500
6. Solenoid Operated With Manual Lever
PORT RELIEF “A” OPTION
A - Relief Cavity Plugged
B - Shim Adjustable Relief 500-1350 PSI Set at 1350
C - Shim Adjustable Relief 1351-1750 PSI Set at 1750
D - Shim Adjustable Relief 1751-2200 PSI Set at 2200
E - Shim Adjustable Relief 2201-3000 PSI Set at 2500
*See page V29 for coil details.
UTILITY SECTION
20UX - XXX
UTILITY TYPE
U - Standard Utility COIL VOLTAGE & TERMINATION*
Omit For Options 2 thru 5
12Q, 12 VDC Double Spade
UTILITY OPTION 12L, 12 VDC Double Wire
1. Solenoid On-Off Press. Build-Up Valve 12H. 12 VDC DIN 43650
2. Mechanical Continuous On Press. Build-up Valve 12W 12VDC Weather Pack ®
3. Closed Center Utility Section 24Q, 24 VDC Double Spade
4. Power Beyond Utility with #10 SAE Power Beyond Port 24L, 24 VDC Double Wire
5. External Pilot Supply Utility 24 VDC DIN 43650
11C, 120 VAC Conduit
11H, 120 VAC DIN 43650
CATV 01-04-09-01
SECTIONAL BODY
VALVES
Model SV
STANDARD FEATURES
• 1-10 Sections Per Valve Bank • Differential Poppet Style Relief, Adjustable
• Load Checks On Each Section from 1500 to 3000 psi (Also available in Low Pressure
• Hard Chrome Plated Spools Version Adjustable from 500 to 1500 psi)
• Compact Construction • Power Beyond Capability
• Enhanced Metering Section Available in • Reversible Handle
both the High and Low Sections • Mid-Inlet and Lock Valve Section available
• Flow Control Inlet
SPECIFICATIONS
Parallel or Series Circuit Construction Foot Mounting
Pressure Rating Maximum Operating Temp. ...................... 180°F
Maximum Operating Pressure ......... 3000 psi Weight Per Section
Maximum Tank Pressure ................... 500 psi Inlet Section ............................... Approx 3.75 Ibs
Nominal Flow Rating ........................... 12 GPM Outlet Section ........................... Approx 3.75 Ibs.
Refer to Pressure Drop Curves. Work Section (Standard) ............ Approx 5.50 Ibs.
Filtration: Fluid cleanliness should meet the ISO Work Section (High) .................. Approx 8.00 Ibs.
4406 17/14 level. As a minimum, 10 micron filtration
is recommended
CATV 01-04-09-01
V13
INLET SECTIONS ALL HAVE BOTH TOP AND SIDE INLET PORTS
PART NO. RELIEF TYPE AND SETTING PORT SIZE
SVI21 No Relief #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
SVI24 Adjustable Low Pressure Relief Set at 1000 PSI #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
SVI15 Adjustable High Pressure Relief Set At 2000 PS #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD)
SVI25 Adjustable High Pressure Relief Set at 2000 PSI #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
WORK SECTIONS ALL HAVE #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD) PORTS, LOAD CHECK AND STANDARD LEVER HANDLE
PART NO. SPOOL TYPE AND ACTION
SVW1AA1 3-Way Single Acting w/ Spring Center
SVW1BA1 4-Way Double Acting w/ Spring Center (Work Ports Blocked in Neutral)
SVW1BB1 4-Way Double Acting w/ 3 Position Detent (Work Ports Blocked in Neutral)
SVW1CA1 4-Way Motor Spool w/ Spring Center (Work Ports Open to Tank in Neutral
SVW1CB1 4-Way Motor Spool w/ 3 Position Detent (Work Ports Open to Tank in Neutral)
SVW1DD1 4-Way 4 Position Float w/ Spring Center and Float Detent
SVL1CA1 4-Way Spool w/ Spring Center (with Pilot Operated Checks on Both Work Ports)
SVM1ES1 4-Way Meter Spool w/ Spring Center (Work Ports Blocked in Neutral)
PORT RELIEF WORK SECTIONS ALL HAVE #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD) PORTS, LOAD CHECK AND STANDARD LEVER
HANDLE. MODELS WITH RELIEF FACTORY SET AT 2000 PSI AT 3 GPM.
SVH1BA1AA 4-Way Double Acting w/ Spring Center Port Relief Plugged
SVH1BA1GG 4-Way Double Acting w/ Spring Center Adjustable 1500-3000 PSI
SVH1DD1AA 4-Way 4 Position Float w/ Spring Center and Float Detent Port Relief Plugged
SVH1DD1BB 4-Way 4 Position Float w/ Spring Center and Float Detent Shim Adjustable 1500-3000 PSI
SVR1ES1AA 4-Way Meter Spool w/ Spring Center Port Relief Plugged
SVR1ES1GG 4-Way Meter Spool w/ Spring Center Adjustable 1500-3000 PSI
SVS1GA1GG 4-Way Double Acting Series w/ Spring Center Adjustable 1500-3000 PSI
SVS1GA1AA 4-Way Double Acting Series w/ Spring Center Port Relief Plugged
OUTLET SECTIONS ALL HAVE BOTH TOP AND SIDE OUTLET PORTS
PART NO. EXHAUST OPTIONS PORT SIZE
SVE11 Open Center Outlet w/ Conversion Plug #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD)
SVE21 Open Center Outlet w/ Conversion Plug #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
VALVES
SVE22 Power Beyond Outlet w/ #8 SAE Beyond Port #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
SVE23 Closed Center Outlet #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
SVE26 Open Center Outlet Pressure Build-up Valve #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
SVE27 Power Beyond Pressure Build-up Valve #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD)
TIE ROD KITS PART NO. PART NO.
TIE ROD TORQUE 660401001 1 Section* 660401006 6 Sections*
150in-lbs ± 6in-lbs 660401002 2 Sections* 660401007 7 Sections*
(12 1/2 ft-lbs ±1/2) 660401003 3 Sections* 660401008 8 Sections*
660401004 4 Sections* 660401008 9 Sections*
660401005 5 Sections* 660401010 10 Sections*
*Number of Work Sections
SPECIAL INLET AND OUTLET SECTIONS AVAILABLE: Sections other than standard models listed can
be made to order. Use order code Matrix below to generate a model number that meets your requirements. If you prefer,
contact your Sales Representative with your specific requirements and a model number will be assigned for you. This model
number can be used for future orders. A minimum order quantity will apply to special valves. Please consult Sales Representative.
All inlet sections have All outlet sections have

INLET SECTIONS top and side inlets. OUTLET SECTION top and side outlets.
SVIXX-XXXX SVEXX
EXHAUST OPTION
RELIEF SETTING (in PSI) PORT SIZE 1. Std. Open Center Outlet
PORT SIZE w/Conversion Plug
1. #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD) RELIEF OPTION 1. #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD)
2. Power Beyond Outlet
2. #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD) 1. No Relief 2. #10 SAE ORB (7/8-14 THD) w/#8 SAE Beyond Port
4. Adj. Low Pressure 500-1500 PSI 3. Closed Center Outlet0
5. Adj. High Pressure 1500-3000 PSI 6 Open Center Outlet Pressure
6. Plastic Plug in relief cavity. Build-up
Use only when cartridge is to be 7. Power Beyond Pressure Build-up
installed at a later date. #8 SAE Beyond Port
0
Often used with no relief. Review application
VALVE ASSEMBLIES
The Model SV sectional body directional control valve can be ordered as separate sections or as a complete factory tested assembly. This will
need to be specified with each order. An assembly number will be assigned at the time of the order. This assembly number can then be used for
future orders.
ASSEMBLY MODEL NUMBER SVA-XXXX

XXXX = Sequence of Numbers. This number will be assigned to final valve to be assembled and tested at the factory. Each new order or quote
will be assigned a new assembly model number. Please use quotation sheet at the end of SV section.
CATV 01-04-09-01
SPECIAL WORK SECTIONS AVAILABLE: Work Sections other than standard models listed can be made to order. Use
requirements. If you prefer, contact your Sales Representative with your
specific requirements and a model number will be assigned for you. This
model number can be used for future orders. A minimum order quantity will
apply to special valves. Please consult Sales Representative.
WORK SECTIONS SV X X X X X
SECTION TYPE HANDLE OPTION
W-Std. Work Section 1. Standard Lever Handle
M-Metering Work Section2 2. Less Handle Only
L-Work Section with Double 3. Less Complete Handle Assembly
P.O. Checks1 4. Adjustable Handle
5. Tang Spool End Only
PORT SIZE 6. Clevis Spool End Only
1. #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD) 7. Vertical Handle
2. #6 SAE ORB (9/16-18 THD) 8. Straight Handle
9. Blank for Optional Joystick Handle
SPOOL TYPE 11. Enclosed Handle
A-3-Way 3-Position 12. Extended Enclosed Handle
B-4-Way 3-Position
C-4-Way 3 Position Motor SPOOL ACTION
D-4-Way 4 Position Float A-Spring Center (SVW & SVL only)
E-4-Way 3 Position Metering (SVM only) B-3 Position Detent
F-3-Way 3 Position Metering (SVM only) C-Friction Detent
1. Lock Valve Section available only with D-Spring Center w/Float Detent (SVW only)
Spool Option C. E-Light Spring Center
2. Metering Section available only with F-2 Position Detent Neutral and Out (No IN Position)
Spool Options E or F. G-2 Position (Center and Spool Out)-Spring Loaded
to Spool Out (Pressure to B Port) Position
PORT RELIEF WORK SECTIONS H-2 Position (Center and Spool ln)-Spring Loaded
to Spool In (Pressure to A Port) Position
SVXXXXXXX J-S/C with MicroSwitch Bracket 2-Position*
SECTION TYPE K-S/C with MicroSwitch Bracket 1 -Position.* *MicroSwitch not provided.
H-Port Relief Section (activates on spool out only)
R-Port Relief Metering Section2 M-Spring Center Detent In
S-Series Circuit Port Relief Section N-Spring Center Detent Out
VALVES
S-Spring Center (SVM only)
PORT SIZE
1.#8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD) PORT RELIEF “B” OPTION
2.#6 SAE ORB (9/16-18 THD) A-Relief Cavity Plugged
B-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
SPOOL TYPE C-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
A-3-Way 3-Position D-Anti-Cavitation Check
B-4-Way 3-Position E-Adjustable Combination Port Relief/Anti-Cavitation Check
C-4-Way 3 Position Motor 1000-2500 PSI***
D-4-Way 4 Position Float F-Non-Adjustable Combination Port Relief/Anti-Cavitation
E-4-Way 3 Position Metering (SVR only) Check 1000-2500 PSI***
F-3-Way 3 Position Metering (SVR only) G-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
G-4-Way 3 Position Series (SVS only) H-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
H-4-Way 3 Position Motor Series (SVS only)
PORT RELIEF “A” OPTION
SPOOL ACTION A-Relief Cavity Plugged
A-Spring Center (SVH & SVS only) B-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
B- 3 Position Detent C-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
C-Friction Detent D-Anti-Cavitation Check
D- Spring Center w/ Float Detent (SVH only) **E-Adjustable Combination Port Relief/Anti-Cavitation Check
E-Light Spring Center 1000-2500 PSI***
F-2 Position Detent Neutral and Out (No IN Position) F-Non-Adjustable Combination Port Relief/Anti-Cavitation
J-S/C with Micro Switch Bracket 2-Position* Check 1000-2500 PSI***
K-S/C with MicroSwitch Bracket 1-Position* **G-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
M-Spring Center Detent In **H-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
N-Spring Center Detent Out **Cannot be used on work sections with float option due to
S-Spring Center (SVR only) interference with handle.
*MicroSwitch not provided *** Do not use in applications that require low work port leakage.
HANDLE OPTION Max allowable leakage 5 in3/min @1000 psi.
1. Standard Lever Handle For Work Port Relief Settings Other Than Standard
2. Less Handle Only SVH1BA1GG-18-25
3. Less Complete Handle Assembly B PORT RELIEF PRESSURE IN HUNDREDS
4. Adjustable Handle EXAMPLE: 25=2500 PSI at 3 GPM
5. Tang Spool End Only All Port Reliefs set at 3 GPM
6. Clevis Spool End Only
7. Vertical Handle A PORT RELIEF PRESSURE IN HUNDREDS
9. Blank for Optional Joystick Handle EXAMPLE: 18=1800 PSI at 3 GPM
12. Extended Enclosed Handle All Port Reliefs set at 3 GPM
CUSTOM SECTION: For OEM application custom sections can often be designed to meet your specifications. Special handles, spool, and
spool actions are often easily made because of the SV valve’s flexible design. Consult your sales representative with your specifications.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V15
FIELD CONVERSION KITS, REPAIR KITS AND RELIEF CARTRIDGES
SPOOL ATTACHMENT KITS 660180006 Adjustable Handle Kit 660280008 Shim Adj. Combination Port
660180001 Spring Center Kit 660180055 Joystick Handle Kit Less Handle Relief/Anti-Cav Check 1000-2500 PSI
660180002 3 Position Detent Kit 660180033 Bent Joystick Handle Kit 660280005 Anti-Cavitation Check
660180003 Friction Detent Kit 660180017 Straight Joystick Handle Kit 660280009 Adj. Port Relief 1500-3000 PSI
660180051 Float Detent Kit 660180018 Offset Joystick Handle Kit 660280011 Adj. Port Relief 500-1500 PSI
660180036 Spring Center Detent In SEAL KITS 672000101 .015 SHIM
660180037 Spring Center Detent Out 660580001 SVW/SVM Replacement Seal Kit 672000102 .033 SHIM
660180015 S/C w/Microswitch, 2 Position* 660580002 Inlet Seal Kit 672000103 .060 SHIM
660180016 S/C w/Microswitch, 1 Position* 660580003 Outlet Seal Kit INLET RELIEFS
HANDLE KITS 660580004 Between Section Seal Kit 660250006 Inlet Relief Plug
660180011 Std. Handle Kit 660580010 SVH/SVR Replacement Seal Kit 660250003 Low Pressure Inlet Relief
660180032 Clevis Sub-Assy 660580009 SVL Replacement Seal Kit 660250002 High Pressure Inlet Relief
660180005 Complete Handle Kit 660580011 SVS Replacement Seal Kit OUTLET CARTRIDGES
PORT RELIEFS 200400030 Open Center Plug
660180031 Pin Kit
660280004 Port Relief Plug 660280001 #8 SAE Power Beyond Cart.
660180026 Vertical Handle Kit
660280002 Closed Center Plug
660180028 Straight Handle Kit 660280003 Shim Adj. Port Relief 1500-3000 PSI
660280018 Open Center Build-Up Cart.
660180007 Complete Adjustable Handle Kit 660280010 Shim Adj. Port Relief 500-1500 PSI
660280019 Power Beyond Build-Up Cart.
660280012 Adj. Combination Port MISC. KITS
*Bracket only, Micrswitch is not provided. Relief/Anti-Cav Check 1000-2500 PSI
660180052 Load Check Kit
PERFORMANCE CURVES
VALVES
SVS SERIES SECTION TEST DATA
CATV 01-04-09-01
DIMENSIONAL DATA
WORK SECTIONS OUTLET COVER
INLET COVER
VALVES
BOTTOM VIEW OF MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Number of Work Sections ”A” ”B*”

1 2.875 5.875
2 4.312 7.312
3 5.750 8.750
4 7.187 10.187
5 NUM 8.625 11.625
6 10.062 13.062
7 11.500 14.500
8 12.937 15.937
9 14.375 17.375
10 15.812 18.812
*with #10 plug in inlet & power beyond in outlet.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V17
TYPICAL STACK DIMENSIONAL DATA
THE ROD TORQUE

150 in-lbs +6 in - lbs
(12 1/2 ft - lbs +1/2
VALVES
ENCLOSED HANDLE, OPTIONS 11 AND 12

Durable die cast metal housing. Weather and oil resistant rubber boot. Reversible handle can be mounted in either a vertical
or horizontal position. The extended handle option provides the necessary clearance for work port relief and lock cartridges.
The extended handle option can also be used on the SVW and SVM, work sections when it is desired to keep handles
aligned in an assembly with both low and high sections.
CATV 01-04-09-01
PARALLEL CIRCUIT SVW, SVM, SVH, SVR, AND SVL WORK SECTIONS
Parallel circuit sections are by far the most common. The SVW,
SVM, SVH, SVR, AND SVL are all parallel circuit construction.
They can be combined together in any order in an assembly.
When any one of the spools is shifted it blocks off the open
center passage thru the valve. The oil then flows into the parallel
circuit core making oil available to all spools. If more than one
spool is fully shifted then oil will go to the spool with the lowest
pressure requirements. However, it is possible to meter the flow
to the spool with the least load and power two unequal loads.
The SVM and SVR sections have metering notches machined
into the spool to allow for better “feathering” of a load. The spool
travel is also a little longer .281 vs. .250 for the standard sections.
The SVL section combines both a 4-way directional valve and a
double pilot operated check valve. This provides very low leakage
when the spool is in neutral. When the spool is shifted, oil is
directed through a work port check to the cylinder. Pressure on
the work port applies pressure to the shuttle spool opening the
opposite check valve and allowing oil to return into the valve.
Depending upon load pressures, the metering of the spool may
be affected. In some cases a one way restrictor in a work port
may be beneficial.
SERIES CIRCUIT SVS WORK SECTIONS

A series circuit valve is most commonly used to control more than
one hydraulic component simultaneously. The entire circuit flow is
available to each valve section that is actuated. In a two spool series
valve with both spools actuated, the oil flows from the inlet to the
work port of the first section. The return flow of the first section is
directed to the open center core of the second section. (In a parallel
VALVES
valve the return oil from the work port is directed to the tank core.)
From the open center core of the second section, the oil flows to the
work port with the return oil going to the outlet. In a series circuit
valve, the summation of the pressures required for each work section
will equal the total pressure required for the circuit. The total
pressure required must not exceed the system relief setting or the
pump pressure rating. It is not required to have a SV Series section
as the last section, unless series flow is required to a downstream
valve. In this application, a power beyond plug must be used in the
outlet section.
COMBINED SERIES / PARALLEL CIRCUITS

The SV Series circuit valve sections may be stacked with SV parallel circuit valve sections. This allows both series and
parallel control in the same valve assembly.
In the valve assembly shown below, the first, third and fourth sections are parallel. The second section is series. The first
parallel section has priority over all downstream valves. When the spool of the first parallel section is actuated, the return oil
from the work port is directed to the tank core, thus oil flow to downstream sections is cut off. The second and third sections
are in series with each other as is the second and fourth sections. The third and fourth sections are in parallel with each
other.
SERIES MOTOR SPOOL
The SV Series Motor Spool provides control of reversible
hydraulic motors. Both work ports are connected to the
open center core in the neutral position. It should be
noted that in the neutral position, the work ports will be
equally pressurized to the same pressure that is required
of any downstream valve sections and that a work port
relief in the section will also limit the pressure of any
other sections in the valve. The series motor spool should
not be used to control a hydraulic cylinder as unwanted
cylinder drift may occur in the neutral position.
CLOSED CENTER APPLICATIONS The SV Series Circuit

Valve sections cannot be used in a closed center valve
assembly.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V19
WORK SECTIONS
VALVES
SV WORK PORT RELIEF

SV WORK PORT RELIEFS, OPTION B, C, G, &
H CAN BE ORDERED PRETESTED. USE
ORDER CODE AT RIGHT
CATV 01-04-09-01
SV INLET RELIEF OPTIONS
OPTION 1 NO RELIEF
This option provides no built in relief. This is used when a relief is
provided elsewhere in the system or in a closed center application.
This plug can be replaced with a relief cartridge at a later date.
OPTION 4 LOW PRESSURE ADJUSTABLE RELIEF

This option provides for a differential poppet relief adjustable from
500-1500 PSI. Set at 1000 PSI @ 10 GPM.
OPTION 5 HIGH PRESSURE ADJUSTABLE RELIEF

This option provides for a differential poppet relief adjustable from
1500-3000 PSI. Set at 2000 PSI @ 10 GPM. The differential poppet
relief provides smooth quiet operation with high cracking pressure.
RELIEF CARTRIDGES CAN BE ORDERED PRETESTED SEE RV-OX RELIEF, PAGE V60.
SV OUTLET COVER OPTIONS
OPTION 3 CLOSED CENTER OUTLET

This option provides for closed center operation. This is
typically used with a variable displacement pressure
compensated pump or in a system with an unloading valve.
When the spools are in neutral the inlet port is blocked.
Closed center can also be accomplished by plugging the
power beyond port of option 2.
PLEASE NOTE that this closed center option does not

provide for the drain off of standby spool leakage. This can
allow a very small amount of oil to enter the work ports
OPTION 1 STANDARD OPEN CENTER when in neutral.
OUTLET WITH CONVERSION PLUG
This is the standard outlet option. This OPTION 6 OPEN CENTER OUTLET PRESSURE BUILD-
option allows for conversion in the UP VALVE FOR SOLENOID OPTION
VALVES
field for power beyond or closed This option directs oil from open center core thru pressure
center applications. When spools are build-up valve and then to tank. See solenoid section for
in neutral the inlet is unloaded to tank. description of operation.
OPTION 2 POWER BEYOND OUTLET OPTION 7 POWER BEYOND PRESSURE BUILD-UP

WITH #8 SAE BEYOND PORT VALVE FOR SOLENOID OPTION
This option provides for a high This option directs oil from inlet thru pressure build-up valve
pressure power beyond port. This and then downstream. This pressure build-up valve
would be used if a valve is to be provides a #8 SAE power beyond port. The outlet must be
added down stream. THE OUTLET connected to tank.
PORT MUST STILL BE CONNECTED
TO TANK. When spools are in neutral
the inlet is connected to the power
beyond port.
SV MID-INLET SECTION
SVIM 1 X X - X X X X
Last Four Digits Specify
A Non-Standard Relief Pressure.
When blank, refer to standard setting
1-No Relief
2-SHIM Adjustable 500-1500 PSI Std. Setting 1000 PSI @ 10GPM
3-SHIM Adjustable 1500-3000 PSI Std. Setting 2000 PSI @ 10 GPM
4-Adjustable 500-1500 PSI Std. Setting 1000 PSI @ 10 GPM
5-Adjustable 1500-3000 PSI Std. Setting 2000 PSI @ 10 GPM
C-Combined Flow Mid-Inlet
S-Split Flow Mid-Inlet
See Section View at left. Note
Location of Spacer, Part Number 671200035
1. Port Size #8 SAE ORB (3/4-16 THD)
DESCRIPTION:
A Mid-Inlet provides an inlet port for a second pump mid stream in the valve stack.
A relief can be provided in this section. With the combined flow the flow from both
pumps is available to the downstream sections when all the work sections
upstream are in neutral. The split flow completely separates the two pump flows.
The common tank passage is all that is shared between the two pump flows.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V21
SV FLOW CONTROL INLET SECTION
SV I FX X X X X X The SVIF Flow Control Inlet is
interchangeable with the standard SV
PORT SIZE SOLENOID OPTION inlet section.
1- Side and End Inlet #10 SAE ORB Omit for Flow Control Option M
2- Side and End Inlet #10 SAE 12Q-12VDC Double Spade Coil FLOW CONTROL OPTIONS:
ORB, with #8 SAE ORB External 24Q-24VDC Double Spade Coil P OPTION incorporates a solenoid
EF Circuit 12H-12VDC DIN 43650 Coil operated, electrically variable
24H - 24VDC DIN 43650 Coil pressure-compensated flow control
RELIEF VALVE cartridge. With the solenoid de-
12L-12VDC Double Lead Wire Coil
1- No Relief energized, all of the inlet flow is
24L - 24VDC Double Lead Wire Coil
2- Direct acting non-adjustable diverted to the tank core/EF port. By
12W -12VDC Double Lead Wire w/ Weatherpak
500-1500 psi set at 1000 psi* increasing the current through the
Connector Coil
3- Direct acting non-adjustable solenoid, the flow directed to the
24W - 24VDC Double Lead Wire w/ Weatherpak
1500-3000 psi set at 2000 psi* power core and downstream sections
Connector Coil
4- Direct acting adjustable 500-1500 psi will be proportionally increased, (the
set at 1000 psi* FLOW CONTROL OPTION maximum rating of the cartridge is 16
5- Direct acting adjustable 1500-3000 psi M- Manual Flow Control gpm at 1500 mA) Control current is
set at 2000 psi* P- Electro-Proportional normally provided via a controller card
*for other settings please specify, i.e. U- Solenoid Unloading providing, a PWM signal.
SVIF15P12Q-2700 is set at 2700 psi
U OPTION incorporates a solenoid
operated, unloader cartridge. With the
solenoid de-energized, all of the inlet
flow is diverted to the tank core/EF
port. With the solenoid energized all
the inlet flow is directed to the power
core and downstream sections.
M OPTION incorporates a manually
operated pressure-compensated flow
control cartridge. With the control knob
turned fully in (clockwise), all of the
inlet flow is diverted to the tank core/
EF port. By turning the flow control
knob counter clockwise, the inlet flow
directed to the power core and
VALVES
downstream sections is proportionally

increased. Approximately 5
revolutions varies flow from no flow to
full flow,
PORT OPTION 2 The flow being
directed to the tank core/EF port may
be utilized by a second circuit by
inserting a 1/4 pipe plug into the tank
core passage on the seal side of the
casting and then connecting the EF
port to the second circuit.
PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER BOX (for use with SVIFP flow control inlet), PART NO. 671300048
The proportional controller box is used to provide an adjustable
electrical signal to a proportional solenoid on the SVIFP inlet. Once the
dial is set, the regulated flow through the valve should remain approxi-
mately constant regardless of pressure. Within the operating range, flow
varies approximately linearly with dial rotation.
CONNECTIONS AND OPERATION:
*Connect leads to the power supply and solenoid. Power supply should
be between 9 and 32 VDC.
*With the power off, the inlet flow is directed to the tank (or excess flow
port).
*To provide power to the control, move the power switch to ON. (Green
LED is ON when control is powered).
*Minimum flow is directed into the valve when 0 on the dial is aligned
with the center mark. Maximum flow is directed into the valve when 10
on the dial is aligned with the center mark.
*Clockwise rotation increases flow.
*Typically, no adjustments are needed for operation, (l-min and l-max
pots are preset for the normal maximum and minimum flows)
Control comes with 6 ft of cable for power leads and 6 ft of
cable for coil leads. Control box protection rating is IP67.
CATV 01-04-09-01
JOYSTICK HANDLE FOR MODEL SV STACK VALVE
This is a special handle for the model SV stack valve that allows
the spools of two adjacent sections to be operated by one common
handle. The spools can be operated independently or simultaneously
depending on handle movement. The option is normally used on
spring center to neutral sections, but can also be used on other
sections such as float sections. This handle is normally installed on
valves assembled at the factory but can be installed on work
sections that have handle option 3 or 9. The drawing at right shows
two joy-sticks with offset handles installed on a six section valve.
When two joysticks are installed on the same valve assembly it is
recommended that there be two standard sections between them to
prevent handle interference. A two section spacer is available, part
no. 660380002.
Please refer to these part numbers and state which sections

handle is to be installed on when ordering a valve assembly. This
handle can be installed in the field to work sections with handle
option 3 (no handle).
VALVES
STANDARD STRAIGHT JOYSTICK HANDLE
OFFSET JOYSTICK HANDLE
BENT JOYSTICK HANDLE
PART NUMBER 660180033 A molded rubber boot (671300011) is available for the joystick.
ONE WAY WORK PORT RESTRICTOR FOR SVH, ONE WAY WORK PORT RESTRICTOR FOR SVW WORK
SVM, SVR, & SVL WORK SECTIONS SECTIONS
This restrictor will restrict oil in one direction and This restrictor will restrict oil in one direction and allow free
allow free flow in the opposite direction. This flow in the opposite direction. This restrictor consists of the
restrictor consists of an orifice plate that simply orifice plate as described at left and an adapter fitting that
drops into the #8 SAE work port of a SVH, SVM, allow use in the standard SVW #8 SAE work port.
SVR, & SVL work section.
ORDERING INFORMATION ORDERING INFORMATION

HEX BRASS RESTRICTOR 670805XXX ADAPTER WITH HEX BRASS RESTRICTOR 661180XXX
SQUARE STEEL RESTRICTOR WITH 661181000 ADAPTER WITH SQUARE STEEL 661182000
CONICAL SPRING RESTRICTOR AND COUNCIL SPRING
The last three digits of part number The last three digits of part number
are the orifice size in thousandths of an inch. are the orifice size in thousandths of an inch.
EXAMPLE: 670805062 .062 ORIFICE EXAMPLE: 661180062 .062 ORIFICE

670805125 .125 ORIFICE 661180125 .125 ORIFICE
670805000 NO ORIFICE 661180000 NO ORIFICE
CATV 01-04-09-01
V23
SV SOLENOID OPERATED
Work Sections
• Type “-T” Solenoid Operated
• Type “-S” Solenoid and Manual Operation
VALVES
STANDARD FEATURES
• Open center or closed center applications • Power beyond capability

• Port relief options available • Load checks on each section
• Internal pilot supply and drain • May be stacked with Manual SV Sections
• 12VDC, 24VDC and 120VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
Parallel or Series Circuit Construction Foot Mounting
Pressure Rating Maximum Operating Temp. ............... 180°F
Maximum Operating Pressure ................ 3000 psi Weight Per Section
Maximum Tank Pressure .......................... 150 psi Inlet Section ........................ Approx. 3.75 Ibs.
Nominal Flow Rating ........................... 12 GPM Outlet Section .................... Approx. 3.75 Ibs.
Differential Pressure Solenoid Operated
Required to Actuator ............... Approx. 150 PSI Type “-T” Work Section ........ Approx. 11.0 Ibs.
Filtration: Fluid cleanliness should meet the ISO Type “-S” Work Section ....... Approx. 14.5 Ibs.
4406 17/14 level. As a minimum, 10 micron filtration
is recommended
CATV 01-04-09-01
TYPE “-T” SOLENOID DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
The Type “-T” Solenoid Operated SV Work Section allows remote electrical on-off control. This solenoid operated SV
section may be assembled with other standard SV manual sections, or type “-S” solenoid and manual sections.
The Type “-T” Solenoid Operated SV Section contains two 3-way 2-position solenoid cartridge valves, one at each end
of the main valve body. When both solenoids are de-energized, both ends of the control valve spool are open to tank
pressure and the spool remains spring centered. When solenoid “A” is energized, pilot pressure is applied to one end of the
control valve spool causing the spool to shift from neutral to full stroke on “A” work port. When solenoid “B” is energized, pilot
pressure is applied to the other end of the control valve spool causing the spool to shift to full stroke on “B” work port.
Internal pilot lines provide pilot pressure to the solenoid actuators. Pilot pressure is generated by a “Pressure Build-Up
Valve” that is installed in the standard outlet section. Two versions of the pressure build-up valve are offered. The open
center pressure build-up valve and the power beyond pressure build-up valve. Both versions supply 150-200 PSI pilot
pressure to the solenoid actuators.
TYPE “-S” SOLENOID AND MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

The Type “-S” Solenoid and Manual Operated SV Work Section allows remote electrical on-off or manual control.
This solenoid operated SV section may be assembled with other standard SV manual sections, or type “-T” solenoid
sections.
The Type “-S” Solenoid and Manual Operated SV Section contains two, 3 way-2 position solenoid cartridge valves
and a pilot operated piston attached to the main control spool. When both solenoids are de-energized both sides of the pilot
piston are open to tank pressure and the spool remains spring centered. When solenoid “A” is energized, pilot pressure is
applied to one side of the pilot piston causing the spool to shift from the neutral position to work port “A”. When solenoid “B”
is energized, pilot pressure is applied to the other side of the pilot piston causing the spool to shift to work port “B”.
Internal pilot lines provide pilot pressure to the solenoid actuator. Pilot pressure is generated by a “Pressure Build-Up
Valve” that is installed in the standard outlet section. Two versions of the pressure build-up valve are offered. The open
center pressure build-up valve and the power beyond pressure build-up valve. Both versions supply 150-200 PSI pilot
pressure to the solenoid actuator.
VALVES
APPLICATION INFORMATION
For over center or light load applications if the required work port load pressure drops below 200 PSI, the pilot pressure
to the spool will drop to the same pressure causing the spring to move the control spool back towards the neutral position.
The spool will end up in an intermediate position between neutral and fully shifted. A restrictor installed in the work port
or line may be required for this type of application.
For closed center applications the Pressure Build-Up Valve is not required. However, a system pressure of 200 PSI must
be maintained in the closed center position to actuate the valve properly.
Proper operation of the solenoid actuators requires a pressure differential of 150-200 PSI above tank pressure. The maximum
tank port pressure should not exceed 150 PSI. Excessive tank pressure will increase “Seal Drag” and may prohibit, the
spool from shifting.
The solenoid operated SV section may be converted to accept an external hydraulic pilot supply to the solenoid actuators.
Please consult a Sales Representative for information.
On Line Information Available

Additional valve information is available on line at princehyd.com
Information available includes:
• Parts manuals for many common Prince valves.
• Cad drawing files for many common Prince valves.
• Instructions sheets.
• Updated Prince catalog pages.
• Prince catalog in electronic format.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V25
SOLENOID OPERATED SVW WORK SECTIONS ALL HAVE #8 SAE PORTS AND LOAD CHECK
PART NO. SPOOL TYPE/VOLTAGE
SVW1BA-T12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION/12 VDC For Inlets, Outlets and
SVW1AA-T12Q 3 POSTION/12 VDC Tie-rod Kits, please
SVW1CA-T12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION MOTOR/12 VDC refer to SV Section
SVW1BA-T11C 4 WAY-3 POSITION/120 VAC
SOLENOID OPERATED
SVH WORK SECTIONS ALL HAVE #8 SAE PORTS AND LOAD CHECK. MODELS WITH RELIEF, FACTORY SET AT 2000 PSI AT 3 GPM
PART NO. SPOOL TYPE/VOLTAGE PORT RELIEFS
SVH1BAGG-T12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION/12 VDC ADJUSTABLE 1500-3000 PSI
SVH1BAAA-T12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION/12 VDC PORT RELIEF PLUGGED
SVH1CAGG-T12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION MOTOR/12 VDC ADJUSTABLE 1500 - 3000 PSI
SPECIAL SECTIONS AVAILABLE: Sections other than the standard models listed can be made to order. Use the order
code Matrix below to generate a model number that meets your requirements. If you
prefer, contact your Sales Representative with your specific requirements and a model
number will be assigned for you. This model number can then be used for future
orders. A minimum order quantity will apply to special valves. Please contact your
Sales Representative.
SOLENOID OPERATED
PORT RELIEF WORK SECTION
SV H X X X X X —T X X X
SECTION TYPE COIL VOLTAGE & TERMINATION *
H-Port Relief Section 12Q, 12 VDC Double Spade
S-Series Section (Use G spool) 12L, 12 VDC Double Wire
VALVES
12H, 12 VDC DIN 43650

PORT SIZE 12W, 12 VDC Weather Pack ®
1. #8 SAE 24Q, 24 VDC Double Spade
24 L, 24 VDC Double Wire
SPOOL TYPE 24H, 24 VDC DIN 43650
A-3-Way 3-Position 11C, 120 VAC Conduit
B-4-Way 3-Position 11H, 120 VAC DIN 43650
C-4-Way 3-Position Motor
G-4-Way Series
SPOOL ACTIONS SOLENOID OPERATION
A - Spring Center
PORT RELIEF “A” OPTION PORT RELIEF “B” OPTION

A-Relief Cavity Plugged A-Relief Cavity Plugged
B-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI B-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
C-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI C-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
G-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
G-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000 PSI
H-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
H-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 500-1500 PSI
SOLENOID OPERATED
SVW AND SVL WORK SECTIONS
SVW X X X —T X X X
SECTION TYPE
W-Standard Work Section COIL VOLTAGE & TERMINATION *
L-Lock Section (Use C Spool)
12Q, 12 VDC Double Spade
PORT SIZE 12L, 12 VDC Double Wire
12H, 12 VDC DIN 43650
1. #8 SAE 12W, 12 VDC Weather Pack ®
SPOOL TYPE 24Q, 24 VDC Double Spade
A-3-Way 3-Position 24H, 24 VDC DIN 43650
B-4-Way 3-Position 11C, 120 VAC Conduit
C-4-Way 3-Position Motor 11H, 120 VAC Din 43650
SPOOL ACTIONS
* See page V29 for coil details SOLENOID OPERATION
A - Spring Center
CATV 01-04-09-01
ORDERING INFORMATION: “-S” SOLENOID AND MANUAL WORK SECTIONS
SOLENOID OPERATED SVW WORK SECTIONS ALL HAVE #8 SAE PORTS, LOAD CHECK AND STANDARD LEVER HANDLE
PART NO. SPOOL TYPE/VOLTAGE
SVW1AA1-S12Q 3 WAY-3 POSITION/12 VDC For Inlets, Outlets and
SVW1BA1-S12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION/12 VDC Tie-rod Kits, please
SVW1CA1-S12Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION MOTOR/12 VDC refer to SV Section
SVW1BA1-S24Q 4 WAY-3 POSITION/24 VDC
SOLENOID OPERATED SVH WORK SECTIONS ALL HAVE #8 SAE PORTS, LOAD CHECK AND STANDARD LEVER HANDLE
MODELS WITH RELIEF, FACTORY SET AT 2000 PSI AT 3 GPM
PART NO. SPOOL TYPE/VOLTAGE PORT RELIEFS

SVH1BA1AA-S12Q 4 WAY DOUBLE ACTING/12 VDC PORT RELIEF PLUGGED
SVH1BA1AA-S24Q 4 WAY DOUBLE ACTING/24 VDC PORT RELIEF PLUGGED
SVH1BA1BB-S12Q 4 WAY DOUBLE ACTING/12 VDC SHIM ADJ. 1500-3000 PSI
SVH1BA1BB-S24Q 4 WAY DOUBLE ACTING/24 VDC SHIM ADJ. 1500-3000 PSI
SPECIAL SECTIONS AVAILABLE: Sections other than the standard models listed can be made to order. Use the
requirements. If you prefer, contact your Sales Representative with your specific
requirements and a model number will be assigned for you. This model number
can then be used for future orders. A minimum order quantity will apply to
special valves. Please contact your Sales Representative.
SOLENOID OPERATED
SVW AND SVL SECTION SVWXXXX–SXXX
SECTION TYPE
W-Standard Work Section COIL VOLTAGE & TERMINATION *
L-Lock Section (Use C Spool) 12Q, 12 VDC Double Spade
12L, 12 VDC Double Wire
PORT SIZE 12H, 12 VDC DIN 43650
VALVES
1. #8 SAE 12W, 12VDC Weather Pack®
SPOOL TYPE 24Q, 24 VDC Double Spade
A-3-Way 3-Position
24H, 24 VDC DIN 43650
B-4-Way 3-Position
11C, 120 VAC Conduit
11H, 120 VAC DIN 43650
SPOOL ACTIONS
A - Spring Center
SOLENOID AND MANUAL OPERATION
HANDLE OPTION
1. Std. Lever Handle 4. Adjustable Handle 11. ENCLOSED HANDLE
2. Less Handle Only 5. Less Handle Tang Spool End 12. EXTENDED ENCLOSED HANDLE
3. Less Complete Handle Assembly 6. Less Handle Clevis Spool End
PORT RELIEF WORK SECTIONS

SVHXXX XXX–SXXX
SECTION TYPE COIL VOLTAGE & TERMINATION*
H-Port Relief Section 12Q,12 VDC Double Spade
S-Series Section (Use G spool) 12L, 12 VDC Double Wire
12H, 12 VDC DIN 43650
PORT SIZE 12W, 12 VDC Weather Pack®
1. #8 SAE 24Q, 24 VDC Double Spade
SPOOL TYPE 24H, 24 VDC DIN 43650
A-3-Way 3-Position 11C,120 VAC Conduit
B-4-Way 3-Position 11H, 120 VAC DIN 43650
SOLENOID AND MANUAL OPERATION
G-4-Way Series
PORT RELIEF “B” OPTION
SPOOL ACTIONS A-Relief Cavity Plugged
A - Spring Center B-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting
Relief 1500-3000 PSI
HANDLE OPTION C-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting
1. Std. Lever Handle Relief 500-1500 PSI
2. Less Handle Only PORT RELIEF “A” OPTION
3. Less Complete Handle Assembly A-Relief Cavity Plugged G-Adjustable Direct Acting
4. Adjustable Handle B-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting Relief 1500-3000
5. Less Handle Tang Spool End Relief 1500-3000 PSI
6. Less Handle Clevis Spool End C-Non-Adjustable Direct Acting H-Adjustable Direct Acting
12. Extended Enclosed Handle *See page V29 for Coil details Relief 500-1500 PSI Relief 500-1500 PSI
CATV 01-04-09-01
V27
SOLENOID OPERATED TYPE “-T”
WORK SECTION DIMENSIONAL DATA
VALVES
TYPE “-T” SEAL KIT

660580014
SOLENOID CARTRIDGES
SEAL KIT 660590008 NOTE:
THIS OPTION CANNOT BE
ADDED IN THE FIELD.
NOTE: For additional data on inlet and outlet sections, valve assemblies, etc. Please refer SV information in this catalog.
SYMBOL
EXAMPLE TWO SECTION STACK
CATV 01-04-09-01
SOLENOID AND MANUAL OPERATED WORK SECTION TYPE “-S”
DIMENSIONAL DATA
VALVES
TYPE “-S” SEAL KIT 660580005 NOTE: THIS OPTION CANNOT BE
SOLENOID CARTRIDGES SEAL KIT 660590008 ADDED IN THE FIELD
NOTE: For additional dimensional data on inlet and outlet sections, valve assemblies, etc. Please refer SV information in this catalog.
SOLENOID COILS - ALL SOLENOID OPERATED SPOOLS

COIL SPECIFICATIONS
COIL PART NUMBERS DUTY RATING ............... CONTINUOUS AT 100 VOLTAGE
671302002 12 VDC H TYPE COIL INGRESS PROTECTION RATING ............................... IP65
671302003 12 VDC L TYPE COIL WATTAGE .............................................................. 20 WATTS
671322004 12 VDC Q TYPE COIL STABILIZED TEMPERATURE 217°F WITH 77°F AMBIENT
671302013 12 VDC W TYPE COIL AMP DRAW AT 77°
671302006 24 VDC H TYPE COIL 12VOLT ................... 1.70 AMPS
671302007 24 VDC L TYPE COIL 24 VOLT .................... .83 AMPS
671322008 24 VDC Q TYPE COIL 120 VOLT. .................. .18 AMPS
671302009 120 VAC C TYPE COIL LEAD WIRE LENGTH ... 18 GAUGE 12” LONG
671302010 120 VAC H TYPE COIL AC COILS ARE INTERNALLY RECTIFIED WITH A FULL WAVE
BRIDGE (NO IN RUSH CURRENT).
DIN STYLE COILS ARE DIN 43650 TYPE A.
USE WEATHER PACK ® TYPE COILS WITH MALE PACKED CONNECTOR #12015792
“WEATHER PACK CONNECTORS”.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V29
PRINCE MFG. CORP. STACK VALVE ASSEMBLY
RECEIVING REQUEST.
NUMBER. ASSIGNED UPON
VALVE ASSEMBLY MODEL
P.O. BOX 7000 QUOTATION REQUEST FORM
N. SIOUX CITY, SD 57049-7000
PHONE (605) 235-1220
FAX (605) 235-1082 DATE ______________________________
SUBMITTED BY _____________________
CUSTOMER ________________________
ADDRESS __________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
PHONE ____________________________
FAX _______________________________
YEARLY REQUIREMENTS _____________
CURRENT SUPPLIER _________________
FILL IN THE CHART BELOW USING ORDER CODE FROM SERIES 20 OR MODEL SV SECTION
NOTE ANY PORT RESTRICTORS, JOYSTICKS HANDLES, ETC. IN SPACE PROVIDED
ITEM SECTION NUMBER SECTION NOTES LIST
INLET
SECTION RELIEF: PSI @ GPM
WORK
SECTION 1 A RELIEF: PSI @ GPM B RELIEF: PSI @ GPM
WORK
VALVES
WORK
WORK
WORK
WORK
WORK
WORK
WORK
WORK
OUTLET
SECTION
TIE ROD KIT
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ASSEMBLY CHARGE (SV ONLY)
TOTAL
CATV 01-04-09-01
CAD FILE REQUEST FORM
CAD Drawing Files are available for all of the standard Prince Valves. Each CAD Drawing shows all six views as well as
a 2D isometric view. The drawings are intended to be generic enough to allow modification to match customers needs.
Where appropriate optional features have been shown. Files are available in either AUTO-CAD 2000 or AUTOCAD
2004.DWG format (AUTOCAD is a Registered Trademark of Auto Desk). Solid Models are also available on request. See
products page at www.princehyd.com.
CUSTOMER ____________________________ FILE FORMAT (CHECK ONE)

ADDRESS ____________________________ RELEASE 2000 __________
____________________________ RELEASE 2004 __________
____________________________
ATTN: ____________________________
VALVE MODEL
SERIES 20 _______________ LS3000 ______________ LVS _______________
MODEL SV _______________ RD100 ______________ RD200* _______________
RD5100 _______________ RD1900 ______________ RV _______________
RD5200 _______________ RD4100 ______________ DRV _______________
RD5300 _______________ LVT ______________ SS _______________
RD2500 _______________ LVR ______________ DS _______________
*THIS FILE CONTAINS INFORMATION FOR RD200, RD300, RD400, RD500, RD900, RD1000 AND RD1500
EXAMPLE
VALVES
CATV 01-04-09-01
V31
MODEL RD5000
MONO-BLOCK
1, 2, 3 Spool
Model RD5100
VALVES
Model RD5200
Model RD5300
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL RD5000 DIMENSIONAL DATA
VALVES
OPTIONAL, TOP OR
BOTTOM PORTING
(INLET PORT)
CATV 01-04-09-01
V33
RD5000 PRESSURE DROP, RELIEF CURVE AND STANDARD FEATURES
STANDARD FEATURES
* Economical monoblock construction of high tensile * Differential poppet style relief, adjustable from 1500
strength gray cast iron. to 3000 psi (also available in low pressure version
* Load check on each spool, adjustable from 500 to 1500 psi)
* Hard chrome plated spool. * Power beyond and closed center capability.
* Optional 4 Position Float on 1st spool. * Reversible handle.
SPECIFICATIONS
PARALLEL CIRCUIT (RD-5200 & RD-5300)
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE ........... 3000 PSI
MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE ........... 180°F
RD5100 SINGLE SPOOL VALVE MAXIMUM TANK PORT PRESSURE .............. 500 PSI
PRESSURE DROP VALUES RECOMMENDED SYSTEM FILTRATION ISO 4406 17/14
110 SUS OIL AT 115°F FLOW RATING .................................... 30 GPM RD5100
∆ P-PSI 25 GPM RD5200
FLOW INLET TO INLET TO A OR B
25 GPM RD5300
(GPM) OUTLET A OR B TO OUTLET WEIGHT ............................................. 14 LBS RD5100
23 LBS RD5200
5 2 8 3
34 LBS RD5300
10 5 17 6
RD5000 RELIEF VALVE 110
15 9 35 12 SUS OIL AT 115°F
20 21 58 21
25 26 86 34
VALVES
RD5200 TWO SPOOL VALVE

PRESSURE DROP VALUES
110 SUS OIL AT 115°F
∆ P-PSI
FLOW INLET TO INLET TO A OR B C OR D TO
(GPM) OUTLET WORK PORTS TO OUTLET
5 3 11 2 2
PARALLEL CIRCUIT VALVES:
Both the RD-5200 Two-Spool and RD-5300 Three-Spool
10 8 22 8 5 Valves are parallel circuit valves. When any one of the
15 16 38 15 11 spools is shifted it blocks off the open center passage thru
the valve. The oil then flows into the parallel circuit core
20 28 57 27 19 making oil available to all spools, If more than one spool is
25 44 83 43 29 fully shifted then oil will go to the spool with the lowest
pressure requirements. However, it is possible to meter the
flow to the spool with the least load and power two unequal
loads.
RD5300 THREE SPOOL VALVE

PRESSURE DROP VALUES
∆ P-PSI
FLOW INLET TO INLET TO INLET TO INLET TO A OR B C OR D E OR F
(GPM) OUTLET A OR B C OR D E OR F TO OUTLET TO OUTLET TO OUTLET
5 2 9 9 11 4 3 2
10 10 18 20 25 14 9 6
15 22 33 41 49 32 22 13
20 37 56 68 78 51 36 21
25 58 83 101 118 76 55 32 The above drawing shows

a symbol for a Three-Spool Valve
Model Number RD532CCCAAA5A4B1
CATV 01-04-09-01
RD5000 ORDERING INFORMATION
STANDARD VALVES AVAILABLE: All standard valves have end inlet and outlet locations, power beyond
conversion plug, complete handle assemblies, and adjustable differential poppet relief.
VALVES
1. Four position, four way, tandem center, detented “in” the float position. Spring center to neutral from work positions.
Work ports blocked in neutral.
2. Tandem center. Spring center to neutral from work positions. Work ports blocked in neutral.
3. Tandem center, 3 position detent. Work ports blocked in neutral.
MISC. AND FIELD CONVERSION KITS FOR MODEL RD-5000 VALVES

660150001 SPRING CENTER KIT 660250006 NO RELIEF PLUG 660350001 HANDLE CLEVIS
660150002 3 POSITION DETENT KIT 660250003 LOW PRESSURE ADJUSTABLE 660551001 RD5100 SEAL KIT
660150003 FRICTION DETENT KIT RELIEF CARTIDGE 660552001 RD5200 SEAL KIT
660150018 1 POSITION DETENT SPOOL 660250002 HIGH PRESSURE ADJUSTABLE 660553001 RD5300 SEAL KIT
OUT W/ SPRING CENTER RELIEF CARTRIDGE 660150011 STRAIGHT JOYSTICK
660150020 2 POSITION DETENT 660312005 CLOSED CENTER HANDLE KIT
W/ SPRING CENTER KIT CONVERSION PLUG 660150012 450 BENT JOYSTICK
660312003 CONVERSION PLUG 660150015 LOAD CHECK KIT HANDLE PARTS
660312004 POWER BEYOND PLUG 660150045 SPRING CENTER WITH 660150014 FLOAT HARDWARE KIT
3/4 NPTF MICRO-SWITCH KIT 660552002 AUTO CYCLE SEAL KIT
660312008 POWER BEYOND PLUG 660150004 HANDLE HARDWARE KIT
#12 SAE
CATV 01-04-09-01
V35
RD5000 ORDER CODE
SPECIAL VALVES AVAILABLE:
RD5000 Mono-block Valves other than the standard models listed can be made to order. Use the order code matrix
below to generate a model number that meets your requirements. Special features not listed can often be made to your
specifications. A minimum order quantity may apply to special valves. Please consult your sales representative.
MODEL RD5000 ORDER CODE MATRIX:

Fill each box with one letter or number from each column to generate a model number
Note that first all spools are listed then all spool attachments.
VALVES
*RD532CCCAAA5A4B1-25
The last two digits are Relief pressure in hundreds
Example: 25=2500 psi, all relief settings are at 10 gpm & 105°F.
*** Joystick handle will operate both spools using only one lever handle. The two spools can be operated either independently or simultaneously
depending on handle movement.
0
Often used with no relief. Review application.
CATV 01-04-09-01
RD-5000 SERIES STANDARD AND SPECIAL FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS
TWO SPOOL
“JOYSTICK” HANDLE
This handle will operate both spools
using only one lever handle. The two
spools can be operated either
independently or simultaneously
depending on handle movement.
The above drawing shows a section view of a 2-spool valve, Model RD-522GCGA-5-A4B1.
This is shown as a representative valve model. Other models will differ in appearance.
VALVES
LOAD CHECK: OPEN CENTER APPLICATIONS:
The load check feature is standard on all The Standard RD-5000 Series Valves are open center type valves. For
RD-5000 series valves. Each spool has a open center valves the hydraulic oil is directed from the inlet to the outlet,
separate load check. The load check will or power beyond, through the open center passage when the spools are
prevent the fall of a cylinder as the spool is in neutral. Moving one or more spools closes off the open center passage
shifted. It also prevents the backflow of oil and directs oil to the work ports.
from the work port to the inlet. As shown
below the pump must build up enough Open center systems most often contain fixed displacement pumps.
pressure to overcome the pressure on the The PMC hydraulic PTO pumps are fixed displacement gear pumps. The
work port caused by the weight of the load maximum pressure in an open center system is controlled by a relief
before the cylinder can move. valve. The RD-5000 series valves have a built in relief valve for this
Please note that the load check has nothing purpose.
to do with how well the valve will hold up a RD-5000 Series spool options A, C, E and G are all open center spools
cylinder with the spool in neutral. The load when used with power beyond options A, B, C and F.
check is functional only when the spool is
shifted.
CLOSED CENTER APPLICATIONS:
RD-5000 Series Valves are available as closed center type valves. For
closed center valves the oil through the open center passage is blocked
when the spools are in neutral.
Closed center systems often use a variable displacement pressure
compensated pump. When this type of pump is used in a closed center
system the system pressure is controlled by the pressure compensator.
When the spools of RD-5000 series valve are in neutral, system pressure
is maintained at the inlet of the valve. For this reason a relief is normally
not required or must be set at a higher pressure than the pump compensator.
RD-5000 Series spool options C, E and G are converted to closed center
by installing a closed center conversion plug, power beyond option D.
PLEASE NOTE that this closed center option does not provide for the
drain off of standby spool leakage. This can allow a very small amount of
The above drawing shows a section view thru work oil to enter the work ports when in neutral.
ports of a RD-5100 Single Spool Valve.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V37
RD-5000 SERIES SPOOL OPTIONS
3 WAY 3 POSITION OPEN CENTER 4 WAY 3 POSITION OPEN CENTER
OPTION A MOTOR SPOOL OPTION E
This spool option is used to control a single acting cylinder This spool option can be used to control a bi-
or a unidirectional motor. In neutral the work port is blocked rotational motor or a double acting cylinder. In
and oil goes through the open center passage to the next neutral the work ports are open to the return. This
spool of a multi-spool valve or the power beyond of a single allows a cylinder to drift or a motor to coast to a
spool valve. The “A” port is plugged for this option. stop. In neutral the oil goes through the open center
passage to the next spool of multi-spool valve or
the power beyond of a single spool valve.
4 WAY 3 POSITION TANDEM CENTER 4 WAY 3 POSITION CLOSED

OPTION C CENTER MOTOR SPOOL
This spool option is used to control a double acting cylinder This option is similar to spool option E except
or a reversible motor. In neutral both of the work ports are in neutral the open center passage is blocked.
blocked and oil goes through the open center passage to This function is achieved by using spool
the next spool of a multi-spool valve or the power beyond of option E with a closed center conversion
a single spool valve. This is the most popular spool option plug (Power beyond option D).
and is used on most PMC standard valves.
4 WAY 4 POSITION OPEN CENTER FLOAT
SPOOL OPTION G
This option is the same as spool option C, 4 way 3 position
4 WAY 3 POSITION CLOSED CENTER tandem center, with an added fourth “float” position. In
This spool option is similar to spool option C above except neutral the work ports are blocked (this will hold up a
in neutral the open center passage is blocked. This function cylinder) and the oil goes through the open center passage
is achieved by using spool option C with a closed center to the next spool or power beyond. In the float position the
conversion plug (Power beyond option D). work ports are open to the return (this will allow a cylinder
to drift or “float”) and the oil goes to next spool or power
beyond. The float position is reached by pushing the spool
as far as it will go and Is held in place by a detent. This
option must be ordered with spool action option G.
RD-5000 SERIES SPOOL ATTACHMENT OPTIONS

3 POSITION SPRING CENTER TO PRESSURE RELEASE DETENT,
NEUTRAL OPTION A DETENT SPOOL ‘OUT ONLY,
This option has 3 positions and a spring that returns SPRING CENTER TO NEUTRAL
VALVES
the spool to neutral when the handle is released. This OPTION E

option is considered standard on many PMC valve
This option provides a pressure release detent for
models.
the spool ‘Out’ position. When the spool is manually
This option can be converted in the field to 3 position placed in the detent position oil is directed to the ‘B’
detent by ordering Kit 660150002. It can be converted work port (the port away from the handle). When the
to friction detent by ordering Kit 660150003. pressure in the ‘B’ port reaches a preset level the
detent will release and the spool will center. The
3 POSITION DETENT detent release pressure is factory set at 1200 psi.
OPTION B This pressure is adjustable from 1000 to 2000 psi.
This option provides three detented positions. The detent release pressure is adjusted by turning
The spool will remain in any of the three positions in the adjusting screw clockwise to increase the
which it is manually placed. No centering spring is pressure and counter-clockwise to decrease the
provided. Note: This option does not positively lock pressure. The spool is spring centered to neutral
the spool in place. Excessive vibration or shock loads from the spool ‘In’ position. This option can be used
may effect operation. with spool options A, C or E.
This option can be converted in the field to spring This option can not be added to a valve in the field.
center by ordering Kit 660150001. It can be converted
to friction detent by ordering Kit 660150003.
PRESSURE RELEASE DETENT,
DETENT SPOOL ‘IN’ AND ‘OUT’
FRICTION DETENT
OPTION C SPRING CENTER TO NEUTRAL
This option provides for a detent in the neutral position OPTION F
only. As the spool is manually moved away from the This option is similar to option ‘E’ above except the
neutral position it will be held in place by the friction of pressure release detent function is on both the
the detent balls on the detent sleeve. Note: Because spool ‘In’ and ‘Out’ positions. This option is available
the spool is held in place by friction only, excessive on RD-5100 valve and number 1 spool of RD-5200
vibration may cause spool to move when not in the and RD-5300 valves.
neutral detented position. This option can be used with spool options C or E.
This option can be converted in the field to spring This option can not be added to a valve in the field.
center by ordering Kit 660150001 and to 3 position
detent by ordering Kit 660150002.
1 POSITION DETENT SPOOL ‘OUT’ SPRING CENTER
4 POSITION SPRING CENTER TO TO NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL DETENT SPOOL ‘IN’ FOR OPTION N
FLOAT POSITION OPTION G This option uses the same parts as option E above but is not pressure released. The
handle must be manually removed from the detent position. The detent holding force
This attachment Is used with spool option ‘G’. This
is adjustable.
option provides for spring center to neutral from either
work position. It also provides a 4th position, float
detent. The float detent is reached by pushing the 2 POSITION DETENT SPOOL ‘IN’ AND ‘OUT CENTER
spool in as far as it will go. In the float position both CENTER TO NEUTRAL
work ports are open to return. This allows a cylinder to OPTION P
drift or “float”.
This option uses the same parts as option F above but is not pressure released. The
This option is available only with spool option ‘G’ and handle must be manually removed from the detent position. The detent holding force
cannot be added to a valve in the field. is adjustable.
CATV 01-04-09-01
RD-5000 SERIES POWER BEYOND OPTIONS
POWER BEYOND POWER BEYOND PLUG IN-
NOT PROVIDED STALLED
OPTION A OPTION C 3/4 NPTF POWER
This option provides an outlet only with BEYOND PORT
no provision for power beyond. This option
can be used with any open center spools OPTION F #12 SAE POWER
where there is no need for a power beyond BEYOND PORT
port. The end outlet, shown at right, is This option provides both an outlet and a power
considered standard but a top or bottom beyond port (also referred to as a high pressure
outlet can also be specified. carry over port). This allows another valve to
When all the valves spools are in neutral be connected downstream. When all the spools
oil goes through the open center core to of a RD-5000 series valve are in neutral high
the outlet. pressure oil can go through the open center
core and out the power beyond port to the
This option cannot be converted in the inlet of downstream valve. The downstream
field to have power beyond. It also cannot valve only receives oil when all spools of the
be converted from open to closed center. first valve are in neutral. This option must be OPTION C Plug No. 660312004
used with open center spools and the outlet OPTION F Plug No. 660312008
of valve must be connected to tank.
CONVERSION PLUG If the power beyond port is not used on a
INSTALLED valve in an open center system the power
OPTION B beyond port must be connected to tank or the
power beyond plug replaced with conversion
This option is similar in function to Option plug 660312003.
‘A’ above except the conversion plug is
A valve with power beyond can be converted
installed in the power beyond location and
to closed center by plugging the power beyond
the end outlet is relocated. This option
port or installing closed center plug 660312005.
should be used with the open center spool
options and allows the valve to be
converted to have power beyond function
or be converted from open to closed CLOSED CENTER
center. This option is considered the PMC CONVERSION PLUG
Standard power beyond option because INSTALLED
of the flexibility it adds to the valve.
OPTION D
When all the valve spools are in neutral This option converts an otherwise open center
oil goes through open center core to valve to closed center operation. The open
return core and then to outlet. center core is blocked by the conversion plug.
VALVES
Oil cannot pass through the valve when the
To convert a valve in the field to have spools are in neutral. Closed center systems
power beyond, remove the conversion plug are normally associated with variable
and replace it with one of the power displacement pumps or any other system where
beyond plugs listed. To convert valve to the pump flow is unloaded when system
closed center, replace conversion plug pressure is reached.
with closed center plug 660312005
Note: If the closed center plug is installed in a
valve that has a relief it may be necessary to
install the no relief plug or adjust the relief
pressure above the compensator setting.
Also, this closed center option does not provide
for the drain off of standby spool leakage. This
can allow a very small amount of oil to enter
the work ports when in neutral.
RD-5000 2 SPOOL SPECIAL APPLICATION VALVE

“AUTO-CYCLE” TWO SPOOL VALVE
This valve is a modified RD-5200 two spool valve that can be used to automatically cycle a hydraulic cylinder. The spools and the valve body have been modified to provide
this function. Both spools have the pressure release detent spool attachment. The valve is shown connected to a cylinder in the sketch below. The “B” port is connected to
the base of the cylinder. The “A” and “D” ports are tied together and connected to the rod end of the cylinder. The “C” port is plugged. At the beginning of the cycle the cylinder
is fully retracted. To begin the cycle both handles are pulled back. Oil is directed to the “B” port and the cylinder will extend until it reaches the end of its stroke. At this point
the pressure will build to the detent release pressure and the first spool will center to neutral. Now the oil will go through the open center core to the second spool and is
directed out the “D” port to retract the cylinder. When the cylinder reaches the full retract position the pressure will build to the detent release pressure and the second spool
will center to neutral. This completes the cycle. To begin the next cycle both handles are again manually pulled back. Please note this valve does not have the loadcheck
feature of the standard RD5200 valve. Also the “B” port is open to tank in neutral.
Model Number DR523MMEE5A1A1
CATV 01-04-09-01
V39
SOLENOID OPERATED RD5000 DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVES
MAXIMUM PRESSURE .............................. 3000 PSI

MAXIMUM TANK PRESSURE ...................... 150 PSI
MAXIMUM FLOW ........................................ 25 GPM
MINIMUM FILTRATION ......................... 10 MICRON
MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE ..... 1800 F
The Solenoid Operated RD5000 Directional Control Valve allows remote electrical on-off or manual control. This
feature can be installed on the RD5100, RD5200, or RD5300. It can be installed on one or all spools of the RD5200 or
RD5300. This option can be purchased as kits and installed by customer. Complete valves are available special order
only (min. qty. 25) Consult your sales representative.
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

The Solenoid Operated RD5000 contains two, 3 way-2
1 1 660150030 BASE ACTUATOR KIT
2 2 SEE CHART SOLENOID COIL
position solenoid cartridge valves and a pilot operated
3 1 660150037 END MANIFOLD KIT
piston attached to the main control spool. When both
4 1 660150033 MID SECTION MANIFOLD KIT
solenoids are de-energized both sides of the pilot piston
5 1 660150035 MANIFOLD TUBE KIT (SHORT) are open to tank pressure and the spool remains spring
6 1 660150036 MANIFOLD TUBE KIT (LONG) centered. When solenoid A is energized, pilot pressure is
7 1 660150046 PRES. RED. MAN. KIT (MULTI-SPOOL) applied to one side of the pilot piston causing the spool
8 1 660150047 PRES. RED. MAN. KIT (SINGLE-SPOOL) to shift from the neutral position to work port A. When
9 1 SEE CHART PRES. BUILD-UP CART. solenoid “B” is energized, pilot pressure is applied to the
other side of the pilot piston causing the spool to shift to
work port “B”. In cases where the pilot pressure is
provided by the inlet line or #4 SAE port on valve, a
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER “Pressure Build-Up Valve” must be installed in the outlet
PRES, BUILD-UP CART. OPEN CENTER 660312012 port. Two versions of the pressure build-up valve are
PRES. BUILD-UP POWER BEYOND CART (#12 SAE) 660312014
12 VDC LEAD WIRE COIL 671302003
offered. The open center pressure build-up valve and the
12 VDC DOUBLE SPADE COIL 671322004 power beyond pressure build-up valve. Both versions
12 VDC WEATHER PACK 671302013 supply 150-200 PSI pilot pressure to the solenoid
12 VDC DIN 43650 COIL 671302002 actuator. When remote pilot is used, the pressure build-up
24 VDC LEAD WIRE COIL 671302007
24 VDC DOUBLE SPADE COIL 671322008 is not required. Because the valve is internally piloted,
24 VDC DIN 43650 COIL 671302006 overcenter or light loads can be a problem. The inlet
120 VAC CONDUIT COIL 671302009 pressure must be at least 200 psi during operation.
120 VAC DIN 43650 COIL 671302010
Restrictors can be added to eliminate this problem.
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL RD4100 SINGLE SPOOL MONO-BLOCK VALVE
RD4100 SPECIFICATIONS
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE ..................... 3000 PSI
MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE ................... 180°F
RECOMMENDED SYSTEM FILTRATION .... ISO 4406 17/14
FLOW RATING ........................................................... 15 GPM
STANDARD FEATURES
• Economical monoblock construction of high tensile strength gray
cast iron
• Load check
• Hard chrome plated spool
• Adjustable cartridge relief
• Open center, closed center, and power beyond available
• For use with system flows up to 15 gpm
• For use with system pressures up to 3000 PSI
• Optional top inlet & outlet port locations.
VALVES
STANDARD VALVES AVAILABLE:
All standard valves have a load check, a complete lever handle assembly, and an adjustable relief, see below for
settings. For other relief settings, please specify.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V41
RD-4100 KITS, RELIEF CURVE, & PRESSURE DROP
RD-4100 RELIEF VALVE CURVES
RD-4100 SINGLE SPOOL PRESSURE DROP

∆ P-PSI
(GPM) OUTLET A OR B TO OUTLET
5 3 10 3
10 11 42 12
15 26 85 32
HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF CART.

VALVES
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
660541001 SEAL KIT

660150015 LOAD CHECK KIT
660580003 POWER BEYOND SEAL KIT
660180001 SPRING CENTER KIT
660180002 3 POSITION DETENT KIT
660180051 SPRING CENTER FLOAT KIT
660180005 COMPLETE HANDLE KIT
660180011 HANDLE KIT
660180032 CLEVIS SUB-ASSY
660180031 PIN KIT
660280004 RELIEF PLUG
660280009 RELIEF CART. 1500-3000 PSI
660280011 RELIEF CART. 500-1500 PSI
200400030 OPEN CENTER PLUG
660280001 POWER BEYOND CART. (#8 SAE)
660280002 CLOSED CENTER PLUG
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL LV
MONO-BLOCK
Especially Suited for Front Loader Market
LVS Series Circuit

Top Ported or Semi-Rear Ported
VALVES
LVT Parallel Circuit
Top Ported
LVR Parallel Circuit

Rear Ported
CATV 01-04-09-01
V43
MODEL LVS SERIES LOADER VALVE
LVS SPECIFICATIONS
SERIES CIRCUIT (multifunction operation, simultaneous operation of
both boom and bucket)
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE ................................ 3000 PSI
MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE .............................. 180°F
RECOMMENDED SYSTEM FILTRATION ............... ISO 4406 17/14
NOMINAL FLOW RATING ................................................... 11 GPM
WEIGHT .................................................................................. 18.5lbs
STANDARD FEATURES
*Economical monoblock construction of high tensile strength gray cast iron
*Load check on each spool
*Hard chrome plated spools
*No face seals on spools
*Adjustable cartridge relief
*Power beyond available
*4 Position Series Float Spool for loader boom
*4 Position Regen Spool for loader bucket
*Molded rubber boot
*Patent pending, dual spool lock joystick available
)
VALVES
Note: Not
for use with
closed center
systems
LVS PRESSURE DROP

∆ P-PSI
FLOW INLET TO INLET TO WORK PORTS
(GPM) OUTLET WORK PORTS TO OUTLET
4 6 22 4
6 18 44 19
10 64 100 60

660590029 SEAL KIT
660180170 SPRING CENTER FLOAT KIT
660180169 SPRING CENTER REGEN KIT
671400252 ROD END
660390016 ROD END W/STUD
671900084 SLIDING SPOOL STUD
660180154 SPOOL LOCK HARDWARE
CATV 01-04-09-01
SERIES LOADER VALVE DIMENSIONAL DATA
REMOTE CABLE CONTROLS FOR PRINCE VALVES
VALVES
REMOTE CABLE CONTROL
Heavy duty remote cable controls are available for most Prince directional control valves. The compact
controller bodies are of die-cast metal construction and are available in either dual axis or single axis
configurations. Dual axis joysticks are constructed with steel swivels and anti-wear bushings. The high
strength flexible control cables are jacketed and have quick attach connections.
SINGLE SPOOL CONTROL DUAL AXIS CONTROLLER

REMOTE CONTROLLERS Prince Part No.
Dual Axis Joystick with lock 660170038
Single Axis 660170039
CONTROL CABLES
59 inches long (1.5 M) 660171150
79 inches long (2.0 M) 660171200 Handle can be
98 inches long (2.5 M) 660171250 attached vertical as
shown or horizontal
VALVE CONNECTION KITS
RD5000 series kit* 660170037
LVS kit (Series loader valve)* 660170029
LVR or LVT kit (Rear or Top
ported loader valve)** 660170030
SV stack valve or RD4100 kit*** 660170031
Series 20 stack valve kit**** 660170035
Note: One control cable and one connection kit is required for
each spool controlled. Order the remote controller, the control
cables and the connection kits as necessary to complete the
remote cable control assembly.
*Field convertible or order option 3, less handle assembly.

**Order loader valve handle option 8, tang end only.
***Field convertible from standard handle or order option 6,
clevis spool end only.
**** Field convertible or order option 3, less complete handle.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V45
MODEL LVT TWO SPOOL MONO-BLOCK LOADER VALVE
LVT SPECIFICATIONS
PARALLEL CIRCUIT
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE ............................... 3000 PSI
MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE ............................. 180°F
RECOMMENDED SYSTEM FILTRATION ............... ISO 4406 17/14
FLOW RATING ..................................................................... 10 GPM
WEIGHT ............................................................................. 14.6 LBS
5/16-18UNC MOUNTING HOLES ON BOTH TOP AND
BOTTOM OF VALVE.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Economical monoblock construction of high
tensile strength gray cast iron
• Load check on each spool
• Open center, and power beyond available
• 4 Position Float Spool for loader boom
• 4 Position Regen Spool for loader bucket
LVT
MODEL SPOOL & ACTION IN/OUT POWER
PORT SIZE RELIEF VALVE BEYOND HANDLE
NUMBER PORT
1 GR 1 A B 1
LVT #8 SAE in & out Standard A1-B1 4 Way 4 Position No Relief Standard Standard Std. Handles
Top Ported #6 SAE work ports Float, Spring center with Float detent Top In, Out Open Center 2
Two Spool A2-B2 4 Way 4 Position 5 and Power Beyond (Power Beyond Clevis Spool End Only
Loader Valve Regen, Spring center with Soft stop Standard: Port Plugged)
Direct B 3
RG Joystick for
A1-B1 4 Way 4 Position Acting Side Inlet, C
Adjustable Top Out & #8 SAE Power ports on bottom
Regen, Spring center with Soft stop (Use with GR,GB or BB)
A2-B2 4 Way 4 Position Float, 1500-3000 PSI Power Beyond Beyond
4
VALVES
Spring center with Float detent Set at 2000 PSI

NOTE: Joystick for ports on left
GB
*LV1GR5AB7-25 A-1 B1 4 Way 4 Position
6
Pilot Operated
Valve can be
converted in
(Use with GB or BB)
Float, Spring center with Float detent 5
The last two digits Adjustable the field Joystick for
A2-B2 4 Way 3 Position Spring Center
are the relief setting 500-3000 PSI ports on top (Use with
BG Set at 2000 PSI D RG, BG or BB)
in hundreds. A-1 B1 4 Way 3 Position Closed Center 6
Ex: 25=2500 PSI @ 10 Spring center FOR OTHER RELIEF (Often Used with Joystick for
A2-B2 4 Way 4 Position SETTINGS PLEASE no Relief Review
GPM. All reliefs are Float, Spring center with Float detent SPECIFY* Application)
ports on right
set at 10 GPM. (Use with BG or BB)
BB
A-1 B1 4 Way 3 Position 8
Spring center Tang Spool End Only
A2-B2 4 Way 3 Position Spring Center
STANDARD VALVES AVAILABLE: LVT PRESSURE DROP

All standard valves have a load check, a complete
handle assembly, and an adjustable relief. 110 SUS OIL AT 115°F
∆ P-PSI
SPOOL TYPE SPOOL ACTION (GPM) OUTLET WORK PORTS TO OUTLET
4 WAY 4 WAY 4 WAY 4 15 20 8

VALVE PART
NUMBER 4 POSITION 3 POSITION 4 POSITION A1-B1 A2-B2 6 35 34 20
FLOAT SPOOL REGEN SPOOL SPOOL 10 95 72 50
SPOOL SPOOL
SPRING SPRING
LVT1BB5AB1 X CENTER CENTER
FLOAT SPRING
LVT1GB5AB1 X X DETENT CENTER 660590017 SEAL KIT
FLOAT SPRING 660180078 SPRING CENTER KIT
LVT1GB5AB3 X X DETENT CENTER 660180076 SPRING CENTER FLOAT KIT
660180077 SPRING CENTER REGEN KIT
FLOAT REGEN 660180073 COMPLETE HANDLE KIT
LVT1GR5AB3 X X DETENT POSITION 660180011 HANDLE KIT
REGEN FLOAT 660180072 CLEVIS SUB-ASSY
LVT1RG5AB5 X X POSITION DETENT 660280004 RELIEF PLUG
SPRING FLOAT 660280009 RELIEF CART. OPTION 5
LVT1BG5AB5 X X CENTER DETENT 270006122 PILOT RELIEF CART. OPTION 6
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL LVR TWO SPOOL MONO-BLOCK LOADER VALVE
LVR SPECIFICATIONS
PARALLEL CIRCUIT
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE ....................... 3000 PSI
MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE ..................... 180°F
RECOMMENDED SYSTEM FILTRATION ...... ISO 4406 17/14
FLOW RATING ............................................................. 14 GPM
WEIGHT ...................................................................... 22.6 LBS
5/16-18UNC MOUNTING HOLES ON BOTH TOP AND
BOTTOM OF VALVE.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Economical monoblock construction of
high tensile strength gray cast iron
• Load check on each spool
• Open center, and power beyond available
• 4 Position Float Spool for loader boom
• 4 Position Regen Spool for loader bucket
LVR A
MODEL IN/OUT POWER
NUMBER PORT SIZE SPOOL & ACTION RELIEF VALVE PORT BEYOND HANDLE
LVT 1 GR 1 A B 1
Top Ported #10 SAE in/out Standard A-B 4 Way 4 Position No Relief All Ports Standard Std. Handles
Two Spool #8 SAE work Float, Spring center with Float detent On End of Open Center 2
Loader Valve C-D 4 Way 4 Position 5 Value (Power Beyond Clevis Spool End Only
2 Regen, Spring center with Soft stop. Standard: Port Plugged)
3
#8 SAE in/out Direct
RG C Joystick for
#6 SAE work Acting
A-B 4 Way 4 Position #8 SAE Power power beyond
Adjustable
Regen, Spring center with Soft stop. Beyond on right
1500-3000 PSI
C-D 4 Way 4 Position Float, (Use with BG or BB)
Set at 2000 PSI
Spring center with Float detent. D 4
GB 6 Closed Joystick for power beyond
VALVES
Pilot Operated Center on bottom
A-B 4 Way 4 Position
Float, Spring center with Float detent Adjustable (Use with RG, BG, or BB)
C-D 4 Way 3 Position Spring centered. 500-2000 PSI 5
Set at 2000 PSI NOTE: Joystick for power beyond
*LVR1GB5AB7-25 BG Valve can be on left
A-B 4 Way 3 Position FOR OTHER RELIEF converted in (Use with GB or BB)
The last two digits Spring centered. SETTINGS PLEASE the field 6
are the relief setting C-D 4 Way 4 Position SPECIFY* Joystick for power
Float, Spring center with Float detent.
in hundreds. beyond on top
Ex: 25=2500 PSI @ 10 BB (Use with GR, GB or BB)
A-B 4 Way 3 Position 8
GPM. All reliefs are Spring centered.
C-D 4 Way 3 Position Tang Spool End Only
set at 10 GPM.
Spring centered (no float, no regen).
LVR PRESSURE DROP
∆ P-PSI
(GPM) OUTLET A OR B TO OUTLET
4 4 14 4
1. PLEASE NOTE that this closed center option does not provide for the drain off of standby spool
leakage. This can allow a very small amount of oil to enter the work ports when in neutral. Closed 8 21 31 15
center option is often used with no relief. Review application. 14 64 72 46
STANDARD VALVES AVAILABLE: PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

All standard valves have a load check, a complete 660590018 SEAL KIT
handle assembly, and an adjustable relief. 660590016 POWER BEYOND
SEAL KIT
660180079 SPRING CENTER KIT
SPOOL TYPE SPOOL ACTION 660180074 SPRING CENTER
FLOAT KIT
4 WAY 4 WAY 660180075 SPRING CENTER
4 POSITION 4 WAY 4 POSITION 4 Way A-B C-D REGEN KIT
VALVE PART 660180073 COMPLETE HANDLE KIT
FLOAT 3 POSITION FLOAT 3 POSITION SPOOL SPOOL
NUMBER 660180011 HANDLE KIT
A-B A-B C-D C-D
SPOOL SPOOL SPOOL SPOOL 660180072 CLEVIS SUB-ASSY
660280004 RELIEF PLUG
660280009 RELIEF CART. OPTION 5
FLOAT SPRING 270006122 PILOT RELIEF CART.
LVR1GB5AB6 X X OPTION 6
DETENT CENTER
660301001 OPEN CENTER PLUG
LVR1BG5AB4 X X SPRING FLOAT 660390008 POWER BEYOND CART.
CENTER DETENT (#8 SAE)
CATV 01-04-09-01
V47
MODEL LVT/VR MOUNTING DIMENSIONS AND OPERATIONS
VALVES
4 WAY 4 POSITION REGEN SPOOL OPERATION

This spool option allows for these four functions of the loader bucket cylinders: “NEUTRAL”, cylinder ports blocked to hold bucket
in place; “BUCKET ROLLBACK” directs oil to hose 1 to retract bucket cylinder; “BUCKET TIP” directs oil to hose 2 to extend the
bucket cylinder with full pressure (Please Note there is a soft stop at this handle position); “BUCKET REGEN” combines the oil
from the tractor pump with the oil returning from hose 1 and it directs it to hose 2 to tip the bucket faster (referred to as REGEN-
ERATION or “REGEN”). It is necessary to push the handle past the soft stop at the normal bucket tip position to get to the regen
position. Also Please Note that the cylinder force will be reduced when in the regen position.
4 WAY 4 POSITION FLOAT SPOOL OPERATION

This spool option allows for these four functions of the loader boom cylinders: “NEUTRAL”, cylinder ports blocked to hold boom in
place; “BOOM RAISE” directs oil to hose 3 to extend boom cylinders; “BOOM LOWER” directs oil to hose 4 to retract the boom
cylinders with full pressure (Please Note there is a soft stop at this handle position); “BOOM FLOAT” connects all boom cylinder
ports to tank allowing the boom to fall to the ground. It is necessary to push the handle past the soft stop at the normal boom
down position. There is a detent that will hold handle in the float position. While in the float position the loader boom cylinders will
move up and down or “FLOAT” to match the ground level as the tractor moves forward or backward.
Joystick Handle
The joystick handle will
operate both spools using
one lever handle. The two
spools can be operated
independently or at the same
time depending upon handle
movement. Because we
allow for maximum mounting
flexibility, we have 4 options
for the LVT, 2 options for the
LVS and 4 options for the
1 2 3 4
ROLL BACK TIP RAISE LOWER LVR. The handle shift pattern JOYSTICK HANDLE OPERATION
for all is shown at right. LOOKING AT HANDLE KNOB
CATV 01-04-09-01
LOG SPLITTER
CONTROL VALVE
VALVES
Model LS3000
SINGLE SPOOL
MONO-BLOCK 20GPM
Model RD2500
CATV 01-04-09-01
V49
MODEL LS3000 DIMENSIONAL DATA
SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Max design and test pressure 2750 PSI
2. Max tank port pressure-150 PSI
3. Flow rating-25 GPM max.
4. Relief valve setting-2250 PSI
5. This valve has one position pressure
release (handle in) with spring center to
neutral
6. Weight: 10 lbs.
7. Recommended filtration-ISO 4406 17/14
8. Max operation temp-180°F
9. In exposed environments do not mount
with spool vertical and handle end
down.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Hydraulically balanced, hard chrome plated spool • Relief valve adjustable up to 2750 PSI
• Handle can be installed in “up” or “down” position • Tandem center spool (in neutral position, both work
• Detent release pressure adjustable from 1000 to 2000 PSI ports blocked, pump unloaded to tank)
• For use with system flows up to 25 GPM • Ideal for logsplitter applications. Available with 3/4"
VALVES
NPTF work ports for higher flow applications
MODEL RD2500 DIMENSIONAL DATA

SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Max design and test pressure 3000 PSI
2. Max tank port pressure-150 PSI
3. Flow rating-20 GPM max.
4. Relief valve setting-1500 PSI
5. Weight: 9.5 Ibs.
6. Recommended filtration-ISO 4406 17/14
7. Max operation temp-180°F
8. In exposed environments, do not mount
with spool vertical and handle end down.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Economical monoblock construction of high • Open center to closed center conversion available on
tensile strength gray cast iron some models
• Load check • For use with system flows to 20 GPM
• Hard chrome plated spool • For use with system pressures to 3000 PSI
• Adjustable ball spring relief
CATV 01-04-09-01
LS-3000, RD-2500 PRESSURE DROP, RELIEF CURVE AND STANDARD MODELS
PRESSURE DROP
110 SUS OIL AT 115° ∆ P-PSI
RD-2500 LS-3000
FLOW INLET TO INLET TO A OR B INLET TO INLET TO A OR B
(GPM) OUTLET A OR B TO OUTLET OUTLET A OR B TO OUTLET
5 5 20 8 3 5 4
10 9 39 15 5 11 13
15 19 60 32 7 23 24
20 31 90 54 11 40 42
STANDARD VALVES AVAILABLE

All standard valves have a load check (except LS3000 models), a complete lever handle assembly, and an adjustable ball-spring relief, see
below for settings. For other relief settings, please specify.
SPOOL TYPE SPOOL ACTION
PRESSURE RELIEF CONVERTIBLE
VALVE PART SPRING RELEASE SETTING FROM OPEN
4 WAY WORK To Specify CENTER
NUMBER 4 WAY 3 POSITION 3 WAY CENTER 3 POSITION DETENT IN/OUT PORT
3 POSITION 3 POSITION TO DETENT SPRING PORT SIZE other settings TO CLOSED
MOTOR SIZE see next page CENTER
NEUTRAL CENTERTO
NEUTRAL
RD-2555-T4-ESA1 X X 1/2 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 1500 PSI @ NO

12 GPM
RD-2575-T4-ESA1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 1500 PSI @ YES

12 GPM
RD-2575-T4-EDA1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 1500 PSI @ YES

12 GPM
VALVES
1500 PSI @
RD-2575-T3-ESA1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF YES
12 GPM
1500 PSI @
RD-2575-M4-ESA1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF YES
12 GPM
RD-2508-T4-ESA1 X X #10 SAE #8 SAE 1500 PSI @ NO

12 GPM
RD-2575-M4-EDA1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 1500 PSI @ YES

12 GPM
LS-3000-1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 2250 PSI @ NO

3 GPM
2250 PSI @
LS-3000-2 X X 3/4 NPTF 3/4 NPTF 3 GPM NO

12 GPM
12 GPM
2250 PSI @
LS-3040-1 X X 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF NO
13 GPM
4 WAY SPOOL 3 WAY SPOOL 4 WAY MOTOR SPOOL LOAD CHECK

This spool option is used to This spool option is used to This spool option is used to control a The load check feature is
control a double acting cylinder. In control a single acting cylinder reversing motor or a double acting standard on all RD-2500 valve
neutral both of the work ports are or a uni-directional motor. In cylinder. In neutral the work ports are models. The load check will
blocked and oil goes through the neutral the work port is blocked connected to tank and oil goes through prevent the fall of a cylinder as
open center passage to the the open center passage to the outlet. the spool is shifted. It does this
outlet. This is the most popular and oil goes through the open
center passage to the outlet. The This allows a motor to free-wheel or a by preventing the backflow of oil
spool option. cylinder to float in the neutral position. from work port to inlet. The
“B” work port is plugged for this
pump must build up enough
option.
pressure to overcome the
pressure on the work port and
lift the load check poppet. The
load check has nothing to do
with holding a cylinder when the
spool is in neutral.
CATV 01-04-09-01
V51
LS-3000-1L/S-3000-2 PARTS BREAKDOWN
NOTE: The Spool is select fit to the valve

body at the factory and therefore body and
spool are not available as repair parts.
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 660130001 HANDLE KIT
2 660125004 RELIEF KIT
NON-STANDARD RELIEF SETTINGS 3 660130004 SPRING CENTER KIT
LS-3000-1-25 4 660330003 DETENT SLEEVE & PISTON SUB-ASSY
5 660330002 DETENT ADJUSTING CARTRIDGE
6 660130007 COMPLETE PRESSURE RELEASE
The last two digits are the relief setting in DETENT KIT
hundreds. Ex: 25=2500 PSI @ 3 GPM. All 7 660530001 SEAL KIT (CONTAINS SEALS FOR
reliefs are set at 3 GPM. SPOOL AND DETENT)
RD-2555-T4-ESA 1 PARTS BREAKDOWN
OPEN TO CLOSED CENTER CONVERSION

VALVES
This feature allows an otherwise open center

valve to be converted to closed center
operation. As shown, a 3/8 NPTF pipe plug is
installed in the bottom of the outlet port to block
open center passage. A pipe thread sealant
should be used. This feature is standard on all
valves with 3/4 NPTF inlet and outlet ports. The
pipe plug is included with these models. Discard
the pipe plug if the valve is used on an open
center application. PLEASE NOTE that this
closed center option does not provide for the
drain off of standby spool leakage. This can
allow a very small amount of oil to enter the
work ports when in neutral.
NOTE: The Spool is select fit to the valve body at the

factory and therefore body and spool are not available
as repair parts.
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 660130001 HANDLE KIT
NON-STANDARD RELIEF SETTINGS 2 660125004 RELIEF KIT
RD2575-T4-ESA1-25 3 660525001 SEAL KIT
4 660125002 SPRING CENTER KIT
The last two digits are the relief setting in 5 660150015 LOAD CHECK KIT
hundreds. Ex: 25=2500 PSI @ 3 GPM. All 6 660125001 3 POSITION DETENT KIT
reliefs are set at 3 GPM.
CATV 01-04-09-01
PRIORITY FLOW REGULATOR
DESCRIPTION:
This valve is a screw-in cartridge style, pressure
compensated fixed-flow priority flow regulator. The
valve delivers a constant flow to the priority port
regardless of pressure on the secondary or
primary circuit. All ports can be fully pressurized.
SPECIFICATIONS
MAXIMUM PRESSURE ..............................3000 PSI
MAXIMUM INLET FLOW..............................15 GPM
MAXIMUM CONTROL FLOW ........................5 GPM
FLOW ACCURACY 1.5 to 5 GPM ....................±10 %
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE ............................180°F
RECOMMENDED FILTRATION........ISO 4406 17/14
THE CARTRIDGE IS ALL STEEL CONSTRUCTION
THE VALVE BODIES ARE HIGH STRENGTH
ALUMINUM
INSTALLATION TORQUE 10-12 FT-LBS
VALVES
CATV 01-04-09-01
V53
PRESSURE COMPENSATED
ADJUSTABLE FLOW CONTROL VALVES
The PRINCE valve models RD-100 and RD-1900 are pressure compen-
MODEL RD-100 sated adjustable flow control valves. By rotating the handle the flow out the
TOP PORT FLOW CONTROL “CF” or controlled flow port can be varied from approximately 0 to the
maximum controlled flow shown in the chart below. Any remaining flow is
bypassed to the “EF” or excess flow port. This flow can be used to power
another circuit or can be returned to tank. Once the controlled flow is set it
will remain nearly constant with variations in pressure on either the con-
trolled or excess flow ports. Please note, if during operation the controlled
flow port is blocked the valve will compensate in sucy a way as to shut off
flow to the excess port.
These valves can also be used as a restrictive flow control by plugging

the excess flow port.
MODEL RD-1900 The PRINCE valve models RDRS-100 and RDRS-1900 have a built in
SIDE PORT FLOW CONTROL adjustable pressure relief. For these models the excess flow port must be
connected to tank.
It should be noted that whenever these or any valve is used to bypass or

restrict flow heat will be generated. Steps maybe required to keep oil
temperature from becoming too high.
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS: FIELD REPAIR KITS:

Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Handle hardware 660301002
Pressure: 3000 psi max Seal Kit 660501001
Weight: RD-100 8 lbs.
RD-1900 9 lbs.
STANDARD MODELS AVAILABLE

VALVES
For relief settings other than standard

MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZES CONTROLLED RDRS-150-16-20
RDRS-1950-16-20
FLOW RANGE
RD-137-8 RD-1937-8 3/8 NPTF 0-8 GPM
RD-150-8 RD-1950-8 1/2 NPTF 0-8 GPM
RD-150-16 RD-1950-16 1/2 NPTF 0-16 GPM Relief Pressure in
Hundreds Example:
RD-175-16 RD-1975-16 3/4 NPTF 0-16 GPM 20=2000 PSI
RD-175-30 RD-1975-30 3/4 NPTF 0-30 GPM
RD-108-8 RD-1908-8 #8 SAE 0-8 GPM
RD-112-30 RD-1912-30 #12 SAE 0-30 GPM
RDRS-150-16 RDRS-1950-16 1/2 NPTF 0-16 GPM These models have built in relief set at
1500 psi @ 10 GPM.
RDRS-175-30 RDRS-1975-30 3/4 NPTF 0-30 GPM
Special combinations of port size and controlled flow range are available in O E M quantities.
Please consult yoursales representative.
SYMBOL
RD-100 &
RD-1900
RDRS-100 &
RDRS-1900
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL RD-100 AND RD-1900
PARTS BREAKDOWN AND DIMENSIONS
MODEL RD-100
RDRS MODEL
RELIEF VALVE PARTS
MODEL RD-1900
VALVES
APPLICATIONS:
As illustrated in the circuit below the RD-100/RD-1900 can be used to supply another circuit or returned to tank.
adjustable flow control valves can be used to control Instead of the control flow directly supplying a motor it can be
the speed of a hydraulic motor. In this circuit oil from a used as a adjustable priority divider and provide adjustable
source is directed into the inlet of the valve. By priority flow to a directional control valve bank. Also as
moving the handle the flow can be varied from approxi- illustrated the RD-100/RD-1900 can be used as a restrictive
mately zero when handle is vertical to maximum when type flow control. In this circuit the excess flow port is
the handle is horizontal. Oil not going to the controlled blocked. This would normally be used with a pressure com-
flow port is bypassed to the excess flow port where it pensated pump or in a closed center system.
BYPASS FLOW CIRCUIT RESTRICTIVE FLOW CIRCUIT
CATV 01-04-09-01
V55
CONSTANT VOLUME
PRIORITY DIVIDERS
MODEL RD-400 The PRINCE model RD-400 is a constant volume priority divider. It can
FIXED FLOW PRIORITY be used in applications where two circuits are to be supplied by a single
DIVIDER pump such as power steering systems. In operation the flow of oil
supplied to the inlet is divided into two flows, the priority flow and the
excess flow. The priority flow will remain nearly constant with variations
in pressure on either the priority or excess flow port and will also remain
nearly constant with variations in the inlet flow.
The priority flow GPM is determined by a fixed orifice inside the main
spool. The desired priority GPM must be specified with model number,
see below. The PRINCE model RD-400R provides the same function as
described above with the addition of a built in pressure relief for the
priority port only. This relief is internally adjustable and requires a
separate line to tank. The relief is factory set at 1500 PSI.
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS:
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Weight: RD-400 7 Ibs.
Pressure: 3000 psi max RD-400-R 7.5 Ibs.
MODEL RD-400 R
FIXED FLOW PRIORITY
DIVIDER WITH PRIORITY
PRESSURE RELIEF STANDARD MODELS AVAILABLE PRIORITY
PORT SIZE GPM
1.5
VALVE INLET AND PRIORITY 2
MODEL NUMBER EXCESS PORT PORT 3
4
RD-400- _ RD-400R- __ 3/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF
VALVES
5
RD-405- _ RD-405R- __ 3/4 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 6
RD-412- _ RD-412R- __ #12 SAE #8 SAE 7
RD-450- _ RD-450R- __ 1/2 NPTF 3/8 NPTF 8
RD-455- _ RD-455R- __ 1/2 NPTF 1/2 NPTF 9
RD-477- _ RD-477R- __ 3/4 NPTF 3/4 NPTF 10
12
To complete the model number fill in the blank with the 14
desired priority GPM from the list at right.
EX: RD-400-3 for 3 GPM priority flow; RD-405R-6 for 6 GPM
priority flow.
MODEL RD-500 The PRINCE model RD-500 is an adjustable constant volume priority
ADJUSTABLE FLOW divider. This valve provides the same function as the PRINCE model
PRIORITY DIVIDER RD-400 except the priority flow is adjustable from 2 GPM to 12 GPM.
The priority flow is set using the adjusting screw and is then locked in
place to maintain setting. This allows setting to be fine tuned in the field
to the exact flow needed.
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow
Pressure: 3000 psi max
Weight: 7 Ibs.
VALVE MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZE
RD-537 3/8 NPTF

RD-550 1/2 NPTF
RD-575 3/4 NPTF
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL RD-400, RD-400R AND RD-500
RD-400
SYMBOL
SEAL KIT NO. 660504001
RD-400R
SYMBOL
VALVES
RD-500
SYMBOL
NOTE: spools are not available separately

CATV 01-04-09-01
V57
PRESSURE COMPENSATED
PROPORTIONAL FLOW DIVIDERS
MODEL RD-200 The PRINCE model RD-200 valve is a pressure compensated proportional flow divider.
PROPORTIONAL DIVIDER The standard models of this valve will take one inlet flow and split it into two nearly
equal outlet flows. The valve is also available with special ratio spools which will split
the flow into two flows proportional to the ratio specified. Because the valve is pres-
sure compensated the valve will maintain the divider ratio with quite different loads on
the outlet ports as long as the inlet flow is within the range given in the chart below.
Flow through the RD-200 cannot be reversed.
The PRINCE model RD-300 provides the same function as the RD-200 with the added
feature of free reverse checks. This allows the reverse flow of oil from the outlet ports
to the inlet port. The reverse flow is not pressure compensated.
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Weight: RD-200 7 Ibs.
MODEL RD-300 Pressure: 3000 psi max RD-300 7 Ibs.
PROPORTIONAL DIVIDER
WITH FREE RETURN CHECKS STANDARD MODELS AVAILABLE
DIVIDER INLET FLOW
MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZE
RATIO RANGE
RD-237-8 RD-337-8 50:50 3/8 NPTF 4-8 GPM

RD-250-16 RD-350-16 RD-350-AB-16 50:50 1/2 NPTF 8-19 GPM
RD-275-30 RD-375-30 RD-375-AB-30 50:50 3/4 NPTF 16-30 GPM
RD-208-8 RD-308-8 50:50 3/4 16 SAE 4-8 GPM
RD-212-30 RD-312-30 50:50 1-1/16-12 SAE 16-30 GPM
In OEM quantities the RD-200 and RD-300 valves are available with special divider ratios. Ratios
available are: 2:1, 80:20, 70:30, 60:40, and others as required. When ordering specify the divider ratio
after the model number EX: RD-250-16 (70:30)
MODEL RD-500P The PRINCE model RD-500P is a pressure compensated proportional flow divider
VALVES
PROPORTIONAL DIVIDER valve with one fixed and one adjustable orifice. This valve provides the same function
WITH ADJUSTABLE ORIFICE as the RD-200 except the divider ratio can be changed in the field.
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Weight: RD-500P 7 Ibs.
MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZE INLET FLOW RANGE
RD-537P-8 3/8 NPTF 4-8 GPM
RD-550P-16 1/2 NPTF 8-16 GPM
RD-575P-30 3/4 NPTF 16-30 GPM
The PRINCE valve model RD-1000S (IP/ED) is an internally piloted adjustable

MODEL RD-1000S (IP/ED) sequence valve. This valve will prevent the flow of oil from going to the sequence
INTERNALLY PILOTED port until the pressure on the inlet port reaches the sequence pressure. The se-
SEQUENCE VALVE WITH quence pressure is adjustable within the range given in chart below. A built in check
EXTERNAL DRAIN valve allows flow from sequence port to inlet. To operate properly the drain port
must be connected to tank. This valve is a spool type sequence valve and will
provide smooth operation but should not be used in applications that require low
leakage.
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Weight: 7 Ibs.
SPRING SEQUENCE
MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZE INLET DRAIN PRESSURE
AND SEQUENCE PORT
L 40-350 PSI
RD-1050S_(IP/ED) 1/2 NPTF 3/8 NPTF M 350-1700 PSI
RD-1075S_(IP/ED) 3/4 NPTF 3/8 NPTF H 1400-2500 PSI
To complete the model number fill in the blank with the spring letter that
corresponds to desired counter balance pressure range.
EX: RD-1050SM (IP/ED) for 350-1700 psi spring range.
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL RD-200, RD-300, RD-300AB, RD-500P,
AND RD-1000S PARTS BREAKDOWN AND DIMENSIONS
RD-200
SYMBOL
RD-300 SYMBOL
VALVES
RD-500S
SYMBOL
RD-1000S SYMBOL

CATV 01-04-09-01
V59
DIFFERENTIAL POPPET STYLE
RELIEF VALVES - RV AND DRV SERIES
MODEL RV
DIFFERENTIAL POPPET
The PRINCE valve model RV is a differential poppet type inline relief.
INLINE RELIEF The valve is made up of a relief cartridge and a cast iron valve body.
The differential poppet type relief provides smooth quiet performance
with a minimum variation between cracking and full flow pressures. This
type relief is also less sensitive to system contamination. The model RV
is well suited as a system relief up to 30 GPM and 3000 psi. It is
available in two pressure ranges and both an externally adjustable and
shim adjustable version.
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Weight: 3 Ibs.
MODEL DRV
DIFFERENTIAL POPPET
DOUBLE RELIEF
The PRINCE valve model DRV is a differential poppet type double relief.
This valve uses the same relief cartridge as the model RV. The double
relief is used in systems that require cross over relief protection such a
reversible hydraulic motor, or systems that require a cushion valve such
as double acting cylinders.
VALVES
Capacity: 30 gpm max inlet flow Weight: 5.5 lbs.

MODEL RV-O The PRINCE valve model RV-0 is the differential poppet relief cartridge
DIFFERENTIAL POPPET used in many valve models. It is available preset to install into RV
RELIEF CARTRIDGE valves in the field or into a custom application. This relief cartridge can
also be used in the RD5100, RD5200, RD5300 and SV stack valve inlet
section.
MODEL NUMBER MODEL NUMBER VALVE TYPE RELIEF SETTING PORT SIZE
RV-1H DRV-1HH ADJUSTABLE1500-3000 PSI 2000 PSI @ 10 GPM #12 SAE
RV-2H DRV-2HH ADJUSTABLE1500-3000 PSI 2000 PSI @ 10 GPM 3/4" NPTF

RV-4H DRV-4HH ADJUSTABLE1500-3000 PSI 2000 PSI @ 10 GPM 1/2" NPTF
RV-2L DRV-2LL ADJUSTABLE 500-1500 PSI 1000 PSI @ 10 GPM 3/4" NPTF
CATV 01-04-09-01
MODEL RV AND DRV SPECIAL MODELS AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
SPECIAL MODEL RV RELIEF VALVES

Other relief valve models not listed on previ-
ous page are available in OEM quantities. To
select a model number use the order code
matrix shown at right. Consult a sales repre-
sentative if options other than those listed are
required.
SPECIAL MODEL DRV

RELIEF VALVES
Other relief valve models not
listed on previous page are
available in OEM quantities. To
select a model number using
the order code matrix at right.
Consult a sales representative
if options other than those
listed are required.
RV-SERIES MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

RV-SERIES RELIEF CURVES
VALVES
DRV-SERIES MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
MACHINING DIMENSIONS
FOR RELIEF VALVE
CARTRIDGE
FIELD CONVERSION KITS:

660250002 ADJ. RELIEF CARTRIDGE 1500-3000 PSI RV ONLY
660250003 ADJ. RELIEF CARTRIDGE 500-1500 PSI*
660250004 NON-ADJUSTABLE RELIEF CARTRIDGE 1500-3000 PSI RV ONLY
660250005 NON-ADJUSTABLE RELIEF CARTRIDGE 500-1500 PSI*
660250011 ADJ. RELIEF CARTRIDGE 1500-3000 PSI DRV ONLY
660250012 NON-ADJUSTABLE RELIEF CARTRIDGE 1500-3000 DRV ONLY
660590001 RV SEAL KIT
660590004 DRV SEAL KIT
670300005 1500-3000 PSI RELIEF SPRING
670300006 500-1500 PSI RELIEF SPRING
•NOTE: THESE CARTRIDGES ARE THE SAME ON BOTH RV AND DRV VALVES
CATV 01-04-09-01
V61
MODEL RD-1800 PRESSURE RELIEF
MODEL RD-900 SELECTOR VALVE
MODEL RD-1800 The PRINCE valve model RD-1800 is a direct acting ball/spring type pres-
sure relief. The valve is compact and simple in design. This type relief is fast
BALL/SPRING TYPE opening and is well suited for pressure spike protection. The performance
DIRECT ACTING RELIEF curves below indicate the low cracking pressure typical to ball/spring reliefs.
Please refer to the model RV relief for a system pressure relief. The valve is
available with a standard steel seat, model RD-1800S, or with a hardened
seat, model RD-1800H. Both models are externally adjustable.
SYMBOL
Weight: 2 Ib.
Adjustment Range: 1000 PSI to 2500 PSI
PRESSURE (PSI)
VALVES

MODEL # PORT SIZES MAX FLOW
RD-1837S 3/8 NPTF 8 GPM
RD-1850H 1/2 NPTF 16 GPM NOTE: Relief settings are 1500 PSI @ 12 GPM
RD-1850S 1/2 NPTF 16 GPM For non-standard relief settings specify PSI in
hundreds and GPM after model number
RD-1875S 3/4 NPTF 20 GPM EX: RD-1850S-12-10 for 1200 PSI @ 10 GPM.
The PRINCE valve model RD-900 is a manual 3 way 2 position

MODEL RD-900 selector valve. This valve will allow one pump source to supply two
SELECTOR VALVE separate circuits. Pushing the handle in diverts oil flow to port away
from handle. Pulling the handle out diverts oil flow to port nearest
handle.
SYMBOL
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Capicity: 30 gpm max inlet flow
Weight: 7 lbs.
STANDARD MODELS
MODEL # PORT SIZES
RD-950 1/2 NPTF

RD-975 3/4 NPTF
SEAL KIT 660590025
CATV 01-04-09-01
SINGLE SELECTOR VALVE
The PRINCE valve model SS is a manual 3-way 2 position selector valve. This
MODEL SS SELECTOR valve will allow one pump source to supply two circuits. With the standard
selector spool pulling the spool out diverts oil to port nearest handle, pushing
the spool in diverts oil to the port away from the handle. The valve has an inlet
onSINGLE
both the bottom and frontVALVE
SELECTOR of the valve body. Special options include lever
handle and a float spool. The float spool connects the inlet to both outlets when
the spool is pushed in and block both outlets when spool is pulled out.
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS: KITS:
Capacity: 20 gpm max inlet flow END CAP KIT 660170009
Pressure: 2500 psi max LEVER HANDLE KIT 660170007
SEAL KIT 660590006
Weight: 4 lbs. KNOB PART NO. 670400031
SNAPPING PART NO. 230017021
CLEVIS PART NO. 671900011
SPRING OFFSET 660170008
SYMBOL STANDARD MODELS AVAILABLE
MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZE DESCRIPTION
SS-2A1D 1/2 NPTF SELECTOR WITH KNOB HANDLE

SS-3A1D #8 SAE SELECTOR WITH KNOB HANDLE
SS-2A1A 1/2 NPTF SELECTOR WITHOUT ATTACHMENTS
SS-2A1E 1/2 NPTF SELECTOR WITH LEVER HANDLE
SS-2A1B 1/2 NPTF SELECTOR WITH CLEVIS
VALVES
SPECIAL MODEL SS SELECTOR VALVES
Other selector valves not listed as standard above
are available in OEM quantities. To select a model
number use the order code matrix at right. Consult a
sales representative if options other than those
listed are required.
LEVER HANDLE OPTION E

MODEL SS KIT NO. 660170007
KNOB OPTION D
PART NO. 670400031
CATV 01-04-09-01
V63
MODEL DS DOUBLE SELECTOR VALVE
The PRINCE valve model DS is a manual 6-way 2 position double

selector valve. This valve will divert the flow going to two separate
hydraulic circuits. For example two double acting cylinders or two
reversible hydraulic motors can be operated by one four-way valve.
When the double selector spool is pushed in, the C and D ports (top
ports) are connected to the A and E ports (right ports). When the
selector spool is pulled out, the C and D ports are connected to the B
and F ports (left ports). An optional series/parallel spool is also
available. This spool will run two reversible hydraulic motors in series
when the spool is out and in parallel when the spool is pushed in.
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS: KITS:
Capacity: 40 GPM max inlet flow LEVER HANDLE 660170001
Pressure: 2500 psi SPRING OFFSET KIT 660170003
Weight: 9 lbs. 2 POSITION DETENT KIT 660170004
END CAP KIT 660170010
SEAL KIT 660590005
KNOB PART NO. 670400029
SNAP RING PART NO. 230017018
STANDARD MODELS AVAILABLE CLEVIS PART NO. 671400059
MODEL # PORT SIZE DESCRIPTION

DS-4A1E 3/4 NPTF DOUBLE SELECTOR WITH LEVER HANDLE SPECIAL MODEL DS SELECTOR VALVES Other
DS-5A1E #12 SAE DOUBLE SELECTOR WITH LEVER HANDLE double selector valves not listed as standard are
DS-4A1D 3/4 NPTF DOUBLE SELECTOR WITH KNOB HANDLE available in OEM quantities. To select a model
number use the order code matrix below. Consult a
DS-4A1A 3/4 NPTF DOUBLE SELECTOR WITHOUT ATTACHMENTS
sales representative if options other than those
DS-1A1E 1/2 NPTF DOUBLE SELECTOR WITH LEVER HANDLE listed are required.
VALVES
CATV 01-04-09-01
PILOT-OPERATED CHECK VALVES
The PRINCE valve model RD-1400 is a double pilot-operated lock valve.

MODEL RD-1400 This valve will lock a cylinder in place when a directional control valve is in
LOCK VALVE DOUBLE the neutral position. In operation oil is directed to one of the valve ports
PILOT-OPERATED and oil can free flow to the corresponding cylinder port. The pressure on
this valve port will shift the pilot spool opening the opposite check valve.
This will allow oil to return through the opposite check valve. This valve has
a hardened steel seat and steel ball and therefore should not be used in
applications requiring absolutely zero leakage. When using a pilot operated
check to lower a heavy load the valve may chatter. An orifice in the line in
some cases may be beneficial
VALVES
MODEL NUMBER PORT SIZE Capicity: 30 gpm max inlet flow
RD-1450 1/2 NPTF Weight: 7 lbs.
RD-1475 3/4 NPTF Pilot Ratio: 4:1
MODEL RD-1600 The PRINCE valve model RD-1600 is a pilot operated check valve. This
PILOT OPERATED valve blocks oil from flowing from the cylinder port to the valve port until
sufficient pressure is applied to the pilot port. Oil can free flow from the valve
CHECK VALVE
port to the cylinder port. The valve has a two stage poppet allowing smooth
chatter free operation.

VALVE SPECIFICATIONS: MODEL NUMBER VALVE AND CYL. PORT PILOT PORT
Capicity: 20 gpm max inlet flow RD-1637 3/8 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
Weight: 2 lbs. RD-1650 1/2 NPTF 1/4 NPTF
Pilot Ratio: 4:1
Decompression Ratio: 16:1
RD-1608 #8 SAE (3/4-16) #4 SAE (7/16-20)
CATV 01-04-09-01
V65
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION To convert into multiply by
Hydraulic Fluid – A good quality mineral based hydraulic fluid is
recommended. Any fluid used must be compatible with the BUNA -N Seals meters inches 39.37
typically used in the standard valves. centimeters inches .3937
millimeters inches .03937
Thread Sealant – Use of a quality non-Teflon thread sealant is
inches meters .0254
recommended for tapered pipe threads. (use of Teflon tape is not recom-
mended.) inches centimeters 2.54
inches millimeters 25.4
MISC. HYDRAULIC FORMULA AND DESIGN INFORMATION
liters gallons .2642
cylinder area (sq. in.) = cylinder dia.2 (inches) x .7854
cylinder force (lbs.) = cylinder area (sq. in.) x psi gallons liters 3.785
cylinder speed (in/sec) = 3.85 x gpm / cylinder area
hydraulic horse power = psi x gpm / 1714
kg/cm2 psi 14.22
hp to drive a pump = psi x gpm / (1714 x pump efficiency) kg/cm 2 bar .9807
hydraulic motor hp = torque (in.-lbs.) x rpm / 63025
hydraulic motor torque = horse power x 63025 / rpm kg/cm 2 atm .9678
hydraulic motor speed (rpm) = 231 x gpm / cubic in. per rev.
1 horsepower is equivalent to: psi kg/cm 2 .0703
746 watts or .746 kilowatts psi bar .0690
2545 BTU/hour or 42.2 BTU/min.
550 ft.-lbs./sec. or 33000 ft.-lbs./min. psi atm .0680
psi in.-hg. 2.0360
PRESSURE DROP ACROSS AN ORIFICE
In the chart below gives the approximate pressure drop, in psi, across an orifice. This bar psi 14.50
chart can be used for hydraulic oil only. bar kg/cm 2 1.020
bar atm .9869
GPM Orifice Size
.047 .062 .078 .093 .109 .125 .140 .156 .187 .218 .250
gallons cubic inches 231
1 432 143 57 28 15 – – – – – – cubic inches gallons .0043
2 1729 571 228 113 60 35 22 14 – – –
3 3890 1285 513 254 134 78 49 32 16 – – ft.-lbs. kg-m .1383
4 – 2284 912 451 239 138 88 57 28 15 –
5 – 3569 1425 705 374 216 137 89 43 23 13
kg-m ft.-lbs. 7.233
6 – – 2051 1015 538 311 198 128 62 34 19
8 – – 3647 1805 956 553 351 228 110 60 35
10 – – – 2820 1494 884 549 356 173 93 54
12 – – – – 2152 1244 791 513 248 134 78 MOTOR HORSEPOWER TO DRIVE A
15
20
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3362
–
1944
3456
1235
2196
801
1425
388
690
210
374
121
216
HYDRAULIC PUMP
25 – – – – – – 3432 2226 1078 584 337 Pump Efficiency 90%, Formula: HP=GPM x PSI/(1714 x Efficiency)
30 – – – – – – – 3205 1552 841 486
GPM PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER 100 200 250 300 400 500 750 1000 1250 1500 2000 2500 3000 4000
FORCE (lbs.) 0.5
1.0
0.03
0.06
0.06
0.13
0.08
0.16
0.10
0.19
0.13
0.26
0.16
0.32
0.24
0.49
0.32
0.65
0.41
0.81
0.49
0.97
0.65
1.30
0.81
1.62
0.97
1.94
1.30
2.59
force (lbs) = cylinder area (sq. in.) x pressure (psi) 1.5 0.10 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.39 0.49 0.73 0.97 1.22 1.46 1.94 2.43 2.92 3.89
To determine force developed by a cylinder in 2.0 0.13 0.26 0.32 0.39 0.52 0.65 0.97 1.30 1.62 1.94 2.59 3.24 3.89 5.19
VALVES
2.5 0.16 0.32 0.41 0.49 0.65 0.81 1.22 1.62 1.03 2.43 3.24 4.05 4.86 6.48
extension use chart below. To determine force 3.0 0.19 0.39 0.49 0.58 0.78 0.97 1.46 1.94 2.43 2.92 3.89 4.86 5.83 7.78
developed in retract subtract the force that 3.5 0.23 0.45 0.57 0.68 0.91 1.13 1.70 2.27 2.84 3.40 4.54 5.67 6.81 9.08
corresponds to cylinder piston rod diameter. 4.0 0.26 0.52 0.65 0.78 1.04 1.30 1.94 2.59 3.24 3.89 5.19 6.48 7.78 10.37
5.0 0.32 0.65 0.81 0.97 1.30 1.62 2.43 3.24 4.05 4.86 6.48 8.10 9.72 12.97
6.0 0.39 0.78 0.97 1.17 1.56 1.94 2.92 3.89 4.86 5.83 7.78 9.72 11.67 15.56
CYL. CYL. 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 7.0 0.45 0.91 1.13 1.36 1.82 2.27 3.40 4.54 5.67 6.81 9.08 11.34 13.61 18.15
DIA AREA PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI 8.0 0.52 1.04 1.30 1.56 2.07 2.59 3.89 5.19 6.48 7.78 10.37 12.97 15.56 20.74
.50 .20 98 196 295 393 491 589 9.0 0.58 1.17 1.46 1.75 2.33 2.92 4.38 5.83 7.29 8.75 11.67 14.59 17.50 23.34
.75 .44 221 442 663 884 1104 1325 10.0 0.65 1.30 1.63 1.96 2.59 3.24 4.86 6.48 8.10 9.72 12.97 16.21 19.45 25.93
.88 .60 301 601 902 1203 1503 1804 11.0 0.71 1.43 1.78 2.14 2.85 3.57 5.35 7.13 8.91 10.70 14.26 17.83 21.39 28.52
12.0 0.78 1.56 1.94 2.33 3.11 3.89 5.83 7.78 9.72 11.67 15.56 19.45 23.34 31.12
1.00 .79 393 785 1178 1571 1964 2356
13.0 0.84 1.69 2.11 2.53 3.37 4.21 6.32 8.43 10.53 12.64 16.85 21.07 25.28 33.71
1.13 .99 497 994 1491 1988 2485 2982 14.0 0.91 1.82 2.27 2.72 3.63 4.54 6.81 9.08 11.34 13.61 18.15 22.69 27.23 36.30
1.25 1.23 614 1227 1841 2454 3068 3682 15.0 0.97 1.94 2.43 2.92 3.89 4.86 7.29 9.72 12.15 14.59 19.45 24.31 29.17 38.90
1.38 1.48 742 1485 2227 2970 3712 4455 16.0 1.04 2.07 2.59 3.11 4.15 5.19 7.78 10.37 12.97 15.56 20.74 25.93 31.12 41.49
1.50 1.77 884 1767 2651 3534 4418 5301 17.0 1.10 2.20 2.76 3.31 4.41 5.51 8.27 11.02 13.78 16.53 22.04 27.55 33.06 44.08
1.75 2.41 1203 2405 3608 4811 6013 7216 18.0 1.17 2.33 2.92 3.50 4.67 5.83 8.75 11.67 14.59 17.50 23.34 29.17 35.01 46.67
2.00 3.14 1571 3142 4712 6283 7854 9425 19.0 1.23 2.46 3.08 3.70 4.93 6.16 9.24 12.32 15.40 18.48 24.63 30.79 36.95 49.27
20.0 1.30 2.59 3.24 3.89 5.19 6.48 9.72 12.97 16.21 19.45 25.93 32.41 38.90 51.86
2.50 4.91 2454 4909 7363 9817 12272 14726
25.0 1.62 3.24 4.05 4.86 6.48 8.10 12.15 16.21 20.26 24.31 32.41 40.52 48.62 64.83
3.00 7.07 3534 7069 10603 14137 17672 21206 30.0 1.94 3.89 4.86 5.83 7.78 9.72 14.59 19.45 24.31 29.17 38.90 48.62 58.34 77.79
3.50 9.62 4811 9621 14432 19242 24053 28863 35.0 2.27 4.54 5.67 6.81 9.08 11.34 17.02 22.69 28.36 34.03 45.38 56.72 68.07 90.76
4.00 12.57 6283 12566 18850 25133 31416 37699 40.0 2.59 5.19 6.48 7.78 10.37 12.97 19.45 25.93 32.41 38.90 51.86 64.83 77.79 103.72
4.50 15.90 7952 15904 23857 31809 39761 47713 45.0 2.92 5.83 7.29 8.75 11.67 14.59 21.88 29.17 36.46 43.76 58.34 73.93 87.51 116.69
5.00 19.64 9817 19635 29453 39270 49087 58905 50.0 3.24 6.48 8.10 9.72 12.97 16.21 24.31 32.41 40.52 48.62 64.83 81.03 97.24 129.65
55.0 3.57 7.13 8.91 10.70 14.26 17.83 26.74 35.65 44.57 53.48 71.31 89.14 106.96 142.62
6.00 28.27 14137 28274 42412 56549 70686 84823
60.0 3.89 7.78 9.72 11.67 15.56 19.45 29.17 38.90 48.62 58.34 77.79 97.24 116.69 155.58
8.00 50.27 25133 50266 75398 100531 125664 150797
65.0 4.21 8.43 10.53 12.64 16.85 21.07 31.60 42.14 52.67 63.20 84.27 105.34 126.41 168.55
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER SPEED (inches/second)

cylinder speed (inches/second) = 3.85 x GPM/cylinder area (sq. in.)
The chart below gives cylinder speed in inches per second for extend and retract (for a given rod diameter). To determine the number of seconds it will take to
extend or retract the cylinder divide the stroke length (inches) by the cylinder speed. EX: for a 4 x 16 cylinder with 10 gpm speed is 3.06 inches/sec.
The time to extend 16 inches will be 5.23 seconds.
1 DIA 1 1/2 DIA 2 DIA 2 1/2 DIA 3 DIA 3 1/2 DIA 4 DIA 5 DIA 6 DIA 8 DIA
GPM EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET EXT RET
1/2 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 ROD 2 1/2 3 ROD
ROD ROD ROD ROD ROD ROD ROD ROD
1 4.90 6.54 2.18 2.90 1.23 1.79 .78 1.05 .54 .68 .40 .47 .31 .38 .20 .23 .14 .16 .08 .09
2 9.80 13.07 4.36 5.81 2.45 3.59 1.57 2.09 1.09 1.38 .80 .95 .61 .76 .39 .47 .27 .33 .15 .18
4 19.61 26.14 8.71 11.62 4.90 7.17 3.14 4.18 2.18 2.76 1.80 1.89 1.23 1.52 .78 .93 .54 .66 .31 .38
6 29.41 39.22 13.07 17.43 7.35 10.75 4.71 6.27 3.27 4.14 2.40 2.84 1.84 2.27 1.18 1.40 .82 .99 .46 .53
8 39.22 52.29 17.43 23.24 9.80 14.34 6.27 8.37 4.36 5.52 3.20 3.79 2.45 3.03 1.57 1.87 1.09 1.32 .61 .71
10 49.02 65.36 21.79 29.05 12.25 17.93 7.84 10.46 5.45 6.90 4.00 4.72 3.06 3.79 1.96 2.33 1.36 1.65 .77 .89
12 58.82 78.43 26.14 34.86 14.71 12.51 9.41 12.55 6.54 8.27 4.82 5.68 3.68 4.55 2.35 2.80 1.63 1.98 .92 1.07
15 – – 32.68 43.57 18.38 26.89 11.76 15.69 8.17 10.34 6.00 7.10 4.60 5.68 2.94 3.50 2.04 2.47 1.15 1.34
20 – – 43.57 58.10 24.51 35.85 15.69 20.92 10.89 13.79 8.00 9.46 6.13 7.58 3.92 4.67 2.72 3.30 1.53 1.78
25 – – – – 30.64 44.82 19.61 26.14 13.62 17.24 10.00 11.83 7.66 9.47 4.90 5.84 3.40 4.14 1.91 2.23
30 – – – – – – 23.53 31.37 16.24 20.66 12.00 14.20 9.19 11.37 5.88 7.00 4.08 4.94 2.30 2.87
35 – – – – – – 27.45 36.60 19.06 24.13 14.01 16.56 10.72 13.26 6.86 8.17 4.77 5.77 2.68 3.12
CATV 01-04-09-01
Catalog HY14-2502/US Flow Control Valves
Technical Information Series F
General Description
Series F flow control valves provide precise control

of flow and shut-off in one direction, and automatically
permit full flow in the opposite direction.
Operation
A two-step needle allows fine adjustment at low flow

by using the first three turns of the adjusting knob. The
next three turns open the valve to full flow, and also
provide standard throttling adjustments.
Features
• The exclusive “Colorflow” color-band reference scale on

the valve stem is a great convenience and time-saver in
setting the valve originally and in returning it to any
previous setting.
• A simple set screw locks the valve on any desired setting.
• A tamperproof option (T) feature is also available to
prevent accidental or intentional adjustment of flow
setting.
Specifications
Maximum Brass: 140 Bar (2000 PSI); Poppets Soft seal poppet in brass
Operating except for F1600 brass 200 - 820 sizes
H
G Pressure
Steel &
which is 35 Bar (500 PSI)
345 Bar (5000 PSI) for
Solid metal 416 stainless steel
poppet on all other sizes and
Stainless 200 thru 1020; styles
Steel: 207 Bar (3000 PSI) for
all other sizes Nominal 0.4 Bar (5 PSI) standard
Cracking Pressure
Material Body see ordering code
Knob Steel - Zinc plated Operating -40°C to +121°C
Temperature (-40°F to +250°F) Nitrile (standard)
Spring 316 Stainless Steel
Needle 416 Stainless Steel -26°C to +205°C
Poppet 416 Stainless Steel (-15°F to +400°F) Fluorocarbon
Retainer 416 Stainless Steel
Stainless
Steel 303 Stainless Steel
Bodies
2502-G1.p65, dd
G2 Parker Hannifin Corporation

Hydraulic Valve Division
Elyria, Ohio, USA
Ordering Information Series F
F
Options Series Size Material Needle Other Seal Design
Options Options Compound Series
NOTE:
Code Description Not required
when ordering.
Omit NPTF/SAE
★8 BSPT
Code Description
★★9 BSPP
Omit Nitrile (Standard)
★ Code 8 can be used
with sizes 200, 400, V Fluorocarbon
600, 800, 1200 Steel
only
★★ Code 9 can be used
with sizes 200, 400,
600, 800, 1200, 1600, Code Description
2000, 2400, 3200 Omit Standard Knob
T* Tamperproof
Code Size Code Size Code Size
F Finger Screw
200 * 1/8" 820 * #8 SAE 2000 1 1/4"
400 *† 1/4" 1020 #10 SAE 2020 #20 SAE * Not available above
420 * #4 SAE 1200 * 3/4" 2400 1 1/2" 1200 size.
600 *† 3/8" 1220 #12 SAE 2420 #24 SAE
620 #6 SAE 1600 * 1" 3200 2"
800 *† 1/2" 1620 #16 SAE 3220 #32 SAE
* Sizes available in Brass.
† Sizes available in Stainless Steel.
Code Description Code Description
B Brass Omit Standard
S Steel 4 Fine Metering
SS* Stainless Steel (200, 400, 600,
Series F Brass Valves can 620, 820 sizes)
be used for both air and oil
service. G
* Available in 400, 600 and
800 sizes.
Effective
Free Flow Free Flow Orifice Area, Effective
Model Rate, Max. Orifice Area Free Flow Control Flow Control Flow
Number LPM (GPM) in. 2 Cv in. 2 Cv
F200 11 (3) 0.023 0.53 0.0102 0.230
F420 11 (3) 0.023 0.53 0.0102 0.230
F400 19 (5) 0.068 1.56 0.0194 0.433
F620 19 (5) 0.068 1.56 0.0194 0.433
F600 30 (8) 0.099 2.27 0.0344 0.787
F820 30 (8) 0.099 2.27 0.0344 0.787
F800 57 (15) 0.224 5.11 0.0427 0.976
F1020 57 (15) 0.224 5.11 0.0427 0.976
F1200 95 (25) 0.348 7.95 0.1080 2.470
F1220 95 (25) 0.348 7.95 0.1080 2.470
F1600 151 (40) 0.453 10.35 0.2300 5.250
F1620 151 (40) 0.453 10.35 0.3070 7.000
F2000 265 (70) 0.855 19.52 0.2300 5.250
F2020 265 (70) 0.855 19.52 0.3710 8.470
F2400 379 (100) 0.955 21.82 0.2300 5.250
F2420 379 (100) 0.955 21.82 0.3710 8.470
F3200 568 (150) 1.046 23.90 0.2300 5.250
F3220 568 (150) 1.046 23.90 0.6010 13.410
2502-G1.p65, dd

Elyria, Ohio, USA
Performance Curves Series F
Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop
Needle Full Open Needle Full Open
PSI Bar 100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil, S.G. = 0.857 PSI Bar 100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil, S.G. = 0.857
160 11.0 160 11.0
140 9.7 Models 400 140 9.7

and 620 (#4) Model 200
120 8.2 120 8.2
Model 800
Pressure Drop
Pressure Drop
100 6.8 100 6.8 and 1020
Models 400 Models 600
and 620 and 820
80 5.7 80 5.7
Models 1200
and 1220
60 4.1 60 4.1
Model 1600
40 2.7 40 2.7
20 1.4 20 1.4
0 0
LPM 3.8 7.6 11.4 15.1 18.9 22.7 26.5 30.3 LPM 18.9 37.9 56.8 75.7 94.6 113.6 132.5 151.4
0 0
GPM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GPM 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Flow Flow
Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop

Needle Full Open
PSI Bar 100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil, S.G. = 0.857
160 11.0
140 9.7
Model
1620
120 8.2
Models 1600 Models 2020
Pressure Drop
2000, 2400, and 2420

100 6.8
and 3200
H
G 80 5.7
60 4.1
Model 3220
40 2.7
20 1.4
0
LPM 75.7 151.4 227.1 302.8 378.5 454.2 529.9 605.6
0
GPM 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow
2502-G1.p65, dd

Elyria, Ohio, USA
Dimensions Series F
Inch equivalents for millimeter dimensions are shown in (**) Knob Options
Pin
Tamperproof
Option (Code “T”)
E permanently locks
knob at desired
D flow setting by
Controlled Flow installing a pin in
H predrilled hole.
C
Closed
FAST
B
Open
Finger screw
Option (Code
“F”) provides
this thumb-
G screw in place
of set screw.
G A
F Sq. (Both Ends)
Model Weight
Number kg (lbs) A B C D E F G H
F200 0.1 (0.3) 1/8–27 NPTF 39.1 35.3 50.8 32.5 16.0 7.9 19.1
(1.54) (1.39) (2.00) (1.28) (0.63) (0.31) (0.75)
F400 0.2 (0.5) 1/4–18 NPTF 45.5 40.4 66.8 42.2 20.6 10.4 20.6
(1.79) (1.59) (2.63) (1.66) (0.81) (0.41) (0.81)
F420 0.2 (0.5) 7/16–20 UNF
#4 SAE
41.4
(1.63)
37.6
(1.48)
68.3
(2.69)
42.9
(1.69)
20.6
(0.81)
10.4
(0.41)
19.1
(0.75)
G
F600 0.3 (0.7) 3/8–18 NPTF 55.4 49.5 69.9 44.5 25.4 12.7 25.4
(2.18) (1.95) (2.75) (1.75) (1.00) (0.50) (1.00)
F620 0.3 (0.6) 9/16–18 UNF 47.7 42.7 79.2 48.8 25.4 12.7 20.6
#6 SAE (1.88) (1.68) (3.12) (1.92) (1.00) (0.50) (0.81)
F800 0.7 (1.5) 1/2–14 NPTF 68.6 61.5 87.4 56.6 31.8 16.0 30.2
(2.70) (2.42) (3.44) (2.23) (1.25) (0.63) (1.19)
F820 0.5 (1.0) 3/4–16 UNF 56.9 51.1 88.9 53.8 28.4 14.2 25.4
#8 SAE (2.24) (2.01) (3.50) (2.12) (1.12) (0.56) (1.00)
F1020 0.8 (1.8) 7/8–14 UNF 68.6 61.5 101.6 65.0 31.8 15.7 30.2
#10 SAE (2.70) (2.42) (4.00) (2.56) (1.25) (0.62) (1.19)
F1200 1.2 (2.6) 3/4–14 NPTF 85.9 71.4 98.6 65.5 38.1 19.1 35.1
(3.38) (2.81) (3.88) (2.58) (1.50) (0.75) (1.38)
F1220 1.2 (2.6) 1 1/6–12 UN 85.9 71.4 117.3 76.5 38.1 19.1 35.1
#12 SAE (3.38) (2.81) (4.62) (3.01) (1.50) (0.75) (1.38)
F1600 2.3 (5.1) 1–11 1/2 NPTF 123.7 106.9 127.0 81.8 44.5 22.4 47.8
(4.87) (4.21) (5.00) (3.22) (1.75) (0.88) (1.88) *
F1620 2.3 (5.1) 1 5/16–12 UN 130.8 114.0 142.7 88.9 57.2 28.4 47.8
#16 SAE (5.15) (4.49) (5.62) (3.50) (2.25) (1.12) (1.88) *
F2000 3.7 (8.1) 1 1/4–11 1/2 NPTF 130.0 113.3 143.0 98.6 57.2 28.7 47.8
(5.12) (4.46) (5.63) (3.88) (2.25) (1.13) (1.88) *
F2020 3.7 (8.1) 1 5/8–12 UN 140.2 123.4 165.1 108.0 69.9 35.1 47.8
#20 SAE (5.52) (4.86) (6.50) (4.25) (2.75) (1.38) (1.88) *
F2400 4.6 (10.2) 1 1/2–11 1/2 NPTF 136.4 119.6 143.0 113.5 69.9 35.1 47.8
(5.37) (4.71) (5.63) (4.47) (2.75) (1.38) (1.88) *
F2420 4.6 (10.2) 1 7/8–12 UN-2B 143.5 126.7 184.2 127.0 76.2 38.1 47.8
#24 SAE (5.65) (4.99) (7.25) (5.00) (3.00) (1.50) (1.88) *
F3200 7.9 (17.4) 2–11 1/2 NPTF 146.1 129.3 165.1 134.9 88.9 44.5 47.8
(5.75) (5.09) (6.50) (5.31) (3.50) (1.75) (1.88) *
F3220 7.9 (17.4) 2 1/2–12 UN 163.6 139.4 228.6 155.7 101.6 50.8 47.8
#32 SAE (6.44) (5.49) (9.00) (6.13) (4.00) (2.00) (1.88) *
* = Hex
2502-G1.p65, dd

Elyria, Ohio, USA
Catalog HY14-2502/US Check Valves
Technical Information Series C
General Description
Series C check valves permit free flow in one direction,
and dependable shut-off in the reverse direction.
Operation
When pressure going through the valve is increased to
the cracking level, the valve opens. When the pressure
is reduced to below the cracking level, the valve
closes.
Features
• Stainless steel poppets standard.
• Soft seal poppets are available.
• Triangular retainers guide the poppets, and hold the
spring firmly in place even under high velocity and shock.
Specifications
Maximum Brass: 140 Bar (2000 PSI);
Operating except for C1600 brass
Pressure which is 35 Bar
(500 PSI)
Steel & 345 Bar (5000 PSI) for Performance Curves
Stainless 200 thru 1220;
Steel: 207 Bar (3000 PSI) for Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop
Material Body
all other sizes and styles
see ordering code
Free Flow 0.3 Bar (5 PSI) Cracking
100 SSU, Hydraulic Oil F
400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600,
PSI Bar 200 620 820 1020 1220 1620
Spring 316 Stainless Steel 200 14.0
Poppet 416 Stainless Steel
175 12.1
Retainer 416 Stainless Steel
Stainless 150 10.5
Steel 303 Stainless Steel
Pressure Drop
2020,
Bodies 125 8.6
2000
Poppets Soft seal poppet is standard for 100 6.9

2420,
200 through 800/1020 size. 2400
75 5.2
3220,
For cracking pressures > 15 PSI, 3200
50 3.5
solid metal poppets are standard
Nominal 0.4 Bar (5 PSI) standard 25 1.7
Cracking 0.07 Bar (1 PSI), 1.38 Bar (20 PSI), 0
Pressure 4.48 Bar (65 PSI) optional LPM 94.6 189.3 283.9 378.5 473.1 567.8
0
GPM 25 50 75 100 125 150
Operating -40°C to +121°C Flow
Temperature (-40°F to +250°F) Nitrile (standard)
-26°C to +205°C
(-15°F to +400°F) Fluorocarbon
2502-F1.p65, dd
F7 Parker Hannifin Corporation

Elyria, Ohio, USA
Ordering Information Series C
C
Options Series C Size Material Cracking Pressure Seal Design
(nominal) Compound Series
NOTE:
Not required
Code Description
when ordering.
Omit NPTF/SAE
★8 BSPT
Code Description
★★ 9 BSPP
Omit Nitrile (Standard)
★ Code 8 can be used
V Fluorocarbon
600, 800, 1200 Steel
only
★★ Code 9 can be used
600, 800, 1200, 1600,
2000, 2400, 3200
Code Size Code Size Code Description
200 * 1/8" 1600 * 1" Omit Standard
400 *† 1/4" 1620 #16 SAE 0.4 Bar (5 PSI)
600 *† 3/8" 2000 1 1/4"
1 0.07 Bar (1 PSI)
620 #6 SAE 2020 #20 SAE
800 *† 1/2" 2400 1 1/2" 20 1.38 Bar (20 PSI)
820 #8 SAE 2420 #24 SAE 65 4.5 Bar (65 PSI)
1020 #10 SAE 3200 2"
Other cracking pressures
1200 * 3/4" 3220 #32 SAE available.
1220 * #12 SAE
* Sizes available in Brass
F † Sizes available in
Stainless Steel
Code Description
B Brass
S Steel
H SS * Stainless Steel
Series C Brass Valves can
be used for both air and oil
service.
* Available in 400, 600 and
800 sizes.
Effective
Orifice Area Effective
Model Max Flow Control Flow Control Flow
Number LPM (GPM) in.2 Cv
C200 15 (3) 0.023 0.53
C400 23 (5) 0.068 1.56
C620 23 (5) 0.068 1.56
C600 30 (8) 0.099 2.27
C820 30 (8) 0.099 2.27
C800 45 (15) 0.224 5.11
C1020 45 (15) 0.224 5.11
C1200 100 (25) 0.348 7.95
C1220 100 (25) 0.348 7.95
C1600 150 (40) 0.453 10.35
C1620 150 (40) 0.453 10.35
C2000 284 (70) 0.855 19.52
C2020 284 (70) 0.855 19.52
C2400 378 (100) 0.955 21.82
C2420 378 (100) 0.955 21.82
C3200 605 (150) 1.046 23.90
C3220 605 (150) 1.046 23.90
2502-F1.p65, dd

Elyria, Ohio, USA
Dimensions Series C
Inch equivalents for millimeter dimensions are shown in (**)
Free
Flow
A
D (Both Ends) B
C Sq.
Model Weight
Number kg (lbs.) A B C D
C200 0.0 1/8–27 NPTF 50.8 16.0 7.9.
(0.1) (2.00) (0.63) (0.31)
C400 0.2 1/4–18 NPTF 66.8 20.6 10.4
(0.4) (2.63) (0.81) (0.41)
C420 0.0 7/16–20 UNF #4 SAE 68.3 20.6 10.4
(0.1) (2.69) (0.81) (0.41)
C600 0.2 3/8–18 NPTF 69.9 25.4 12.7
(0.5) (2.75) (1.00) (0.50)
C620 0.2
(0.5)
9/16–18 UNF #6 SAE 79.2
(3.12)
25.4
(1.00)
12.7
(0.50) F
C800 0.6 1/2–14 NPTF 87.4 31.8 16.0
(1.3) (3.44) (1.25) (0.63)
C820 0.3 3/4–16 UNF #8 SAE 88.9 28.4 14.2
(0.7) (3.50) (1.12) (0.56)
C1020 0.6 7/8–14 UNF #10 SAE 101.6 31.8 15.7
(1.3) (4.00) (1.25) (0.62)
C1200 0.9 3/4–14 NPTF 98.6 38.1 19.1
(2.0) (3.88) (1.50) (0.75)
C1220 0.9 1 1/6–12 UN #12 SAE 117.3 38.1 19.1
(2.0) (4.62) (1.50) (0.75)
C1600 1.5 1–11 1/2 NPTF 127.0 44.5 22.4
(3.3) (5.00) (1.75) (0.88)
C1620 1.5 1 5/16–12 UN #16 SAE 142.7 57.2 28.4
(3.3) (5.62) (2.25) (1.12)
C2000 2.8 1 1/4–11 1/2 NPTF 143.0 57.2 28.7
(6.2) (5.63) (2.25) (1.13)
C2020 2.8 1 5/8–12 UN #20 SAE 165.1 69.9 35.1
(6.2) (6.50) (2.75) (1.38)
C2400 3.8 1 1/2–11 1/2 NPTF 143.0 69.9 35.1
(8.4) (5.63) (2.75) (1.38)
C2420 3.8 1 7/8–12 UN #24 SAE 184.2 76.2 38.1
(8.4) (7.25) (3.00) (1.50)
C3200 7.0 2–11 1/2 NPTF 165.1 88.9 44.5
(15.4) (6.50) (3.50) (1.75)
C3220 7.0 2 1/2–12 UN #32 SAE 228.6 101.6 50.8
(15.4) (9.00) (4.00) (2.00)
2502-F1.p65, dd

Elyria, Ohio, USA
Data sheet
Thermostats
Type RT
Description A thermostat is a temperature-controlled switch.
The position of the contacts depends on the
temperature of the sensor and the set scale value.
The RT series covers thermostats for general
industrial and marine applications, including
diff erential thermostats with room sensors, duct
sensors, and capillary tube sensors
Contents Page
Description ...............................................................................................................................................................................1
Survey of types, temperature ranges ..............................................................................................................................2
Technical data and code nos. all types ...........................................................................................................................3
Nomograms .............................................................................................................................................................................5
Technical data ..........................................................................................................................................................................7
Approvals ..................................................................................................................................................................................7
Dimensions and weight .......................................................................................................................................................8
Choice of suitable sensor pocket......................................................................................................................................8
Installation, setting ................................................................................................................................................................9
Function .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Types of charge .................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Thermostat for control of ventilation plant ............................................................................................................... 12
Thermostats with adjustable neutral zone ................................................................................................................ 13
Differential thermostats .................................................................................................................................................... 14
Spare parts and accessories ............................................................................................................................................ 15
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187

Data sheet Thermostats, type RT
Thermostats type RT
Range
−50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300°C
pe Type
bar
−60 → −25 RT 10
Thermostats with cylindrical remote sensor
−45 → −15 RT 9
−30 → 0 RT 13
−25 → 15 RT 3,2,7
−20 → 12 RT 8
−5 → 10 RT 12
−5 → 30 RT 14
−5 → 50 RT 26
5 → 22 RT 23
8 → 32 RT 15
25 → 90 RT 101
20 → 90 RT 106
30 → 140 RT 108
70 → 150 RT 107
120 → 215 RT 120
150 → 250 RT 123
200 → 300 RT 124
Thermostats with room sensors, duct sensor and capillary −50 → −15 RT 17
tube sensor −30 → 0 RT 11
−25 → 15 RT 34
−5 → 30 RT 4
10 → 35 RT 115
10 → 45 RT 103
15 → 45 RT 140
40 → 80 RT 141
25 → 90 RT 102
−20 → 12 RT 8L
Thermostats with adjustable neutral zone
−5 → 30 RT 14L
0 → 38 RT 16L
15 → 45 RT 140 L
25 → 90 RT 101L
Differential thermostats 0 → 15 RT 270
0 → 20 RT 271
2 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
Technical data and code nos. When ordering, please state type and code Types of charge
number. A: Vapour charge - sensor must not be the
warmest part.
B: Adsorption charge
C: Partial charge - the sensor must not be the
coldest part
Thermostats with cylindrical remote sensor Preferred charge

Setting Adjustable differential Max. Capillary Code no.
range range*) sensor tube
temperature length
At lowest At highest
range range Type of
setting setting Type
charge
°C °C °C °C m
−60 → −25 1.7 → 7 1→3 150 A 2 017-507766 RT 10
−45 → −15 2.2 → 10 1 → 4.5 150 A 2 017-506666 RT 9
−30 → 0 1.5 → 6 1→3 150 A 2 017-509766 RT 13
−25 → 15 2.8 → 10 1→4 150 A 2 017-501466 RT 3
RT 107 −25 → 15 2.8 → 10 1→4 150 A 5 017-501666 RT 3
with cylindrical remote sensor, −25 → 15 2.8 → 10 1→4 150 A 8 017-501766 RT 3
cover with windows and hand −25 → 15 5 → 18 6 → 20 150 B 2 017-500866 RT 2
setting knob
−25 → 15 2 → 10 2.5 → 14 150 B 2 017-505366 RT 7
−25 → 15 2 → 10 2.5 → 14 150 B 5 017-505566 RT 7
−25 → 15 2 → 10 2.5 → 14 150 B 8 017-505666 RT 7
−20 → 12 1.5 → 7 1.5 → 7 145 B 2 017-506366 RT 8
−5 → 10 1 → 3.5 1→3 65 B 2 017-508966 RT 12
−5 → 30 2→8 2 → 10 150 B 2 017-509966 RT 14
−5 → 30 2→8 2 → 10 150 B 3 017-510066 RT 14
−5 → 30 2→8 2 → 10 150 B 5 017-510166 RT 14
−5 → 30 2→8 2 → 10 150 B 8 017-510266 RT 14
−5 → 30 2→8 2 → 10 150 B 10 017-510366 RT 14
−5 → 50 2→9 3 → 19 150 B 2 017-518066 RT 26
5 → 22 1.1 → 3 1→3 85 B 2 017-527866 RT 23
8 → 32 1.6 → 8 1.6 → 8 150 B 2 017-511566 RT 15
25 → 90 2.4 → 10 3.5 → 20 300 B 2 017-500366 017-500466 017-500566 RT 101
25 → 90 2.4 → 10 3.5 → 20 300 B 3 017-500666 RT 101
25 → 90 2.4 → 10 3.5 → 20 300 B 5 017-502266 017-502366 RT 101
25 → 90 2.4 → 10 3.5 → 20 300 B 8 017-502466 RT 101
25 → 90 2.4 → 10 3.5 → 20 300 B 10 017-502566 RT 101
RT 106
with cylindrical remote sensor, 20 → 90 4 → 20 2→7 120 C 2 017-504866 017-504966 RT 106
cover with windows and hand 20 → 90 4 → 20 2→7 120 C 3 017-505166 RT 106
setting knob 20 → 90 4 → 20 2→7 120 C 5 017-505066 RT 106
30 → 140 5 → 20 4 → 14 220 B 2 017-506066 RT 108
70 → 150 6 → 25 1.8 → 8 215 C 2 017-513566 017-513666 017-513766 RT 107
70 → 150 6 → 25 1.8 → 8 215 C 3 017-513966 RT 107
70 → 150 6 → 25 1.8 → 8 215 C 5 017-514066 017-514166 017-514366 RT 107
70 → 150 6 → 25 1.8 → 8 215 C 8 017-514466 RT 107
70 → 150 6 → 25 1.8 → 8 215 C 10 017-514566 RT 107
120 → 215 7 → 30 1.8 → 9 260 C 2 017-5205661) 017-5211661) RT 120
120 → 215 7 → 30 1.8 → 9 260 C 5 017-5206661) RT 120
120 → 215 7 → 30 1.8 → 9 260 C 8 017-5207661) RT 120
120 → 215 7 → 30 1.8 → 9 260 C 2 017-520866 017-5214662) RT 120
120 → 215 7 → 30 1.8 → 9 260 C 5 017-520966 RT 120
150 → 250 6.5 → 30 1.8 → 9 300 C 2 017-522066 017-522466 RT 123
150 → 250 6.5 → 30 1.8 → 9 300 C 5 017-522266 RT 123
200 → 300 5 → 25 2.5 → 10 350 C 2 017-522766 017-523166 RT 124
200 → 300 5 → 25 2.5 → 10 350 C 5 017-522966 RT 124
*) See also pages 5-6
1)
Thermostats fitted with neon lamp connected to terminal 4
2)
Thermostat with tamper-proof seal cap
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 3
Thermostats with room sensor, duct sensor and capillary tube sensor Preferred versions
Setting range Adjustable differential Max. Capillary tube Sensor
range*) sensor length type**)
At lowest At highest temperature Type of
Code no. Type
range range charge
setting setting
°C °C °C °C m Figur
−50 → − 15 2.2 → 7 1.5 → 5 100 A - 1 017-511766 RT 17
−30 → 0 1.5 → 6 1→3 66 A - 1 017-508366 RT 11
−25 → 15 2 → 10 2 → 12 100 B - 1 017-511866 RT 34
−5 → 30 1.5 → 7 1.2 → 4 75 A - 1 017-503666 RT 4
−5 → 30 1.5 → 7 1.2 → 4 75 A - 1 017-503766 1)
RT 4
Thermostat type RT 115
with room sensor 10 → 35 5) 5)
92 B - 1 017-5197662) RT 115
10 → 35 5) 5)
92 B - 1 017-5198663) RT 115
10 → 45 1.3 → 7 1→5 100 A - 1 017-515566 RT 103
15 → 45 1.8 → 8 2.5 → 11 240 B 2 2 017-523666 RT 140
40 → 80 1.9 → 9 2.5 → 17 250 B 2 2 017-524166 RT 141
25 → 90 2.4 → 10 3.5 → 20 300 B 2 3 017-514766 RT 102
*) See also pages 5-6
**) See also fig. 1-5
1)
Bellows with built-in heating element which reduces the thermal differential (220V)
2)
Can be connected to 220 V and 380 V
3)
Can be connected to 220 V
5)
Special thermostat for ventilation plant
Thermostat type RT 140 Thermostats with adjustable neutral zone

with duct sensor Setting range Mechanical Adjustable differential Max. Capillary Sensor
differential range*) sensor tube type**)
At lowest At highest temperature Type of length
Code no. Type
range range charge
setting setting
°C °C °C °C °C m Figur
−20 → − 12 1.5 1.5 → 4.4 1.5 → 4.9 145 B 2 4 017L003066 RT 8L
−5 → 30 1.5 1.5 → 5 1.5 → 5 150 B 2 4 017L003466 RT 14L
0 → 38 1.5 / 0.7 1.5 → 5 0.7 → 1.9 100 A - 1 017L002466 RT 16L
15 → 45 1.8 / 2 1.8 → 4.5 2→5 240 B 2 2 017L003166 RT 140L
25 → 90 2.5 / 3.5 2.5 → 7 3.5 → 12.5 300 b 2 4 017L0062661) RT 101L
*) See fig. 1-5
Differential thermostats
Neutral zone thermostat Setting range Mechanical Operating Max. Capillary Sensor type*)
type RT 16L with room sensor differential range sensor Type of tube
Code no. Type
(LT element) temperature charge length
°C °C °C °C m Figur
0 → 20 3 20 → 100 200 B 2 × 10 5 017D004466 RT 271
0 → 15 2 −30 → 40 65 B 2×5 5 017D003166 RT 270
*) See fig. 1-5
Differential thermostat
type RT 270 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Thermostat with Thermostat with Thermostat with Thermostat with Differential
room sensor duct sensor capillary tube sensor cylindrical remote thermostat
sensor
4 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
Nomograms for obtained differentials A = Range setting

B = Obtained differential
C = Differential setting
13
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 5
Nomograms for obtained differentials A = Range setting

B = Obtained differential
C = Differential setting
6 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
Technical data Designation RT thermostats

Ambient temperature −50 to 70°C . See remarks on charge types page 113
Contact system
Single-pole changeover switch (SPDT)

Contact load Alternating current: Fig. 6
AC-1: 10A, 400 V
AC-3: 4A, 400 V
AC-15: 3A, 400 V
Contact material: Direct current:

AgCdO DC-13: 12 W, 230 V
(see fig. 6)
Special contact system See “accessories” pages 15-16
Cable entry 2 PG 13.5 for 6 - 14 mm diameter cables
Enclosure IP 66 acc. to IEC 529 and EN 60529. Units supplied with external reset.
IP 54. The thermostat housing is made of bakelite acc. to DIN 53470
Cover is made of polyamide.
Approvals
RT 2 RT 4 RT 3 RT 12 RT 16 RT 34 RT 101 RT 106 RT 120 RT 124
RT 23 RT 10 RT 7 RT 13 RT 102 RT 103 RT 107
RT 26 RT 11 RT 8 RT 14 RT 141 RT 115 RT 123
Approvals
RT 108 RT 16L RT 8L RT 14L RT 271 RT 140
RT 17 RT 9 RT 15 RT 270
RT 140L
x x x x x x x x x x CE marked acc. to EN 60947-4/-5
x x x x Det Norske Veritas, Norway
x x x x x x x x x x CCC, China Compulsory Certificate
x Lloyds Register of Shipping, UK
x x x x x Germanischer Lloyd, Germany
x Bureau Veritas, France
x x x x x x x x x x Registro Italiano Navale, Italy
x x x x x x x x x x RMRS, Russian Maritime Register of shipping
x x x x x x x Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, Japan
Note: In addition we refer to the certificates, the copies of which can be ordered from Danfoss.
GL approval is conditional on the use of a ship’s cable entry
Identification The type designation of the units is given on the setting

scale. The code no. is stamped on the bottom of the
thermostat housing
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 7
Dimensions and weight
RT 101, 107, 120, 123

special versions with seal
cap and blank cover
RT 4
RT 11
RT 16, RT 16L RT 106 RT 2
RT 17 RT 107 RT 3
RT 34 RT 120 RT 9
RT 103 RT 123
RT 115
Special sensor Special sensor
W. no W. no. Material
RT 7
RT 8, RT 8L RT 270
RT 10 RT 271 2.0090
1.4301 18/8 steel
RT 12 copper
RT 13
RT 14, RT 14L
RT 15
RT 21
RT 23
RT 24
RT 26 RT 140 / 140 L RT 102 RT 124
RT 101, RT 101L
RT 108
RT 124 Weight approx. 1 kg
RT 140, RT 140L Choice of suitable sensor pocket
Capillary L Suitable L a1 d
W. no. Type tube length sensor pocket Material W.no
m mm Code no. mm mm mm
RT2/3/7/9 2, 3, 5 017-437066 Brass 2.0321
10/13/26/120 8, 10 017-436966 18/8 steel 1.4301 112 G½ 11
80
RT 101/ 101L 2, 3 017-437066 Brass 2.0321 112 G½ 11
017-436966 18/8 steel 1.4301
RT8/8L/14/ 2, 3, 5, 8, 10 017-437966 Brass 2.0321
2.0090 14L/15/107/123, 270 017-436966 18/8 steel 1.4301 112 G½ 11
cop- 110
RT 101 5, 8, 10 017-437066 Brass 2.0321
per
017-436966 18/8 steel 1.4301 112 G½ 11
RT 14 10 150 017-436766 182 G½ 11
RT 271 10 180 017-421666
Brass 2.0321
RT 12/13 2 210 017-421666 465 G½ 11
RT 108 2 410 017-421666
060L333066 110
Brass 2.0235 G½ 15
060L332766 160
2.3 76
060L333166 110
18/8 steel 1.4301 G½ 15
2.0240 060L332966 160
RT 106
brass 060L333066 110
Brass 2.0235 G½ 15
060L332766 160
5 86
060L333166 110
18/8 steel 1.4301 G½ 15
060L332966 160
Sensor pocket, solid version, internal diameter 13.1 mm 017-421866 AISI 316L 1.4435 108 G½ 15.7
8 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
Installation RT units have two fixing holes which become

accessible when the front cover is removed. Units
fitted with switch 017-018166*) must be installed
with the setting knob upwards.
The other thermostats in the RT series can be
installed in any position, except that on plant
subjected to severe vibrations it is advantageous
to have the screwed cable entry downwards.
*) Contact system with non snap-action function.
See spare parts and accessories, page 15.
Fig. 7 Position of unit
Setting Differentials
The mechanical differential is the differential that
is set on the differential disc in the thermostat.
The thermal differential (operating differential)
is the differential the system operates on. The
thermal differential is always greater than the
mechanical differential and depends on three
factors:
1) flow velocity of the medium
2) temperature charge rate of the medium and
3) heat transmission
The medium
The fastest reaction is obtained from a medium
having high specific heat and high thermal
conductivity. It is therefore advantageous to
choose a medium that fulfills these conditions
(provided there is a choice). The flow velocity of
the medium is also of significance.(Optimum flow
velocity for liquids is approx. 0.3 m/s).
5. Setting knob
9. Main scale Example:
19. Differential setting disc
Fig. 8 Regulation of a central heating boiler
The temperature in an oil-fired central heating
boiler must be regulated by an RT 101. Max.
The range is set by using the setting knob (5) temperature 76°C. Min. temperature 70°C.
while at the same time reading the main scale (9). Differential 76-70 = 6°C.
Tools must be used to set thermostats fitted with 1. Connect the oil burner via thermostat
a seal cap. The differential is set by the differential terminals 1-2.
disc (19). 2. Set the thermostat on 70°C using the hand
The size of the obtained differential can be knob (5), fig. 8.
established by comparing the set main scale 3. Set the differential disc (19) on 3. This figure is
value and the scale value on the differential disc, obtained from the RT 101 nomogram, page 5.
with the help of the nomogram for the
thermostat concerned (see pages 5-6) When the plant has been operating for some
time an assessment can be made of whether
Example the thermal differential is satisfactory. If it is too
Unit: RT 120 large, reduce the mechanical differential of the
Range setting: 160°C thermostat.
Differential setting: 2
Brass Stainless steel 18/8
It will be seen on the nomogram on page 6 that
by drawing a line from 160°C on scale A, through
2 on scale C, the value for the differential can be
read from scale B: 6°C.
Selection of differential (mechanical differential)

To ensure that the plant functions properly, a
suitable differential is necessary. Too small a
differential will give rise to short running periods
with a risk of hunting. Too high a differential will Temperature
result in large temperature variations.
Permissible media pressure on the sensor pocket as a
function of temperature
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 9
Function a. RT thermostats with automatic reset Contact function

The RT thermostats are set according to the I. Contact changeover for rising temperature
function required on falling temperature. occurs at scale setting plus differential..
Contacts 1-4 break while contacts 1-2 make when II. Contact changeover for falling temperatue
the temperature falls to the scale setting. The occurs at scale setting.
contacts changeover to their initial position when
the temperature again rises to the scale setting
plus the differential (see fig. 9).
Scale setting −−−

Differential
Fig. 9
b. RT thermostats with max. reset I. Alarm for rising temperature given at the set
Contacts 1-4 make while contacts 1-2 break when value.
the temperature exceeds the set range value. II. Alarm for falling temperature given at the set
The contacts changeover to their initial position value minus the differential.
when the temperature falls to the scale value Manual reset possible only when the temperature
minus the differential (see fig. 10). has fallen to the range setting minus differential.

Differential
Fig. 10
10 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
RT units with The method of operation of these units is based

vapour charge on the connection between the pressure and
temperature of satuated vapour. The sensor Gas
system contains just a small amount of liquid and
this is brought completely to vapour form. If the
Saturated vapour
sensor in this type of unit is located coldest in
relation to the capillary tube and bellows
housing, the ambient temperature has no
influence on regulation accuracy.
Fig. 11a
RT units with The thermostatic element contains a superheated

adsorption charge gas together with a solid substance (always in
the sensor) having a large adsorption surface.
This gives an advantage in that the sensor can
be installed either colder or warmer than the
remaining part of the thermostatic element.
However, the charge is to some extent sensitive
to changes in the temperature of the bellows and
capillary tube. Fig. 11b
Scale correction
If the thermostat is to be used in ambient Factor for scale deviation
tempratures that differ significantly from the
factory setting (20°C), compensation can be
made for the scale deviation:
Scale correction = Z x a
Z can be found from fig. 11c, while a is the
correction factor from the table.
Example:
Relative scale setting %

Find the necessary scale correction for a RT 108
with a regulation range +30 to + 140°C.
Setting: 85°C
Ambient temperature: 50°C
Correction:
Set value - min. scale value
× 100 = %
max. scale value - min. scale value
85 - 30
× 100 = 50%
140 - 30 Fig. 11c
Correction factor from table 2.0 (a) Type Range °C Correction factor a
Factor for scale deviation (see fig. 11c): + 1.2 (Z) RT 2 −25 → 15 2.3
RT 7 −25 → 15 2.9
Scale correction: Z x a = 1.2 x 2.0 = 2.4°C RT 8/L −20 → 12 1.7
Corrected setting: 85 + 2.4 = 87.4 RT 12 −5 → 10 1.2
RT 14/L −5 → 20 2.4
RT 15 8 → 32 1.2
RT 23 5 → 22 0.6
RT 101/L 25 → 90 5.0
RT 102 25 → 90 5.0
RT 108 30 → 140 2.0
RT 140/L 15 → 45 3.1
RT units with The method of operation of these units is based

solid charge on the connection between the pressure and
temperature of saturated vapour.
The sensor system contains a fairly large amount
of liquid, of which only a small part is brought to
vapour form. If the sensor in this type of unit is
located warmest in relation to the capillary tube
and bellows housing, the ambient temperature
has no influence on regulation accuracy.
Fig. 11d
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 11
RT 115 for control of The bulb sensor is heated by an element which is

ventilation plant in livestock cut in when the thermostat stops the fans and is
buildings cut out when the thermostat starts the fans.
The for of operation is as follows:
If the room temperature is more than the value
set on the thermostat, 20°C for example, the
fans run continuously (100% operating time). If
the room temperature falls to 20°C, the switch
contacts changeover, the fan stops and the bulb
sensor heating element cuts in.
When the bulb sensor is heated up, pressure in
the sensor system increases and after a certain
time the switch changes over again thereby
cutting in the fans and cutting out the element.
If the room temperature falls more than 2°C
under the set temperature - in this example,
lower than 18°C - the fans stop completely. The
heating element is cut in as usual but can no
longer heat the bulb sensor sufficiently to create
the required pressure increase in the thermostatic
element to cut in the fans again. Thus with a room
A. Series resistor temperature of less than 18°C the operating time
B. Bulb sensor
is 0%.
C. Heating element
An example is shown in fig. 13.
With temperature settings other than the one
Fig. 12 shown, the inclined line in the diagram is displaced
parallel. The line break point on the right of the
RT 115 has two sensors, each of which is diagram always corresponds to the set value.
connected to the space between bellows and It is therefore possible to maintain a stable
bellows housing; see fig. 12. One sensor is a room temperature and at the same time obtain
normal, external, rigid coiled capillary tube type, periodic ventilation where the duration of the
the other is a bulb sensor located in the ventilation periods depends on the difference
thermostat housing. between the actual room temperature and the
set temperature.
By ensuring that the thermostat is always set
at least 2°C over the lowest permissible room
temperature, the thermostat will never allow the
room temperature to fall below the desired level.
Setting example
017-519766, 380V 017-519766, 239V 017-519866, 230 V

Ventilator running time in %
A: Phase input to fan

B: Control lead
Fig. 13 Connection diagrams for RT 115
12 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
Application RT-L thermostats are fitted with an adjustable Hunting

neutral zone. This enables the units to be used Periodic variations of the controlled variable from
for floating control. The terminology involved is the fixed reference.
explained below.
Neutral zone
Floating control The interval in the controlled variable in which
A form of discontinuous control where the cor- the correcting element does not respond.
recting element (e.g. valve, damper, or similar)
moves towards one extreme position at a rate Mechanical differential
independent of the magnitude of the error when The interval between the values of the controlled
the error exceeds a definite positive and towards variable in which the correcting element does
the opposite extreme position when the error respond.
exceeds a definite negative value.
The contact system in neutral zone units cannot
be exchanged, as the contact system adjustment
is adjusted to the other parts of the unit.
Neutral zone setting The range is set using the setting knob (5), fig. 14,
while reading the main scale (9). The set value is
the break temperature for contacts 1-4, fig. 15.
The required neutral zone can be found in the
diagram for the unit concerned, fig. 16. The
position at which the neuttral zone disc (40)
must be set can be read from the low scale in the
diagram.
5. Setting knob
9. Main scale
40. Neutral zone disc with scale
Fig. 14
Example: RT 16L
Setting temperature: +24°C
Required neutral zone: 1.9°C
Using the setting knob, set the thermostat on
24°C.
The dotted lines in the diagram for the RT 16L
fig. 16 intersect each other on the curve for
position 2.8 and the neutral zone setting disc (40)
must be set to that position.
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 13
Application Control and monitoring of temperature differentials plant and refrigeration and heating plant, where
An RT differential thermostat is an electric single there is a need to maintain a certain temperature
-pole changeover switch. The position of the difference, from 0 to 20°C, between two media.
switch contacts is controlled by the difference One of the sensors is used as a reference, the
in temperature between the two sensors of the other as an indirect controlled variable. (The
termostat. direct controlled variable is the temperature
The RT 270 is used in process plant, ventilation differential).
Setting The required temperature differential between

the LT sensor (1) (lowest temperature) and the HT
sensor (32) (highest temperature) is set using the
setting disc (5) while reading the scale (9).
Fig. 17 is a cross-sectional drawing of the RT 270.
The differential thermostat has two bellows
elements: an LT element whose sensor must be
placed in the medium with the lowest
temperature, and an HT element whose sensor
must be placed in the medium with the highest
temperature.
The main spring has a rectilinear characteristic.
Within the differential range it can be set for
different temperature differentials by means of
the setting disc.
When the differential between LT and HT sensor
temperatures is reduced, the main spindle moves
downwards.
1. Sensor for the lowest The contact arm is moved downwards by the
temperature (LT) guide bush so that contact 1-4 break and
5. Setting disc contacts 1-2 make when the set temperature
9. Scale differential is reached.
32. Sensor for the highest The switch contacts change back when the
temperature (HT)
temperature differential has increased to the set
value plus the fixed contact differential of approx.
Fig. 17 2°C.
Function Differential thermostats are fitted with a I. Contacts make when differential temperature
changeover switch (SPDT) falls below the range scale setting.
When the differential temperature falls below II. Contacts make when differential temperature
the set value, contacts 1-4 break and contacts 1-2 rises above the range scale plus the fixed
make. When the differential temperature rises to contact differential.
the set range value plus the fixed contact differ-
ential, contacts 1-2 break and contacts 1-4 make.

Differential
Fig. 18. Contact funktion on falling differnetial temperature
Example The choice is an RT 270 with a range of 0-15°C

The temperature rise across an air cooler must be and a fixed contact differential of 2°C.
held below 5°C. An alarm must be given when Range setting: 5-2°C = 3°C
the differential temperature of the cooling water When the differential temperature exceeds the
exceeds the 5°C range setting plus the fixed contact differential
(3+2°C) an alarm will be given.
14 IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187
Spare parts and accessories

Version Symbol Description Contact rating Code no.
Single-pole changeover switch (SPDT) with

terminal board proof against leakate current
Standard 017-403066
Fitted in all standard versions of type RT1).
Snap action changeover contacts.
For manual reset of unit after contact

changeover on rising pressure Alternating current:
With max. reset 017-404266
AC-1 (ohmic): 10 A, 400 V
For units with max. reset. AC-3 (inductive): 4 A, 400 V
AC-14/15 (coil/transformer): 3 A, 400 V
For manual reset of units after contact
Blocked rotor: 28 A, 400 V
changeover on falling pressure.
Direct current:
With min. reset 017-404166
DC 13/14: 12 W, 230 V
For units with min. reset.
Alternating current:
Single-pole changeover switch (SPDT) with gold
AC-1(ohmic): 10 A, 400 V
plated (oxide-free) contact surfaces.
AC-3 (inductive): 2 A, 400 V
Increases cut-in reliability on alarm and monitor-
Standard AC-14/15 1 A, 400 V 017-424066
ing systems, etc.
Snap action changeover contacts.
Direct current:
Terminal board proof against leakage current.
DC-13/14: 12 W, 230 V
Alternating current:
Single-pole changeover switch that cuts in two
AC-1(ohmic): 10 A, 400 V
Cuts in two circuits circuits simultaneously on rising pressure.
AC-3 (inductive): 3 A, 400 V 017-403466
simultaneously Snap action changeover contacts.
AC-14/15 2 A, 400 V
Terminal board proof against leakage current.
Direct current:
DC-13/14: 12 W, 230 V
Single-pole changeover switch that cuts out two
Cuts out two circuits circuits simultaneously on rising pressure. * If current is led through contacts 2 and 017-403666
simultaneously Snap action changeover contacts. 4, i.e. terminals 2 and 4 connected but
Terminal board proof against leakage current. not 1, max. permissible load is increased
to 90 W, 220 V - - -.
With non-snap action Single-pole changeover with non-snap action Alternating or direct current:
017-018166
changeover contacts changeover gold plated (oxide-free) contacts. 25 VA, 24 V
1
) At load types with low currents/voltages contact failure The switch contacts are shown in the position they
may occure on the silver contacts because of oxidation. assume on falling temperature, i.e. after downward
In systems where such a contact failure is of great movement of the RT main spindle.
importance (alarm etc.), gold plated contacts are
The setting pointer of the control shows the scale value
recommended.
Contact systems for neutral zone units are not at which contact changeover occurs on falling
available as spare parts. Exchange not possible, as the temperature. An exception is switch no. 017-403066
contact system adjustment is adjusted to the other with max. reset where the setting pointer shows the
parts of the unit. scale value at which contact changeover occurs on
rising pressure.
Switches
Version Symbol Description Contact rating Code no.
For Alarm application
For manual reset of unit after contact changeover Alternating current:
With min. reset on falling pressure. AC-1 (ohmic): 10 A, 400 V 017-404766
Gold plated (oxide-free) contact surfaces AC-3 (inductive): 2 A, 400 V
Full load current: 2 A, 400 V
AC-14/15: 1 A, 400 V
Blocked rotor: 14A, 400 V
For manual reset of unit after contact changeover Direct current

With max. reset on rising pressure. DC-13/14: 12W, 230 V 017-404866
Gold plated (oxide-free) contact surfaces
For control application
max. 100 mA / 30 V a.c./ d.c.
min. 1 mA / 5 V a.c. / d.c.
IC.PD.P10.E1.02 - 520B2187 15
Part Description Qty. Code no.
Covers: Polyamide With window 5 017-436166

Cover
Colour: Pale grey RAL 7035 Without window 5 017-436266
Replacement Pale grey Ral 7035

Setting knob 30 017-436366
Seal cap to replace setting knob so that Black 20 017-436066

Seal cap
Setting can only be altered with tools
Seal screws for

1 + 1 017-425166
cover and seal cap
For all RT thermostats with remote sensor.

Capillary tube gland 5 017-422066
G½A (pipe thread ISO 228/1), oil resistant rubber washer for max. 110°C/90 bar
For RT 106 thermostats with remote sensor.
Capillary tube gland 1 003N0155
G¾A (pipe thread ISO 228/1), oil resistant rubber washer for max. 110°C/90 bar
Sensor clip For all RT units with remote sensor L = 76 mm 10 017-420366
For RT thermostats with the sensor insert in a pocket. Tube with 3.5cm3
Heat conductive compound to be filled in the sensor pocket to improve heat transfer between
10 041E0114
compound pocket and sensor.
Application range for compound: −20 to +150°C, momentarily up to 220°C
For RT 14, 101 and 270

Sensor holder 20 set 017-420166
Sensor holder for wall mounting incl. four capillary tube clips
Sensor pocket for RT thermostats with cylindrical remote sensor

Insertion length d
Connection pipe
Used for the following types L Material Code no.
thread ISO 228/1
mm mm
All except
112 11 Brass 017-437066
RT 12, 23, 106, 108, 124, 270
All except
112 11 Stainless steel 18/8 017-436966
RT 12, 23, 106, 108, 124, 271
RT 106, RT 124 2) 110 15 Brass 060L3271661)
RT 106, RT 124 2) 110 15 Stainless steel 18/8 G ½A 060L3268661)
RT 106, RT 124 2) 160 15 Brass 060L3263661)
RT 106, RT 124 2) 160 15 Stainless steel 18(8 060L3269661)
RT 271 182 11 Brass 017-436766
RT 108 465 11 Brass 017-421666
1)
Supplied without washer set
2)
Unit supplied with washer set
See possibly page 8.

® Danfoss A/S 09-05/ IC-MC/mr
16 IC.PD.P10.E1.02-520B2187
Load Control Valves
Counterbalance, Vented Counterbalance and Motion Control Valve Packages for
applications up to 350 bar (5000 psi) and 190 L/min (50 USgpm)
EATON Vickers Screw-in Cartridge Valves V-VLOV-MC001-E1 June 2003 H-1

Section Contents
Load Control Valves
Typical Application Rated Flow

Model Pressure bar (psi) l/mim (USgpm) Page
Load Control Valves - Application guidelines, features and benefits .............................................................................. H-3
Functional symbols ......................................................................................................................................................... H-5
Counterbalance valves
CBV1/2-10......................................350 (5000) ..............................................60 (15) ...................................................... H-6
CBV1/2-12 .....................................350 (5000) ..............................................114 (30) .................................................... H-8
Vented counterbalance valves
VCB1-10.........................................350 (5000) ..............................................60 (15) .................................................... H-10
VCB1-12.........................................350 (5000) ..............................................114 (30)................................................... H-12
Motion control valves
MCV1-16........................................210 (3000)...............................................151 (40) .................................................. H-14
MCV1-20 .......................................210 (3000)...............................................190 (50) .................................................. H-16
Dual motion control valve
MCV2-20 .......................................210 (3000)...............................................190 (50) .................................................. H-18
Dual motion control valve with load lock
MCV4-16 .......................................210 (3000)...............................................151 (40) .................................................. H-20
Note
Pilot operated check valves
are covered in Section G.
H-2 EATON Vickers Screw-in Cartridge Valves V-VLOV-MC001-E1 June 2003

Section Overview
Load Control Valves
Load control valves Pilot operated check valves The 3-ported counterbal- 4-ported counterbalance
Eaton offers a broad range These valves are used: ance valves are offered valve is offered with a wide
of Vickers load control with a wide variety of variety of standard
• For position load locking standard housings with housings with SAE and
valving including counter-
balance, motion control and • As an alternative to SAE and BSPP port BSPP port options.
pilot operated check valves. counterbalance valves options. Aluminum and NOTE: For applications
The prime function of load where neither the over- steel housings are available where the flow rate will not
controls is to prevent loads running loads or release in the following styles: exceed 37,8 L/min (10
from running ahead of speed are factors in the • Inline single USgpm) for VCB1–10 and
pump supply and/or to pro- application. 95 L/min (25 Usgpm) for
• Inline dual
vide positive load holding. • Pilot operated check VCB1-12, the standard C-
These valves provide pre- valves are covered in • Inline dual, with integral **-4 housing can be used.
cise and stable motion con- section G shuttle For applications over those
trol. Load control valves are • SAE 4-bolt, Code 61 flows or those that require
ideally suited for moving Counterbalance a reduced pressure drop,
• Close coupled, nipple
and positioning systems. cartridges, 3-ported housings with the slot
mounted
These products include feature or a C-**-4U cavity
The CBV are single car- • Gasket mounted single are required.
both screw-in cartridge and tridge type counterbalance
inline housing valves to valves that have: • Gasket mounted dual Aluminum and steel
meet the majority of load • Various bolt on manifolds housings are available in
control requirements. • A check feature allowing the following styles:
free flow in one direction for Eaton hydraulic
motors • Inline single
Load control • A relief feature
application tips controlling flow in the • Inline dual
other direction
Vented counterbalance H
cartridges, 4-ported • Gasket mounted single
3-ported counterbalance • A pilot signal that over-
valves The VCB1-10 and VCB1-12
rides the relief setting Motion control valves
are single cartridge type
These valves are used with providing the counterbal- counterbalance valves that These are inline housing
an open center on/off direc- ance function. have: type motion control or
tional valve for: The CBV*–10 series prod- counterbalance valves that
• A check feature that
• Precise control of over- ucts are capable of handling utilize separate cartridges
allows free flow in one
running loads flows to up 60 L/min (15 to perform the counterbal-
direction
USgpm) and pressures up ance function as described
• Protection from pump • A relief feature that con-
to 350 bar (5000 psi). in the 3-ported version. The
cavitation trols flow in the other 16 and 20 series valves are
• Preventing actuator from The CBV*–12 series prod- direction and available in both single and
running ahead of the ucts are capable of handling dual functions. The 16
flows up to 114 L/min (30 • A pilot signal that over-
pump supply and rides the relief setting, series is capable of
USgpm) and pressures up handling flows up to 151
• Providing load holding to 350 bar (5000 psi). providing the counterbal-
and hose failure safety ance function L/min (40 USgpm) and
These valves are available pressures up to 210 bar
Vented (4-ported) with 4:1 and 10:1 pilot The additional 4th port on (3000 psi). The 20 series
counterbalance valves ratios. As a general rule, a this valve provides an exter- valves are capable of han-
These valves are used for: low pilot ratio will provide nal drain that makes the dling 190 L/min (50 USgpm)
better motion control and valve insensitive to back and pressures up to 210 bar
• Precise control of pressure at port 2, when
stability in systems with (3000 psi). Both series offer
overrunning loads the valve is piloted open.
higher capacitance (spongy) a 10:1 pilot ratio.
• Regenerative cylinder and inductance (high inertial This is particularly useful in
circuits loads). A high pilot ratio regenerative circuits, meter-
improves the efficiency of a out circuits, servo valves
• Meter-out control and
hydraulic system, but and proportional valves cir-
providing load holding
motion control stability may cuits. This valve is available
and hose failure safety
suffer. with a 4:1 pilot ratio. The
with proportional control
valves

Features and benefits Do not remove the spring The pilot-to-open valves housings with SAE and
of counterbalance & wire from the adjusting positively lock a load from BSPP port options in the
motion controls: screw. port 1 to port 2 until pilot following configurations:
• Positive load holding in 3. Tighten the jam nut to pressure applied to port 3 – Inline single
any position. secure the desired pres- is sufficient to unseat the – Inline dual
sure setting. valve. This then permits – SAE, 4-bolt
• Thermal expansion relief flow from port 1 to port 2. – Close coupled, nipple
protection. NOTE CBV*–10 spring wire The load can also be mounted
• Cartridge valves may be must not be removed. released through means of – Gasket mounted single
installed directly into cavi- Removal will affect the min- an optional screw type – Gasket mounted dual
ties machined in the imum adjustment of the override.
valve. These valves fit into
actuator body. This The POC*-10 covers flow C–*–3S cavities.
reduces the number of up to 60 L/min (15 USgpm).
potential leak points and CAUTION • Four standard cracking
The POC*-12 covers flow pressures permit energy
simplifies plumbing. Care should be up to 114 L/min (30
taken to ensure savings, while tailoring
• Line mounting of single USgpm). With infinite life the hydraulic system
or dual functions can the load is sup- qualification to a fatigue
ported by mechanical requirements to minimize
simplify installation of pressure rating of 310 bar shock.
load control valves in means when servicing or (4500 psi), these POC
many applications. removing the cartridge valves are suitable for use • Unique dual spring
valve. in a broad range of load design provides high
• Dual function models operational efficiency and
CAUTION control applications with
that can introduce low- a low pressure spring
typical system operating
pressure makeup flow to Hydraulically option for effective anti-
pressures up to 350 bar
prevent cavitation can be released “dead- cavitation protection.
(5000 psi). Tailoring of the
line mounted in hydro- man” brakes circuit to gain energy sav- • Unique design provides
static transmissions. should be used to lock ings while minimizing shock compact package and
• When used with paired static loads due to motor is obtained through the use low pressure drops that
cylinders, counterbalance and cylinder leakage. of several standard cracking match or exceed current
valves will help to bal- pressure ranges from 2,0 market expectations and
ance the load by transfer- CAUTION bar (30 psi) to 7 bar (100 provide for excellent
ring part of the load from Counterbalance psi). When anti-cavitation repeatability and stability.
the heavily loaded cylin- valves can be protection is required, the
der to the less loaded • 3:1 pilot ratio satisfies
damaged by 0,30 bar (5 psi) spring
cylinder. simple load holding appli-
severe decompression should be used. For those
cation requirements,
• When used with an open shock. To help prevent applications where pilot
while providing smooth
center directional control shock damage, a restriction pressure may not always
operation and longer
valve, deceleration con- may be added between the be available, the valve can
operating life.
trol can be provided. cylinder and the counterbal- be ordered with an optional
ance valve. adjustable override. • Optional adjustable over-
Adjusting counter ride releases the load for
CAUTION Pilot-to-open valves are
balance cartridge valve situations where pilot
suitable for a wide range of
Counterbalance pressure is not always
pressure setting: applications including aerial
valves are not available.
Counterbalance valves work platforms, boom
relief valves or
adjust in the opposite direc- truck, machine tool and
energy-saving devices. WARNING
tion of other pressure con- round bailer markets.
Stability problems may be
trol valves. Turning the Pilot operated check Do not use Pilot-
encountered when system
adjuster counterclockwise valves are covered in to-open check
operating pressure goes
increases the valve setting; section G. valves in load
below 50 bar (700 psi).
turning the adjustment holding applications where
Features and benefits either overrunning loads are
clockwise lowers the pres- Pilot operated of pilot operated
sure setting, releasing the possible or load release
check valves check valves: speed is critical. Failure to
load.
The POC*-10 and POC*-12 • Simple load holding observe these guidelines
1. Loosen the jam nut. series of pilot-to-open check device. Low cost alterna- may result in bodily injury
2. Turn the adjusting screw valves complement the tive to more complex or damage to equipment.
clockwise to reduce the CBV*-10 and CBV*-12 coun- solutions when overrun-
pressure setting, or counterbalance cartridges and ning loads are not pres- WARNING
terclockwise to increase are physically interchange- ent and / or control of For pressure over
the pressure setting. able with them. The POC’s load release speed is not 210 bar (3000
provide a low cost alterna- required. psi) use steel
tive to load control when
• Provides high operational housings.
the dynamics of neither
overrunning loads nor load efficiency and low spring
release speed are factors to settings.
be considered in the design • Valves are offered with a
of the hydraulic circuit for wide variety of standard
the load to be controlled.

Functional
Symbols
load Control Valves
CBV cartridges in housings VCB cartridges in housings POC cartridges in housings*

I - Inline Mounted I - Inline Mounted I - Inline Mounted
1 F Type S Type
C1
2 3 2 3
3
3 Pilot
1 1
V2 4 2 B - 4-Bolt Pad (Size 12 only)
B - 4-Bolt Pad (Size 12 only) F Type S Type
G - Gasket Mounted, Single
C1 C1 Pilot C1 Pilot
C1 C2
Pilot Pilot
3 Pilot V1 V1
V2
V2 3 Pilot V1 N - Close Coupled, Nipple Mounted
N - Closed Coupled, F Type S Type
Vent
Nipple Mounted C1 C2 C1 C2
C2 D - Dual Line Mounted
Vent V2 V1
C1
V1 V2 V1 V2
G - Gasket Mounted, Single
V1 V2 F Type S Type
G - Gasket Mounted, Single C2 C1 C1 C2 C1 C2
C2
C1
V1 V2 V1 V2 H
D - Dual Line Mounted
V1 V2 F Type S Type
D - Dual Line Mounted C1 C2 C1 C2
P - Dual Gasket Mounted
V2 V1
V1 V2 V1 V2
P - Dual Gasket Mounted
F Type S Type
C1 C2 C1 C2
C2 C1
H - Dual, bolt on for H or T

motor V1 V2 V1 V2
2K - Dual, bolt on for 2000
series motor * Pilot operated check valve data sheets
M - Dual Counterbalance are included in Section G
Line Mounted
w/Integral Shuttle
V2 S V1
C2 C1

CBV1/2-10
Counterbalance valve
Description Operation
The CBV*-10 is a 3-ported, The CBV counterbalance Flow from port 1 to port 2 setting has been reached or
externally piloted, screw-in valve allows free flow from is blocked until either the sufficient pilot pressure has
cartridge type counterbal- port 2 (inlet) to port 1 (load). predetermined pressure been applied to port 3
ance valve. (pilot).
Functional Symbol RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49˚C (120˚F)
1
Typical application pressure (all ports) 350 bar (5000 psi)
Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) 350 bar (5000 psi)
3 Rated flow 60 L/min (15 USgpm)
Cracking pressure @ 1 L/min (0.25 USgpm) 30 - 62-210 bar (900-3000 psi)
50 - 186-350 bar (2700-5000 psi)
2 Internal leakage 5 drops/min. max. Port 1 to Port 2 @ 77% of crack pressure
Temperature range -40˚ to 120˚C (-40˚ to 248˚F)
Sectional View Cavity C-10-3S
Pilot ratio 4:1, 10:1
Fluids All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
MIL-H-5606, SAE 10, SAE 20, etc.
Filtration Cleanliness code 18/16/13
Standard housing materials Aluminum or steel
Weight cartridge only 0,23 kg. (0.50 lbs.)
Seal kit 02-173019 Buna-N
02-173020 Viton®
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont
CAUTION WARNING
Adjustments For pressure over
exceeding 350 bar 210 bar (3000 psi)
(5000 psi) may use steel housing.
3 damage the body.
Pressure Drop Curves
2 Cartridge only
For 4:1 Ratio

Pilot pressure, =
Cracking pressure + (5 x Port 2 pressure) - Port 1 pressure
4
For 10:1 Ratio
Pilot pressure, =
10 A - Piloted open port 1 to port 2
B - Free flow port 2 to port 1

Model Code
CBV1/2-10
CBV* – 10 (V) – * – * *** – * – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Valve function 7 Housing port sizes

CBV - Counterbalance valve PORT SIZE VALVE BODY CODES
I N/G/P D/M H/2K
2 Pilot ratio Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum
1- 4:1 SAE 6 A6H* S6T A6H A6T A6H S6T -
2 - 10:1 SAE 8 A8H S8T - - A8H S8T -
3 Valve size SAE 10 - S10T - - A10H S10T A10H
10 - Size 10 1/4" BSPP A2G - - - A2G S2G -
3/8" BSPP A3G* S3G A3G A3G A3G S3G -
4 Seals
1/2" BSPP - S4G - - A4G S4G -
Blank - Buna-N * Light Duty Housing is available, to specify, substitute H or G with T or B respectively.
V - Viton For housing part numbers and dimensions see section J.
Note -P,H, 2K, D and M bodies contain two CBV valves.
5 Adjustment options
S - Screw with locknut
8 Free flow crack pressure 9 Pressure range 11 Special features
C - Cap over screw
K - Hand knob A - 1,4 bar (20 psi) (standard) 30 - 62-210 bar (900-3000 psi) 00 - None
B - 0,28 bar (4 psi) (anti 50 - 186-350 bar (2700- (Only required if valve has
6 Valve Body cavitation) 5000 psi) special features, omit if 00)
O - Cartridge only C - 1.4 bar (20 psi) with low
leak poppet * 10 Pressure setting
I - Inline body
N - Close coupled, nipple D - 0.28 bar (4 psi) with low (optional)
mounting leak poppet * (Specified by customer in 100
G - Gasket mounted, single * Low leak poppet is only available on
CBV2-**. psi increments) for example:
D - Dual counterbalance, 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi) H
Only apply B and D options if required in
line mounted your application, these are not preferred 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
M - Dual counterbalance, options.
line mounted with CBV Valves should not be applied with
integral shuttle valve closed center directional valves.
P - Dual counterbalance,
gasket mounted
H - Dual counter balance, Dimensions
bolt on manifold for mm (inch)
H, S or T series motor
“C” Adjustment (Cap over screw) “K” Adjustment (Hand knob) “S” Adjustment (Screw w/locknut)
2K -Dual counter balance,
bolt on manifold for Ø 31,75
2000 series motor
(1.25) Nom.
Torque cartridge 12,7

in housing: (0.50) hex
65,6 (2.58) 61,0 (2.40)
A - 47-54 Nm (35-40 ft.lbs) 55,4 (2.18 )
61,7 (Nominal (Nominal 25,4
S - 68-75 Nm (50-55 ft.lbs) (2.43) full in) Nominal
full out) (1.0) h ex
Nominal full out
3(P) 0.875”-14 Thd. 48,0

(1.89)
2(V)
Note Ø 17,4
Turn screw or knob clock- 1(C) (0.68 6)
wise to reduce pressure
Ø 19,0
setting and release load.
(0.748)

CBV1/2-12
Counterbalance valve
The CBV*-12 is a 3-ported, The counterbalance valve to port 2 is blocked until reached or sufficient pilot
externally piloted, screw-in allows free flow from port 2 either the predetermined pressure has been applied
cartridge type counterbal- to port 1. Flow from port 1 pressure setting has been to port 3 (pilot).
ance valve.
Functional Symbol RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

1
Rated flow 114 L/min (30 USgpm)
3
50 - 186-350 bar (2700-5000 psi)
Sectional View Cavity C-12-3S
Pilot ratio 4:1, 10:1
02-165887 Viton®
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont
Cartridge only
Flow – L/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49°C)
0 20 40 60 80 100
WARNING
3 300 20
For pressure over
Pressure Drop – bar

Pressure Drop – psi
210 bar (3000 psi)

2 use steel housing. 15
200
CAUTION
10
Adjustments A
1 exceeding 350 bar 100
(5000 psi) may B 5
damage the body.
0
For 4:1 Ratio 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Pilot pressure, = Flow – USgpm (105 SUS oil @120°F)
4
A - Piloted open port 1 to port 2
For 10:1 Ratio B - Free flow port 2 to port 1
Pilot pressure, =
10

Model Code
CBV1/2-12
CBV* – 12 (V) – * – * * *** – * – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Valve function 8 Housing port sizes 10 Pressure range

CBV - Counterbalance valve PORT SIZE VALVE BODY CODES 30 - 62-210 bar
I B N/G/P D/M (900-3000 psi)
2 Pilot ratio 50 - 186-350 bar
SAE 8 - - 8T -
1 - 4:1 (2700-5000 psi)
2 - 10:1 SAE 10 10T - - 10T
SAE 12 12T - - 12T 11 Pressure setting
3 Valve size 1/2" BSPP 4G - 4G 4G (optional)
12 - Size 12 3/4" BSPP 6G - - - (Specified by customer in 100
psi increments) for example:
4 SAE-Code 61 6T 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
Seals
For housing part numbers and dimensions see section J. 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
Blank - Buna-N
V - Viton
9 Free flow crack pressure 12 Special features
5 Adjustment
A - 2,0 bar (25 psi) (standard) D - 0.28 bar (4 psi) with low 00 - None
S - Screw with locknut B - 0,30 bar (4 psi) leak poppet * (Only required if valve has
C - Cap over screw (anti-cavitation) * Low leak poppet is only available on special features, omit if 00)
K - Hand knob CBV2-**.
C - 1.4 bar (20 psi) with low
Only apply B and D options if required in
leak poppet * your application, these are not preferred
6 Valve body options.
O - Cartridge only CBV Valves should not be applied with
I - Inline body closed center directional valves.
B - SAE 4 - Bolt pad
N - Close coupled, nipple H
mounting Dimensions
G - Gasket mounted, single mm (inch)
D - Dual counterbalance,
line mounted Torque cartridge in housing:
M - Dual counterbalance, A - 81-95 Nm (60-70 ft.lbs)
line mounted with S - 102-115 Nm (75-85 ft.lbs)
integral shuttle valve “C” Adjustment “K” Adjustment “S” Adjustment
P - Dual counterbalance,
gasket mounted
Ø 31,75 (1.25)
7 Valve housing material 4,0 (0.16) hex
nom. 13,0 (0.50) hex
A - Aluminum
S - Steel
66,8 (2.63)
70,4 75,4 (2.97) 70,0 (2.75) Nom. full out
(2.77) (Nom. (Nom.
Nom. full out) full in) 53,8 (2.12)
31,75 (1.25)
Nom. full in
hex
1.063”-12 Thd.
3 57,7
(2.27)
Note 2
Turn screw or knob clock-
wise to reduce pressure 1 Ø 22,17 (0.873)
setting and release load. Ø 23,75 (0.935)

VCB1-10
Vented counterbalance
valve
The VCB1-10 is a 4-ported, The VCB1-10 counterbal- from port 1 to port 2 is sufficient pilot pressure has
externally piloted, screw-in ance valve will allow free blocked until either a prede- been sensed on
cartridge type counter- flow from port 2 to port 1 termined pressure setting port 3 (pilot). Port 4 is
balance valve with the through a built in check has been reached or vented to tank.
separate vent. This separate valve. Flow
vent makes the valve
insensitive to back pressure
at port 2. RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Functional Symbol Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) 350 bar (5000 psi)
1 Rated flow 60 L/min (15 USgpm)
50 - 186-350 bar (2700-5000 psi)
4 Cavity C-10-4 or C-10-4U
2
Pilot ratio 4:1
Sectional View Fluids All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
Seal kit 889625 Buna-N
566080 Viton®

Cartridge only
Flow – L/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49°C)

WARNING
10 20 30 40 50
For pressure over 400 30
210 bar (3000 psi) Pressure Drop – bar
4 use steel housing.

300
CAUTION 20
Adjustments 200
3 exceeding 350 bar
(5000 psi) may 10
100 B
damage the body.
2 A
Note
0 0
Valve should be set 1.3 0 3 6 9 12 15
1 times load induced pres-
sure. Flow – USgpm (105 SUS oil @120°F)
For 4:1 Ratio
Crack pressure – Load pressure
Pilot pressure = A - Piloted open port 1 to port 2
Pilot ratio

Model Code
VCB1-10
VCB1 – 10 (V) – * – * **** – * – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Valve function 7 Housing port sizes

VCB - Vented counterbalance PORT SIZE VALVE BODY CODES
valve I D G
Alum. Steel Alum. Steel Alum. Steel
2 Pilot ratio SAE 6 A6H* S6T A6H S6T A6H S6T
1 - 4:1
SAE 8 A8H** S8T** A8H** S8T** A8H** S8T**
3 Valve size SAE 10 A10H** - - S10T - -
10 - Size 10 1/4" BSPP A2G - - - - -
3/8" BSPP A3G** S3G** A3G** S3G** A3G S3G**
4 Seals
* Light Duty Housing is available, to specify, substitute H with T respectively. 10 Pressure setting
Blank - Buna-N **
Housings with slot.
V - Viton (optional)
Note - for housing part numbers and dimensions see section J.
(Specified by customer in 100
5 Adjustment psi increments) for example:
8 Free flow crack pressure 9 Pressure range 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
C - Cap over screw A - 1,4 bar (20 psi) (standard) 30 - 62-210 bar (900-3000 psi) 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
K - Hand knob B - 0,28 bar (4 psi) (anti- 50 - 186-350 bar (2700-
cavitation) 5000 psi) 11 Special features
6 Valve body 00 - None H
O - Cartridge only (Only required if valve has
I - Inline body special features, omit if 00)
G - Gasket mounted, single
D - Dual counterbalance,
line mounted
“K” Adjustment “S” Adjustment
Ø 31,75 (1.25) nom. 4,0 (0.16) hex
Dimensions “C” Adjustment
mm (inch)
Torque cartridge in housing: 12,7 (0.50) hex

A - 47-54 Nm (35-40 ft.lbs)
S - 68-75 Nm (50-75 ft.lbs) 53,8 45,0
(2.12) (1.77)
25,4 (1.00) hex 31,8 54,4
(1.25) (2.14)
0.875”-14 Thd.
Note
Turn screw or knob clock-
wise to reduce pressure 4
setting and release load. 63,8
(2.51)
3
1
Ø 15,80 (0.622)
Ø 17,40 (0.686)
Ø 19,00 (0.748)

VCB1-12
Vented counterbalance
valve
The VCB1-12 is a 4-ported, The VCB1-12 counterbalance Flow from port 1 to port 2 is or sufficient pilot pressure
externally piloted, screw-in valve will allow free flow blocked until either a prede- has been sensed on
cartridge type counter- from port 2 to port 1 through termined pressure setting port 3 (pilot). Port 4 is
balance valve with the a built in check valve. has been reached vented to tank.
separate vent. This separate
vent makes the valve insen- RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
sitive to back pressure at Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49˚C (120˚F)
port 2. Typical application pressure (all ports) 350 bar (5000 psi)
Functional Symbol Cracking pressure @ 1 L/min (0.25 USgpm) 30 - 35-210 bar (500-3000 psi)
1 50 - 175-350 bar (2500-5000 psi)
Internal leakage 5 drops/min. max. Port 1 to Port 2 @ 77% of crack pressure
3 Cavity C-12-4 or C-12-4U
Pilot ratio 4:1
4 Fluids All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
2 MIL-H-5606, SAE 10, SAE 20, etc.
Sectional View Standard housing materials Aluminum or steel
02-160980 Viton®

Cartridge only
WARNING
For pressure over
210 bar (3000 psi) Flow – L/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49°C)
use steel housing.
20 40 60 80 100
CAUTION 300 21
4
Adjustments
exceeding 350 bar
(5000 psi) may 200 14
3 damage the body.
B 7
2 100
Note
Valve should be set 1.3
A
times load induced 0 0
1 pressure. 0 6 12 18 24 30
Flow – USgpm (105 SUS oil @120°F)
For 4:1 Ratio
Relief setting – Load pressure
Pilot pressure = A - Piloted open port 1 to port 2
Pilot ratio

Model Code
VCB1-12
VCB1 – 12 (V) – * – * **** – * – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Valve function 6 Valve Body 8 Free flow crack pressure 10 Pressure setting
VCB - Vented counterbalance O- Cartridge only A - 1,7 bar (25 psi) (standard) (optional)
valve I - Inline body B - 0,28 bar (4 psi) (anti- (Specified by customer in 100
G- Gasket mounted, single cavitation) psi increments) for example:
2 Pilot ratio D- Dual counterbalance, 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
line mounted 9 Pressure range 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
1 - 4:1
30 - 25-210 bar (500-3000 psi)
3 Valve size 50 - 175-350 bar (2700- 11
7 Special features
12 - Size 12 Housing port sizes 5000 psi)
00 - None
PORT SIZE VALVE BODY CODES (Only required if valve has
4 Seals I/D G special features, omit if 00)
Blank - Buna-N Alum. Steel Alum. Steel
V - Viton SAE 8 - - A8T** S8T**
5 Adjustment
SAE 10 A10T S10T - -
SAE 12 A12T** S12T** - -
C - Cap over screw 3/8" BSPP - - A4G** S4G**
K - Hand knob 1/2" BSPP A4G S4G** - -
**Housing with slot
H
Note - for housing part numbers and dimensions see section J*.
Dimensions 4,0 (0.16) hex

mm (inch) “S” Adjustment
Torque cartridge in housing: “C” Adjustment
“K” Adjustment
A - 81-95 Nm (60-70 ft.lbs) 50,4
Ø 31,75 12,7 (0.50) hex
S - 102-115 Nm (75-85 ft.lbs) (1.98)
41,0
(1.61)
31,7 (1.25) hex
49,5
(1.95)
1.062”-12 Thd.
4
91,6
(3.60)
3
Note
Turn screw or knob clock- 2
wise to reduce pressure set-
ting and release load.
1
Ø 20,57 (0.810)
Ø 22,17 (0.873)
Ø 23,75 (0.935)

MCV1-16
Motion control valve
The MCV1-16 is an inline The MCV1-16 is an inline valve controls a moving load will also lock or hold a load in
housing type motion control housing type motion control and prevents loads from any position and provides for
or load holding valve. This or load holding valve. This running ahead of a pump. It thermal expansion relief.
valve controls a moving load
and prevents loads from
RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
running ahead of a pump. It
will also lock or hold a load in Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49˚C (120˚F)
any position and provides for Typical application pressure (all ports) 210 bar (3000 psi)
thermal expansion relief. Rated flow 151 L/min (40 USgpm)
Free flow cracking pressure @ 1 L/min (0.25 USgpm) 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi)
35 - 13,6-240 bar (200-3500 psi)
Internal leakage Port “C” to “V” less than 5 drops/min. max. @ 210 bar (3000 psi)
Functional Symbol Temperature range -40˚ to 120˚C (-40˚ to 248˚F)
C Pilot ratio 11:1
Standard housing material Aluminum
Pilot
Weight 4,50 kg. (10.00 lbs.)
Seal kits (Check valve) 565810 Buna-N
889609 Viton®
V Seal kits (Relief valve) 565810 Buna-N
889609 Viton®
Sectional View Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont
Pilot pressure calculation for 11:1 Ratio

Nominal pressure to open valve by remote control
Pilot pressure =
Cracking pressure + (12 x Port V pressure) - Port C pressure
11
C
V Pressure Drop Curves
Free Flow (V to C) Piloted Open (C to V)

Pilot
Flow – L/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49°C) Flow – L/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49°C)
0 50 100 150 0 50 100 150
250 300 20
15
Pressure Drop (bar)
250
Pressure Drop (psi)
200
15
200
150
10
150
10
100
100
5 5
50 50
0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40
Flow – USgpm (105 SUS oil @120°F) Flow – USgpm (105 SUS oil @120°F)

Model Code
MCV1-16
MCV1 – 16 (V) – * – *** – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1Valve Function 3 Seals 5

Port size 7 Pressure setting
MCV1 - Motion control valve Blank - ® Buna-N 12T - SAE 12 (light duty) Optional - specify in 100 psi
V - Viton 6B - 3/4” BSPP (light duty) ranges. If not specified, set at:
2 Size 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
6 Cracking pressure range 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
16 - 16 Size 4 Adjustment
K - Hand knob 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi)
S - Screw with locknut 35 - 13,6-240 bar 8 Special features
(200-3500 psi)
00 - None
(Only required if valve has
special features, omit if 00)
Installation
Dimensions
mm (inch) 31,8
63,5 (1.25) H
Torque cartridge in housing (2.50)
108-122 Nm (80-90 ft.lbs)
63,5 47,6 (1.88)
(2.50)
RV3–16–S
CV1–16–P–0–5
100,0
63,5 9,5 (0.38) (3.94)
(2.50)
28,6
(1.13) 60,4 V
76,3 (2.38)
(3.00)
C 85,7 133,4
(3.38) (5.25)
38,1 1,1 (0.44)
(1.50) 2 places
Pilot SAE 6 139,7 (5.50) 31,8

165,1 (6.50) 63,5 (1.25)
(2.50)

MCV1-20
Motion control valve
The MCV1-20 is an inline This valve allows free flow the opposite direction until pilot pressure has been
housing type motion control from the “V” port to the “C” either the relief setting is applied to the “Pilot” port.
or load holding valve. This port and blocks flow in reached or until sufficient
and prevents loads from run- RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
ning ahead of a pump. It will Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49˚C (120˚F)
also lock or hold a load in any Typical application pressure (all ports) 210 bar (3000 psi)
position and provides for
thermal expansion relief.
Free flow cracking pressure @ 1 L/min (0.25 USgpm) 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi)
35 - 13,6-240 bar (200-3500 psi)
Internal leakage Port “C” to “V” less than 5 drops/min. max. @ 210 bar (3000 psi)
Functional Symbol
Pilot ratio 10:1
C Fluids All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
Pilot Weight 5,40 kg. (12.00 lbs.)
889619 Viton®
V Seal kits (Relief valve) 565810 Buna-N
889609 Viton®
Sectional View Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont

Pilot pressure =
10
V
C
Pilot
Free Flow (V to C) Piloted Open (C to V)
40 80 120 160 200 40 80 120 160 200
100 7 600 40
6

500
80
5 30
400
60 4
300
3 20
40
200
2
10
20 100
1
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50

Model Code
MCV1-20
MCV1 – 20 (V) – * – *** – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Valve Function 4 Adjustment 6 Cracking pressure range 8 Special features
MCV1 - Motion control valve K - Hand knob 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi) 00 - None
S - Screw with locknut 35 - 13,6-240 bar (Only required if valve has
2 Size (200-3500 psi) special features, omit if 00)
5 Port size
20 - 20 Size
7 Pressure setting
16T - SAE 16 (light duty)
3 Seals 8B - 1” BSPP (light duty) Optional - specify in 100 psi
Blank - Buna-N ranges. If not specified, set at:
V - Viton® 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
Installation
Dimensions
mm (inch)
63,5
Torque CV2-20 cartridge (2.50)
in housing 128-155 H
Nm (95-115 ft.lbs)
44,4 (1.75)
Torque RV3-16 cartridge
in housing 108-122 109,5 (4.31)
Nm (80-90 ft.lbs)
RV–3–16–S
84,1
(3.31)
CV2–20–P–0–5
44,4
(1.75)
82,5
(3.25) 85,7
133,3 (3.37) V
C (5.25) Ø10,3(0.406) 152,4
through, (6.00)
2 places
44,4
(1.75)
SAE 6
31,7 119,7 (5.50) 31,7

Pilot (1.25) 165,1 (6.50) (1.25)

MCV2-20
Dual-motion control valve
The MCV2-20 is a dual This valve allows free flow in the opposite direction pilot pressure has been
inline housing type motion from the “V” port to the until either the relief setting applied from the opposite
control or load holding “C” ports and blocks flow is reached or until sufficient “V” port.
valve. This valve controls a
RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
moving load and prevents
loads from running ahead Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49˚C (120˚F)
of a pump. It will also lock Typical application pressure (all ports) 210 bar (3000 psi)
or hold a load in any posi- Rated flow 190 L/min (50 USgpm)
tion and provides for ther- Free flow cracking pressure @ 1 L/min (0.25 USgpm) 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi)
mal expansion relief. 35 - 13,6-240 bar (200-3500 psi)
Functional Symbol Internal leakage, Port “C” to “V” less than 5 drops/min. max. @ 210 bar (3000 psi)
C1 C2 Pilot ratio 10:1
Weight 10,0 kg. (21.50 lbs.)
V1 V2 889619 Viton®
Seal kits (Relief valve) 565810 Buna-N
Sectional View 889609 Viton®

Pilot pressure, nominal at port 3 =
10
Free Flow Piloted Open

(V1 to C1 or V2 to C2) (C1 to V1 or C2 to V2)
40 80 120 160 200 40 80 120 160 200
100 7 600 40
6

80 500
5 30
400
60 4
300 20
40 3
200
2
20 10
1 100
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50

Model Code
MCV2-20
MCV2 – 20 (V) – * – *** – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1Valve Function 3 Seals 6 Cracking pressure range 8 Special features

MCV2 - Dual-motion Blank - Buna-N 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi) 00 - None
control valve V - Viton® 35 - 13,6-240 bar (Only required if valve has
(200-3500 psi) special features, omit if 00)
2 Size 4 Adjustment
20 - 20 Size K - Hand knob 7 Pressure setting
S - Screw with locknut Optional - specify in 100 psi
5 Port size ranges. If not specified, set at:
20T - SAE 12 (light duty) 20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
8B - 1” BSPP (light duty) 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
Installation
Dimensions
mm (inch)
Torque CV2-20 cartridge

in housing 128-155 127,0 H
Nm (95-115 ft.lbs) (5.00)
Torque RV3-16 cartridge Ø 0.375-16 x 50
in housing 108-122 deep
Nm (80-90 ft.lbs) 4 places
55,6 (2.19)
120,6 (4.75)
RV3–16–S
(2 req’d) 84,1
(3.31)
CV2–20–P
(2 req’d)
44,4
(1.75) 85,7
(3.37)
V2 V1
C2 C1
152,4
(6.00)
31,7
165,1 (6.50) (1.25)
95,3 (3.75)

MCV4-16
Dual-motion control valve
The MCV4-16 is a dual inline This valve allows free flow in the opposite direction until pilot pressure has been
housing type motion control from the “V” ports to the either the relief setting is applied from the opposite
or load holding valve. This “C” ports and blocks flow reached or until sufficient “V” port.
and prevents loads from run- RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
ning ahead of a pump. It will Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49˚C (120˚F)
also lock or hold a load in any Typical application pressure (all ports) 210 bar (3000 psi)
position and provides for Rated flow 151 L/min (40 USgpm)
thermal expansion relief and
make-up oil. Free flow cracking pressure @ 1 L/min (0.25 USgpm) 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi)
35 - 13,6-240 bar (200-3500 psi)
Internal leakage Port “C” to “V less than 5 drops/min. max. @ 210 bar (3000 psi)
Functional Symbol Temperature range -40˚ to 120˚C (-40˚ to 248˚F)
C1 C2 Pilot ratio 11:1
Weight 8,0 kg. (18 lbs.)
V1 Tank V2 889609 Viton®
Seal kits (Relief valve) 565810 Buna-N
Sectional View 889609 Viton®

Pilot pressure =
11
Free Flow Piloted Open

(V1 to C1 or V2 to C2) (C1 to V1 or C2 to V2)
0 50 100 150 0 50 100 150
250 600 40
15

500
200
30
400
150 10
300
20
100
200
5 10
50 100
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

Model Code
MCV4 – 16 (V) – * – *** – **/** – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1Valve Function 3 Seals 5 Port size 7 Pressure setting

MCV4 - Dual-motion Blank - Buna-N 12T - SAE 12 (light duty) Optional - specify in 100 psi
control valve V - Viton® 6B - 3/4” BSPP (light duty) ranges. If not specified, set at:
20 - 140 bar (2000 psi)
2 Size 4 Adjustment 6 Cracking pressure range 35 - 240 bar (3500 psi)
16 - 16 Size K - Hand knob 13 - 3,4-8,4 bar (50-1300 psi)
S - Screw with locknut 35 - 13,6-240 bar 8 Special features
(200-3500 psi)
00 - None
(Only required if valve has
special features, omit if 00)
Installation Torque cartridge in housing

Dimensions 108-122 Nm (80-90 ft.lbs)
mm (inch)
RV3–16–S H
(2 req’d)
103,9
(4.09)
CV1–16V–P–0–50
(2 req’d)
Ø 13,5 (0.531)
mtg. holes
2 plcs.
127,0 C1 C2
44,5 101,6
Tank (5.00)
69,9 (1.75) (4.00)
(2.75)
50,8
12,7 (0.50) 12,7 (0.50) (2.00)
50,8 (2.00)
101,6 (4.00)
127,0 (5.00)
101,6
127,0 (4.00)
(5.00) V1 V2
12,7 (.50)

PROYECTOS Y COMPONENTES DE INGENIERÍA INDUSTRIAL
Vignola: Hoevel 4427, Quinta Normal, Santiago, Fono 02 433 6200, Fax 02 433 6232, email : vignosan@vignola.cl
WINCHE HIDRÁULICO WH-0600
MANUAL
Manual Winche Hidráulico WH-0600 Página 1 de 9

1.0 DESCRIPCIÓN Y CARACTERÍSTICAS GENERALES:
El diseño del winche hidráulico modelo WH-Cap es una caja reductora del tipo sin fin corona que en el
eje de la corona tiene acoplado un tambor para accionamiento de cables o cuerdas, dependiendo de la
forma que se use, como winche o como cabrestante.
Se prefiere el sistema de accionamiento sin fin corona para aprovechar sus capacidades de
autobloqueo.
Se considera un eje de accionamiento por ambos extremos de la caja para facilitar la posición correcta o
más cómoda del tambor respecto a la carga o del motor de accionamiento.
Las posibilidades de accionamiento son variadas, en el esquema se muestra el accionamiento con

motor hidráulico con acople directo sobre uno de los ejes, pero es posible hacer un montaje diferente,
con motor eléctrico por ejemplo, ubicado convenientemente a los costados de la caja de reducción de
velocidad y con transmisión con poleas sobre el eje.
Es posible su uso como winche, con el cable fijo al tambor y una de sus puntas libre para aplicar carga o
como cabrestante, enrollando un cordel o una cuerda directamente sobre el tambor, en cualquiera de los
dos casos se mantiene la capacidad de tracción específica para el modelo.
En su construcción se ha sobredimensionado ampliamente los ejes, los rodamientos y el cuerpo de

manera de soportar el trato pesado que normalmente se le da a estos componentes.
La caja es totalmente sellada para permitir su montaje en cualquier posición.
2.0 ESPECIFICACIONES BÁSICAS
Winche modelo W-600 con motor hidráulico
Capacidad de carga en el tambor, [N-m] 353

Capacidad de carga en el tambor, N 5.890
Diámetro del tambor, [mm] 114
Carga de rotura del cable, [kg] 6000
Velocidad máxima de giro del tambor, [rpm] 10
Velocidad máxima lineal en el cable, [m/min] 3,5
Presión máxima en la conexión hidráulica, [bar] 75
PRECAUCIÓN: El accionamiento hidráulico que no forma parte de este winche

debe garantizar que se cumplan los límites establecidos para la presión y la
velocidad de giro. Tanto, para garantizar la integridad del winche mismo, como
para proteger los sistemas al que se le aplica fuerza.

3.0 PLANO DE DIMENSIONES GENERALES PARA MONTAJE

4.0 LISTADO DE PARTES DE REPUESTO
00 Cuando requiera solicitar repuestos pida de acuerdo con la

12 siguiente lista usando el código compuesto de la siguiente
forma:
WH-0600-XX, donde XX es el número de item de

la lista que sigue:
11
Item Descripción Cant
00 Winche completo 1
10 01 Caja de rodamientos 1
02 Rodamiento rodillos cónicos 4
03 Retén 4
04 Tapa de rodamientos con pernos 4
05 Motor hidráulico 1
06 Base de motor hidráulico con pernos 1
07 Acoplamiento con chavetas y pernos 1
08 Tornillo sin fin 1
09 Eje de tambor con chavetas 1
09 10 Corona completa 1
11 Tambor con tapa y perno 1
08 12 Tapa con empaquetadura y pernos 1
02
Ejemplos:
01
Si quiere el winche completo pida WH-0600-00
06
03 Si quiere la corona completa pida WH-0600-10
04
05 07 Los item 2, 3 y 4 se repiten en cada punta de eje y son
iguales.
La cantidad indicada es la utilizada en un winche:

5.0 INFORMACIÓN PARA OPERACIÓN Y DE SEGURIDAD
5.1 GENERAL
Antes de usar el winche asegúrese de leer las instrucciones entregadas por el fabricante.
Póngase en contacto con el fabricante si tiene dudas sobre la instalación, la operación o el mantenimiento.
Guarde estas el manual y estas las instrucciones.
5.2 INSTALACIÓN
El winche está diseñado para ser instalado solamente apernado con cuatro pernos en su base.
No utilice otro tipo de cable o de una longitud que no sea el especificado.
No quite ni oculte letreros de advertencia.
5.3 SIEMPRE ANTES DE USAR
Revise el mecanismo del winche, el cable y los aparejos.
Repare o reemplace cualquier componente dañado por uno de iguales especificaciones.
Compruebe las fijaciones, los pernos y el estdo de la estructura donde se fija el winche.
Compruebe que las mangueras del sistema hidráulico están en buen estado, libres de filtraciones y con todas sus
fijaciones en su lugar.
No utilice el equipo si detecta alguna falla en cualquiera de sus componentes.
Si la temperatura ambiente es excesivamente fría sea prudente, se pueden afectar algunas propiedades de los
materiales que componen el sistema.
El cable no debe estar con lubricante, debe permanecer seco.

5.4 DURANTE EL USO
En esta aplicación especial el winche no está diseñado nada más que para el movimiento del pasillo de acceso al
carro de mantenimiento. No está destinado a levantar cargas ni personas.
Cuando el pasillo necesite subir o bajar debe estar totalmente libre, no se puede accionar el winche si sobre el
pasillo o en la trayectoria de su movimiento hay carga, personas u obstáculos.
Mantenerse lejos del cable y del pasillo para evitar engancharse durante el movimiento.
No toque el cable mientras el winche esté en movimiento.
Compruebe que el cable se enrolla ordenadamente sobre el tambor llenando una capa antes de empezar con la
siguiente, esto evita caídas de la carga y golpes que pueden dañar los componentes.
Se debe asegurar el área alrededor del pasillo para evitar que alguien inadvertidamente se ponga en la
trayectoria del movimiento o en la posible zona de la caída en caso de corte o falla del sistema.
No permita el roce del cable con estructuras u otros objetos.
Mantenga un mínimo de cinco vueltas cuando el cable alcance su posición más extrema desenrollado.
Aborte de inmediato el trabajo si detecta fallas en cualquier componente del sistema completo.
5.4 ETIQUETA IMPRESA
En las páginas que siguen se incluye una etiqueta para mantener siempre adherida al winche. Si pierde la que se
incluye con la entrega imprímala, plastifíquela y péguela al winche, es primordial para mantener a la vista de los
operadores la forma correcta y segura de operarlo.

Lado 1 de la etiqueta:
CUIDADO
Si no se siguen estas instrucciones se pueden generar condiciones de

riesgo, incluyendo la muerte.
ANTES DE OPERAR EL WINCHE
Lea cuidadosamente el manual de operación del equipo.

Inspecciones todo, las fijaciones, el winche mismo, el cable y los
aparejos.
Asegure que todo funciona de acuerdo a lo especificado.
Asegure que las mangueras del sistema hidráulico están en buenas
condiciones.
No opera si detecta cualquier falla en el sistema completo.
No haga modificaciones sin autorización del fabricante.
Asegure que le presión máxima este controlada y no se sobrepase.
Opere con precauciones si la temperatura es excesivamente baja.
Asegúrese que el cable está seco y limpio.
NO RETIRE NI TAPE ESTA TARJETA DE ADVERTENCIAS.

CUANDO OPERE EL WINCHE
No levante la carga por encima de personas.

Mantenga las manos o cualquier parte del cuero lejos de las piezas en
movimiento.
No toque el cable mientras el winche se mueve.
Asegúrese de que el cable se enrolla parejo sobre el tambor, con
carga o sin carga.
Compruebe que la carga se mueve sin obstáculos y sin generar
riesgos para las personas o las instalaciones.
Cuide que el cable en su recorrido no toque superficies metálicas.
Asegure que la presión máxima no se sobrepasa.
Mantenga a las personas fuera del área alrededor de la carga o del
área en que podría alcanzar al caer.
En su extensión máxima deben quedar a lo menos cinco vueltas de
cable en el tambor.
Aborte la operación y detenga completamente si el winche no
responde a los mandos.
Manténgalo bloqueado en el caso de que vaya a trabajar con la carga
o a hacer trabajos de mantenimiento en el winche.
NO RETIRE NI TAPE ESTA TARJETA DE ADVERTENCIAS.

CERTIFICADO DE PRUEBAS EN FÁBRICA
1.0 Datos básicos

Cliente FLSMIDTH Minerals S. A.
Orden de Compra N° 11072 del 06 Noviembre de 2008
Componente WINCHE HIDRÁULICO
Modelo / Serie WH-0600 / 09001
2.0 Datos de la prueba

Nombre del responsable Firma
Pablo Hormazábal
Lugar de la prueba TALLERES VIGNOLA
Fecha de la prueba 03 Marzo de 2009
3.0 Especificaciones básicas

Tipo de accionamiento Motor Hidráulico
Presión, [Pa] 56
Caudal, [l/min] 21,5
Capacidad de carga en el tambor, [N-m] 353
Capacidad de carga en el tambor, N 5.890
Diámetro del tambor, [mm] 112
Carga de rotura del cable, [kg] 6.000
Velocidad de giro del tambor, [rpm] 10
Velocidad lineal en el cable, [m/min] 3,8
4.0 Resultados de las pruebas

Variable Valor Comentarios
Velocidad de tambor, [rpm] 10
Velocidad lineal, [m/s] 0,06
Presión en vacío, [Pa] 5
Sobrecarga de prueba, [adim] 1,25
Torsión de la prueba, [N-m] 441
Presión a torsión de prueba, [Pa] 70
5.0 Comentarios adicionales
El motor fue probado y operó durante un tiempo de 10 minutos a la carga

máxima de 441 N-m sin signos de anormalidad.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
104,50
A A
55
155
105,68
B B
265
204
53
C 45 156 C
200
16
220
395
135
114
D D
106
130
E E
155
77,50 WINCHE 600 KG
CABLE 8 mm PROYECTOS Y COMPONENTES DE INGENIERIA INDUSTRIAL
CARRERA 7 M Cliente FLS Minerals S.A.
F
MOTOR HIDRAULICO SALAMI Proyecto Carro Esperanza F
2MB6,2RP81P1V1CPPD1VSF3,8/200 Componente Winche elevacion de puente

Nº W-600
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F.L.Smidth Minerals S.A.
Nueva de Lyon 072 Of. 1102 – Providencia – Santiago – Chile – Phone: 56 2 – 290 0000 – Fax: 56 2 – 333 1790
MINERA ESPERANZA LTDA.

PROYECTO ESPERANZA
CARRO DE MANTENIMIENTO MONTADO SOBRE TROLES
HOJA DE DATOS MOTOR UNIDAD HIDRÁULICA
28010ME01HD01 REV. 1 12 Marzo 2009
CLIENTE : AKER SOLUTIONS

ORDEN DE COMPRA Nº : 211M – MR – 052 - 02
F.L.Smidth Minerals S.A. Proyecto Número : 28010
28010ME01HD01 – 0
Hoja 1 de 2
F.L.Smidth Minerals S.A.
Nueva de Lyon 072 Of. 1102 – Providencia – Santiago – Chile – Phone: 56 2 – 290 0000 – Fax: 56 2 – 333 1790
28010ME01HD01 – 0
Hoja 2 de 2
Drehstrommotoren 1LG4 1LG6 1LG9
Moteurs triphasés 1LP4 1LP6 1LP9
Motores trifásicos 1PP4 1PP6 1PP9
Motori trifasi
Trefasmotorer
Tøífázové motory
Òðåõôàçíûå äâèãàòåëè
Betriebsanleitung / Instructions Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 35037000000057
Ausgabe / Edition N14-0105 DEUTSCH/ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPANNOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ÈESKY/ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ
BG 180M ... 315L

Baugrößen (BG)
Frame sizes (BG)
Désignation de carcasse (BG)
Tamaòos constuctivos (BG)
Grandezze (BG)
Storlekar (BG)
Konstrukèní velikosti (BG)
Êîíñòðóêòèâíûå ðàçìåðû (BG)
Reservados todos los derechos. Tutti i diritti riservati. All rätt förbehålles.
Alle Rechte vorbehalten. All rights reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Vekerá práva vyhrazena. Âñå ïðàâà çàêðåïëåíû çàêîíîì.
Bauformen / Types of construction / Formes de construction / Formas constructivas / Forme costruttive / Monteringssätt / Konstrukèní tvary / Êîíñòðóêòèâíûå ôîðìû
(1ME6)
(1ME6)
oder
or oder
ou or
o IM V 5 IM V 6 ou
oppure o
eller IM B 35
oppure
IM B 3 nebo eller IM B 34
IM B 5 nebo IM V 1 IM V 3
IM B 6 IM B 7 IM B 8
Fig. 1
DEUTSCH
Allgemeine Hinweise 1 Beschreibung

Zu beachten sind die Angaben und 1.1 Anwendungsbereich
WARNUNG Anweisungen in allen gelieferten Be-
Die Motoren können in staubiger oder feuchter Umgebung auf-
triebs- und sonstigen Anleitungen.
gestellt werden. Die Isolierung ist tropenfest. Bei sachgemäßer
Dies ist zur Vermeidung von Gefahren und Schäden unerläßlich!
Lagerung oder sachgemäßer Aufstellung im Freien sind normaler-
Eine zusätzliche Sicherheitsinformation (gelb) liegt bei, die weise gegen Witterungseinflüsse keine besonderen Schutz-
ergänzende Angaben zur Sicherheit für elektrische Maschinen maßnahmen an den Motoren notwendig.
enthält. Diese Sicherheitsinformation ist deshalb eine Ergän-
Meßflächenschalldruckpegel bei 50Hz (DIN EN 21 680 Teil 1)
zung für alle weiteren noch gelieferten Betriebs- und sonstigen
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9, ca. 60 bis 76 dB(A)
Anleitungen.
Weiterhin sind die jeweils geltenden nationalen, örtlichen und
anlagespezifischen Bestimmungen und Erfordernisse zu
1.2 Aufbau und Arbeitsweise
berücksichtigen! 1LG4-, 1LG6- und 1LG9- Motoren sind in Grundausführung ei-
Sonderausführungen und Bauvarianten können in tech- gengekühlt mit Lüfter. Wahlweise können 1LG.-Motoren zudem
nischen Details abweichen! Bei eventuellen Unklarheiten wird ohne Eigenlüfter (z.B. als Lüftermotoren mit Kühlung durch einen
dringend empfohlen, unter Angabe von Typbezeichnung und auf dem Wellenende angeordneten Sonderlüfter) oder fremdbelüftet
Fabriknummer beim Hersteller rückzufragen, oder die Instand- (Option G17) ausgeführt werden. 1PP4, 1PP6, und 1PP9-Motoren
haltungsarbeiten von einem der SIEMENS - Servicezentren sind selbstgekühlt ohne Lüfter.
durchführenzulassen. Bei Fußmotoren sind die Füße am Motorgehäuse angegossen,
wahlweise können angeschraubte Füße geliefert werden.(Option
K11 / s. Fig. 2).
HINWEIS: Fig. 2 ... (Ersatzteile) s. Anhang auf Seite 29
Ein Umsetzen der Füße am Motorgehäuse, z. B. zwecks
Veränderung der Klemmenkastenlage, ist bei den Optionen K09,
Ausgabe / Edition N14-0105 Bestell-Nr. / Order No. 35037000000057

 Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved DEUTSCH/ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPANNOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ÈESKY/ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ
Siemens AG -1-
DEUTSCH
K10 und K11 möglich. Die dafür notwendigen Bohrungen und Ggf. ist eine Nachwuchtung vorzunehmen, z. B. ist der aus dem
Flächen sind bereits entsprechend bearbeitet. Abtriebselement und über der Wellenkontur herausragende Teil
Bei Motoren mit Bremse (z.B. Option G26) ist zusätzlich die Brem- der Paßfeder TP abzuarbeiten.
senbetriebsanleitung mit zu beachten! Zu beachten sind die allgemein er-
Diese Hinweise gelten ergänzend zur Betriebsanleitung des WARNUNG forderlichen Maßnahmen für den
entsprechenden Motortyps. Sie gelten nicht für Motoren in EEx e Berührungsschutz der Abtriebsele-
Ausführungen. mente.
Wird ein Motor ohne Abtriebselement in Betrieb genommen,
so ist die Paßfeder gegen Herausschleudern zu sichern.
2 Betrieb
Alle Arbeiten nur im elektrisch span-
WARNUNG nungslosen Zustand der Anlage 2.4 Elektrischer Anschluß
durchführen. Netzspannung und Netzfrequenz müssen mit den Daten auf dem
Leistungsschild übereinstimmen. ±5% Spannungs- oder Frequenz-
2.1 Transport, Lagern abweichung (1ME6 ±3% Frequenzabweichung) sind ohne Leis-
tungsherabsetzung zulässig. Anschluß und Anordnung der Schalt-
Beim Transport sind alle vorhandenen Hebeösen am Motor zu bügel nach dem im Klemmenkasten befindlichen Schaltbild vorneh-
benutzen!
men. Schutzleiter an diese Klemme anschließen.
Zum Transport von Maschinensätzen
WARNUNG (z. B. Getriebe-, Gebläseanbauten, ...) Bei Anschlußklemmen mit Klemmbügeln (z. B. nach DIN 46282)
nur die dafür vorgesehenen Hebeösen sind die Leiter so zu verteilen, daß auf beiden Stegseiten etwa
bzw. -zapfen benutzen! Maschinensätze dürfen nicht durch gleiche Klemmhöhen entstehen. Diese Anschlußart erfordert
Anhängen an den Einzelmaschinen gehoben werden! Auf daher, daß ein einzelner Leiter U-förmig gebogen werden muß
Tragfähigkeit dieser Hebeeinrichtung achten! oder mit einem Kabelschuh anzuschließen ist (s. Fig. 3.1). Dies
gilt auch für den Schutzleiteranschluß und den äußeren Er-
Die Wälzlager sollten neu gefettet bzw. erneuert werden, wenn
dungsleiter (s. Fig. 3.2) - grüngelb .
die Zeit von der Lieferung bis zur Motorinbetriebnahme bei günsti-
gen Bedingungen (Aufbewahrung in trockenen, staub- und erschüt- Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen
terungsfreien Räumen) mehr als 3 Jahre beträgt. Bei ungünstigen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten)
Bedingungen verringert sich diese Zeit wesentlich. s. Fig. 4.
Ggf. ist der Isolationswiderstand der Wicklung zu überprüfen, s.
Abschnitt 2.5 . 2.5 Überprüfung des Isolationswiderstandes
Vor der Erstinbetriebnahme des Motors, nach längerer Lagerung
2.2 Aufstellung oder Stillstandzeit (ca. 6 Monate), muß der Isolationswiderstand
der Wicklungen ermittelt werden.
Eingeschraubte Hebeösen sind nach dem Aufstellen festanzu-
ziehen oder zu entfernen! Bei und unmittelbar nach der Messung
WARNUNG haben die Klemmen teilweise gefähr-
Bei Motoren mit Wellenende nach oben oder unten (z.B. IMV5,
liche Spannungen und dürfen nicht
IMV6 - s. Fig. 1) muß gewährleistet sein, daß kein Wasser in das
berührt werden.
obere Lager eindringen kann.
Isolationswiderstand
Das Klemmenkastenoberteil kann bei einem Klemmenbrett mit
- Der Mindestisolationswiderstand von neuen, gereinigten oder
6 Anschlußklemmen um 4x90 Grad und bei einem Klemmenbrett
instandgesetzten Wicklungen gegen Masse beträgt 10 Mega-
mit 9 Anschlußklemmen um 180 Grad gedreht werden.
Ohm.
Laufruhe
- Der kritische Isolationswiderstand Rkrit wird zunächst errech-
Stabile Fundamentgestaltung oder An- und Einbauverhältnisse,
net. Berechnung erfolgt durch Multiplikation der Bemessungs-
genaues Ausrichten der Motoren sowie ein gut ausgewuchtetes
spannung UN, z. B. AC 0,69 kV, mit dem konstanten Faktor (0,5
Abtriebselement sind Voraussetzung für einen ruhigen schwin-
MegaOhm/kV):
gungsarmen Lauf. Z. B. sind dünne Bleche unter die Füße zu legen,
um ein Verspannen der Motoren zu vermeiden oder ggf. kann ein R krit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm
komplettes Auswuchten des Läufers mit dem Abtriebselement er- Messung
forderlich sein. Der Mindestisolationswiderstand der Wicklungen gegen Masse
wird mit 500 V Gleichspannung gemessen. Dabei soll die Tempe-
2.3 Wuchtung, Abtriebselemente ratur der Wicklungen 25°C ± 15°C betragen.
Der kritische Isolationswiderstand ist bei Betriebstemperatur der
Das Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplungen Rie- Wicklung mit 500 V Gleichspannung zu messen.
menscheiben, Zahnrad, ...) ist mit einer geeigneten Vorrichtung
auszuführen (Fig. 7). Überprüfung
Ist bei neuer, gereinigter oder instandgesetztem Motor, der längere
Standardmäßig sind die Läufer mit einer halben Paßfeder dy- Zeit gelagert wurde oder still stand, der Mindestisolationswider-
namisch ausgewuchtet. stand der Wicklung gegen Masse kleiner 10 MegaOhm, kann die
Die Art der Auswuchtung wird am AS-Wellenende (Wellenstirn- Ursache hierfür Feuchte sein. Die Wicklungen sind dann zu trock-
seite) markiert: nen.
(H = Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder Nach längerer Betriebsdauer kann der Mindestisolationswider-
(F = Auswuchtung mit ganzer Paßfeder-Sonderaus- stand auf den kritischen Isolationswiderstand absinken. Solange
führung) der gemessene Wert den errechneten Wert des kritischen Isola-
Bei Montage des Abtriebselementes auf entsprechende tionswiderstandes nicht unterschreitet, darf der Motor weiter be-
Auswuchtart achten! trieben werden. Wird dieser Wert unterschritten, ist der Motor so-
Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder fort abzuschalten.
Bei Abtriebselementen mit einem Längenverhältnis von Naben- Es ist die Ursache hierfür zu ermitteln, ggf. sind die Wicklungen
länge l zur Länge des Wellenendes lM < 0,8 und Drehzahlen > oder Wicklungsteile instand zusetzen, zu reinigen oder zu trock-
1500/min können Laufruhestörungen auftreten (s. Fig. 8). nen.

Siemens AG -2-
DEUTSCH
2.6 Inbetriebnahme Lagerwechsel, Fettstandzeit, Fettsorte

HINWEIS: Bei stark ungleichförmigem Drehmoment (z.B. An- Die Fettstandzeit beträgt unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen, bei
trieb eines Kolbenkompressors) wird ein nicht-sinusförmiger Mo- waagerechter Motoraufstellung, Kühlmitteltemperatur bis 40°C und
torstrom erzwungen, dessen Oberschwingungen sowohl eine un- einer Motordrehzahl von
zulässige Netzbeeinflussung als auch unzulässig hohe elektro- - 1500/min ca. 40 000 Betriebsstunden
magnetische Störaussendungen bewirken können.
- 3000/min ca. 20 000 Betriebsstunden.
Bei Speisung durch Umrichter können hochfrequente Strom- und
Spannungsoberschwingungen in den Motorzuleitungen zu elektro- Unabhängig von den Betriebsstunden sollte das Fett, wegen der
Alterung, etwa alle 3 Jahre erneuert werden. Dazu sind die Lager
magnetischen Störaussendungen führen. Deshalb wird die Ver-
zu demontieren auszuwaschen und neu zu beffeten. Bei Aus-
wendung abgeschirmter Zuleitungen empfohlen.
führung mit Nachschmierung sind die Schmierschildangaben zu
Vor Inbetriebnahme ist zu prüfen ob: beachten.
- die Mindestisolationswiderstände eingehalten sind
Bei besonderen Betriebsbedingungen, z. B. senkrechter Motorauf-
- der Läufer ohne anzustreifen gedreht werden kann stellung, häufigem Betrieb bei der Grenzdrehzahl nmax, großen Schwin-
- der Motor ordnungsgemäß montiert und ausgerichtet ist gungs- und Stoßbelastungen, häufigem Reversierbetrieb, reduzieren
- die Abtriebselemente richtige Einstellbedingungen haben (z. B. sich die vorstehend genannten Betriebsstunden wesentlich.
Riemenspannung bei Riementrieb; ...) und das Abtriebselement Die Motoren haben standardmässig Rillenkugellager der Reihe 62
für die Einsatzbedingungen geeignet ist . . oder mit Option K36 Rillenkugellager der Reihe 63 . . mit einer
- alle elektrischen Anschlüsse sowie Befestigungsschrauben und Deckscheibe (ZC3 Ausführung).
Verbindungselemente nach Vorschrift angezogen und ausge- Die Deckscheibe ist auf der dem Motorgehäuse (Ständer) zuge-
führt sind wandten Lagerseite angeordnet.
- der Schutzleiter ordnungsgemäß hergestellt ist HINWEIS: Beim Lagerwechsel ist auf die Anordnung der Deck-
- eventuell vorhandenen Zusatzeinrichtungen (Bremse, Tacho, scheibe und die Lagerluft zu achten, da bei Sonderausführungen
Fremdlüfter) funktionsfähig sind von der Standardausführung abgewichen werden kann!
- Berührungsschutzmaßnahmen für bewegte und spannnungs- Fettsorte bei Standardmaschinen: (Fa. ESSO ) UNIREX N3);
führende Teile getroffen sind Fettstandzeiten und Nachschmierfristen gelten nur in Verbindung
mit dieser Fettsorte.
- die Grenzdrehzahl nmax (s. Leistungsschild) nicht überschritten
wird; Ersatzfette müssen mind. der DIN 51825-KL3N genügen. Hierbei
sind Schmierfristen bei KT > 25 oC zu reduzieren.
HINWEIS: Die Grenzdrehzahl nmax ist die höchste kurzzeitig
zulässige Betriebsdrehzahl. Es ist zu beachten, daß sich hier- Sonderfette sind auf dem Schmierschild angegeben.
bei das Geräusch- und Schwingungsverhalten des Motors ver- Das Mischen von verschiedenen Fettsorten ist zu vermeiden!
schlechtert sowie die Lagerwechselfrist verringert. Motor im erforderlichen Umfang zerlegen. Wälzlager mit geeigneter
Nach dem Anbau der Motoren ist die Vorrichtung abziehen (s. Fig. 6). Lagerstelle von Verunreinigun-
VORSICHT Bremse (falls vorhanden) auf ihre ein- gen säubern! Wälzlager reinigen bzw. erneuern und neu fetten.
wandfreie Funktion zu prüfen! Hohlräume der Wälzlager bündig mit Schmierfett füllen! Lagerdeck-
Diese Aufzählung kann nicht vollständig sein. Zusätzliche el bzw. Lagerschild bleibt ohne Fettfüllung, um eine Überfettung
Prüfungen sind gegebenenfalls nötig! zu vermeiden.
Wälzlager gleichmäßig auf ca. 80-100°C erwärmen und aufziehen.
3 Instandhaltung Harte Schläge (z. B. mit einem Hammer, ...) sind zu vermeiden.
Eventuell abgenützte Dichtelemente (z. B. Wellendichtring, usw.),
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen sind ebenfalls zu erneuern.
Sind Radial-Wellendichtringe ohne Feder eingebaut, so muß auch
Vor Beginn jeder Arbeit am Motor
das Ersatzteil ohne Feder eingesetzt werden.
WARNUNG oder Gerät, besonders aber vor
dem Öffnen von Abdeckungen ak- Nachschmiereinrichtung
tiver Teile, muß der Motor vorschriftsmäßig freigeschaltet Bei Motoren mit Nachschmiereinrichtung sind die Angaben auf
sein. Neben den Hauptstromkreisen ist dabei auch auf even- dem Schmierschild zubeachten!
tuell vorhandene Zusatz- oder Hilfsstromkreise zu achten. Fugenabdichtung
Die üblichen 5 Sicherheitsregeln lauten hierbei z. B. nach Beim Zusammenbau von Maschinen der Schutzart IP 55 oder höher
DIN VDE 0105: (s. Leistungsschild) müssen die blanken Montageflächen zwischen
dem Motorgehäuse und den Lagerschilden durch eine geeignete,
- Freischalten
nicht aushärtende Dichtungsmasse abgedichtet werden (z. B. Hy-
- Gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern lomar, Curil).
- Spannungsfreiheit feststellen Kunststofflüfter (BG180M ... 315L)
- Erden und Kurzschließen Kunststofflüfter haben jeweils zwei angegossene Zungen, die als
Axialfixierung in die Ringnut der Welle einrasten. Vor dem Abzie-
- Benachbarte unter Spannung stehende Teile abdecken oder
abschranken. hen des Lüfters müssen die beiden Zungen ausgerastet
(Schraubendreher) und in dieser Position, z.B. durch einge-
Diese zuvor genannten Maßnahmen dürfen erst dann schobene Beilagen, provisorisch festgehalten werden. Die Lüfter
zurückgenommen werden, wenn die Instandhaltungsarbei- haben in der Tragscheibe zwei Öffnungen zum Durchführen einer
ten abgeschlossen sind und der Motor vollständig mon- Abziehvorrichtung, die an der Nabe sind angreift.
tiert ist.
Die Öffnungen sind bei Auslieferung mit einer dünnen Kunststoff-
haut verschlossen, und müssen durchstoßen werden.
HINWEIS: Verschlossenen Kondenswasseröffnungen, müssen Zum Abziehen wie auch zum Aufziehen muß grundsätzlich eine
von Zeit zu Zeit geöffnet werden, damit eventuell angesammeltes geeignete Vorrichtung verwendet werden. Hammerschläge sind
Kondenswasser abfließen kann. hierbei unbedingt zu vermeiden, um die Lager zu schützen.
Kondenswasseröffnungen sind stets an der tiefsten Stelle des Es ist auf das Einrasten der Schnappnasen in der Wellennut zu
Motors anzuordnen! achten.

Siemens AG -3-
ENGLISH
General note If, after delivery, the motors are stored for more than 3 years under
favourable conditions (kept in a dry place free from dust and vibra-
The data and recommendations spec- tion) prior to commissioning, the bearings should be regreased.
WARNING ified in all the instructions supplied,
Under unfavourable conditions, this period is considerably short-
and in all other related instructions,
er.
must always be observed in order to avoid hazardous situa-
tions and the risk of possible injury or damage. If necessary, the insulation resistance of the winding should be
checked, see Section 2.5.
These instructions are augmented by supplementary instruc-
tions (yellow), which contain additional information on the safe-
ty measures for electrical machines and devices. The latter 2.2 Installation
instructions thus augment all submitted instructions and all other
After installation, screwed-in lifting eyes should either be removed
related instructions.
or tightened down.
Furthermore, the pertinent national, local and plant-specific
In the case of motors with shaft end facing upwards or down-
regulations and requirements should be kept in mind!
wards (such as IMV5, IMV6 - see Fig. 1), measures must be tak-
Special designs and other versions may vary in technical en to ensure that no water can penetrate into the upper bearing.
details! If in doubt, be sure to contact the manufacturer, quot-
In the case of terminal boards with 6 terminals, the top part of the
ing the type designation and serial number, or have mainte-
terminal box can be turned through 4 x 90 degrees. For terminal
nance work done by one of SIEMENS Service Centres.
boards with 9 terminals, it can be turned through 180 degrees.
Quiet running
NOTE: Fig. 2 ... (Spare Parts) see Annex page 29 Stable foundations or mounting conditions, exact alignment of the
motors and a well-balanced transmission element are essential
for quiet vibration-free running. If necessary, shims should be in-
1 Description serted under the motor feet to prevent strain, or the whole rotor
1.1 Application and transmission element should be balanced.
The motors are suitable for operation in dusty and damp environ-
ments. The insulation is tropicalized. If they are properly stored or 2.3 Balancing, transmission elements
installed outdoors, special weatherproofing measures are not usu-
A suitable device should always be used for fitting and removing
ally required.
the transmission elements (coupling halves, pulleys, pinions) (Fig.
Measuring-surface sound-pressure level at 50 Hz 7).
(DIN EN 21 680 Part 1)
As standard, the rotors are dynamically balanced with the half
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9 approx. 51 to 76 dB(A)
featherkey inserted.
The type of balance is marked on the drive end of the shaft (shaft
1.2 Construction and mode of operation end face):
The 1LG4, 1LG6 and 1LG9 motors are standardly self-ventilated (H = balanced with half featherkey)
with own fans. In addition to that the 1LG motors are optionally (F = balanced with whole featherkey)
either without an own fan (such as fan motors with cooling by means When fitting the transmission element, keep the type of bal-
of a separate fan arranged on the shaft end) or with external cool- ance in mind!
ling (option G17). The 1PP4, 1PP6 and 1PP9 motors are equipped Balance with half featherkey
with own cooling without any fan. Poor running characteristics can arise in the case of transmission
The feet on foot-mounted motors are cast integrally with the motor elements having a length ratio of hub length l to length of shaft end
casing or they can be optionally bolted onto the casing (option l M < 0.8 and running at speeds of > 1500 rev/min (see Fig. 8). If
K11 / see fig. 2). necessary, re-balancing should be carried out, e.g. the part of the
Rearranging the feet (e.g. for changing the position of the terminal featherkey Tp that protrudes from the transmission element and
box) is possible for options K09, K10 and K11. The bores and above the shaft surface should be cut back.
surfaces, necessary for this purpose, are already machined in a The usual measures should be taken
corresponding way. WARNING to guard transmission elements from
Where motors with brake are concerned (e.g. option G26), take touch. If a motor is started up without
into consideration also the brake operating instructions! transmission element attached, the
featherkey should be secured to prevent it being thrown out.
These instructions are valid in addition to the operating instruc-
tions of the given motor type. They are not valid for motors of
EEx e series. 2.4 Electrical connection
Check to see that system voltage and frequency agree with the
2 Operation data given on the rating plate. Voltage or frequency deviations of
Before starting any work on the ma- ±5% (for 1ME6, frequency deviations of ±3%) from the rated val-
chine, be sure to isolate it from the ues are permitted without the necessity of derating the output.
WARNING
power supply. Connection and arrangement of the terminal links must agree with
the diagram provided in the terminal box. Connect the earthing
2.1 Transport, storage conductor to the terminal with the marking .
Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN 46282),
The motors should always be lifted at both lifting eyes during
arrange the conductors so the clips are virtually level, i.e. not
transport.
tilted when tightened. This method of connection means that
For lifting machine sets (such as built- the ends of single conductors must be bent in the shape of a
WARNING on gearboxes, fan units), always use U or be fitted with a cable lug (see Fig. 3.1). This also applies
the lifting eyes or lifting pegs provid- to the green-yellow protective earthing conductor and the outer
ed! Machine sets may not be lifted by earthing conductor (see Fig. 3.2).
suspending the individual machines! Check the lifting capac-
Please refer to Fig. 4 for tightening torques for terminal bolts and
ity of the hoist!
nuts (except for terminal strips).

Siemens AG -4-
ENGLISH
2.5 Checking the insulation resistance It is not possible to formulate a complete check list. Other
checks may also be necessary!
The insulation resistance of the windings must be measured prior
to initial startup of the machine, after long periods of storage or
standstill (approx. 6 months). 3 Maintenance
While the measurement is being tak-
Safety precautions
WARNING en and immediately afterwards, some
of the terminals carry dangerous volt- Before starting any work on the
ages and must not be touched. WARNING motor or other equipment, particu-
Insulation resistance larly before opening covers over
- The minimum insulation resistance of new, cleaned or re- live or moving parts, the motor must be properly isolated
paired windings with respect to ground is 10 MOhm. from the power supply. Besides the main circuits, any ad-
- The critical insulation resistance Rcrit is calculated first by mul- ditional or auxiliary circuits that may be present must also
tiplying the rated voltage UN, e.g. 0.69 kV AC, with the constant be isolated.
factor (0.5 MOhm/kV): The usual 5 safety rules (as set forth in DIN VDE 0105)
Rcrit = 0.69 kV * 0.5 MOhm/kV = 0.345 MOhm. are:
Measurement - Isolate the equipment
The minimum insulation resistance of the windings to ground is - Take effective measures to prevent reconnection
measured with 500 V DC. The winding temperature should then - Verify equipment is dead
be 25oC ± 15 oC.
- Earth and short-circuit
The critical insulation resistance should be measured with 500
- Cover or fence off adjacent live parts
V DC with the winding at operating temperature.
The precautions listed above should remain in force until
Checking
all maintenance work is finished and the motor has been
If the minimum insulation resistance of a new, cleaned or re-
fully assembled.
paired machine, which has been stored or at standstill for a pro-
longed period of time, is less than 10 MOhm, this may be due to
humidity. The windings must then be dried. NOTE: Where motors are fitted with closed condense water open-
After long periods of operation, the minimum insulation resist- ings, these should be opened from time to time to allow any accu-
ance may drop to the critical insulation resistance. As long as mulated condense water to be drained away.
the measured value does not fall below the calculated value of the Condense water openings should always be at the lowest point of
critical insulation resistance, the machine may continue in op- the motor!
eration. If it does, the machine must be stopped immediately.
The cause must be determined, and the windings or winding sec- Fitting new bearings, grease lifetime, type of
tions repaired, cleaned or dried as necessary.
grease
2.6 Commissioning Under normal operating conditions, with horizontally mounted
motors and coolant temperatures up to 40 °C, the grease lifetime
NOTE: Where the torque is very uneven (the drive of a piston-type should be:
compressor, for example), the inevitable result is a non-sinusoidal
- approx. 40,000 operating hours for speeds of 1500 rpm
motor current, whose harmonics can lead to excessive system
perturbation or excessive electromagnetic interference. - approx. 20,000 operating hours for speeds of 3000 rpm
In the case of converter-fed motors, high-frequency current or volt- Irrespective of the number of operating hours, the grease should
age harmonics in the motor cables can give rise to electromagnet- be renewed every 3 years because of ageing. In this case the
ic interference. That is why the use of shielded cables is recom- bearings should be dismounted, washed and newly greased. The
mended. modifications with additional greasing are to be maintained ac-
cording to instructions on the lubricating data plate.
Before commissioning, check that:
- The minimum insulation resistances are adhered to In the case of motors operating under special conditions, such as
- The rotor turns freely without rubbing vertical motor position, frequent operation at maximum speed nmax,
heavy vibration, sudden load changes and frequent reversing op-
- The motor is properly assembled and aligned eration, the bearing should be changed at considerably more fre-
- The transmission elements are correctly adjusted (e.g. belt ten- quent intervals than at the operating hours stated above.
sion) and the transmission element is suitable for the given op- The motors are standardly equipped with radial ball bearings of 62
erating conditions series or with option K36 - radial ball bearings of 63 series
- All electrical connections, mounting screws and connecting ele- which are provided with a cover plate (ZC3 version).
ments are properly tightened and fitted The cover plate is arranged on that side of the bearing facing the
- All protective conductors are properly installed frame (stator).
- Any auxiliaries that may be fitted (brakes, speedometer, sepa- NOTE: Notice the cover plate arrangement and the bearing clear-
rate fan) are in working order ance when changing the bearings because standard modifications
- Touch protection guards are installed around moving and live can differ from special motors!
parts The cover plate material should withstand temperatures from -
- The maximum speed nmax (see rating plate) is not exceeded. 20 °C to +150 °C, e.g. polyacryl-rubber (ACM).
NOTE: The maximum speed nmax is the highest operating speed Type of grease for standard machines: (Fa. ESSO / UNIREX
permitted for short periods. It should be kept in mind that motor N3); grease lifetime and lubrication intervals are valid for this type
noise and vibration are worse at this speed, and bearing life is of grease only.
reduced. Compensatory greases must conform to DIN 51825-KL3N at least.
After motor installation, the brake, if In this case the lubrication intervals at KT > 25 °C are to be re-
CAUTION fitted, should be checked for proper duced.
functioning.

Siemens AG -5-
ENGLISH
Special greases are introduced on the lubricating data plate.

Avoid mixing different types of grease!
Dismantle the motor to the extent necessary. Pull off the bearing
with a suitable device (see Fig. 6). Clean the journal! Clean the
bearing, or obtain a new one, and pack it with fresh grease.
Pack the bearing cavities flush with grease! The cover plate or
endshield is kept free of grease to prevent overgreasing.
Heat bearings evenly to about 80-100 °C and press on. Heavy
blows (such as with a hammer, ...) should be avoided.
Any worn sealing elements (such as shaft sealing ring, etc.) should
also be renewed.
If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the replacement
sealing rings must also be of the springless type.
Regreasing device
In the case of motors with regreasing device, take note of the
information given on the lubricating data plate!
Joint sealing
When reassembling machines with degree of protection IP55 or
higher (see rating plate), the bright surfaces of the joint between
the motor frame and the endshields should be coated with a suit-
able non-hardening sealing compound (such as Hylomar, Curil).
Plastic fan (frame sizes 180M ... 315L)
Plastic fans have two cast-on tabs that snap into the ring groove
on the shaft to prevent axial movement. Before the fan is pulled off
the shaft, these two tabs must be disengaged (screwdriver) and
held temporarily in that position, e.g. by inserting packing. In the
disc at the root of the blades, there are two openings for the claws
of an extractor whose central screw should press against the hub.
On delivery, these openings may be covered by a film of plastic
and later on they should be punched.
A suitable device should be used for pulling the fan off and press-
ing it back on. Hammer blows must be avoided to protect the bear-
ings.

Siemens AG -6-
FRANÇAIS
Remarque générale que par les oeillets ou chevilles délingage prévus à cet effet.
Ils ne doivent pas être levés par les machines individuelles.
Afin dassurer la protection des per- La charge limite du dispositif de levage doit être respectée.
ATTENTION sonnes et déviter tout dégât matéri-
Dans des conditions dentreposage favorables (dans des locaux
el, il est impératif de respecter les in-
secs, à labri de poussières et de trépidations), regraisser ou rem-
dications contenues dans toutes les instructions de service et
placer les roulements à billes sil sest écoulé plus de 4 ans entre
dans tous les autres éléments de documentation transmis avec
la livraision et la mise en service du moteur. Dans des conditions
le produit. défavorables, cette période sera plus courte en conséquence.
Les instructions jointes (sur papier jaune) contiennent des rè-
Ler cas échéant, contrôler la résistance disolement des enroule-
gles de sécurité applicables aux matériels électriques. Ces in- ments (voir chap. 2.5).
formations relatives à la sécurité doivent être utilisées en com-
plément de lensemble de la documentation.
Toutes les prescriptions et exigences nationales, locales
2.2 Installation
ou spécifiques à linstallation doivent être respectées. Après linstallation, serrer ou enlever les oeillets de levage vissés.
Les machines de réalisation spéciale (version, forme de con- Sur les moteurs à bout darbre vers le haut ou vers le bas
struction) peuvent différer quant aux détails techniques. En cas (p.ex. IMV5, IMV6, voir Fig. 1), prendre les dispositions pour pro-
de doute à ce sujet, il est instamment recommandé de con- téger le palier supérieur contre la pénétration deau.
tacter lagence Siemens compétente en indiquant la désigna-
La partie supérieure des boîtes à bornes avec plaques de bornes
tion de type et le numéro de fabrication, ou de recourir aux
à six bornes peut être tournée de 4 x 90°; la partie supérieure des
centres de S.A.V. Siemens pour effectuer les travaux de main-
boîtes à bornes avec plaques de bornes à 9 bornes peut être
tenance.
tournée de 180°.
Comportement vibratoire
NOTA Fig. 2 ...(Pièces de rechange) voir appendice pages 29 La stabilité des fondations et des supports de montage, la préci-
sion de lalignement des machines et léquilibrage soigné des or-
ganes de transmission sont les conditions dun bon comportement
1 Description vibratoire. Cest ainsi quil faudra par exemple interposer sous les
1.1 Domaine dapplication pattes des cales en tôle pour empêcher le gauchissement du
moteur ou procéder à léquilibrage du rotor complet avec les élé-
Les moteurs peuvent être installés en atmosphère poussiéreuse
ments de transmission.
et humide. Lisolation est tropicalisée. Normalement, aucune
mesure de protection particulière contre les intempéries nest
nécessaire si lon entrepose correctement les moteurs ou si on les 2.3 Equilibrage, organes de transmission
monte à lextérieur selon les règles de lart.
Lemmanchement et lextraction des organes de transmission
Niveau de pression acoustique à 50 Hz (DIN EN 21680, fasc. 1) (demi-accouplements, poulies, roues demtées,...) devront se faire
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9 env. 51 à 76 dB(A) avec les dispositifs appropriés (Fig. 7).
Les moteurs en version standard ont fait lobjet dun équili-
1.2 Constitution et mode de fonctionnement brage dynamique avec demi-clavette.
Les moteurs 1LG4, 1LG6 et 1LG9 en version standard sont au- Le type déquilibrage est indiquépar un marquage au bout de larbre
torefroidis par ventilateur. En outre, les moteurs de la série 1LG (côté de la commande au front de larbre):
peuvent etre soit sans le propre ventilateur (par ex. les moteurs de (H = équilibrage avec demi-clavette)
ventilateur refroidis par un ventilateur spécial monté au bout de (F = équilibrage avec clavette entière-version spéciale)
larbre), soit en exécution a refroidissement étranger (option G17). Lors du montage de lorgane de transmission, veiller à ce que le
Les moteurs 1PP4, 1PP6 et 1PP9 sont autorefroidis sans ventila- type déquilibrage de ce dernier corresponde à celui du rotor.
teur. Equilibrage avec demi-clavette
Les pattes des moteurs sont coulées sur la carcasse, il y a aussi Pour les organes de transmission dont le rapport de la longueur
une option a pattes vissées à la carcasse (option K11 / voir Fig. 2). de moyeu à la longueur lM du bout darbre est < 0,8 et pour des
Les options K09, K10 et K11 permettent le déplacement des pattes vitesses > 1500 tr/min, il peut se produire des balourds (voir Fig.
sur la carcasse, par exemple pour modifier la position de la ré- 8).
glette de bornes. Il y a déja les alésages nécessaires et les sur- Effectuer le cas échéant un rééquilibrage après avoir par exemple
faces sont déja usinées de façon correspondante. éliminé lexcédent de matière TP de la clavette qui fait saillie par
Pour les moteurs avec frein (par exemple option G26), il convient rapport au moyeu et à larbre.
dobserver en plus les instructions de service du frein! Prendre les mesures habituelles de
Ces instructions sont valables en qualité dun complément des ATTENTION protection des personnes contre
instructions de service du modele correspondant du moteur. Elles laccès aux parties en mouvement au
ne concernent pas les moteurs en version EEx e. niveau des organes de transmission. Lorsquun moteur est
mis en marche sans organes de transmission, prendre les
mesures nécessaires afin dempêcher que la clavette ne soit
2 Fonctionnement projetée hors de larbre par force centrifuge.
Avant toute intervention sur la ma-
ATTENTION chine, vérifier quelle est bien hors ten-
2.4 Raccordement électrique
sion.
Comparer la tension et la fréquence du réseau aux indications de
2.1 Transport, manutention et stockage la plaque signalétique. Une variation de ±5 % de la tension ou de
la fréquence (pour 1MA5/1MF5 de ±3 % de la fréquence) est ad-
Pour la manutention, utiliser tous les oeillets de levage disponi- missible sans déclassement en puissance. Réaliser le branche-
bles sur le moteur. ment et disposer les barrettes de couplage conformément au sché-
Les groupes de machines (par ex. ma situé dans la boîte à bornes. Raccorder le conducteur de pro-
ATTENTION motoréducteurs, motocompresseurs, tection à la borne .
etc.) ne doivent être manutentionnés

Siemens AG -7-
FRANÇAIS
Les conducteurs raccordés à des bornes à étrier doivent être - le moteur est monté et aligné correctement,
disposés de telle sorte que létrier repose à la même hauteur - les organes de transmission sont correctement réglés (par ex.
de part et dautre de la vis. Lorsquun seul conducteur est tension de courroie) et bien choisis pour lemploi,
raccordé, il doit être plié en U autour de la vis ou être muni
- les connexions électriques sont réalisées conformément aux
dune cosse (voir Fig. 3.1). Il en est de même du conducteur
prescriptions, et les vis des bornes sont serrées aux couples
de protection et le conducteur de terre externe vert jaune (voir
Fig. 3.2). prescrits,
Couples de serrage des vis et écrous des bornes de la plaque à - le conducteur de protection est bien raccordé,
bornes (ne concerne pas les borniers), bvoir Fig. 4. - les dispositifs additonnels éventuels (freins, compte-tours, ven-
tilateur externe) sont opérationnels,
2.5 Contrôle de la résistance disolement - les mesures de protection des personnes contre laccès aux
parties actives (sous tension) ou en mouvement ont été prises,
Avant la première mise en service de la machine, après un en-
- la vitesse limite nmax (lorsquelle est indiquée, voir plaque sig-
treposage de longue durée ou encore une interruption de service
nalétique) ne doit pas être dépassée.
prolongée (env. 6 mois), la résistance disolement des enroule-
ments doit être mesurée. NOTA : la vitesse limite nmax est la vitesse de service maximale
temporaire. A cette vitesse, on observe une dégradation du com-
Durant la mesure et immédiatement
portement sonore et vibratoire ainsi quun raccourcissement de
ATTENTION après, les bornes sont portées en par-
la période de renouvellement des roulements.
tie à une tension dangereuse et ne
doivent pas être touchées. Après montage de la machine,
ATTENTION sassurer que le frein (si présent) est
Résistance disolement
en bon état de fonctionnement.
- La résistance minimale disolement mesurée par rapport à la
masse est de 10 Mégohms pour les enroulements neufs, net- La présente énumération ne peut être exhaustive. Des con-
toyés ou remis en état. trôles supplémentaires peuvent savérer nécessaires.
- La résistance critique disolement Rkrit se calcule en multipli-
ant la tension assignée U N, p.ex. 0,69 kV CA, par la constante 3 Maintenance
0,5Mégohms/kV :
R krit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 Mégohms/kV = 0,345 Mégohms Dispositions générales concernant la sécurité
Mesure Avant toute intervention sur le mo-
La résistance minimale disolement des enroulements par rap- ATTENTION teur, notamment avant douvrir ou
port à la masse est mesurée avec une tension dessai continue de denlever les recouvrements des
500 V. parties actives, il est indispensable de mettre le moteur
La température des enroulements en cours dessai doit être de 25 hors tension conformément aux règlements de sécurité.
± 15°C. En plus des circuits principaux, ne pas oublier les éven-
La résistance critique disolement doit être mesurée avec une tuels circuits auxiliaires et additionnels.
tension dessai continue de 500 V lorsque les enroulements ont Les 5 règles de sécurité (par exemple selon DIN VDE 0105)
atteint leur température en service. sont applicables :
Contrôle - mettre hors tension
La résistance minimale disolement par rapport à la masse - condamner les appareils (contre le réenclenchement)
mesurée sur les enroulements de machines ayant été entreposées
- vérifier labsence de tension
pendant une période prolongée, ou encore sur des enroulements
neufs, nettoyés ou remis en état peut être inférieure à 10 Még- - mettre à la terre et court-circuiter
ohms en raison de lhumidité régnant au niveau des enroulements. - recouvrir les parties actives voisines ou en barrer laccès.
Dans ce cas, sécher les enroulements.
Ces mesures de sécurité ne doivent être supprimées quà
Après un service prolongé, la valeur de la résistance minimale lissue de lintervention de maintenance et lorsque tous
disolement peut se rapprocher de la valeur de la résistance cri- les éléments du moteur sont remontés.
tique disolement. Tant quelle ne tombe pas en-dessous de ce-
tte dernière, la machine peut rester en fonctionnement. Dans le
NOTA : Dans la mesure où le moteur doit fonctionner avec purgeurs
cas contraire, la machine doit être arrêtée immédiatement.
de condensat fermés (par ex. en degré de protection IP55 ou IP56),
Il faudra alors en déterminer la cause, et éventuellement remettre il faut ouvrir de temps en temps les purgeurs de lìeau condensée
en état, nettoyer ou sécher les enroulements en totalité ou en pour pouvoir évacuer leau condensée éventuellement accumulée.
partie.
Les purgeurs de condensats sont toujours à installer au point le
plus bas du moteur.
2.6 Mise en service
NOTA : Un couple très irrégulier (par ex. lors de lentraînement Remplacement des roulements, durée dusage du
dun compresseur à piston) donne lieu à un courant moteur non lubrifiant, types des graisses de lubrification
sinusoïdal dont les harmoniques sont susceptibles de polluer ex-
agérément le réseau dalimentation ou démettre des perturbations Dans des conditions de service normales, avec moteur à axe ho-
électromagnétiques. rizontal et température dair de refroidissement jusquà 40 °C, la
durée dusage du lubrifiant est de
Lors de lalimentation par convertisseurs statiques, les câbles
vers le moteur peuvent être le siège dharmoniques de courant et - 40 000 heures de service à 1500 tr/min,
de tension à haute fréquence qui sont la source démissions de - 20 000 heures de service à 3000 tr/min.
perturbations électromagnétiques. Ceci oblige à utiliser des câ- Pour des raisons de vieillissement, la graisse devrait être renou-
bles dalimentation blindés. velée tous les 3 ans, indépendamment du nombre dheures de
Avant mise en service, vérifier les points suivants : service. Pour povoir le faire, il faut démonter les roulements, les
- la résistance disolement minimale est respectée, laver et graisser par la graisse neuve. Pour les versions où il faut
- le rotor peut être tourné sans quil frotte, périodiquement ajouter la graisse, suivre les données de la plaque
de graissage.

Siemens AG -8-
FRANÇAIS
Dans les conditions dutilisation particulières, par ex. axe vertical,

fonctionnement fréquent à la vitesse limite nmax , grandes sollic-
itations par des vibrations et chocs, inversion fréquent du sens de
marche, etc., les nombres des heures de service indiqués ci-des-
sus sont beaucoup plus réduits.
Les moteurs sont équipés en version standard de roulements à
billes série 62 ou à loption K36 de roulements a billes série
63 avec un couvre-palier (version ZC3).
NOTA : lors du remplacement des roulements, veiller à lorientation
du déflecteur et au jeu des roulements, vu que sur les exécutiuons
spéciales la disposition peut différer de celle des exécutions stand-
ard!
Les déflecteurs seront en matière résistant aux températures en-
tre -20 °C et +150 °C, par ex. caoutchouc de polyacryle (ACM).
Type de graisse (moteurs standards) : UNIREX N3 (Esso) ;
durée dusage des graisses et délais de graissage sont valables
seulement pour ce type de graisse.
Les graisses de rechange doivent correspondre au minimum à
DIN 51825-KL3N. Dans ce cas il faut réduire les intervalles de
graissage pour KT > 25oC.
Les graisses spéciales sont spécifiées sur la plaque de graissage.
Eviter de mélanger différentes sortes de graisses.
Démonter le moteur dans la mesure du nécessaire. Lextraction
des roulements doit être réalisée avec un dispositif approprié (voir
Fig. 6). Nettoyer les portées de paliers ! Nettoyer les roulements
ou les remplacer et le regraisser.
Remplir à ras de graisse les espaces libres des roulements ! Ne
pas mettre de graisse dans les couvercles de paliers ni dans les
flasques-paliers pour éviter un excédent de graisse.
Porter progressivement les roulements à une température denviron
80 à 100 °C et les emmancher sur larbre. Eviter les coups secs
(par ex.: coups de marteau).
Remplacer également tous les éléments détanchéité soumis à
usure (par exemple bagues détanchéité).
Les bagues détanchéité à frottement radial sans ressort seront
remplacées par des bagues de même type (sans ressort).
Dispositif de graissage
Pour les moteurs avec le dispositif de graissage, respecter les
indications figurant sur la plaque de graissage.
Pour les moteurs avec le dispositif de graissage, respecter les
indications figurant sur la plaque de graissage.
Etanchéité des jointures
Lors du réassemblage des moteurs avec un degré de protection
IP 55 ou supérieur (voir plaque signalétique), les jointures en métal
nu entre la carcasse et les flasques-paliers doivent être étanchées
avec un produit pâteux ne durcissant pas (p. ex. Hylomar, Curil).
Ventilateurs en matière plastique (BG180M 315L)
Les ventilateurs en matière plastique comportent de moulage deux
languettes qui sengagent dans la gorge de larbre à titre
dimmobilisation en translation. Avant dextraire le ventilateur, il
faut dégager les deux languettes (tournevis) et les maintenir pro-
visoirement dans cette position par des cales. Les ventilateurs
comportent dans le disque raidisseur deux trous pour le passage
de larrache-moyeu qui sera fixé sur le moyeu. A la livraison, ces
trous sont obstrués par un mince voile quil faut percer.
Lextraction et lemmanchement du ventilateur doivent être réa-
lisés avec un dispositif approprié. Ne pas donner de coups de
marteau pour protéger les roulements.
Il faut soccuper à ce que les cliquets soient bien enfoncés dans
les cannelures de laxe.

Siemens AG -9-
ESPAÒOL
Indicaciones generales máquinas no deben elevarse colgados de las máquinas indi-

viduales. Comprobar la capacidad de carga de estas anillas.
Para evitar peligros y danos, es im- Los rodamientos se volverán a engrasar o se renovarán si han
PRECAUCION prescindible observar siempre los
transcurrido más de 3 años bajo condiciones favorables desde el
datos y las indicaciones que figuran
suministro hasta la puesta en servicio (conservación en locales
en todas las instrucciones de servicio y en las demás suminis-
secos, exentos de polvo y de trepidaciones). Si las condiciones
tradas.
son desfavorables, este período se acorta considerablemente.
Estas instrucciones de servicio llevan adjuntas otras (de color
En caso dado se comprobará la resistencia de aislamiento, v. apar-
amarillo), que contienen datos suplementarios sobre la seguri-
tado 2.5.
dad de las máquinas eléctricas. Son por tanto un complemen-
to de las demás instrucciones generales y de servicio suminis-
tradas. 2.2 Emplazamiento
Además rigen las condiciones y prescripciones vigentes na- Las anillas atornilladas se apretarán o retirarán después de la
cionales, locales y específicas de la instalación. instalación.
Pueden diferir los detalles técnicos de las ejecuciones espe- En las máquinas de eje vertical (p. ej., IMV5, IMV6 - v. Fig. 1),
ciales y variantes. En caso de dudas, es perentorio dirigirse hay que garantizar que no pueda entrar agua en el rodamiento
al fabricante indicando la designación de tipo y el número superior.
de serie, o dejar que un centro de service de SIEMENS efectúe
La parte superior de la caja de bornes con placa de 6 bornes se
los trabajos de conservación.
puede girar en 4 x 90 grados y con placa de 9 bornes en 180
grados.
INDICACION: Figs. 2 ... (Piezas de recambio), v. Anexo págs. 29 Estabilidad de marcha
Son condiciones previas para lograr una marcha estable, con vi-
braciones reducidas, que la conformación de los cimientos o las
1 Descripción condiciones de adosado/empotrado sean estables, junto con una
1.1 Campo de aplicación alineación exacta de los motores y un buen equilibrado de los
elementos de accionamiento. Por ejemplo, se pueden colocar
Los motores pueden instalarse en ambientes húmedos o polvori-
chapas delgadas debajo de las patas para evitar las torsiones en
entos. El aislamiento es resistente al clima tropical. Normalmente
los motores o, en caso dado, puede que sea necesario un equilib-
no es preciso adoptar medidas de protección especiales contra
rado completo del rotor junto con el elemento de accionamiento.
los efectos climatológicos, si los motores se almacenan o se de-
positan a la intemperie convenientemente.
Nivel de intensidad acústica en la superficie, a 50 Hz
2.3 Equilibrado, elementos de accionamiento
(DIN EN 21 680, parte 1) Se han de calar y extraer los elementos de accionamiento
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9 aprox. 51 a 76 dB(A) (acoplamientos, poleas de transmisión, ruedas dentadas, ...)con
un dispositivo adecuado (Fig. 7).
1.2 Funcionamiento y constitución Los rotores están equilibrados dinámicamente con media
chaveta de manera estándar.
Los motores 1LG4, 1LG6 y 1LG9 en su ejecución básica tienen
autorrefrigeración por ventilador. Además los motores de la serie A partir de las series de 1991, el tipo de equilibrado se marcará en
1LG pueden o bien no tener ventilador (opción...., por ejemplo el LA del extremo del eje:
como motores ventiladores con refrigeración por medio de un (H = equilibrado con media chaveta)
ventilador especial motado en el extremo del eje), o pueden tener (F = equilibrado con chaveta entera ajustada ejecución
refrigeración independiente (opción G17). Los motores 1PP4, 1PP6 especial)
y 1PP9 son motores con refrigeración propia sin ventilador. Al montar el elemento de accionamiento observar que sea
En los motores con patas éstas están fundidas en la carcasa, al adecuado el tipo de equilibrado.
pedido se pueden suministrar con las patas atornilladas (opción Equilibrado con media chaveta
K11 / ver Fig. 2).. En los elementos de accionamiento con una relación de la longi-
El traslado de las patas en la carcasa, por ejemplo para el cambio tud de cuba I a la longitud del extremo del eje IM < 0,8 y veloci-
de posición de la caja de bornes (ver Fig.5), es posible en las dades > 1500/min, pueden aparecer irregularidades en la estabi-
opciones K09, K10 y K11. Para esto ya están adecuadamente lidad de marcha (v. Fig. 8).
elaboradas las superficies y las perforaciones necesarias. ¡En los En caso dado será necesario un reequilibrado, p. ej., mecanizar la
motores con freno (por ejemplo la opción G26) es necesario parte de la chaveta Tp que sobresale del elemento de accionami-
además tener en cuenta las instrucciones de servicio del freno ! ento y del contorno del eje.
Estas instrucciones son válidas como suplemento a las instruc- Se observarán las medidas generales
ciones de servicio del tipo de motor al que se refiera. No es válido PRECAUCION necesarias para la protección contra
para los motores con ejecución EEx e. contactos involuntarios de los ele-
mentos de accionamiento.
2 Operación Si se opera un motor sin elemento de accionamiento, habrá
En los motores solo se trabajará que asegurar la chaveta contra su eyección.
PRECAUCION cuando no estén bajo tensión.
2.4 Conexión
2.1 Transporte, almacenamiento La tensión y frecuencia de la red tienen que ser las indicadas en la
Durante el transporte se utilizarán todas las anillas de suspensión placa de características. Son admisibles desviaciones de tensión
disponibles. o de frecuencia de ±5 % como máximo (para 1ME6, desviaciones
Para transportar grupos de máquinas máximas de frecuencia de ±3 %), sin que por ello disminuya la
PRECAUCION (p. ej., reductores, ventiladores potencia. Llevar a cabo el empalme y la colocación de los estribos
adosados, ...) utilizar únicamente las de maniobra según el esquema que se encuentra en la caja de
anillas o muñones de suspensión previstos. Los grupos de bornes. Empalmar el conductor de protección al borne marcado
con .

Siemens AG - 10 -
ESPAÒOL
En los bornes con estribo (p. ej. según DIN 46282) los con- - todas las conexiones eléctricas, así como los tornillos y ele-
ductores se distribuirán de tal manera que resulte aprox. la mentos de unión están apretados y ejecutados según las dis-
misma altura de conexión en ambos lados. Este tipo de co- posiciones
nexión requiere doblar en U uno de los conductores, o usar - que el conductor de protección se ha fabricado de acuerdo a
un terminal (v. Fig. 3.1). Esto rige igualmente para la cone- las prescripciones
xión del conductor de protección y para el conductor de puesta
a tierra exterior, de color amarillo y verde (v. Fig. 3.2). - que todos los dispositivos adicionales (frenos, velocímetro, ven-
tilador externo.) están en condiciones de prestar servicio
Los terminales eléctricos roscados y los bornes de conexión (ex-
- que se han tomado las medidas necesarias contra contactos
ceptuando los de las regletas) estén apretados con el par prescri-
involuntarios de piezas en movimiento y bajo tensión
to; véase la fig. 4.
- que no se sobrepasa la velocidad límite nmáx (v. placa de cara-
cterísticas).
2.5 Control de la resistencia del aislamiento
INDICACION. La velocidad límite nmáx es la velocidad de servi-
Antes de la primera puesta en marcha, tras largos períodos de cio máxima admisible durante cortos períodos. Hay que tener
almacenamiento o de parada (aprox. 6 meses) hay que medir la en cuenta que en este caso el comportamiento empeora re-
resistencia del aislamiento de los arrollamientos. specto al ruido y a las vibraciones del motor y que se acorta el
Durante la medición y seguidamente período para el cambio de los rodamientos.
PRECAUCION después de ella, los bornes a veces Tras montar los motores se compro-
están sometidos a tensiones pelig- ATENCION bará el perfecto funcionamiento de
rosas, por lo que no deben tocarse. los frenos (si existen).
Resistencia del aislamiento Esta lista no es completa. Posiblemente sean necesarias prue-
- La resistencia mínima del aislamiento contra masa de un bas adicionales.
arrollamiento nuevo, limpio o reparado es de 10 Megaohmios.
- En primer lugar se calcula la resistencia del aislamiento críti-
ca Rcrít. Dicho cálculo se efectúa multiplicando la tensión asig-
3 Mantenimiento
nada UN, p. ej. 0,69 kV AC por el factor constante (0,5 Mega-
ohmios/kV): Medidas de seguridad
Rcrít= 0,69 kV * 0,5 Megaohmios/kV = 0,345 Megaohmios. Antes de comenzar cualquier tra-
Medición PRECAUCION bajo en el motor o en el aparato y,
La resistencia mínima del aislamiento contra masa de los arrol- especialmente, antes de abrir las
lamientos se mide con 500 V c.c. Al hacerlo, la temperatura de los cubiertas de las partes activas, debe desconectarse seg-
arrollamientos será de 25°C ± 15°C. ún las prescripciones. Tener en cuenta los circuitos adi-
cionales o auxiliares que pudieran haber junto con los cir-
La resistencia crítica del aislamiento a la temperatura de ser- cuitos principales.
vicio del arrollamiento se mide con 500 V c.c.
Las usuales 5 reglas de seguridad según, p. ej., DIN VDE
Control 0105 son:
Si en una máquina nueva, limpia o tras un largo período de alma-
cenamiento o de paro la resistencia del aislamiento mínima - Desconectar
contra masa del arrollamiento fuese menor de 10 Megaohmios - Asegurar contra la reconexión
podría haber un exceso de humedad. En este caso se secarán los - Comprobar si está libre de tensión
arrollamientos.
- Poner a tierra y cortocircuitar
Tras un largo período de funcionamiento la resistencia mínima
- Cubrir o delimitar las partes contiguas que estén bajo ten-
del aislamiento puede bajar a la resistencia crítica. Mientras el
sión.
valor medido no sea menor que el calculado para la resistencia
crítica la máquina podrá seguir funcionando. Si se alcanzara un Solo podrán retirarse estas medidas cuando se hayan
valor menor habría que parar inmediatamente la máquina. acabado los trabajos de mantenimiento y el motor se haya
montado completamente
Hay que averiguar cuál es el motivo y en su caso reparar los arrol-
lamientos o sus partes, limpiarlos o secarlos.
INDICACION: Deberán abrirse de cuando en cuando los taladros
2.6 Puesta en servicio para el agua de condensación en los motores en los que dichos
agujeros estén tapados (p. ej., grado de protección IP55 ó IP56, v.
INDICACION: Cuando el par es muy irregular (p. ej., accion- placa de características), para permitir la salida del agua que pud-
amiento de un compresor de émbolo) se fuerza la formación de iera haberse acumulado.
una corriente distorsionada, cuyas oscilaciones armónicas pueden
Las aberturas para el agua de condensación siempre deberán
influenciar indebidamente a la red así como también emitir pertur-
baciones electromagnéticas inadmisiblemente altas. situarse en la parte más baja del motor.
Si la alimentación es a través de un convertidor, las oscila-

ciones armónicas de tensión y corriente de alta frecuencia en las Cambio de rodamientos, duración de la grasa,
líneas de alimentación pueden emitir perturbaciones electromag- tipos de grasa
néticas. Por esta razón se recomienda el uso de conductores blin-
dados. El plazo de duración de la grasa bajo condiciones normales de
servicio, montaje horizontal del motor, temperatura del medio re-
Antes de la puesta en servicio se comprobará si frigerante de hasta 40°C y con velocidades del motor de
- se han observado las resistencias mínimas del aislamiento
- 1500/min, es aprox. 40.000 horas de servicio
- el rotor puede girarse sin que roce
- 3000/min, es aprox. 20.000 horas de servicio.
- si el motor está alineado y montado correctamente
Independientemente de las horas de servicio, se recomienda ren-
- los elementos de accionamiento están ajustados correctamente ovar la grasa aprox. cada 3 años debido a su envejecimiento.Por
(p. ej., la tensión de la correa en caso de accionamiento por ello es necesario desmontar los rodamientos, limpiarlos y lubri-
correa, ...) y que el elemento de accionamiento es el adecuado carlos noc grasa nueva. En la ejecución con reengrase se han de
para la aplicación prevista observar los datos en la placa de lubricación.

Siemens AG - 11 -
ESPAÒOL
Bajo condiciones de servicio especiales, p. ej., montaje vertical, Ventiladores de material plástico (BG180M ... 315L)
servicio frecuente a velocidades límite nmáx, con grandes cargas Cada ventilador de plástico tiene dos lengüetas moldeadas que
por vibraciones y choques, así como con muchos servicios con encajan como fijación axial en la ranura anular del eje. Antes de
inversión de marcha, se reducen considerablemente las horas de extraer el ventilador, desencajar estas dos lengüetas y fijarlas pro-
servicio indicadas. visionalmente en esta posición, p. ej., por medio de piezas inser-
Los motores tienen rodamientos radiales rígidos con un disco de tadas. Los ventiladores tienen en el disco portador dos aberturas
cierre (ejecución ZC3). para poder pasar el dispositivo de extracción que se fija en el
disco. En estado de suministro las aberturas aún están cubiertas
El disco de cierre está colocado en el lado del rodamiento dirigido de una fina hoja de plástico que se tiene que romper.
hacia la carcasa del motor (estator).
Tanto para calar como para extraer se utilizará siempre el dispos-
INDICACION: Al cambiar los rodamientos observar la disposición itivo adecuado. Son absolutamente inadmisibles los martillazos
del disco de cierre y el juego del rodamiento, ya que en las ejecu- para impedir el dano de los rodamientos.
ciones especiales pueden ser diferentaes a en las estándar.
Estos discos deberán resistir temperaturas desde -20°C hasta
+150°C, p. ej., ser de caucho poliacrílico (ACM).
Tipos de grasa en las máquinas estándar: (Fa. ESSO /UNIREX
N3); la duración de las grasas y el plazo para el reengrase se
refieren solamente a este tipo de grasa.
Las grasas alternativas deben satisfacer DIN 51825-KL3N. En este
caso se deberán acortar los intervalos de engrase en KT > 25° C.
Las grasas especiales se indican en la placa de características.
Evítese la mezcla de grasas.
Despiezar el motor tanto como sea necesario. Extraer el rodami-
ento con el dispositivo adecuado (v. Fig. 6). Limpiar de impurezas
al alojamiento. Limpiar o renovar los rodamientos y volverlos a
engrasar.
Llenar a ras los recintos huecos del rodamiento. No se llena de
grasa la tapa o el escudo portacojinetes, para evitar un engrase
excesivo.
Calentar uniformemente los rodamientos a aprox. 80-100°C y ca-
larlos. Evitar golpes fuertes (p. ej., con un martillo, ...).
También se renovarán los elementos de junta deteriorados (p. ej.,
los anillos de cierre radial de eje etc.).
Si los anillos de cierre radial del eje no tuvieran muelles, tampoco
se pondrán muelles en los nuevos.
Dispositivo de reengrase
En los motores con dispositivo de reengrase, se observarán las
indicaciones en la placa de características.
Sellado de juntas
Al montar máquinas con grado de protección IP55 o más (v. placa
de características), las superficies pulidas entre la carcasa del
motor y los escudos portacojinetes deberán hermetizarse con una
pasta obturadora que no se endurece, p. ej., Hylomar, Curil.

Siemens AG - 12 -
ITALIANO
Se tiene que cuidar que los pasadores encajen adecuadamente Per il trasporto di gruppi di macchina (ad es. azionamenti,
en las estrías del eje. soffianti supplementari) vanno utilizzati soltanto gli occhielli
ed i perni previsti per il sollevamento. Il sollevamento di un
PERICOLO gruppo di macchine non deve mai avvenire aggianciando la
componente supplementare alla macchina principale.
Avvertenze generiche Assicurarsi che la capacità di portata degli apparecchi di sol-
Per evitare rischi e danni è indispensabile attenersi alle levamento sia sufficiente.
avvertenze ed alle indicazioni contenute nella presente pubbli- E consigliabile reingrassare i cuscinetti se fra la fornitura e la
cazione e nelle istruzioni supplementari in allegato (in giallo), messa in servizio dei motori in condizioni favorevoli (magazzinag-
relative alla sicurezza nellimpiego di macchine ed apparecchi gio in ambienti asciutti, esenti da polvere e vibrazioni), è trascorso
elettrici, come pure quelle contenute in altri stampati attinenti. un periodo superiore a 3 anni. In condizioni non favorevoli la dura-
Vanno inoltre rispettate le norme ed esigenze nazionali, lo- ta è notevolmente più breve.
cali e specifiche dellimpianto. Eventualmente va controllata la resistenza disolamento degli av-
Esecuzioni speciali e varianti costruttive possono discos- volgimenti, ved. sez. 2.5.
tarsi in particolari tecnici. In caso di eventuali difficoltà, si prega
di rivolgersi al costruttore, indicando il tipo e il numero di matri- 2.2 Installazione
cola, oppure di far eseguire i lavori di manutenzione da uno dei
centri di service della Siemens. Dopo linstallazione della macchina gli occhielli di sollevamento
avvitati alla carcassa vanno serrati oppure tolti.
Nelle macchine con estremità dalbero verso lalto e verso il
Avvertenza: Fig. 2 ... (Parti di ricambio) , vedi appendice p. 30
basso (ad es. IMV5, IMV6, ved. fig. 1) si deve fare attenzione che
non possa penetrare acqua nel cuscinetto superiore.
1 Descrizione La parte superiore della carcassa morsetti può essere ruotata
1.1 Campo dimpiego di 4x90 gradi, in caso di una morsettiera a 6 morsetti e di 180 gradi
con una morsettiera a 9 morsetti.
I motori possono essere installati in ambienti polverosi o umidi.
Silenziosità di funzionamento
Lisolamento è in versione tropicale. Se il deposito o linstallazione
Per il funzionamento silenzioso ed equilibrato della macchina sono
allaperto sono eseguiti regolarmente, non è necessario in linea di
indispensabili dei fondamenti stabili e condizioni favorevoli
massima alcun particolare accorgimento per proteggere i motori
allinstallazione come anche la regolazione corretta del motore e
dalle intemperie.
lequilibratura precisa dellelemento di azionamento.
Livello di pressione acustica delle superfici di misura a 50Hz
(DIN EN 21680 parte 1) Per garantire ciò, può risultare necessario eseguire lequilibratura
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9 ca. 51 a 76 dB(A) completa con lelemento di azionamento oppure stabilizzare la
macchina con spessori di lamiera sottili posti sotto i piedini per
provvedere ad eventuali distorsioni.
1.2 Costruzione e modo di funzionamento 2.3 Equilibratura, elementi di azionamento

I motori 1LG4, 1LG6 e 1LG9 sono in esecuzione di base autoven- Le operazioni di calettamento e di estrazione degli elementi di tras-
tilati. Inoltre i motori della serie 1LG possono essere anche senza missione (disco di accoppiamento, puleggia, ingranaggio, ..) devo-
il proprio ventilatore (per esempio come motori a ventilatori, a no essere sempre eseguite con le apposite attrezzature (fig.7).
raffreddamento ad un ventilatore speciale montato allestremità
dellalbero), oppure per mezzo di raffreddamento a ventilatori es- Alla fornitura, i rotori sono equilibrati dinamicamente con
terni (opzione G17). I motori 1PP4, 1PP6 e 1PP9 hanno ventilazi- mezza chiavetta.
one naturale (senza ventilatore). Il tipo di equilibratura è segnato allestremità dellalbero (sul lato
Nei motori a piedini i piedini fanno corpo con la carcassa per dellazionamento sulla fronte dellalbero).
fusione oppure, in opzione, sono avvitati alla carcassa (opzione (H = equilibratura con mezza chiavetta)
K11/ved. fig. 2). (F = equilibratura con chiavetta piena esecuzione
speciale)
Per questa ragione un riposizionamento dei piedini sulla carcassa
del motore, p. es. per variare la posizione della cassetta morsetti, Considerare il tipo di equilibratura prima del montaggio
è possibile solo con le opzioni K09, K10 e K11. Le forature neces- dellelemento di azionamento!
sarie ci sono già fatte e le superfici sono già lavorate in modo Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta
opportuno. In caso di elementi di azionamento con un rapporto di lunghezza
Per i motori con il freno (per esempio opzione G26) bisogna ris- di lM < 0,8 e con una velocità superiore a 1500 giri/min., può risul-
pettare anche le istruzioni di servizio del freno. tare compromessa la silenzionsità di funzionamento (ved. fig.8).
Le presenti istruzioni sono valide in qualità di un supplemento delle Eventualmente sarà necessaria la riequilibratura, ad es. riducen-
istruzioni di servizio del tipo di motore corrispondente. Non valgo- do la lunghezza della chiavetta TP sporgente dallelemento di azio-
no per lesecuzione EEx e. namento allestremità dellalbero.
PERICOLO Osservare le misure di protezione
generali contro i contatti accidentali
PERICOLO 2 Esercizio degli elementi di azionamento.
Si faccia attenzione che qualunque
Se la messa in servizio di un motore avviene senza lelemento
operazione sulla macchina venga effettuata solamente in as-
di azionamento, la chiavetta deve essere protetta contro
senza di tensione.
lespulsione.
2.1 Trasporto, deposito 2.4 Allacciamento

Il sollevamento di motori con più occhielli deve avvenire utilizzan-
La tensione e la frequenza di rete devono coincidere con i dati
doli tutti.
PERICOLO riportati sulla targhetta. Sono ammessi scostamenti del ±5% della
tensione o della frequenza (per 1ME6 ±3% della frequenza), in

Siemens AG - 13 -
ITALIANO
quanto essi non causano una riduzione della potenza. Il collega- - il motore sia montato ed allineato correttamente
mento e la disposizione dei ponticelli dovranno corrispondere a - gli elementi di azionamento siano regolati esattamente (per es.
quelli indicati dallo schema applicato allinterno della cassetta tensione della cinghia in caso di azionamento a cinghia) e siano
morsetti. Si colleghi il conduttore di protezione al morsetto con- adatti alle condizioni dimpiego.
trassegnato da . - utti gli allacciamenti elettrici, viti di fissaggio ed elementi di col-
Quando si effettuano i collegamenti con morsetti di serraggio legamento siano eseguiti correttamente e ben serrati secondo
(per es. secondo DIN 46282 ), si faccia attenzione che i con- le istruzioni.
duttori abbiano lo stesso spessore su entrambi i lati del mor- - il conduttore di protezione sia in regola
setto. Questo tipo di collegamento richiede quindi che i sin- - funzionino eventuali apparecchiature supplementari (freni, con-
goli conduttori vengano ripiegati ad U o allacciati tramite ca- tagiri, ventilatore esterno)
pocorda. (ved. fig. 3.1). Ciò vale anche per il conduttore di
protezione ed il conduttore di messa a terra esterno giallo- - siano attuati tutti i provvedimenti per la protezione contro i con-
verde (vedi Fig.3.2 ). tatti accidentali delle parti in movimento o sotto tensione.
Coppie di serraggio ammesse per viti e dadi dei morsetti (ad ec- - che il limite max. di giri (nmax) non venga superato (vedi targhet-
cezione di quelli della morsettiera) vedi fig. 4. ta).
Avvertenza: Il numero max. di giri è ammesso solo per un breve
2.5 Verifica della resistenza di isolamento periodo durante il funzionamento. Bisogna tener conto che ciò
può incidere negativamente sul comportamento della macchina
Prima della prima messa in servizio del motore dopo un lungo in quanto riguarda le vibrazioni, la rumorosità ed i gli intervalli di
periodo di magazzinaggio o di sosta (circa 6 mesi), è necessario sostituzione dei cuscinetti.
determinare la resistenza disolamento ATTENZIONE Dopo linstallazionee dei motori va
degli avvolgimenti. verificato il perfetto funzionamento del
PERICOLO
Durante e subito dopo la misurazione, freno (se presente).
i morsetti sono in parte sotto tensione Questo elenco non può essere completo. Possono essere
pericolosa e non vanno quindi assolutamente toccati! eventualmente necessarie altre prove.
Resistenza disolamento
- La resistenza disolamento minima contro massa di avvolgi-
menti nuovi, puliti o riparati è 10 MegaOhm
3 Manutenzione
- La resistenza critica disolamento Rkrit deve prima essere cal-
Indicazioni di sicurezza
colata. Il calcolo avviene moltiplicando la tensione di taratura
U N, per es. 0,69 kV AC, con il fattore costante (0,5 MegaOhm/ PERICOLO Prima di iniziare qualsiasi lavoro
kV). sulla macchina e limpianto, in par-
R krit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm ticolare prima di aprire coperture e carcasse di parti in
servizio, bisogna assicurarsi che la macchina sia priva di
Misurazione
tensione. Ciò riguarda non solamente i circuiti principali,
La resistenza disolamento minima degli avvolgimenti contro
ma bisogna tener conto anche dei circuiti ausiliari e sup-
massa viene misurata con tensione continua di 500V. La tempera-
plementari.
tura degli avvolgimenti dovrebbe essere 25°C ± 15°C.
Vanno rispettate le 5 regole di sicurezza, ad es sec. VDE
La resistenza critica disolamento va misurata sulla temperatu-
01505:
ra di servizio degli avvolgimenti, con tensione continua di 500V.
- togliere la tensione
Verifica
Se, nel caso di una macchina nuova , pulita o rimessa a punto che - proteggere il sistema contro la reinserzione
è stata a lungo in maggazino oppure ferma, la resistenza minima - assicurarsi che la macchina sia priva di tensione
disolamento degli avvolgimenti contro massa è minore di 10Mega- - collegare a terra e cortocircuitare la macchina
Ohm, lumidità può esserne la causa. Bisogna quindi asciugare gli
avvolgimenti. - sbarrare o coprire le parti adiacenti che portano tensione.
Dopo un lungo periodo di esercizio, la resistenza minima può Le misure di sicurezza sopraindicate devono essere ris-
ridursi alla resistenza critica disolamento. Fintanto che il valore pettate fino alla portata a termine dei lavori di manutenzi-
non scende al di sotto di quello della resistenza critica, si può one ed alla completa installazione della macchina.
continuare ad utilizzare la macchina. Nel momento in cui il valore
scende al di sotto, la macchina deve essere immediatamente di- Avvertenza: In caso di macchine in esecuzione a fori chiusi per lo
sinserita, e bisogna ricercare le cause; eventualmente dovranno scarico di condensa (ad es. tipo di protezione IP55 o IP56, ved.
essere rimessi a punto, puliti o asciugati gli avvolgimenti o le sezi- targhetta), i fori per lo scarico di condensa devono essere aperti
oni dellavvolgimento. da tanto in tanto per scaricare la condensa eventualmente ristag-
nata.
2.6 Messa in servizio I fori per la condensa devono essere situati sul fondo della macchina.
Avvertenza: In caso che la coppia sia fortemente disuniforme Sostituzione dei cuscinetti, durata delluso di grasso, tipi di grasso
(ad es. azionamento di compressore a stantuffi), si forma forzata- La durata delluso di grasso è in condizioni di funzionamento nor-
mente una corrente di macchina non sinusoidale, la cui frequenza male, cioè installazione orizzontale della macchina, temperatura
di armonica può avere una influenza non ammissibile sulla rete e del refrigerante inferiore a 40°C e un no. max. dei giri motore,
può essere la causa di disturbi elettromagnetici troppo forti. - 1500/min.: ca. 40 000 ore di servizio
Lalimentazione tramite convertitore può causare disturbi elet- - 3000/min.: ca. 20 000 ore di servizio
tromagnetici derivanti dalla corrente o da tensioni con una frequ-
enza di armonica troppo elevata nei conduttori del motore.Si rac- Indipendentemente dal numero delle ore di servizio è comunque
comanda perciò limpiego di conduttori schermati. raccomandabile sostituire il grasso al più tardi dopo 3 anni (per
motivi di invecchiamento). A tale scopo occorre smontare i cusci-
Prima della messa in servizio bisogna verificare che: netti, lavarli e d ingrassarli con il grasso nuovo. Per le esecuzioni
- la resistenza disolamento minima sia in regola
dove occorre regolarmente aggiungere il grasso, procedere sec-
- il rotore possa ruotare senza strisciare ondo i dati sulla targhetta di grassaggio.

Siemens AG - 14 -
ITALIANO
Sotto condizioni particolari, ad es. installazione verticale della Ventilatori in materia plastica (BG180M...315L)
macchina, funzionamento frequente al limite dei giri nmax e intense I venilatori in plastica hanno due linguette fuse che si incastrano
sollecitazioni da vibrazioni e urti, inversioni frequenti di marcia ecc., nella cava dellalbero come fissaggio assiale. Prima di togliere la
gli intervalli per la sostituzione dei cuscinetti sono notevolmente ventola, le due linguette devono essere disinnestate (cacciavite) e
più brevi (riduzione delle ore di servizio sopraindicate). mantenute provvisoriamente in questa posizione, per es. per mezzo
I motori sono provvisti nella versione standard di cuscinetti a sfere di appositi spessori.
della serie 62 oppure allopzione K36 di cuscinetti a sfere Sulla piastra di sostegno le ventole hanno due aperture per
della serie 63 con un coperchio (esecuzione ZC3). lestrattore che deve agganciarsi al mozzo. Queste aperture siano
Il disco di tenuta è disposto sul lato cuscinetti della carcassa del chiuse da un foglio di plastica per il trasporto che deve essere
motore (statore). tolto.
AVVERTENZA: Prima della sostituzione dei cuscinetti bisogna Per lestrazione e lapplicazione deve venir utilizzato un utensile
assicurarsi della posizione del disco di tenuta e del gioco del cus- adatto. Per proteggere i cuscinetti, evitare assolutamente di dare
cinetto, poichè esistono diversi varianti speciali rispetto martellate!
allesecuzione standard. Occorre verificare che i scatti siano bene posizionati nelle scanala-
Il materiale dei dischi dovrebbe essere resistente a temperature ture dellalbero.
entro -20°C e + 150°C, per es. caucciù di poliacrilio (ACM).
Tipo di grasso per le macchine standard: UNIREX N3 (ESSO).
La durata delluso di grassi ed intervalli di grassaggio valgono
soltanto per questo tipo di grasso.
Altri tipi di grasso sostituivi devono corrispondere al minimo alle
norme DIN 51825-KL3N. In questo caso occorre ridurre gli inter-
valli di grassaggio per KT > 25°C.
La miscelazione di diversi tipi di grasso va evitata.
Smontare il motore quanto è necessario per eseguire i lavori. Es-
trarre i cuscinetti con un attrezzo adatto (ved. fig. 6) e pulire la
zona di montaggio dei cuscinetti da insudiciamenti.
Pulire i cuscinetti, sostituirli eventualmente ed eseguire la rilubrifi-
cazione. Riempire a livello i spazi vuoti dei cuscinetti con grasso.
I copricuscinetti oppure lo scudo non vengono lubrificati per evi-
tare un ingrassaggio eccessivo.
Riscaldare uniformemente i cuscinetti a 80° - 100°C e calettarli.
Non dare colpi forti (martellate)! Vanno sostituiti anche eventuali
elementi di tenuta ad usura (ad es. anelli di tenuta, ecc.). Se gli
anelli di tenuta radiali sono installati senza molla, va utilizzato an-
che il ricambio nuovo senza molla.
Ingrassatore
In caso dei mmotori con ingrassatore, osservare le indicazioni ri-
portati sulla targhetta.
Tenute
Durante lassemblaggio di macchine con un grado di protezione
IP55 o superiore (ved. targhetta), bisogna rendere stagni le giun-
zioni nude tra la carcassa e gli scudi per mezzo di un mastice
adeguato, non indurente (ad es. Hylomar, Curil).

Siemens AG - 15 -
SVENSKA
Allmänna anvisningar Om motorn efter leveransen måste förvaras i mera än 3 år under

gynnsamma förhållanden (i torrt, damm- och vibrationsfritt utrymme)
För undvikande av risker och skador innan den tas i drift, så måste rullningslagren fettas in på nytt. Vid
VARNING måste de uppgifter och anvisningar förvaring under ogynnsamma förhållanden reduceras denna tid
som ges i denna driftsinstruktion samt avsevärt.
övriga tillhörande driftsinstruktioner ständigt beaktas.
Kontrollera lindningens isolationsmotstånd enl. avsnitt 2.5.
Med denna driftsinstruktion medföljer även en annan instruk-
tion (gul), som innehåller kompletterande säkerhetsuppgifter
för elektriska maskiner och apparater. Denna gäller alltså som
2.2 Installation
komplettering av alla övriga levererade drifts- och andra instruk- Iskruvade lyftöglor dras åt eller tas bort efter installationen.
tioner inkl. sådana som ännu ej levererats.
För motorer som monteras med axeltappen uppåt eller nedåt (t.ex.
Beakta dessutom alla nationella, lokala och anläggnings- IMV5, IMV6, se Fig. 1) måste man se till att vatten ej kan tränga in
specifika bestämmelser och krav. i det övre lagret.
Specialversioner och varianter kan avvika i tekniska detaljer. Uttagslådans överdel kan vridas 4x90 grader, när man använder
Ta alltid kontakt med tillverkaren vid eventuella oklarheter och en anslutningsplint med 6 klämmor och 180 grader när man an-
ange därvid typbeteckning och tillverkningsnummer, eller vänder en plint med 9 klämmor.
låt alla reparationer utföras av en av SIEMENS servicecentra-
Vibrationsfri gång
ler.
Förutsättningen för lugn och vibrationsfri gång är dels ett stabilt
fundament, dels även att motorerna är exakt uppriktade och att
OBS: Fig. 2 ... (Reservdelar) se bilagan på sid. 30 drivdonet är väl balanserat. Man kan t.ex. undvika mekaniska spän-
ningar genom att lägga tunna plåtar under fötterna. I vissa fall kan
det bli nödvändigt att rikta hela rotorn tillsammans med drivdonet.
1 Beskrivning
1.1 Användningsområde 2.3 Balansering, drivdon
Motorerna kan installeras i dammig eller fuktig omgivning. Isole- Drivdon (t.ex. kopplingar, remskivor, kugghjul ...) skall dras på och
ringen är i tropikutförande. Vid ändamålsenlig lagring eller upp- av med lämpligt verktyg (Fig. 7).
ställning utomhus erfordras normalt inga speciella skyddsåtgärder
Motorer av standardmodell är dynamiskt balanserade med full
mot väderpåverkan på motorerna.
halv kil (fullkil).
Ljudtrycksnivå vid 50 Hz (DIN EN 21 680 del 1)
Sättet på vilket balanseringen bör genomföras är markerad på
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9 c:a 51 till 76 dB(A)
axeltappen (på drivanordningens sida - på axelns panna):
(H = balansering med halv kil)
1.2 Funktionssätt och konstruktion (F = balansering med full dvs hel kil, specialutförandet)
Motorerna 1LG4, 1LG6 och 1LG9 finns till i grundutförandet med Se till att det drivdon som monteras är balanserat på samma sätt!
egen kylning (fläkt). Dessutom kan motorerna i produktionsserien Balansering med halv kil
1 LG väljas också utan egen fläkt (möjliga varianter som är till På drivdon med en navlängd I som är <0,8 av axeltappens längd
finnandes är exempelvis ventilatormotorerna i vilka kylingen för- I M och med varvtal >1500/min kan rotationsstörningar inträffa (se
siggår med hjälp av en speciell fläkt som finns på axeltappen), Fig.8).
eller är de till förfogande också i utförandet med extern fläkt (väljbar
Eventuellt kan efterbalansering erfordras, t.ex. genom nedslipning
variant G17). Motorerna 1PP4, 1PP6 och 1PP9 är motorer som
av den del av kilen TP, som sticker ut ur drivdonet och utöver ax-
har självkyling utan fläkt.
elns konturlinje.
I föttermotorerna är fötterna pågjutna på motorhuset; de kan väljbart
Vidta alla allmänt erforderliga åtgärder
levereras också med fastskruvna fötter (variant K11, jfr avb Nr 2). VARNING för beröringsskyddav drivdonen. Om
Det är möjligt att flytta om fötterna på motorhuset - något som kan en motor tas i drift utan drivdon skall
bli nödvändigt exempelvis p g av en förändring i klammerns läge i kilen fixeras så att den inte kan kastas ut.
varianterna K09, K10 och K11. De därtill nödvändiga borringar och
ytor är redan förberedade på det för en sådan åtgärd bästägnade
sätt. I motorerna med egna bromsar (exempelvis variant G26) bör
2.4 Elektrisk anslutning
den respektiva bromsgångens driftsinstruktion respekteras! Nätspänning och nätfrekvens måste stämma överens med de data
Dessa anvisningar är giltiga som tillägg till bruksanvisningen för som anges på märkplåten. En spännings- eller frekvensavvikelse
den respektiva motortypen. De är inte giltiga vad motorer i genom- på ±5% (vid 1ME6 frekvensavvikelse på ±3%) är tillåten utan att
förandet EExe beträffar. effekten behöver reduceras.
Anslutning och kopplingen av kopplingsblecken jämförs med kop-
2 Drift plingsschemat på insidan av locket till anslutningslådan. Skyddsl-
Vid alla arbeten på motorn måste den- edare anslutes till denna plint .
VARNING na vara spänningslös. Vid kontaktklämmor med klämbyglar (t.ex. enl. DIN 46282)
måste ledarna fördelas så att det blir ungefär samma kläm-
2.1 Transport, förvaring höjd på vardera sidan av balken.
Detta slags anslutning kräver därför att en enstaka ledare böjs
Vid transport bör alla lyftöglor på motorn utnyttjas.
i U-form, eller att att man använder en kabelsko (Fig. 3.1). Detta
Vid transport av hela maskinuppsät- gäller även skyddsledaranslutningen och den externa jord-
VARNING tningar (t.ex. med kuggväxel- eller fläk- ningsledaren (Fig. 3.2).
taggregat) får man bara använda be-
Åtdragningsmomenten för elanslutningarnas skruvförband (gäller
fintliga lyftöglor eller lyfttappar. Lyft inte maskinuppsättnin-
ej plintrader), se Fig. 4.
garna genom att hänga dem i de enskilda maskinerna! Se till
att lyftdonet har erforderlig kapacitet!

Siemens AG - 16 -
SVENSKA
2.5 Kontroll av isolationsmotståndet 3 Underhåll

Innan motorn tas i drift första gången samt efter en längre tids
lagring (c:a 6 månader) måste man fastställa lindningarnas isola- Säkerhetsåtgärder
tionsmotstånd. Innan något arbete på motorn eller
Under och omedelbart efter mätnin- VARNING utrustningen påbörjas, framför allt
VARNING gen ligger det delvis farliga spännin- innan skydden över aktiva delar
gar på klämmorna, som inte får öppnas, måste motorn vara skild från nätet enligt gällande
beröras. föreskrifter. Uppmärksamma förutom huvudströmkretsar-
Isolationsmotstånd na även eventuellt befintliga tillsats- eller hjälpströmkret-
- Minsta isolationsmotstånd gentemot jord i nya, rengjorda eller sar.
reparerade lindningar är 10 MegaOhm. De vanligaste 5 säkerhetsreglerna är därvid enligt DIN
- Det kritiska isolationsmoståndet Rkrit beräknas först teoretiskt. VDE 0105:
Detta gör man genom att multiplicera märkspänningen UN, t.ex. - Frånkoppling
AC 0,69 kV, med konstanta faktorn (0,5 MegaOhm/kV): - Säkra mot återinkoppling
Rkrit = 0,69 kV x 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm - Fastställ spänningslöshet
Mätning - Jorda och kortslut
Ledningarnas minsta isolationsmotstånd gentemot jord mäts med
likspänning 500 V. Därvid skall lindningarnas temperatur vara 25°C - Täck över eller spärra av intilliggande delar som fortfarande
±15°C. står under spänning
Det kritiska isolationsmotståndet skall mätas med 500 V likspän- Ovannämnda åtgärder får inte återställas förrän underhåll-
ning när lindningarna har driftstemperatur. sarbetena är avslutade och motorn är fullständigt monterad.
Kontroll
Om lindningarna i en ny, just rengjord eller reparerad motor som OBS: Stängda kondensvattenöppningar skall då och då öppnas
legat i lager eller stått stilla under en längre tid har ett minsta iso- för att det eventuellt samlade kondensvattnet kan tappas ut.
lationsmotstånd gentemot jord som är mindre än 10 MegaOhm, Kondensvattenöppningarna skall alltid anordnas längst ned på
så kan det bero på fukt. Då måste lindningarna torkas. motorn.
Efter en längre tids driftsuppehåll kan minsta isolationsmotstån-
det sjunka ner till det kritiska isolationsmotståndet. Så länge det Lagerbyte, smörjmaterialets livslängd, fettsorter
uppmätta värdet för det kritiska isolationsmotståndet inte under-
skrider det beräknade värdet, kan motorn fortfarande hållas i drift. Smörjmaterialets livslängd är under normala driftsförhållanden,
Om detta värde underskrids måste motorn omedelbart stoppas. vågrät motorinstallation, kylmedelstemperatur max 40°C och för
motorvarvtalet
Fastställ orsaken till detta. Eventuellt kan det bli nödvändigt att
reparera, rengöra eller torka ut lindningar eller lindningsdelar. - 1500/min c:a 40 000 driftstimmar
- 3000/min c:a 20 000 driftstimmar
2.6 Idrifttagning Oberoende av antalet driftstimmar bör fettet bytes vart 3:e år p g
av åldrandet. För detta ändamål är det nödvändigt att demontera
OBS: Vid starkt varierande vridmoment (t.ex. drivning av en lager, tvätta dem upp och smörja dem med nytt fett. Ifall den re-
kolvkompressor) uppstår en icke-sinusformad motorström, vars spektiva maskinkonstruktion gör genomgående tilläggssmörjning
övertoner kan medföra en otillåten påverkan på nätet och alstra möjlig, är det nödvändigt att ta hänsyn till uppgifter som finns på
otillåtet stora elektromagnetiska störningar. smörjningstabellen.
Vid matning med omriktare kan högfrekventa ström- och spän- Vid speciella driftsförhållanden - t ex lodrät motorinstallation, ofta
ningsövertoner i ledningarna till motorn medföra elektromagnetis- förekommande körning vid maximivarvtalet nMAX, stora vibrations-
ka störningar. Därför rekommenderas skärmade ledningar. eller stötbelastningar, ofta förekommande reverserande drift- re-
Kontrollera före idrifttagningen att duceras ovannämnda intervall avsevärt.
- minsta isolationsmotstånden ej överskrids, Motorerna är standardvis utrustade med radiala kullager (spårkul-
- rotorn kan vridas runt utan att skrapa emot någonstans lager) serien 62..., eller i väljbar variant K36 är det radialkullager
- motorn är korrekt monterad och riktad serien 63.. med en täckbricka som finns till (genomförandet ZC3).
- drivdonen är rätt inställda (t.ex. remspänningen vid remdrift) och Täckbrickan är placerad på den lagersidan som är vänd mot mo-
lämpade för avsedd användning torhuset (statorn).
- alla elektriska anslutningar, skruvförband och förbindelseelement OBS: Ge akt på täckbrickans placering och på lagerns glapprum
är åtdragna och utförda enligt föreskrift vid lagerbyte, eftersom det finns några specialutföranden som kan
ha annat arrangemang.
- skyddsledare resp. skyddsjordning utförts korrekt
Fettsorter för standardmotorer (firma ESSO/UNIREX N3): smör-
- eventuellt förekommande hjälp- tillsätsanordningar (broms, var-
jmaterialets livslängd ocn tilläggssmörjningens (eftersmörjmnin-
vmätare, främmande fläkt) är funktionsdugliga
gens) frister är giltiga bara för den här fettsorten. Eventuella ersät-
- beröringsskydd har ordnats för rörliga och spänningförande de- tningsfett måste uppfylla åtminstone kraven som nämnas i DIN
taljer 51825-KL3N. I detta tillfälle bör smörjningens frister vid KT över
- maximivarvtalet nmax (se märkskylten), ej överskrids 25°C förkortas. Speciella fettsorter är citerade på smörjningens
översiktliga tabell (skylt).
OBS: Maximivarvtalet nmax är det högsta kortvariga varvtal som
tillåts. Kom ihåg att detta försämrar motorns buller- och vibra- Blanda inte olika fettsorter!
tionsegenskaper och reducerar lagerbytesintervallet. Ta isär motorn i den mån det behövs. Dra av rullningslagren med
Kontrollera att bromsen (om sådan lämpligt verktyg (se Fig. 6). Rengör lagerstället från föroreningar.
VIKTIGT förekommer) fungerar ordentligt när Rengör eller byt ut rullningslagren och fetta in dem på nytt.
motorerna har monterats. Fyll lagrens fettutrymmen upp till kanten! Lagerlock resp. lager-
Denna uppräkning kan inte vara fullständig. Ytterligare kon- sköld får ingen fettfyllning, så att överfettning undviks.
troller kan erfordras. Värm upp lagren likformigt till ca. 80-100°C. Undvik hårda slag
(t.ex. med hammare).

Siemens AG - 17 -
SVENSKA
Ev. nedslitna tätningar (t.ex. radialtätningsring) skall också bytas

ut. Om radialtätningsringar utan fjädrar är monterade, så får inte
heller den nya ringen vara försedd med fjäder
Eftersmörjningsanordning
Närsomhelst speciella smörjfett är nödvändiga, finns det anförd
på smörjregimens skylt.
Inredning som tjäner eftersmörjningen.
I motorerna som har en inredning för eftersmörjning bör uppgifter
som står på smörjningssylten respekteras.
Fogtätning.
När man sätter ihop maskiner i kapslingsklass IP55 eller högre (se
märkskylten), så måste de blanka monteringsytorna mellan mo-
torhuset och lagersköldarna tätas med en lämplig inte hårdnande
tätningsmass (t ex Hylomar, Curil).
Plastfläkt (BG 180M - 315L)
Plastfläktar har två pågjutna tungor, som snäpper in i spåret i ax-
eln och fixerar fläkten. Innan fläkten dras av måste båda tungorna
frigöras (skruvmejsel) och provisoriskt hållas kvar i detta läge, t ex
under användning av inskjutna mellanbrickor. Skivan som håller
fast fläkthjulen är försedd med två hål, genom vilka man kan sätta
en avdragare mot navet; avdragaren fixeras på skivan. Vid lever-
ansen brukar dessa hål vara förseglade med en tunn plasthinna,
som då måste brytas.
Använd alltid lämpligt verktyg vid av- och pådragning. Slå aldrig
med hammaren; hammarslag bör undgås med hänsyn til lagerns
beskydd. Det är nödvändigt att klinkor (tungor) riktigt smäller igen
i spåren på axeln.

Siemens AG - 18 -
ÈESKY
Veobecnì Valivá loiska je tøeba znova namazat, resp. vymìnit pouze v pøí-
padì, e doba od dodávky do uvedení motoru do provozu pøi vhod-
Je tøeba dbát údajù a pokynù ve ných podmínkách (skladování v suchých prostorech bez prachu
UPOZORNÌNÍ vech dodávaných provozních a vibrací) je delí ne tøi roky. Pøi nevhodných podmínkách se tato
i ostatních návodech. To je nezbyt- doba podstatnì zkracuje. V daném pøípadì je tøeba pøezkouet
nì nutné pro zabránìní rizika úrazu a pokození! izolaèní odpor vinutí, viz odst. 2.5.
Dodatkové informace bezpeènosti práce (luté) jsou pøiloeny
a obsahují doplòující údaje k bezpeènosti u elektrických strojù. 2.2 Instalace
Tyto bezpeènostní informace jsou tedy doplnìním k dalím do-
dávaným provozním a ostatním návodùm. Naroubovaná závìsná oka je tøeba po instalaci dotáhnout anebo
odroubovat!
Dále je tøeba brát na vìdomí vekeré platné národní, místní
a jiná specifická ustanovení a poadavky. U motorù s koncem høídele nahoru nebo dolù (napø. IMV5, IMV6 -
viz obr. 1) je tøeba zajistit, aby do horního loiska nemohla vnik-
Zvlátní provedení a konstrukèní modifikace se mohou liit
nout voda.
v technických detailech. V pøípadì nejasností se v kadém pøí-
padì doporuèuje obrátit na výrobce s udáním typového ozna- Svorkovnicový kryt u svorkové desky se 6 pøipojovacími svorkami
èení a výrobního èísla, nebo vekeré úkony údrby pøene- se mùe otoèit o 4x 90o a u svorkové desky s 9 pøipojovacími
chat servisnímu støedisku SIEMENS. svorkami o 180o .
Klidný chod
Stabilní podklad nebo podmínky vestavby, pøesné vyrovnání mo-
POZNÁMKA: obr. 2 (náhradní díly) viz dodatek na stranì 30. torù a také dobøe vyváený pøenosový èlen, to jsou pøedpoklady
pro klidný chod bez vibrací. Napøíklad pod patky je tøeba podloit
1. Popis tenké plechy a tím zabránit namáhání motorù pnutím nebo v da-
ném pøípadì je nutné provést kompletní vyváení rotoru s pøeno-
1.1 Rozsah pouití sovým èlenem.
Motory je moné instalovat v praném nebo vlhkém prostøedí. Izo-
lace je v tropickém provedení. Pøi pøimìøeném skladování nebo 2.3 Vyváení, pøenosové èleny
odborné instalaci na otevøeném prostranství není tøeba za normál-
ních okolností pøijímat ádná zvlátní opatøení na ochranu motorù Nasazování a stahování pøenosových èlenù (spojky, øemenice, ozu-
proti povìtrnostním vlivùm. bené kolo) je tøeba provádìt s vhodným zaøízením (obr. 7).
Hladina akustického tlaku na mìøených plochách pøi 50 Hz Standardnì jsou rotory vyváeny s polovinou pera.
(DIN EN 21 680 èást 1) Zpùsob vyváení je vyznaèen na èelní stìnì konce høídele (na
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9, cca 60 a 76 dB(A) stranì pohonu):
(H = vyváení s polovinou pera)
1.2 Konstrukèní uspoøádání a provozní reim (F = vyváení s celým perem - zvlátní provedení)
Pøi montái pøenosových èlenù je tøeba dbát na pøísluný
Motory 1LG4, 1LG6 a 1LG9 mají v základním provedení vlastní druh vyváení!
chlazení ventilátorem. Motory 1LG. je moné dodávat bez vlastní-
ho ventilátoru jako motory pro pohon ventilátorù, který je nasazen Vyváení s polovinou pera
na konci høídele motoru, nebo s cizím chlazením (opce G17). Mo- U pøenosových èlenù s pomìrem délky náboje l k délce konce
tory 1PP4, 1PP6 a 1PP9 jsou motory s vlastním chlazením bez høídele IM < 0,8 a pøi poètu otáèek > 1500/min se mohou projevit
ventilátoru. poruchy klidného chodu (viz. obr. 8). V daném pøípadì je tøeba
provést vyváení, napø. odstranit èást pera TP, pøeènívajícího pøes
U motorù jsou patky nality pøímo na kostøe statoru, motory lze
obrys høídele.
dodávat s naroubovanými patkami (opce K11/viz obr. 2). Zmìna
upevnìní patek na kostøe motoru, napø. z dùvodù zmìny polohy Je tøeba dbát veobecných opatøení
svorkovnicové skøínì, je moná u opce K09, K10 a K11. K tomuto UPOZORNÌNÍ na ochranu pøed dotykem pøenoso-
úèelu potøebná vrtání a plochy jsou ji odpovídajícím zpùsobem vých èlenù. Je-li motor uvádìn do
opracovány. chodu bez pøenosového èlenu, pak je tøeba pero zajistit proti
vymrtìní.
U motorù s brzdou (napø. opce G26) je tøeba navíc vzít do úvahy
provozní návod brzdy!
Tyto pokyny platí jako doplòkové k provoznímu návodu pøísluné- 2.4 Pøipojení
ho typu motoru. Neplatí pro motory v provedení EEx e. Napìtí a frekvence sítì musí souhlasit s údaji na výkonnostním
títku. Odchylka ±5% u napìtí nebo frekvence (u 1ME6 ±3% od-
2. Provoz chylka frekvence) je pøípustná jetì bez sníení výkonu. Pøipojení
a uspoøádání propojek provádìt podle schéma zapojení, které se
nachází ve svorkovnicové skøíni. Ochranný vodiè pøipojit na svor-
Vekeré práce na zaøízení je moné ku
UPOZORNÌNÍ .
provádìt pouze bez napìtí.
U pøipojovacích svorek s U-tømeny (napø. podle DIN 46282) je
tøeba vodièe rozdìlit tak, aby na obou stranách tømenu byla
2.1 Transport, skladování stejná výka pøipojovaného vodièe. Tento zpùsob pøipojení
Pøi transportu je tøeba vyuívat vekerá závìsná oka na motoru. tedy vyaduje, aby jednotlivé vodièe byly zahnuty ve tvaru U
anebo pøipojeny pomocí kabelového oka (viz obr. 3.1). To
platí také pro pøipojení ochranného vodièe a vnìjí uzemòo-
Pro pøepravu strojových souprav vací vodiè (viz obr. 3.2) - zelenolutý.
UPOZORNÌNÍ (napø. soupravy s pøevodovkou, vý-
Utahovací momenty pro roubové spoje elektrických pøipojení -
vìvou apod.) je tøeba pouívat pouze
pøipojení svorkových desek (kromì svorkových lit) viz obr. 4.
k tomuto úèelu urèená závìsná oka, resp. èepy! Soustrojí se
nesmí zvedat zavìením pouze jednoho stroje! Je tøeba dbát
na dodrení nosnosti zvedacího zaøízení!

Siemens AG - 19 -
ÈESKY
2.5 Pøezkouení izolaèního odporu Tento výèet nemùe být úplný a proto jsou rovnì nezbytné
dalí kontroly.
Pøed prvním uvedením motoru do provozu, po delím skladování
nebo odstavení (cca 6 mìsícù), se musí zjistit izolaèní odpor vinu-
tí. 3. Údrba
Bìhem mìøení a bezprostøednì po
UPOZORNÌNÍ nìm je na svorkách èásteènì nebez- Bezpeènostní opatøení
peèné napìtí a proto se jich nesmíte Pøed zahájením práce na motoru
dotýkat. VAROVÁNÍ nebo zaøízení, zvlátì pak pøed ote-
Izolaèní odpor vøením krytù aktivních èástí, se
- Minimální izolaèní odpor u nového, vyèitìného nebo oprave- musí motor pøedpisovì vypnout. Mimo hlavních proudo-
ného vinutí vùèi kostøe èiní 10 MOhm. vých obvodù je tøeba pøitom dbát také na pøípadné vedlej-
- Nejdøíve je tøeba vypoèítat kritický izolaèní odpor R krit. Výpoèet í a pomocné proudové okruhy.
se provádí vynásobením jmenovitého napìtí U N, napø. AC Existuje 5 obvyklých bezpeènostních zásad ve smyslu
0,69 kV, s konstantou (0,5 MOhm/kV): napø. DIN VDE 0105:
R krit = 0,69 kV x 0,5 MOhm/kV = 0,345 MOhm - vypnout
Mìøení - zajistit proti opìtovnému zapnutí
Minimální izolaèní odpor vinutí se mìøí proti kostøe stejnosmìr- - zjistit, zda je zaøízení bez napìtí
ným napìtím 500 V. Pøitom teplota vinutí je 25o C ±15oC.
- zkontrolovat uzemnìní a propojení na krátko
Kritický izolaèní odpor je tøeba mìøit pøi provozní teplotì vinutí
- zakrýt nebo pøehradit sousední èásti pod napìtím
stejnosmìrným napìtím 500 V.
Výe uvedená opatøení se smí zruit teprve v pøípadì, kdy
Pøezkouení
jsou vekeré servisní úkony dokonèeny a motor je kom-
Jestlie u nového, vyèitìného nebo opraveného motoru, který
pletnì smontován.
byl delí dobu skladován nebo odstaven, je minimální izolaèní od-
por vinutí proti kostøe mení ne 10 MOhm, pak pøíèinou mùe být
vlhkost. Vinutí je tøeba nejdøíve vysuit. POZNÁMKA: Uzavøené otvory pro odtok kondenzované vody se
Po delí dobì provozu mùe minimální izolaèní odpor poklesnout musí obèas otevøít, aby se mohla vypustit nashromádìná kon-
na hodnotu kritického izolaèního odporu. Pokud namìøená hodno- denzovaná voda.
ta nepoklesla pod vypoètenou hodnotu kritického izolaèního od- Otvory pro odtok kondenzované vody jsou vdy v nejniím místì
poru, smí se motor dále provozovat. Jakmile poklesne pod kritic- motoru!
kou hodnotu, musí se motor okamitì vypnout.
Výmìna loisek, ivotnost maziva, druhy mazacích tukù
Je tøeba zjistit pøíèinu a v daném pøípadì vinutí nebo jeho èásti
nechat opravit, vyèistit nebo nechat vyschnout. ivotnost maziva èiní za normálních provozních podmínek, pøi vo-
dorovné instalaci motoru, teplotì chladiva do 40oC a poètu otáèek
motoru
2.6 Uvedení do provozu - 1500 ot/min cca. 40.000 provozních hodin
POZNÁMKA: V pøípadì silnì nerovnomìrného kroutícího momentu - 3000 ot/min cca. 20.000 provozních hodin
(napø. pohon pístového kompresoru) vynucený motorový proud
Nezávisle na provozních hodinách by se mazací tuk mìl z dùvodù
nemá sinusový tvar, pøièem jeho vyí harmonické mohou mít
stárnutí mìnit pøiblinì kadé 3 roky. Za tímto úèelem je tøeba
nepøípustný vliv na sí a také mùe zpùsobovat nepøípustnì vyso-
loiska demontovat, vymýt a namazat novým tukem. U provedení
ké elektromagnetické ruení.
s domazáváním je tøeba dbát údajù na títku mazání.
Pøi napájení mìnièem mohou vysokofrekvenèní proudy a napìtí
Za zvlátních provozních podmínek, napø. svislá instalace motoru,
zpùsobit ruení v pøívodních vodièích motoru, proto se doporuèuje
pøi èastìjím provozu s maximálním pøípustným poètem otáèek
pouívání odstínìných pøívodních vedení.
nMAX, pøi velké zátìi chvìním a rázy a pøi èasté reverzaci, se výe
Pøed uvedením do provozu je tøeba zkontrolovat, zda: uvedené poèty provozních hodin podstatnì sniují.
- jsou dodreny hodnoty minimálního izolaèního odporu
Ve standardním provedení mají motory radiální kulièková loiska
- rotorem lze volnì pootoèit øady 62 ... nebo jako opce K36 radiální kulièková loiska øady 63 ...
- motor je øádnì namontován a vyrovnán s jedním krycím kroukem (provedení ZC3).
- pøenosové èleny jsou správnì usazeny (napø. napnutí øemene u Krycí krouek je umístìn na stranì loisek, obrácené ke kostøe
øemenového pøevodu) a pøenosový èlen je vhodný pro dané pod- motoru (stator).
mínky pouití POZNÁMKA: Pøi výmìnì loisek je tøeba brát ohled na uspoøádá-
- vekeré elektrické spoje, upevòovací rouby a spojovací prvky ní krycího krouku a vùli loiska, ponìvad to se u zvlátních pro-
jsou pøedpisovì pøipojeny a dotaeny vedení mùe liit od provedení standardních!
- ochranný vodiè je øádnì pøipojen Mazací tuky u standardních strojù: (Fa. ESSO / UNIREX N3);
- pøípadné pøídavné zaøízení (brzda, tachogenerátor, cizí ventila- ivotnost maziv a lhùty pro domazávání platí pouze ve spojení s
ce) je funkèní tímto druhem maziva.
- jsou provedena opatøení proti dotyku pohyblivých èástí a dílù Náhradní tuky musí vyhovovat minimálnì normì DIN 51825-KL3N.
pod napìtím V tomto pøípadì je tøeba intervaly mazání u KT >25o C sníit.
- nejsou pøekroèeny maximální pøípustné otáèky nmax (viz výkon- Zvlátní tuky jsou uvedeny na mazacím títku.
nostní títek) Míchání rùzných druhù maziv je nepøípustné!
POZNÁMKA: Maximální pøípustné otáèky nmax jsou nejvyí krát- Motor demontovat v potøebném rozsahu. Valivá loiska stahovat
kodobì pøípustné provozní otáèky. Je tøeba vzít do úvahy, e se vhodným zaøízením (viz obr. 6). Z místa loiska odstranit neèisto-
pøitom zhoruje hluènost a vibrace motoru a také sniuje ivot- ty! Valivá loiska vyèistit, resp. vymìnit a znova namazat.
nost loisek. Volný prostor valivých loisek zcela naplnit mazacím tukem. Lo-
Po namontování motorù je tøeba iskové víko resp. loiskový tít zùstane bez tukové náplnì, aby
UPOZORNÌNÍ zkontrolovat dokonalou funkci brz- se tak zabránilo pøemazání.
dy (v pøípadì instalace)!

Siemens AG - 20 -
Loiska rovnomìrnì zahøát asi na 80-120o C a nasadit. Nepouí-
vat silné údery (napø. kladivem).
Pøípadnì opotøebené tìsnicí prvky (napø. tìsnìní høídele atd.) je
tøeba rovnì vymìnit. Jestlie jsou namontovány radiální høídelo-
vé tìsnicí krouky bez pruiny, pak se musí pouít také náhradní
díly bez pruiny.
Zaøízení pro domazávání
U motorù se zaøízením pro domazávání je tøeba dbát údajù na
títku mazání!
Utìsnìní spár
Pøi montái strojù s druhem ochrany IP 55 nebo vyím (viz vý-
konnostní títek) se musí èisté montání plochy mezi kostrou mo-
toru a loiskovým títem utìsnit vhodnou, nikoliv vytvrzovatelnou,
tìsnicí hmotou (napø. Hylomar, Curil).
Plastové ventilátory (BG180M ... 315L)
Plastové ventilátory mají dva nálitky, které jako axiální fixace za-
padnou do kruhové dráky na høídeli. Pøed stahováním ventilátoru
se musí oba nálitky vysunout (roubovákem) a v této poloze pøe-
chodnì podret, napø. pomocí vsunutých pøíloek. Ventilátory mají
v náboji dva otvory pro nasunutí stahovacího pøípravku, který se
na náboj pøipevní.
Otvory jsou pøi dodávce uzavøeny tenkou vrstvou z umìlé hmoty,
která se pak musí prorazit.
Pro stahování a také pro nasazování se musí zásadnì pouívat
vhodný pøípravek. Pøitom je tøeba bezpodmíneènì zabránit úde-
rùm kladiva, aby se nepokodila loiska.
Je tøeba dbát na správné zaskoèení západek do dráky na høídeli.

Siemens AG - 21 -
ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ
Âîîáùå 2.1 Òðàíñïîðò, õðàíåíèå â ñêëàäå

Íàäî ñëåäèòü çà äàííûìè Ïðè òðàíñïîðòå íàäî ïîëüçîâàòüñÿ âñåìè ñåðüãàìè íà
ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ è óêàçàíèÿìè âî âñåõ ïîñòàâëÿåìûõ äâèãàòåëå.
èíñòðóêöèÿõ ïî îáñëóæèâàíèþ Äëÿ òðàíñïîðòà ìàøèííûõ êîì-
è ïîäîáíûõ èíñòðóêöèÿõ. Ýòî íåîáõîäèìî, ÷òîáû ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ ïëåêòîâ (íàïð. êîìïëåêòà ñ êîðîáêîé
ïðåäîòâðàòèòü óãðîçó íåñ÷àñòíûõ ñëó÷àåâ è ïîâðåæäåíèÿ! ïåðåäà÷, âàêóóìíàñîñîì èòä.) íàäî
Äîïîëíèòåëüíàÿ èíôîðìàöèÿ ïî áåçîïàñíîñòè òðóäà ïðèìåíÿòü òîëüêî äëÿ ýòîé öåëè ïðåäíàçíà÷åííûå ñåðüãè
(æåëòàÿ) ïðèëîæåíà. Îíà ñîäåðæèò äîïîëíèòåëüíûå èëè ïàëüöû! Çàïðåùàåòñÿ ïîäíèìàòü àãðåãàòû ïîäâåñêîé
äàííûå, êàñàþùèåñÿ áåçîïàñíîñòè ýëåêòðè÷åñêèõ ìàøèí. ëèøü îäíîé ìàøèíû! Íàäî ñëåäèòü çà ñîáëþäàíèåì
Çíà÷èò, ýòà èíôîðìàöèÿ ïî áåçîïàñíîñòè ÿâëÿåòñÿ ãðóçîïîäúåìíîñòè ïîäúåìíîãî ìåõàíèçìà!
äîïîëíåíèåì äð óãèõ ïîñòàâëÿåìûõ èíñòðóêöèé ïî Ïîäøèïíèêè êà÷åíèÿ íàäî ñíîâà ñìàçàòü èëè çàìåíèòü ëèøü
îáñëóæèâàíèþ è ïîäîáíûõ èíñòðóêöèé. â ñëó÷àå, ÷òî âðåìÿ ñ ïîñòàâêè äî ââåäåíèÿ äâèãàòåëÿ
Äàëåå íàäî ïðèíèìàòü âî âíèìàíèå âñå äåéñòâóþùèå â ýêñïëóàòàöèþ ïðè óäîáíûõ óñëîâèÿõ (õðàíåíèå â ñóõèõ
íàöèîíàëüíûå, ìåñòíûå è äðóãèå ñïåöèôè÷åñêèå ïðîñòðàíñòâàõ áåç ïûëè è âèáðàöèé) áîëüøå òðåõ ëåò. Ïðè
ïîñòàíîâëåíèÿ è òðåáîâàíèÿ. íåóäîáíûõ óñëîâèÿõ ýòîò ñðîê ñóùåñòâåííûì îáðàçîì
ñîêðàùàåòñÿ. Â äàííîì ñëó÷àå íàäî ïðîâåðèòü ñîïðîòèâëåíèå
Òåõíè÷åñêèå äåòàëè ñïåöèàëüíûõ èñïîëíåíèé
èçîëÿöèè îáìîòêè, ñì. àáçàö 2.5.
è êîíñòðóêòèâíûõ ìîäèôèêàöèé ìîãóò îòëè÷àòüñÿ.
Â ñëó÷àå íåÿñíîñòåé âî âñÿêîì ñëó÷àå ðåêîìåíäóåòñÿ
îáðàòèòüñÿ ê ïðîèçâîäèòåëþ, ñ óêàçàíèåì íàçâàíèÿ 2.2 Óñòàíîâêà
ìîäåëè è çàâîäñêîãî íîìåðà, èëè äîâåðèòü âñå îïåðàöèè
Ïîñëå óñòàíîâêè íàäî íàâèí÷åííûå ñåðüãè ïîäâåðíóòü èëè
òåõíè÷åñêîãî îáñëóæèâàíèÿ ñåðâèñíîìó öåíòðó SIEMENS.
îòâèíòèòü!
Ó äâèãàòåëåé ñ íîñêîì âàëà ââåðõ èëè âíèç (íàïð. IMV5, IMV6
ÏÐÈÌÅ×ÀÍÈÅ: ðèñ. 2 (çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè) ñìîòðè äîïîëíåíèå
ñìîòðè ðèñ. 1) íàäî îáåñïå÷èòü, ÷òîáû â âåðõíèé ïîäøèïíèê
íà ñòðàíèöå 30.
íå ìîãëà ïðîíèêíóòü âîäà.
Êðûøêó êëåììíîé êîðîáêè äëÿ çàæèìíîé ïëàòû ñ 6 ñîåäè-
1. Îïèñàíèå î
íèòåëüíûìè çàæèìàìè ìîæíî ïîâåðíóòü íà 4 õ 90 è äëÿ
î
çàæèìíîé ïëàòû ñ 9 ñîåäèíèòåëüíûìè çàæèìàìè íà 180 .
1.1 Îáëàñòü ïðèìåíåíèÿ Ñïîêîéíûé õîä
Äâèãàòåëè ìîæíî óñòàíîâèòü â ïûëüíîé èëè âëàæíîé ñðåäå. Ñòàáèëüíîå îñíîâàíèå èëè óñëîâèÿ âñòðàèâàíèÿ, òî÷íàÿ
Èçîëÿöèÿ èñïîëíåíà äëÿ òðîïè÷åñêèõ óñëîâèé. Â ñëó÷àå áàëàíñèðîâêà äâèãàòåëåé è òàêæå õîðîøî êîìïåíñèðîâàííûé
ñîîòâåòñòâóþùåãî õðàíåíèÿ â ñêëàäå èëè ïðîôåññèîíàëüíîé ýëåìåíò ïåðåäà÷è ýòî ïðåñïîñûëêè ñïîêîéíîãî õîäà áåç
óñò àíîâêè íà îòêðûòîé ïë îùàäêå ïðè íîðìàëüíûõ âèáðàöèé. Íàïðèìåð ïîä ïÿòû íàäî ïîëîæèòü æåñòü è òàêèì
îáñòîÿòåëüñòâàõ íå íàäî ïðèíèìàòü íèêàêèå îñîáûå ìåðû äëÿ îáðàçîì ïðåäîòâðàòèòü íàïðÿæåíèå äâèãàòåëåé èëè â äàííîì
çàùèòû äâèãàòåëåé îò àòìîñôåðíûõ âëèÿíèé. ñëó÷àå íàäî ïðîâåñòè êîìïëåêòíóþ áàëàíñèðîâêó ðîòîðà
ñ ýëåìåíòîì ïåðåäà÷è.
Óðîâåíü àêóñòè÷åñêîãî äàâëåíèÿ íà èçìåðÿåìûõ ïëîùàäÿõ
ïðè 50 ãö
2.3 Áàëàíñèðîâêà, ýëåìåíòû ïåðåäà÷è
(DIN EN 21 680 ÷àñòü 1)
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LG9, îêîëî 60 70 äá(à) Óñòàíîâêó è ñíÿòèå ýëåìåíòîâ ïåðåäà÷è (ìóôòû, ðåìåííîãî
øêèâà, øåñòåðíè) íàäî ïðîâîäèòü ñ ïîìîùüþ óäîáíîãî
óñòðîéñòâà (ðèñ. 7).
1.2 Êîíñòðóêòèâíîå ðàñïîëîæåíèå è ðåæèì
Ñòàíäàðòíûì îáðàçîì ðîòîðû áàëàíñèðîâàíû ñ ïîëî-
ýêñïëóàòàöèè âèíîé øïîíêè.
Äâèãàòåëè 1LG4, 1LG6 è 1LG9 â îñíîâíîì èñïîëíåíèè Ñïîñîá áàëàíñèðîâêè îáîçíà÷åí íà ïåðåäíåé ñòåíå íîñêà âàëà
ñíàáæåíû ñ îáñòâåííûì îõëàæäåíèåì âåíòèëÿòîðîì. (íà ñòîðîíå ïðèâîäà);
Äâèãàòåëè 1LG ìîæíî ïîñòàâëÿòü áåç ñîáñòâåííîãî âåíòèëÿòðà (H = áàëàíñèðîâêà ñ ïîëîâèíîé øïîíêè)
â ê à÷åñòâå äâèãàòåëåé äëÿ ïðèâîäà âåíòèëÿòîðîâ,
óñòàíîâëåííîãî â íîñêå âàëà äâèãàòåëÿ, èëè ñ âíåøíèì (F = áàëàíñèðîâêà ñ öåëîé øïîíêîé îñîáîå èñïîëíåíèå)
îõëàæäåíèåì (îïöèîí G17). Äâèãàòåëè 1PP4, 1PP6 è 1PP9 Â òå÷åíèå ìîíòàæà ýëåìåíòîâ ïåðåäà÷è íàäî ñëåäèòü çà
äâèãàòåëè ñ ñîáñòâåííûì îõëàæäåíèåì áåç âåíòèëÿòîðà. ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèì âèäîì áàëàíñèðîâêè!
Ïÿòû äâèãàòåëåé ïðèáûëè ïðÿìî íà êàðêàñå ñòàòîðà. Áàëàíñèðîâêà ñ ïîëîâèíîé øïîíêè
Äâèãàòåëè ìîæíî ïîñòàâëÿòü ñ íàâèí÷åííûìè ïÿòàìè (îïöèîí Ó ýëåìåíòîâ ïåðåäà÷è ñ îòíîøåíèåì äëèíû ñòóïèöû l ê äëèíå
Ê11/ñìîòðè ðèñ. 2). Èçìåíåíèå ïðèêðåïëåíèÿ ïÿò ê êàðêàñó íîñêà âàëà l < 0,8 è ïðè ÷èñëå îáîðîòîâ > 1500/ìèí ìîãóò
M
äâèãàòåëÿ, íàïð. èççà èçìåíåíèÿ ïîëîæåíèÿ êëåììíîé ïðîÿâèòüñÿ íàðóøåíèÿ ñïîêîéíîãî õîäà (ñìîòðè ðèñ. 8).
êîðîáêè, âîçìîæíî ó îïöèîíà Ê09, Ê10 è Ê11. Íóæíûå äëÿ ýòîãî Â äàííîì ñëó÷àå íàäî ïðîâåñòè áàëàíñèðîâêó, íàïð. óñòðàíèòü
îòâåðñòèÿ è ïëîùàäè óæå íàäëåæàùèì îáðàçîì îáðàáîòàíû. ÷àñòü øïîíêè Ò , âûñòóïàþùóþ ÷åðåç ãàáàðèò âàëà.
Ð
Ó äâèãàòåëåé ñ òîðìîçîì (íàïð. îïöèîí G26) íàäî òàêæå Íàäî ñîáëþäàòü âñåîáùèå
ïðèíèìàòü âî âíèìàíèå èíñòðóêöèþ ïî îáñëóæèâàíèþ òîðìîçà! ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ ìåðîïðèÿòèÿ ïî çàùèòå îò êîíòàêòà
Íàñòîÿùèå óêàçàíèÿ äåéñòâèòåëüíû â êà÷åñòâå äîïîëíåíèé ýëåìåíòîâ ïåðåäà÷è. Â ñëó÷àå, ÷òî
ê èíñòðóêöèè ïî îáñëó æèâàíèþ ñîîòâåñòâóþùåãî òèïà äâèãàòåëü ïðèâîäèòñÿ â äâèæåíèå áåç ýëåìåíòà ïåðåäà÷è,
äâèãàòåëÿ. Îíè íå èìåþò ñèëó äëÿ äâèãàòåëåé â èñïîëíåíèè íàäî çàêðåïèòü øïîíêó îò ïîäñêîêà.
ÅÅõ å.
2.4. Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå
2. Ýêñïëóàòàöèÿ Íàïðÿæåíèå è ÷àñòîòà ñåòè äîëæíû îòâå÷àòü äàííûì íà
Âñå ðàáîòû íà óñòðîéñòâå äîëæíû òàáëè÷êå ñ ïàñïîðòíûìè äàííûìè äâèãàòåëÿ. Îòêëîíåíèå ±5%
ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ ïðîâîäèòüñÿ âñåãäà áåç íàïðÿæåíèÿ. íàïðÿæåíèÿ èëè ÷àñòîòû (äëÿ 1ME6 ±3% îòêëîíåíèå ÷àñòîòû)
äîïóñêàåòñÿ åùå áåç ïîíèæåíèÿ ìîùíîñòè. Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå

Siemens AG - 22 -
ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ
è ðàñïîëîæåíèå ñîåäèíèòåëåé íàäî ïðîâîäèòü ñîãëàñíî ñõåìå Ïåðåä ââåäåíèåì â ýêñïëóàòàöèþ íàäî ïðîâåðèòü, åñëè:
âêëþ÷åíèÿ, êîòîðàÿ íàõîäèòñÿ â êëåììíîé êîðîáêå. Çàùèòíûé ñîáëþ äåíû çíà÷åíèÿ ìèíèìàëüíîãî ñ îïðîòèâëåíèÿ
ïðîâîä íàäî ïðèñîåäèíèòü ê çàæèìó . èçîëÿöèè
Äëÿ ïðèñîåäèíèòåëüíûõ çàæèìîâ ñ õîìóòàìè â ôîðìå ðîòîðîì ìîæíî ñâîáîäíî ïîâîðà÷èâàòü
U (íàïð. ñîãëàñíî DIN 46282) íàäî ðàñïðåäåëèòü ïðîâîäû äâèãàòåëü íàäëåæàùèì îáðàçîì ïðèêðåïëåí è áàëàíñèðîâàí
òàêèì îáðàçîì, ÷òîáû íà îáåèõ ñòîðîíàõ õîìóòà áûëà ýëåìåíòû ïåðåäà÷è ïðàâèëüíî óñòàíîâëåíû (íàïð. íàòÿæêà
îäèíàêîâàÿ âûñîòà ïðèñîåäèíÿåìîãî ïðîâîäà. Çíà÷èò, ýòîò ðåìíÿ ó ðåìåííîé ïåðåäà÷è) è åñëè ýëåìåíò ïåðåäà÷è
ñïîñîá ïðèñîåäèíåíèÿ òðåáóåò, ÷òîáû îòäåëüíûå ïðîâîäû óäîáíûé äëÿ äàííûõ óñëîâèé ïðèìåíåíèÿ
áûëè îáîãíóòû â ôîðìå U èëè ïðèñîåäèíåíû ñ ïîìîùüþ
êàáåëüíîãî íàêîíå÷íèêà (ñìîòðè ðèñ. 3.1). Òî æå ñàìîå âñå ýëåêòðè÷åñêèå ñîåäèíåíèÿ, ñîåäèíèòåëüíûå âèíòû
äåéñòâóåò äëÿ ïðèñîåäèíåíèÿ çàùèòíîãî ïðîâîäà è ýëåìåíòû íàäëåæàùèì îáðàçîì ïðèñîåäèíåíû è çàòÿíóòû
è âíåøíåãî ïðîâîäà çàçåìëåíèÿ (ñìîòðè ðèñ. 3.2) çàùèòíûé ïðîâîä íàäëåæàùèì îáðàçîì ïðèñîåäèíåí
çåëåíîæåëòûé. ýâåíò óàëüíîå äîïîëíèòåëüíîå óñòðîéñòâî (òîðìîç,
Çàòÿæíûå ìîìåíòû äëÿ âèíòîâûõ ñîåäèíåíèé ýëåêòðè÷åñêèõ òàõîãåíåðàòîð, âíåøíÿÿ âåíòèëÿöèÿ) ðàáîòàåò
ïðèñîåäèíåíèé ïðèñîåäèíåíèå çàæèìíûõ ïëàò (êðîìå ïðèíÿòû ìåðû ïðîòèâ êîíòàêòà äâèæóùèõñÿ ÷àñòåé è äåòàëåé
çàæèìíûõ ïëàíîê) ñìîòðè ðèñ. 4. ïîä íàïðÿæåíèåì
íå ïðåâûøåíû ìàêñèìàëüíûå äîïóñòèìûå îáîðîòû nmax
2.5. Èñïûòàíèå ñîïðîòèâëåíèÿ èçîëÿöèè (ñìîòðè òàáëè÷êó ìîùíîñòåé)
Äî ïåðâîãî ââîäà äâèã àòåëÿ â ýê ñïëóàòàöèþ, ïîñëå ÏÐÈÌÅ×ÀÍÈÅ: Ìàêñèìàëüíûå äîïóñòèìûå îáîðîòû nmax
ïðîäîëæèòåëüíîãî õðàíåíèÿ â ñêëàäå èëè îñòàíîâà (îêîëî 6 ñàìûå âûñîêèå êðàòêîñðî÷íî äîïóñòèìûå ðàáî÷èå îáîðîòû.
ìåñÿöåâ) íàäî óñòàíîâèòü ñîïðîòèâëåíèå èçîëÿöèè îáìîòêè. Íàäî ïðèíèìàòü âî âíèìàíèå, ÷òî ïðèòîì óõóäøàåòñÿ
øóìíûé õîä è âèáðàöèè äâèãàòåëÿ è òàêæå ïîíèæàåòñÿ ñðîê
Â òå÷åíèå èçìåðåíèÿ è íåïîñðåä-
ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ ñòâåííî ïîñëå íåãî íà çàæèìàõ
ñëóæáû ïîäøèïíèêîâ.
îñòàåòñÿ ÷àñòè÷íî îïàñíîå íàïðÿ- Ïîñëå ïðèêðåïëåíèÿ äâèãàòåëåé
æåíèå, è ïîýòîìó çàïðåùàåòñÿ êàñàòüñÿ èõ. ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ íàäî ïðîâåðèòü ñîâåðøåííóþ ðàáîòó
òîðìîçà (â ñëó÷àå óñòàíîâêè)!
Ñîïðîòèâëåíèå èçîëÿöèè
- Ìèíèìàëüíîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå èçîëÿöèè êîðïóñó ó íîâîé, Ýòîò ïåðå÷åíü íå ìîæåò áûòü ïîëíûì, è ïîýòîìó
î÷èùåííîé èëè èñïðàâëåííîé îáìîòêè ñîñòàâëÿåò 10 Ìîì. íåîáõîäèìû åùå äðóãèå êîíòðîëè.
Ïðåæäå âñåãî íàäî âû÷èñëèòü êðèòè÷åñêîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå
èçîëÿöèè Rkrit . Âû÷èñëåíèå ïðîâ îäèòñÿ óìíîæåíèåì 3. Óõîä
íîìèíàëüíîãî íàïðÿæåíèÿ UN, íàïð. AC 0,69 êâ, ñ êîíñòàíòîé
(0,5 Ìîì/êâ). Ìåðû áåçîïàñíîñòè
Rêðèò = 0,69 êâ õ 0,5 Ìîì/êâ = 0,345 Ìîì
Ïðå æäå ÷åì íà÷àòü ðàáîòó íà
Èçìåðåíèå ÂÍÈÌÀÍÈÅ
äâèãàòåëþ èëè óñòðîéñòâå,
Ìèíèìàëüíîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå èçîëÿöèè îáìîòêè êîðïóñó îñîáåííî ïðåæäå ÷åì îòêðûòü
èçìåðÿåòñÿ ïîñòîÿííûì íàïðÿæåíèåì 500 â. Ïðèòîì
î î êîæóõè àêòèâíûõ ÷àñòåé, íàäî äâèãàòåëü âûêëþ÷èòü
òåìïåðàòóðà îáìîòêè 25 Ñ ± 15 Ñ. ïðåäïèñàííûì îáðàçîì. Êðîìå ãëàâíûõ öåïåé òîêà íàäî
Êðèòè÷åñêîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå èçîëÿöèè íàäî èçìåðÿòü ïðè ïðèòîì ñëåäèòü òàêæå çà âîçìîæíûìè äîïîëíèòåëü-
ðàáî÷åé òåìïåðàòóðå îáìîòêè ïîñòîÿííûì íàïðÿæåíèåì 500 â. íûìè è âñïîìîãàòåëüíûìè öåïÿìè òîêà.
Èñïûòàíèå Ñóùåñòâóåò 5 îáûêíîâåííûõ ïðèíöèïîâ áåçîïàñíîñòè
Â ñëó÷àå, ÷òî ó íîâîãî, î÷èùåííîãî èëè îòðåìîíòèðîâàííîãî â ñìûñëå íàïð. DIN VDE 0105:
äâèãàòåëÿ, êîòîðûé íàõîäèëñÿ ïðîäîëæèòåëüíîå âðåìÿ âûêëþ÷èòü
â ñêëàäå èëè â îñòàíîâå, ìèíèìàëüíîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå
èçîëÿöèè îáìîòêè êîðïóñó ìåíüøå 10 Ìîì, ïîòîì ïðè÷èíîé îáåñïå÷èòü ïðîòèâ ïîâòîðíîãî âêëþ÷åíèÿ
ìîæåò áûòü âëàæíîñòü. Îáìîòêó íàäî ïðåæäå âñåãî âûñóøèòü. ïðîâåðèòü, åñëè óñòðîéñòâî áåç íàïðÿæåíèÿ
Ïîñëå ïðîäîëæèòåëüíîãî âðåìåíè ýêñïëóàòàöèè ìîæåò ïðîâåðèòü çàçåìëåíèå è çàìûêàíèå íàêîðîòêî
ìèíèìàëüíîå ñîïðîòèâëåíèå èçîëÿöèè ïîíèçèòüñÿ äî çíà÷åíèÿ çàêðûòü èëè ïåðåãîðîäèòü ñîñåäíèå ÷àñòè ïîä íàïðÿ-
êðèòè÷åñêîãî ñîïðîòèâëåíèÿ èçîëÿöèè. Åñëè èçìåðåííîå æåíèåì
çíà÷åíèå íå ïîíèçèëîñü ïîä âû÷èñëåííîå çíà÷åíèå
Âûøåïðèâåäåííûå ìåðû ìîæíî îòìåíèòü òîëüêî
êðèòè÷åñêîãî ñîïðîòèâëåíèÿ èçîëÿöèè, äâèãàòåëü ìîæíî
â ñëó÷àå, êîãäà âñå ñåðâèñíûå îïåðàöèè îêîí÷åíû
îñòàâèòü â ýêñïëóàòàöèè. Êàê òîëüêî çíà÷åíèå ïîíèçèòñÿ íèæå
è äâèãàòåëü ïîëíîñòüþ ñìîíòèðîâàí.
êðèòè÷åñêîãî çíà÷åíèÿ, íàäî äâèãàòåëü íåìåäëåííî îòêëþ÷èòü.
Íàäî îïðåäåëèòü ïðè÷èíó è â äàííîì ñëó÷àå îáìîòêó èëè åå
÷àñòü îòðåìîíòèðîâàòü, î÷èñòèòü èëè ïðîñóøèòü. ÏÐÈÌÅ×ÀÍÈÅ: Çàêðûòûå îòâåðñòèÿ äëÿ ñòîê à
êîíäåíñèðîâàííîé âîäû íàäî âðåìÿ îò âðåìåíè îòêðûòü, ÷òîáû
âîçìîæíî áûëî âûïóñòèòü íàêîïëåííóþ êîíäåíñèðîâàííóþ
2.6 Ââåäåíèå â ýêñïëóàòàöèþ âîäó.
ÏÐÈÌÅ×ÀÍÈÅ: Â ñëó÷àå ñèëüíî íåðàâíîìåðíîãî êðóòÿùåãî Îòâåðñòèÿ äëÿ ñòîêà êîíäåíñèðîâàííîé âîäû íàõîäÿòñÿ âñåãäà
ìîìåíòà (íàïð. ïðèâîä ïîðøíåâîãî êîìïðåññ îðà) â ñàìîì íèçêîì ìåñòå äâèãàòåëÿ!
âûíóæäåííûé òîê äâèãàòåëÿ íå èìååò ñèíóñíóþ ôîðìó, ïðè÷åì
Îáìåí ïîäøèïíèêîâ, ñðîê ñëóæáû ñìàçêè, âèäû ñìàçêè
åãî âûñøèå ãàðìîíèêè ìîãóò íåáëàãîïðèÿòíî ïîâëèÿòü íà ñåòü
è ìîãóò òàêæå âûçâàòü íåäîïóñòèìîå âûñîêèå ýëåêòðî- Ñðîê ñëóæáû ñìàçêè ïðè íîðìàëüíûõ óñëîâèé ýêñïëóàòàöèè,
ìàãíèòíûå ïîìåõè. ïðè ãîðèçîíòàëüíîé óñòàíîâêå äâèãàòåëÿ, òåìïåðàòóðå
î
îõëàæäàþùåãî ñðåäñòâà äî 40 Ñ è ÷èñëå îáîðîòîâ äâèãàòåëÿ
Â ñëó÷àå ïèòàíèÿ ïðåîáðàçîâàòåëåì ìîãóò âûñîêî÷àñòîòíûå
òîêè è íàïðÿæåíèÿ âûçâàòü ïîìåõè â ïîäâîäíûõ ïðîâîäàõ 1500 îá/ìèí îêîëî 40.000 ÷àñîâ ýêñïëóàòàöèè
äâèãàòåëÿ, ïîýòîìó ðåêîìåíäóåòñÿ ïðèìåíÿòü ýêðàíèðîâàííóþ 3000 îá/ìèí îêîëî 20.000 ÷àñîâ ýêñïëóàòàöèè
ïîäâîäíóþ ëèíèþ. Íåçàâèñèìî îò ÷àñîâ ýêñïëóàòàöèè ñìàçêó íàäî èççà åå
ñòàðåíèÿ ìåíÿòü ïðèáëèçèòåëüíî âñåãäà ïîñëå òðåõ ëåò. Äëÿ

Siemens AG - 23 -
ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ
ýòîé öåëè íàäî ïîäøèïíèêè ðàçîáðàòü, âûìûòü è ñíîâà Óñòðîéñòâî äëÿ äîïîëíèòåëüíîé ñìàçêè
ñìàçàòü. Â ñëó÷àå èñïîëíåíèÿ ñ äîïîëíèòåëüíîé ñìàçêîé íàäî Ó äâèãàòåëåé ñ óñòðîéñòâîì äëÿ äîïîëíèòåëüíîé ñìàçêè íàäî
ñîáëþäàòü äàííûå íà òàáëè÷êå ñìàçêè. ñëåäèòü çà äàííûìè íà òàáëè÷êå ñìàçêè!
Ïðè îñîáûõ óñëîâèÿõ ýêñïëóàòàöèè, íàïð. âåðòèêàëüíîé Óïëîòíåíèå çàçîðîâ
óñò àíîâêå äâèãàòåëÿ, ïðè áîëåå ÷àñòîé ýêñïëóàòàöèè Ïðè ñáîðêå ìàøèí ñ âèäîì çàùèòû ÈÏ 55 èëè áîëüøå (ñìîòðè
ñ ìàêñèìàëüíûì äîïóñòèìûì ÷èñëîì îáîðîòîâ n , ïðè òàáëè÷êó ìîùíîñòåé) ÷èñòûå ìîíòàæíûå ïëîùàäè ìåæäó
áîëüøîé íàãðóçêå âèáðàöèåé è óäàðàìè è ïðè max ÷àñòîì êàðêàñîì äâèãàòåëÿ è ïîäøèïíèêîâûì ùèòîì íàäî óïëîòíèòü
ðåâåðñèðîâàíèè âûøåïðèâåäåííûå ê îëè÷åñòâà ÷àñîâ óäîáíîé, íåîòâåðæäàþùåé óïë îòíÿþùåé ìàññîé (íàïð.
ýêñïëóàòàöèè çíà÷èòåëüíî ïîíèæàþòñÿ. Hylomar, Curil).
Ó äâèãàòåëåé â ñòàíäàðòíîì èñïîëíåíèè ðàäèàëüíûå Ïëàñòîâûå âåíòèëÿòîðû (BG180M 315L)
øàðèêîâûå ïîäøèïíèêè ñåðèè 62 èëè â êà÷åñòâå îïöèîíà Ó ïëàñòîâûõ âåíòèëÿòîðîâ äâå ïðèáûëè, êîòîðûå â êà÷åñòâå
Ê36 ðàäèàëüíûå øàðèêîâûå ïîäøèïíèêè ñåðèè 63 ñ îäíèì àêñèàëüíîé ôèêñàöèè óëîæàòñÿ â êðóãëûé ïàç íà âàëå. Ïðåæäå
çàùèòíûì äèñêîì (èñïîëíåíèå ZC3). ÷åì ñòÿãèâàòü âåíòèëÿòîð, íàäî îáå ïðèáûëè âûñóíóòü
Çàùèòíûé äèñê íàõîäèòñÿ íà ñòîðîíå ïîäøèïíèêîâ, ïîâåðíóòîé (îòâåðòêîé) è â ýòîì ïîëîæåíèè âðåìåííî ïîääåðæàòü, íàïð. ñ
ê êàðêàñó äâèãàòåëÿ (ñòàòîð). ïîìîùüþ âñóíóòûõ íàêëàäîê. Âî âòóëêå âåíòèëÿòîðà äâå
îòâåðñòèÿ äëÿ íàäâèãà ñòÿãèâàþùåãî ïðèñïîñîáëåíèÿ, êîòîðîå
ÏÐÈÌÅ×ÀÍÈÅ: Ïðè çàìåíå ïîäøèïíèêîâ íàäî ïðèíèìàòü âî ïðèêðåïèòñÿ íà âòóëêó.
âíèìàíèå ðàñïîëîæåíèå çàùèòíîãî äèñêà è çàçîð ïîäøèïíèêà,
ïîòîìó ÷òî ó îñîáûõ èñïîëíåíèé ýòî ìîæåò îòëè÷àòüñÿ îò Ïðè ïîñòàâêå îòâåðñòèÿ çàêðûòû òîíêèì ñëîåì ïëàñòìàññû,
ñòàíäàðòíûõ èñïîëíåíèé! êîòîðûé íàäî ïðîáèòü.
Ñìàçêè ó ñòàíäàðòíûõ ìàøèí: (à. ESSO / UNIREX N3); ñðîê Äëÿ ñòàãèâàíèÿ è òàêæå äëÿ óñòàíîâêè íàäî âñåãäà ïðèìåíÿòü
ñëóæáû ñìàçîê è ñðîêè äëÿ äîïîëíèòåëüíîé ñìàçêè óäîáíîå ïðèñïîñîáëåíèå. Ïðèòîì íàäî áåçóñëîâíî ïðåäîò-
äåéñòâèòåëüíû òîëüêî äëÿ ýòîãî âèäà ñìàçêè. Çàïàñíûå ñìàçêè âðàòèòü óäàòû ìîëîòîì, ÷òîáû íå ïîâðåäèòü ïîäøèïíèêè.
äîëæíû óäîâëåòâîðÿòü ìèíèìàëüíî ñòàíäàðò DIN 51825KL3N. Íàäî ñëåäèòü çà òåì, ÷òîáû çàùåëêè ïðàâèëüíî óëîæèëèñü
î
Â ýòîì ñëó÷àå íàäî èíòåðâàëû ñìàçêè äëÿ ÊÒ >25 Ñ ïîíèçèòü. â ïàç íà âàëå.
Ñïåöèàëüíûå ñìàçêè ïðèâåäåíû íà òàáëè÷êå ñìàçêè.
Ñìåøèâàíèå ðàçíûõ âèäî ñìàçîê íå äîïóñêàåòñÿ!
Äâèãàòåëü ðàçîáðàòü â íóæíîì îáúåìå. Ïîäøèïíèêè êà÷åíèÿ
ñòÿãèâàòü óäîáíûì óñòðîéñòâîì (ñìîòðè ðèñ. 6). Èç ìåñòà
ïîäøèïíèêà óñòðàíèòü ãðÿçè! Ïîäøèïíèêè êà÷åíèÿ î÷èñòèòü,
ýâåíò. çàìåíèòü è ñíîâà ñìàçàòü.
Ñâîáîäíîå ïðîñòðàíñòâî ïîäøèïíèêîâ êà÷åíèÿ ïîëíîñòüþ
çàïîëíèòü ñìàçêîé. Êîæóõ ïîäøèïíèêà, èëè ïîäøèïíèêîâûé
ùèò îñòàþòñÿ áåç ñìàçêè, ÷òîáû ïðåäîòâðàòèòü èçëèøíþþ
ñìàçêó.
Ïîäøèïíèêè ðàâíîìåðíî îáîãðåòü ïðèáëèçèòåëüíî äî 80
î
120 Ñ è óñòàíîâèòü. Íå ïðèìåíÿòü ñèëüíûå óäàðû (íàïð.
ìîëîòîì).
Ýâåíòóàëüíûå èçíîøåííûå óïëîòíÿþùèå ýëåìåíòû (íàïð.
óïëîòíåíèå âàëà èòä.) íàäî òàêæå çàìåíèòü. Â ñëó÷àå, ÷òî
âìîíòèðîâàíû ðàäèàëüíûå óïëîòíèòåëüíûå êîëüöà âàëîâ áåç
øïîíêè, íàäî ïðèìåíèòü çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè òàêæå áåç øïîíêè.

Siemens AG - 24 -
DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAÒOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA / ÈESKY / ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ
BG 180M . . . 250M
1LG4
1LG6
Fig. 2 +

Siemens AG - 25 -
BG 280S . . . 315L
1LG4
1LG6
BG 280S - 315L
Fig. 3 +

Siemens AG - 26 -
gk 330 gt 320
Normteile sind nach Abmessung, Werkstoff und Oberfläche commerce daprès leurs dimensions, le matériau et létat Normerade detaljer kan erhållas i öppna handeln, och skall
im freien Handel zu beziehen. de surface. specificeras beträffande storlek, material och ytbehandling.
Standard commercially available parts are to be purchased Las piezas estándar se comprarán en comercios del ramo Normované díly lze podle rozmìrù, materiálu a povrchu
in accordance with the specified dimensions, material and según las dimensiones, material y superficie especificados. zakoupit volnì v obchodech.
surface finish. Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato secondo le Ñòàíäàðòíûå äåòàëè ìîæíî ïîêóïèòü â ìàãàçèíàõ
Les pièces normalisées peuvent être obtenues dans le dimensioni, il materiale e la finitura della superficie. ñîãëàñíî ðàçìåðàì, ìàòåðèàëó è ïîâåðõíîñòè.
4.38 5.78
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.21 5.32 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.25 5.53 DIN 936
ISO 4035
3.02 DIN 471
3.03 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.66 EN 50262
5.79 5.67
5.90
5.92
5.98
6.02 DIN 472 5.31
DIN 7985 DIN 625
ISO 7048 1.60 Lagertyp:
6.10 Type of bearing:
Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
4.04 DIN 580 4.40 DIN 125 Lagertyp:
5.36 Typ loiska:
Òèï ïîäøèïíèêà:
Fig. 2a

Siemens AG - 27 -
gk 430 gt 420
surface finish.
Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato secondo le Ñòàíäàðòíûå äåòàëè ìîæíî ïîêóïèòü â ìàãàçèíàõ
4.38 5.78
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.21 5.32 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.25
5.53 DIN 936
ISO 4035
3.02 DIN 471
3.03 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.66 EN 50262
5.79 5.67
5.90
5.92
5.98
6.02 DIN 472 5.31
DIN 7985 DIN 625
Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
5.36 Typ loiska:
Fig. 2b

Siemens AG - 28 -
gk 431 gt 421
4.38 5.78
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.21 5.32 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.25 5.53 DIN 936
ISO 4035
3.02 DIN 471
3.03 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.66 EN 50262
5.79 5.67
5.90
5.92
5.98
6.02 DIN 472 5.31
DIN 7985 DIN 625
Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
5.36 Typ loiska:
Fig. 2c

Siemens AG - 29 -
gt 520 gt 540
- for cable arrangements without lugs only terminal board

(5.10) from gt 540 possible
- für Kabelschuhlosen Anschluß! nur Klemmenbrett (5.10)
aus gt 540 zulässig
surface finish.
Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato secondo le Ñòàíäàðòíûå äåòàëè ìîæíî ïîêóïèòü â ìàãàçèíàõ
4.38 5.78
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.21 5.32 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.25
5.53 DIN 936
ISO 4035
3.02 DIN 471
3.03 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.66 EN 50262
5.79 5.67
5.90
5.92
5.98
6.02 DIN 472 5.31
DIN 625
DIN 7985 1.60 Lagertyp:
ISO 7048 6.10 Type of bearing:
Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
5.36 Typ loiska:
Fig. 2d

Siemens AG - 30 -
gt 620 gt 640
- for cable arrangements without lugs only terminal board

(5.10) from gt 640 possible
- für Kabelschuhlosen Anschluß! nur Klemmenbrett (5.10)
aus gt 640 zulässig
4.38 5.78
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.21 5.32 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.25 5.53 DIN 936
ISO 4035
3.02 DIN 471
1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.66 EN 50262
5.79 5.67
5.90
5.92
5.98
6.02 DIN 472 5.31
DIN 7985 DIN 625
Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
5.36 Typ loiska:
Fig. 2c

Siemens AG - 31 -
Anschließbare Querschnitt je nach Klemmengröße (ggf. reduziert durch Größe der Leitungseinführungen)
Conductor cross-sections connectable to the various terminals (may be reduced by size of cable entries)
Sections raccordables suivant la taille de la borne (réduction éventuelle par la taille des entrées de câbles)
Sección conectable segùn tamaño del borne (en caso dado, más pequeña debido al tamaño de las entradas de linea)
Diamentri dei collegamenti a sec. delle misure dei morsetti (eventualmente sono ridotte le dimensioni delle aperture per i conduttori)
Anslutningsbara ledarareor för olika klämstorlekar (ev. reducerat med hänsyn till genomföringens storlek)
Pøipojovací prùøez podle velikosti svorek (v daném pøípadì omezený velikostí prùchodek vedení).
Ñîåäèíèòåëüíîå ñå÷åíèå ñîãëàñíî ðàçìåðó çàæèìîâ (â äàííîì ñëó÷àå îãðàíè÷åííîå ðàçìåðîâ ïðîõîäíûõ èçîëÿòîðîâ ëèíèè).
... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2 ... 25 mm2
DIN 46 234
Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabel- Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Anschluß von zwei etwa gleich Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabel- Bei Anschulß mit DIN- Kabel-
schuh ist dieser nach unten ab- mit Klemmbügel. dicken Leitern mit Klemmbügel. schuh unter äußerem Erdungs- schuh.
zuwinkeln! winkel.
If connections are made with DIN Connecting a single conductor Connecting two conductors of al- If connectionsare made with DIN If connections are made with DIN
cable lugs, band the cable lugs with a terminal clip. most equal thidcness with a ter- cable lugs, under the outer earth- cable lugs.
downwards. minal clip. ing engle.
Lorsque le raccordement est réa- Raccordement dun seul conduc- Deux conducteurs de diamètre à Lorsque le raccordement est réa- Lorsque le raccordement est réa-
lisé par cosses DIN, cellesci doi- teur à une Borne à étrier. peu pré équivalents, raccordés à lisé par cosses DIN, à une équer- lisé par cosses DIN.
vent être pliéss vors le bas. une borne à étrier. re extérieure de mise à la terre.
Si la conexión se efectúa con ter- Conexión de un solo conductor Conexión de dos conductores de Si la conexión se efectúa con ter- Si la conexión se efectúa con ter-
minales para cables DIN, habrá con un estribo. diámetro aproximadamente igual, minales para cables DIN, bajo el minales para cables DIN.
que doblarlos hacia abajo. con un estribo. angular exterior de puesta a tierra.
Nel collegamento con capocorda Allacciamento di ogni singolo con- Allacciamento di due conduttori di Nel collegamento con capocorda Nel collegamento con capocorda
conforme alle norme DIN, questo duttore con morsetto di serraggio. stesso o pressocchè indentico spes- conforme alle norme DIN, sotto conforme alle norme DIN.
va piegato verso il basso. sore con morsetto di serraggio. angolare di messa a terra esterno.
Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl. Anslutning av en enkelledare med Anslutning av två ungefär lika Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl. Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl.
DIN skall denna bockas nedåt. klämbygel. tjocka ledare med klämbygel. DIN under extern jordningsvinkel. DIN.
Pøipojení pomocí kabelového oka Pøipojení jednotlivého vodièe Pøipojení dvou vodièù stejného Pøipojení kabelovým okem DIN Pøipojení kabelovým okem DIN.
DIN je tøeba je ohnout smìrem U-tømenem. prùøezu s U-tømenem. pod vnìjím uzemòovacím tøme-
dolù. nem.
Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå ñ ïîìîùüþ Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå îòäåëüíîãî Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå äâóõ ïðîâîäîâ Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå êàáåëüíûì Ïðèñîåäèíåíèå êà áåëüíûì
êàáåëüíîãî íàêîíå÷íèêà DIN ïðîâîäà õîìóòîì â ôîðìå U. îäèíàêîâîãî ñå÷åíèÿ ñ õîìóòîì íàêîíå÷íèêîì DIN ïîä âíåøíèì íàêîíå÷íèêîì DIN.
íàäî îáîãíóòü âíèç. â ôîðìå U. çàçåìëÿþùèì õîìóòîì.
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2

Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten)
Tightening torques for screwed electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for terminal strips)
Couples de serrages des bornes de la plaque à bornes (ne concerne pas las borniers)
Pares de apriete para uniones atornilladas de las conexiones eléctricas en la placa de bornes (exceptuando las regletas de bornes).
Coppie di serraggio per le viti di attacco di collegamenti elettrici / dei portamorsetti (escluse morsettiere)
Åtdragningsmoment för de elektriska anslutningarnas skruvförband (utom på kontaktplintar)
Utahovací momenty pro roubové spoje elektrických pøipojení - pøipojení na svorkových deskách (mimo svorkovnicové lity).
Çàòÿæíûå ìîìåíòû äëÿ âèíòîâûõ ñîåäèíåíèé ýëåêòðè÷åñêèõ ïðèñîåäèíåíèé ïðèñîåäèíåíèå íà çàæèìíûõ ïëàòàõ (êðîìå
çàæèìíîé ïëàíêè).
Gewinde- ø / Thread- ø / ø du filetage

ø de la rosca / Diametro del filetto M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
Gängdimeter / Závit ø / Äèàìåòð ðåçüáû
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque min
0,8 1,8 2,7 5,5 9 14 27
Couple de serrage ìèí
Par de apriete Nm
Coppia di serraggio
Åtdragningsmoment max 1,2 2,5 4 8 13 20 40
Utahovací moment ìàêñ
Çàòÿæíîé ìîìåíò
Die obigen Anziehdrehmomente gelten soweit keine anderen Werte angegeben sind!
The above values of tightening torque are applicable unless alternative values are given elsewhere.
Les couples de serrage indiqués ci-dessus sont valables pour autant quaucune valeur spécifique ne soit donnée.
Estos pares de apriete rigen mientras no se indiquen otros.
Le coppie di serraggio indicate qui di sopra sono valide se non sono indicati altri valori.
Fig. 4 Ovanstående åtdragningsmoment gäller om ej andra värden angivits!
Výe uvedené utahovací momenty platí, pokud nejsou uvedeny jiné hodnoty.
Âûøåïðèâåäåííûå ìîìåíòû äåéñòâóþò â ñëó÷àå, ÷òî íå ïðèâåäåíû äðóãèå çíà÷åíèÿ.

Siemens AG - 32 -
Lagerwechsel / Changing bearings / Remplacement des roulements / Cambio de cojinetes

Sostituzione del cuscinetto / Lagerbyte / Výmìna loiska / Çàìåíà ïîäøèïíèêà
Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout darbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione delle centratura nullestremità dalbero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen I axeltappen)
Fig. 6 Vloená podloka (ochrana støedícího dùlku na konci høídele)
Ïðîìåæóòî÷íàÿ ïîäêëàäíàÿ øàéáà (çàùèòà öåíòðîâîãî îòâåðñòèÿ â êîíöå âàëà)
Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen / Pressing on and pulling off drive elements / Emmanchement et extraction dorganes
de transmission / Calado y extracción de elementos de accionamiento / Calettamento ed estrazione degli elementi di azionamento
/ På- och avdragning av drivdon / Nasazování a stahování pøenosových èlenù / Óñòàíîâêà è ñòÿãèâàíèå ýëåìåíòîâ ïåðåäà÷è
Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout darbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione della centratura nullestremità dalbero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen I axeltappen)
Vloená podloka (ochrana støedícího dùlku na konci høídele)
Ïðîìåæóòî÷íàÿ ïîäêëàäíàÿ øàéáà (çàùèòà öåíòðîâîãî îòâåðñòèÿ â êîíöå âàëà)
Zum Aufziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplung, Zahnrad, Riemenscheibe usw. ), Gewinde im Wellenende benutzen und - sofern möglich -Abtriebselemente nach Bedarf erwärmen.
Zum Abziehen geeignete Vorrichtung verwenden. Es dürfen beim Auf- und Abziehen keine Schläge (z.B. mit Hammer oder ähnlichem) oder größere als die laut Katalog zulässigen radialen
oder axialen Kräfte über das Wellenende auf die Motorlager übertragen werden.
Use the tapped hole provided in the end of the shaft for fitting drive components such as couplings, gearwheels, belt pulleys, etc. and, if possible, heat the components as necessary. Use
a suitable puller tool for removing the components. Do not strike the components, e.g. with a hammer or similar tool, when fitting or removing them and do not exert more than the maximum
value of radial or axial force - according to the catalog - transmitted to the motor bearings through the shaft extension.
Pour monter les organes de transmission (accouplements, roues dentées, poulies à courroie, etc.), utiliser le taraudage du bout darbre. Au besoin et lorsque cela est possible, chauffer les
organes de transmission. Pour le démontage, utiliser un dispositif approprié. Aucun coup (par ex. marteau) supérieur aux efforts axiaux et radiaux admissibles mentionnés au catalogue
ne doit être transmis par larbre aux roulements en cours de montage ou de démontage.
Para calar Ios elementos de accionamiento (acoplamientos, rueda dentada, polea, etc.) utilizar la rosca en el extremo del eje y - siempre que sea posible - calentar convenientemente
dichos elementos. Utilizar el dispositivo adecuado para la extracción. Durante las operaciones de calado o extracción no golpear (p. ej. con martillo o similar) ni ejercer sobre los cojinetes
del motor a través del extremo del eje fuerzas axiales o radiales superiores a las admisibles según catálogo.
Per calettare gli elementi di azionamento (giunti, ruote dentate, pulegge, ecc.), utilizzare il foro filettato nellestremità dalbero e, se possibile, riscaldare gli elementi di azionamento. Per
lestrazione vanno adoperati attrezzi adatti. Sono da evitare colpi o martellate, e forze radiali o assiali trasmesse dallestremità dalbero ai cuscinetti che siano maggiori di quelle consentite
sec. il catalogo.
Använd axeltappens gänga vid pådragning av drivdon (koppling, kugghjul, remskiva etc) och värm om möjligt upp drivdonen om så behövs. Använd lämpliga verktyg för avdragningen.
Några slag (t.ex. med hammare e.dyl.) får aldrig förekomma vid på- och avdragning, och radiella och axiella krafter som är större än de som anges i katalogen får inte överföras till
motorlagren via axeltappen.
Pro nasazování pøenosových èlenù (spojka, ozubené kolo, øemenice atd.) pouívat závit na konci høídele a - pokud je to moné - pøenosové èleny podle potøeby nahøát. Pro stahování
pouívat vhodný pøípravek. Pøi nasazování a stahování se nesmí pouívat ádné údery (napø. kladivem apod.) nebo vìtí radiální nebo axiální síly, ne jsou pøípustné podle katalogu, které
se pøenáejí pøes konec høídele na loiska motoru.
Äëÿ óñòàíîâêè ýëåìåíòîâ ïåðåäà÷è (ìóôòà, øåñòåðíÿ, ðåìåííûé øêèâ èòä.) ïðèìåíÿòü ðåçüáó â íîñêå âàëà è åñëè âîçìîæíî ïîäîãðåòü ýëåìåíòû ïåðåäà÷è ïî ïîòðåáíîñòè.
Äëÿ ñòÿãèâàíèÿ ïðèìåíÿòü óäîáíîå ïðèñïîñîáëåíèå. Ïðè óñòàíîâêå è ñòÿãèâàíèè çàïðåùàåòñÿ ïðèìåíÿòü óäàðû (íàïðèìåð ìîëîòîì èòï.) èëè ðàäèàëüíûå èëè îñåâûå óñèëèÿ
ïðåâûøàþùèå çíà÷åíèÿ äîïóñêàåìûå ñîãëàñíî êàòàëîãó, êîòîðûå ïåðåäàþòñÿ ÷åðåç íîñîê âàëà â ïîäøèïíèêè äâèãàòåëÿ.
Fig. 7
Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder / Balancing with half featherkey
Equilibrage avec demi-clavette / Equilibrado con media chaveta Nabenlänge I / Hub length I / Longueur du moyeu I / Longitud del cubo I
Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta / Balansering med halv kil Lunghezza mozzo I / Navlängd I / Délka náboje l / Äëèíà ñòóïèöû l
Vyváení s polovinou pera / Áàëàíñèðîâêà ñ ïîëîâèíîé øïîíêè
Herausragender Teil der Paßfeder T P
Protruding section of featherkey TP
Partie saillante TP de la clavette
Parte saliente de la chaveta TP
Parte sporgente della chiavetta Tp
Nedslipning av den del av kilen TP
Pøeènívající èást zalícovaného pera TP
Âûñòóïàþùàÿ ÷àñòü ïðèãíàííîé ÒÐ
Fig. 8
Länge des Wellenendes IM / Length of shaft I M / Longueur du bout darbre IM / Longitud del extremo del eje IM
Lunghezza IM dellestremità dalbero / Axeltappens längd IM / Délka konce høídele lM / Äëèíà íîñêà âàëà lM

Siemens AG - 33 -
ANHANG / APPENDIX / APPENDICE / ANEXO / APPENDICE / BILAGA / DODATEK / ÄÎÏÎËÍÅÍÈÅ
DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL

Ersatzteile, vom Werk lieferbar Spare parts, available from the works Pièces de rechange, livrables par lusine Piezas de recambio; suministro desde
(s. Bestellbeispiel) (see specimen orders) (voir exemple de oommande) fábrica (véase ejemplo de pedido).
1.00 Lagerung AS 1.00 Bearing assembly, drive end 1.00 Palier côté entraînement 1.00 Cojinete del LA
.40 Lagerschild .40 Endshield .40 Flasque-palier .40 Escudo portacojinetes
.43 Wellendichtring .43 Shaft sealing ring .43 Bague détanchéité .43 Retén
.58 Federscheibe .58 Resilient preloading disc .58 Rondelle élastique .58 Arandela de resorte
.60 Wälzlager .60 Rolling-contact bearing .60 Roulement .60 Rodamiento
.61 Verschlußstopfen .61 Plug .61 Bauchons .61 Tapón
.65 Lagerdeckel .65 Cover of bearing .65 Couvercle de palier .65 Cubierta del cojinete
.67 Ausserer Lagerdeckel .67 Outer bearing cap .67 Couvercle extérieur de palier .67 Tapa exterior del cojinete
.68 Schleuderscheibe .68 Grease slinger .68 Disque de projection .68 Anillo de engrase
.69 Druckfeder .69 Compression springs .69 Ressort de compressôon .69 Muelles de presión
3.00 Läufer, komplett 3.00 Rotor, complete 3.00 Rotor, complet 3.00 Rotor, completo
4.00 Ständer, komplett 4.00 Stator, complete 4.00 Stator, complet 4.00 Estator, completo
.07 Gehäusefuß (BG180 - rechts, links) .07 Body footing (BG 180 - left, right) .07 Pied du corps (BG 180 gauche, droit) .07 Pedestal del cuerpo (BG180
.18 Leistungsschild .18 Rating plate .18 Plaque signalétique izquierdo, derecho)
.35 Scheibe .35 Disc .35 Disque .18 Placa de características
.40 Scheibe .40 Disc .40 Disque .35 Arandela
.41 Erdungslasche .41 Earthing terminal .41 Borne de mise à la terre .40 Disco
5.00 Klemmenkasten, komplett 5.00 Terminal box, complete 5.00 Boîte à bornes, complète .41 Borne de puesta a tierra
.03 Dichtung .03 Gasket (frame sizes 200: cord-type .03 Joint (torique sur HA 200) 5.00 Caja de bornes, completa
(BG200 Schnurdichtung) gasket) .10 Plaque à bornes, complète .03 Junta (en BG 200 obturación
.10 Klemmenbrett, komplett .10 Terminal board, complete .33 Plaquette arrêtée en rotation trenzada)
.33 Unverdrehbare Unterlage .33 Not-twist shim .34 Etrier de serrage .10 Placa de bornes, completa
.34 Klemmbügel .34 Terminal clip .35 Passe-câble en caoutchone .33 Suplemento fijo
.35 Gummistopfen .35 Rubber plug .44 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes .34 Estribo
.44 Klemmenkasten-Oberteil .44 Upper part of terminal box .51 Ecrou .35 Tapón de goma
.51 Mutter .51 Nut .52 Barrett droite .44 Parte superior de la caja de bornes
.52 Schaltbügel .52 Stirrup .70 Etrier de serrage .51 Tuerca
.70 Klemmbügel .70 Terminal clip .71 Couvercle extérieur de palier .52 Brida
.71 Ausserer Lagerdeckel .71 Outer bearing cap .72 Disque de projection .70 Estribo
.72 Schleuderscheibe .72 Grease slinger .83 Joint .71 Tapa exterior del cojinete
.83 Dichtung .83 Gasket .84 Couvercle de la boîte ä bornes .72 Anillo de engrase
.84 Klemmenkasten-Deckel .84 Cover for terminal box .89 Vis .83 Junta
.89 Schraube .89 Screw .94 Vis .84 Tapa de la caja de bornes
.94 Schraube .94 Screw .95 Bornier pour circuit auxiliaire .89 Tornillo
.95 Klemme .95 Clip .96 Lardon porteur .94 Tornillo
.96 Tragschiene .96 Supporting bar .97 Étai complet .95 Abrazadera
.97 Strebe komplett .97 Brace complete .99 Tôle de contact .96 Listón de soporte
.99 Kontaktblech .99 Contact washer 6.00 Palier côté opposé à lentraînement .97 Sostén completo
6.00 Lagerung BS 6.00 Bearing assembly, non-drive end .10 Roulement .99 Plancha de contacto
.10 Wälzlager .10 Rolling-contact bearing .20 Flasque-palier 6.00 Cojinete del LCA
.20 Lagerschild .20 Endshield .23 Bague détanchéité .10 Rodamiento
.23 Wellendichtring .23 Shaft sealing ring .24 Couvercle de palier .20 Escudo portacojinete
.24 Lagerdeckel .24 Cover of bearing .65 Graisseur .23 Retén
.65 Schmiernippel .65 Nipple .66 Douille en caoutchouc .24 Cubierta del cojinete
.66 Gummibuchse .66 Rubber bush .67 Tube de graissage .65 Aceitera
.67 Schmierrohr .67 Lubrication pipe 7.00 Ventilation, complète .66 Casquillo de goma
7.00 Belüftung, komplett 7.00 Ventilation accesories, complete .04 Ventilateur .67 Tubo de lubricación
.04 Lüfter .04 Fan .40 Capot du ventilateur 7.00 Ventilación, completa
.40 Lüfterhaube .40 Fan cowl .41 Equerre .04 Ventilador
.41 Winkel .41 Angle .49 Vis .40 Tapa del ventilador
.49 Schraube .49 Screw .41 Angular
Les dispositifs demmanchement et
Auf- und Abziehvorrichtungen für Wälzlager, Mounting and extracting devices for rolling- dextraction pour roulements, ventilateurs et .49 Tornillo
Lüfter und Abtriebselemente sind nicht liefer- contact bearings, fans and out elements are organes de tranasmission ne sont pes livra- No se suministran Ios dispositivos para ex-
bar! not available. bles. traer y calar los rodamientos, el ventilador y
Ios elementos de accionamiento.

Siemens AG - 34 -
ANHANG / APPENDIX / APPENDICE / ANEXO / APPENDICE / BILAGA / DODATEK / ÄÎÏÎËÍÅÍÈÅ
ITALIANO SVENSKA ÈESKY ÏÎ ÐÓÑÑÊÈ

Parti di ricambio, fornibili dalla fabbrica Reservdelar, tillgängliga från Náhradní díly, které dodává výrobce Çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè, ïîñòàâëÿåìûå ïðîèçâî-
(vedi esempio) fabriken (se Beställningsexempel) (viz pøíklad objednávky) äèòåëåì (ñìîòðè ïðèìåð çàêàçà)
1.00 Supporto lato comando 1.00 Lager för axeltappsidan 1.00 Uloení AS 1.0 Óñòàíîâêà AS
.40 Scudo di supporto (A-sidan), komplett .40 loiskový tít .40 ïîäøèïíèêîâûé ùèò
.43 Anello torico .40 Lagersköld .43 tìsnící krouek høídele .43 óïëîòíÿþùåå êîëüöî âàëà
.58 Rondella elastica .43 Tätningsring .58 pruná podloka .58 óïðóãàÿ øàéáà
.60 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .58 Fjäderbricka .60 valivé loisko .60 ïîäøèïíèê êà÷åíèÿ
.61 Tappo di chiusura .60 Rullningslager .61 uzavírací zátka .61 çàïîðíàÿ ïðîáêà
.65 Copricuscinetto .61 Förseglingspropp .65 loiskové víko .65 êîëïàê ïîäøèïíèêà
.67 Copricuscinetto esterno .65 Lageröverfall .67 loiskové víko vnìjí .67 íàðóæíàÿ êðèøêà ïîäøèïíèêà
.68 Disco centrifugo .67 Yttre lagerlock .68 odstøikovaè .68 öåíòðîáåæíàÿ øàéáà
.69 Molla de compressione .68 Avkastare .69 Tlaèná pruina .69 ïðóæèíà ñæàòèÿ
3.00 Rotore, completo .69 Spiralfjäder 3.00 Rotor úplný 3.00 Ðîòîð ïîëíûé
4.00 Statore, completo 3.00 Rotor, komplett 4.00 Stator úplný 4.00 Ñòàòîð ïîëíûé
.07 Piede del corpo (BG 180 sinistro, 4.00 Stator, komplett .07 patka statoru (BG180 - pravá, levá) .07 ïÿòà ñòàòîðà (BG180 ïðàâàÿ, ëåâàÿ)
destro) .07 Kroppens fot (BG 180 - vänstre fot, .18 výkonostní títek .18 òàáëè÷êà ìîùíîñòåé
.18 Targhetta högre fot) .35 podloka .35 øàéáà
.35 Disco .18 Märkplåt .40 podloka .40 øàéáà
.40 Disco .35 Bricka .41 uzemòovací spojka .41 çàçåìëÿþùàÿ ìóôòà
.41 Morsetto di messa a terra .40 Skiva 5.00 Svorkovnice úplná 5.00 Êëåììíèê ïîëíûé
5.00 Scatola morsetti, completa .41 Jordledningens klammer .03 tìsnìní (BG200 tìsnicí òùra) .03 íàáèâêà (BG200 óïëîòíÿþùèé øíóð)
.03 Guarnizione (nei BG200 guarnizione 5.00 Uttagslåda, komplett .10 svorková deska úplná .10 çàæèìíàÿ ïëàòà ïîëíàÿ
a corda) .03 Tätning .33 pevná podloka proti pootoèení .33 æåñòêàÿ øàéáà ïðîòèâ ïîâîðîòà
.10 Morsettiera completa .10 Kopplingsplint, komplett .34 upínací tømen .34 çàæèìíûé õîìóò
.33 Supporto antitorsione .33 Underlägg, arreterat .35 gumová zátka .35 ðåçèíîâàÿ ïðîáêà
.34 Morsetto di serraggio .34 Klämbygel .44 skøíò svorkovnice .44 êîðîáêà êëåììíèêà
.35 Tappo in gomma .35 Gummiplugg .51 matice .51 ãàéêà
.44 Parte superiore della scatola .44 Anslutningslåda, överdel .52 propojka .52 ñîåäèíèòåëü
morsetti .51 Mutter .70 U-tømen .70 õîìóò â ôîðìå U
.51 Dado .52 Bygel .71 loiskové víko vnìjí .71 íàðóæíàÿ êðèøêà ïîäøèïíèêà
.52 Ponticello diritto .70 Klämbygel .72 odstøikovaè .72 öåíòðîáåæíàÿ øàéáà
.70 Morsetto di serraggio .71 Yttre lagerlock .83 tìsnìní .83 íàáèâêà
.71 Copricuscinetto esterno .72 Avkastare .84 víko skøínì svorkovnice .84 êîëïàê êîðîáêè êëåììíèêà
.72 Disco centrifugo .83 Tätning .89 roub .89 âèíò
.83 Guarnizione .84 Lock till uttagslåda .94 roub .94 âèíò
.84 Coperchio della scatola morsetti .89 Skruv .95 svorka .95 çàæèì
.89 Vite .94 Skruv .96 nosná lita .96 íåñóùàÿ ïëàíêà
.94 Vite .95 Klämma .97 opìrka úplná .97 ïîääåðæêà ïîëíàÿ
.95 Morsettiera per circuito .96 Bärlist .99 kontaktní plech .99 êîíòàêòíûé ëèñòîâîé ìåòàëë
.96 Lista portante .97 Full sträva 6.00 Uloení BS 6.00 Óñòàíîâêà BS
.97 Montante completo .99 Kontaktplåt .10 valivé loisko .10 ïîäøèïíèê êà÷åíèÿ
.99 Lamiera di contatto .20 loiskový tít .20 ïîäøèïíèêîâûé ùèò
6.00 Lager för fläktsidan (B-sidan)
6.00 Supporto opposto al lato comando .10 Rullningslager .23 tìsnící krouek høídele .23 óïëîòíÿþùåå êîëüöî âàëà
.10 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .20 Lagersköld .24 loiskové víko .24 êîëïàê ïîäøèïíèêà
.20 Scudo di supporto .23 Axeltätning .65 mazací hlavice .65 ñìàçî÷íàÿ ãîëîâêà
.23 Anello torico .24 Lageröverfall .66 gumové pouzdro .66 ðåçèíîâàÿ âòóëêà
.24 Copricuscinetto .65 Smörjkopp .67 mazací trubka .67 ñìàçî÷íàÿ òðóáêà
.65 Nipplo di lubrificazione .66 Gummihylsa 7.00 Ventilace úplná 7.00 Âåíòèëÿöèÿ ïîëíàÿ
.66 Bussola in gomma .67 Smörjrör .04 ventilátor .04 âåíòèëÿòîð
.67 Tubo di lubrificazione .40 kryt ventilátoru .40 êîæóõ âåíòèëÿòîðà
7.00 Fläktkylning, komplett
7.00 Ventilazione completa .04 Fläkt .41 úhelník .41 óãîëüíèê
.04 Ventola .40 Fläktkåpa .49 roub .49 âèíò
.40 Cuffia della ventola .41 Vinkel Nasazovací a stahovací pøípravky pro valivá Ïðèñïîñîáëåíèÿ äëÿ óñòàíîâêè è ñòÿãè-
.41 Angolare .49 Skruv loiska, ventilátory a pøenosové èleny se ne- âàíèÿ ïîäøèïíèêîâ êà÷åíèÿ, âåíòèëÿòîðû
.49 Vite På- och avdragare för rullningslager, fläkt dodávají! è ýëåìåíòû ïåðåäà÷è íå ïîñòàâëÿþòñÿ!
Non sono fornibili i dispositivi di estrazione / och drivdon kan ej erhållas.
calettamento per i cuscinetti, ventilatori ed
azionamenti.
Bestellbeispiel / Order example

Exemple de commande
Ejemplo de pedido
Esempio di ordinazione
Beställningsexempel
Pøíklad objednávky
Ïðèìåð çàêàçà
1LG4183-4AA60
Nr. UC 0008/012783001
1.40 Lagerschild

Siemens AG - 35 -
Breathers
Hydraulic reservoirs “breathe” air in and out as the oil level rises and falls.
This circulating air contains particles and moisture that can cause
corrosion, increase equipment wear and reduce fluid performance. In
typical systems, the internal hydraulic fluid is warmer than the
external environment. This difference in temperatures causes
water vapor to form. Breathers protect your hydraulic
system by filtering out damaging moisture and particles.
More than 25% of the samples sent to the Eaton Fluid
Analysis Laboratory for analysis have significant water
contamination. In an operating system, the H20-gate
Vent Breather creates a moisture barrier when there
is a 5°F (2°C) difference between reservoir and
ambient temperature and when there is a 10%
per minute exchange of air volume above the
fluid. The Mobile-gate breather is smaller in
size but is also 1/4 the size and 1/2 the capacity
of the H20-gate. These temperature and air flow
conditions are present in most hydraulic systems
which employ a cylinder.
Part Numbers:
NPT Mobile-gate MBR110
Flange Mobile-gate MBR120
H20-gate BR110
Dirt-gate BR210
Performs as a gate Works even when the Reduces humidity inside

During the “inhalation” cycle, system is shut down. reservoir.
the proprietary media blocks The H20-gate and Mobile- The H20-gate and Mobile-
the water vapor from gate Vent Breather retard the gate Vent Breathers lower
entering the reservoir. During vapor equilibrium process and stabilize the relative
the “exhalation” cycle, the and work to prevent humidity of air inside the
media allows the moisture in condensation even after the reservoir, leading to a lower
the reservoir air to exit. The system is shut and cooled dewpoint (Tdewpoint <
moisture is carried off the down, such as overnight. As Tambient = NO
media by the exiting air, this chart illustrates, the CONDENSATION) at a rate
restoring the media’s water dewpoint is slow to climb, and amount that will be
barrier capacity, and the even after the system dependent upon several
moisture barrier mechanism temperature has dropped to conditions: the ambient
is not affected by the amount the ambient temperature. conditions, the internal
of exposure to moisture. The Once the system has reservoir heat, amount and
reservoir air is maintained at reached ambient frequency of reservoir air
a low relative humidity, and temperature, condensation flow through the vent, and
more importantly, at a lower does not occur. the temperature of the
dew point temperature than reservoir surfaces.
the ambient temperature.
BREATHER FEATURES
H2O-gate Dirt-gate Mobile-gate

Visual Indicator • • •
Particle Control • • •
Water/Moisture Control • •
Corrosion Resistant Housing • • •
Flow Rate 708 L/min 708 L/min 473 L/min
(187 USgpm) (187 USgpm) (125 USgpm)
EATON Vickers Filtration Catalog E-FIFI-MC002-E August 2005 13

Breathers
H2O-gate™ Reservoir Breather
Features/Benefits: Part Numbers:

• Visual Mechanical • Easy Installation: H20-gate BR110
Indicator: Actuates when Lightweight design can
Bayonet Adapter 924710
particles have blocked the be hand tightened onto
media, before the pump adapter. Screw-in Adapter P-077002
cavitates. • Durable Plastic Housing:
• Proprietary Media: Protects the media from
Reduces dew point external splashing.
temperature to prevent • Superior breather filters
condensation and is both moisture and
99.7% efficient in blocking particles from air.
particles 3μ and larger.
• Effective up to 121°C
• Reversible Flow Through (250°F)
Media: Allows for moisture
to exit the reservoir. • Media contains oil
attractant layer to collect
• Media contains oil and return oil splashes.
attractant layer to collect
and return oil splashes. • Rated up to 25 SCFM
Dirt-gate™ Reservoir Breather

Features/Benefits: Part Numbers:
• Visual Mechanical • Durable Plastic Housing: Dirt-gate BR210
Indicator: Actuates when Protects the media from
particles have blocked the external splashing. Bayonet Adapter 924710
media, before the pump Screw-in Adapter P-077002
• High Efficiency:
cavitates. (99% at 2 microns)
• Easy Installation: • Very Low Pressure Drop Note:
Lightweight design can
be hand tightened onto • Filters out particles This breather does not filter
adapter. moisture from air.
• Effective up to 121°C
(250°F)
• Rated up to 25 SCFM
Mobile-gate™ Filler Breather Assemblies
Features/Benefits: Part Number

• Proprietary Media: • Reversible Flow Through MBR110 5002486
Reduces dew point Media: Allows for moisture MBR120 5002487
temperature to prevent to exit the reservoir.
condensation and is • Easy Installation:
99.7% efficient in blocking Lightweight design can be
particles 10μ and larger. hand tightened.
• Water Barrier: • Rugged metal housing is
Regenerates its water long lasting and ideal for
shedding capacity with mobile applications.
each cycle.
• Rated to 16.7 SCFM
MBR120
MBR110
Items not in bold are non-standard and may have a longer lead time
14 EATON Vickers Filtration Catalog E-FIFI-MC002-E August 2005
Breathers
H2O-gate Specifications Dirt-gate Specifications
19 19
133,4 (.75) 133,4 (.75)
(5.25) (5.25)
105
(4.13)
184,2 12
(7.25) (.47)
12
(.47) 1.5 UN Straight Thread
1.5 UN Straight Thread
Mobile-gate Specifications
PART NUMBER FLOW DIMENSIONS (IN)
USgpm L/min D1 D2 D3 D4 H1 H2 T1
MBR110 125 475 3.08 - - 2.33 0.63 NPT 3/4
MBR120 125 475 3.08 1.88 - 2.50 3.50 -
MBR120 FLANGE - - - - 0.25 2.81 - - -
D1 D1
H1 H1 D3
D4
H2
H2 T1
D2
EATON Vickers Filtration Catalog E-FIFI-MC002-E August 2005 15

Breathers
Adapters
Installation Dimensions
Threaded Pipe Adaptor Bayonet Adaptor

82,6
(3.25)
21,7
(.853) 25,4
19,1 (1.00)
(.750) Vent Filter
O-ring 11/4 NPT

Bayonet Adaptor
11/2-16 UN
Standard Mounting
Flange of a reservoir
filler/breather
assembly
MODELS AND PART NUMBERS
Part Number Description Vent Filters Applicable
924710 Bayonet, no check BR110, BR210
P-077002 Threaded pipe BR110, BR210
All Eaton Vent Filters are easily applied

to reservoirs via Spin-On adaptors.
Items not in bold are non-standard and may have a longer lead time
16 EATON Vickers Filtration Catalog E-FIFI-MC002-E August 2005
Product Data
CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860
Heavy Duty Greases
DESCRIPTION
CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860 greases are designed to extend the service life of rolling and sliding
bearings subjected to heavy loads and to elevated temperatures.
CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860 greases are intended to provide a stable oil film for applications at lower
speeds, higher loads, and/or higher temperatures sustained for longer periods of time.
• CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860 greases feature a lithium-complex soap as thickener and a mineral
paraffin-base oil.
• Corrosion inhibitors and anti-oxidant agents have been added to the base oil.
• EP additives and solid lubricants evenly distributed in the grease increase the load carrying capacity
and wear protection.
APPLICATIONS
• CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860 greases are recommended for rolling and sliding bearings at high
loads and normal to elevated temperatures.
• They could be used at permanent temperatures up to + 140 °C
• Peak temperatures up to + 150 °C are possible. Lubrication intervals should be tuned carefully at high
temperatures.
• CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860 greases are available in the NLGI grades 1 and 2 as well as with base
oil viscosities of ISO VG 220 and 460.
ADVANTAGES
• The lithium-complex soap guarantees an excellent worked penetration as well as a high dropping point.
• Reduced friction, due to the CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® solid lubricants, is most evident under
boundary and mixed friction conditions. This benefit is most pronounced where frequent start-up, slow
speeds, or high and unexpected loads are encountered.
• Overall savings are derived from the above and result from less labor and downtime, smoother, more
efficient operation with longer parts life, and extended lubrication intervals.
NOTES FOR USE

• CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® 860 greases are not compatible with greases of a different soap base.
• Lubrication intervals should be increased gradually to ensure complete removal of previous lubricant
and the deposit of the a surface layer of CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY® solids.
• At elevated temperatures (over +100 °C to +150 °C) lubrication intervals should be tuned carefully.
Castrol
Wakefield House
Aspect Park
Molub-Alloy 860 Pipers Way
07/05/2004 Swindon
All reasonable care has been taken to ensure that the information contained in this publication is accurate at the date of printing. It
should be noted however that the information may be effected by changes subsequent to the date of printing in the blend formulation
or methods of application of any of the products referred to or in the requirements of any specification approval relating to any such
SN3 1RE
Products United Kingdom
Tel +44 (0)1793 452111
Fax +44 (0)1703 486083
Product Data
®
CASTROL MOLUB-ALLOY 860
Technical data
Unit Value Test method
MOLUB-ALLOY 860 greases - 860/220-1 860/220-2 860/460-1 860/460-2 -
DIN classification - KPF 1N-30 KPF 2N-20 KPF 1N-30 KPF 2N-20 DIN 51502
NLGI grade - 1 2 1 2 DIN 51818
Thickener (soap base) - lithium-complex -
Worked penetration 0.1 mm 310 – 340 265 – 295 310 – 340 265 – 295 ISO 2137
Dropping point °C > 260 ISO 2176
Viscosity at + 40°C 220 220 460 460
mm²/s DIN 51366
+ 100°C 19 19 28.5 28.5
Flash point °C 232 ISO 2592
Fire point °C 260 ISO 2592
Behavior in the presence of water (90°C) (rating) 1 DIN 51807/1
Copper corrosion (100°C, after 24 h) - <2 DIN 51811
Oxidation stability (pressure drop after hPa 280 280 350 350 DIN 51808
100 h at 100°C)
Rust prevention properties (rating)* 1 ASTM D 1743
Emcor test (rating)* 0/0 DIN 51802 / IP
220/67
Roll stability % 10 11 12 12 ASTM D 1831
Timken EP test (ok load) N 220 DIN 51434-3
Four ball EP test (weld load) N 4400/4600 DIN 51350, 04-A
Four ball wear test (wear scar diameter) mm 0.70 DIN 51350, 05-E
FAG-FE 9 test (1500/6000-140) - pass DIN 51821-02-A
Flow pressure at – 20°C hPa 620 1200 620 1200 DIN 51805
1 mm²/s ^ 1cSt
* = pass
These technical data are based on average test results. Minor deviations may occur from case to case.
For further product information please contact the Technical Service or Castrol Industrie GmbH.
Castrol
Wakefield House
Aspect Park
Molub-Alloy 860 Pipers Way
07/05/2004 Swindon
All reasonable care has been taken to ensure that the information contained in this publication is accurate at the date of printing. It
should be noted however that the information may be effected by changes subsequent to the date of printing in the blend formulation
or methods of application of any of the products referred to or in the requirements of any specification approval relating to any such
SN3 1RE
Products United Kingdom
Tel +44 (0)1793 452111
Fax +44 (0)1703 486083
Mobil SHC 500 Series
Hydraulic Oils
Product Description
Mobil SHC 500 Series oils are supreme performance hydraulic oils formulated from synthesised, wax-free
hydrocarbon base fluids combined with a carefully engineered super-stabilised additive system. They are
exceptionally high quality, wide-temperature, shear-stable hydraulic oils with controlled low-temperature
pumpability properties and maximised anti-wear protection for high-pressure vane, piston and gear pumps. The
products exhibit very high viscosity indexes contributing to their excellent low and high temperature performance
making them an excellent choice for equipment that is subjected to a wide range of start-up and operating
temperatures. The Mobil SHC 500 Series oils provide outstanding shear stability allowing their use in
high-pressure, high-temperature operating environments for extended periods of time without the loss of critical
lubrication characteristics. The Mobil SHC 500 Series oils provide long oil/filter life and optimum equipment
protection reducing both maintenance and product disposal costs. They were developed in conjunction with the
major OEMs to meet the stringent requirements of severe hydraulic systems using high pressure, high output
pumps as well as handling the critical requirements of other hydraulic system components such as close clearance
servo-valves and the high accuracy numerically controlled (NC) machine tools. These products meet the most
rigorous performance requirements of a wide range of hydraulic system and component manufacturers, using
various multi-metallurgy designs, ensuring a single product with exceptional performance characteristics in a
wide range of equipment. They are designed to work with systems operating under severe conditions where
high levels of anti-wear and film strength protection are needed, yet they are formulated to work where
non-anti-wear hydraulic oils are generally recommended.
Features and Benefits

The Mobil SHC 500 Series hydraulic oils exhibit outstanding low and high temperature performance providing
an extra margin of equipment protection above and beyond the capabilities of comparable mineral oil-based
products. Their excellent oxidation resistance allows extension of oil and filter change intervals while assuring
exceptionally clean systems and trouble-free operation. Their high level of anti-wear properties and excellent
film strength characteristics result in exceptional equipment performance that results in fewer breakdowns and
helps improve production capacity. Their controlled demulsibility permits the oils to work well in systems
contaminated with small amounts of water yet readily separate large amounts of water.
Features Advantages and Potential Benefits

Design-Specific Synthetic Base stock Extended service intervals Cleaner system and reduced
close-tolerance valve sticking Improved filterability
Exceptional Anti-wear Reduced wear Protects systems using various metallurgy
High Viscosity Index Wide temperature range performance Assures equipment
protection at cold start-up temperatures Protects system
components at high operating temperatures
Outstanding Oxidation Stability Provides long oil and equipment life Extends filter life
Excellent Corrosion Protection Prevents internal hydraulic system corrosion Reduces
negative effects of moisture in systems Provides
1 of 3
Features Advantages and Potential Benefits
corrosion protection of multi-metallurgy component
designs
Very Good Multi-metal Compatibility Assures excellent performance of various components
Reduces requirements for additional products
Meets a Wide Range of Equipment Requirements One product can replace several Minimises inventory
requirements Reduced potential for product
misapplication
Excellent Air Separation Characteristics Reduces foaming and it's negative effects
Controlled Demulsibility Protects systems where small quantities of moisture are
present Readily separates larger quantities of water
Innovative Keep Clean Properties Reduces system deposits and sludging Protect critical
components such as servo-valves Improves system
response and eliminates valve sticking Improves total
system performance
Applications
• Hydraulic systems critical to deposit build-up such as sophisticated Numerically Controlled (NC) machines,
particularly where close clearance servo-valves are used
• Systems employing multi-metal component designs
• High pressure vane, piston and gear pumps
• Systems where cold start-up and / or very high operating temperatures are typical
• Where small amounts of water are unavoidable
• In systems containing gears and bearings
• Systems requiring a high degree of load-carrying capability and anti-wear protection
• Applications where thin oil-film corrosion protection is an asset such as in systems containing moisture
Specifications and Approvals

Mobil SHC 500 Series meets or exceeds 524 525 526 527
the following industry specifications:
Denison HF-0, HF-1, and HF-2 (Approved) X X X
Vickers I-286-S (Quality Level) X X X
Vickers M-2950-S (Quality Level) X X X
FZG Gear Test, DIN 51354, Fail Stage X X X X
Cincinnati Milacron (Quality Level)
P-68 X
P-69 X
P-70 X
Typical Properties
Mobil SHC 500 Series 524 525 526 527
ISO Viscosity Grade 32 46 68 100
Viscosity, ASTM D 445
2 of 3
Mobil SHC 500 Series 524 525 526 527
cSt @ 40º C 32 46 68 100
cSt @ 100º C 6.4 8.54 11.52 15.94
Brookfield Viscosity @ -18º C, ASTM D 923 1376 2385 4500
2983, cP
Viscosity Index, ASTM D 2270 144 154 158 160
Density 15º C, ASTM D 4052, kg/L 0.852 0.8514 0.8535 0.8576
Copper Strip Corrosion, ASTM D 130, 3 1B 1B 1B 1B
hours @ 100º C
Rust Characteristics, ASTM D 665B Pass Pass Pass Pass
FZG Gear Test, DIN 51534, Fail Stage 11 11 11 11
Pour Point, ºC, ASTM D 97 -54 -54 -42 -46
Flash Point, ºC, ASTM D 92 234 238 216 232
Foam Sequence I, II, III, ASTM D 893 , ml 50/0 50/0 50/0 50/0
Health and Safety

Based on available information, this product is not expected to produce adverse effects on health when used
for the intended application and the recommendations provided in the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) are
followed. MSDS's are available upon request through your sales contract office, or via the Internet. This product
should not be used for purposes other than its intended use. If disposing of used product, take care to protect
the environment.
The Mobil logotype, the Pegasus design and Mobil SHC are trademarks of Exxon Mobil Corporation, or one of
its subsidiaries.
ExxonMobil Lubricants & Specialties

All products may not be available locally. For more information, contact your local sales office or visit www.exxonmobil.com.
ExxonMobil is comprised of numerous affiliates and subsidiaries, many with names that include Esso, Mobil, or ExxonMobil. Nothing in this document is intended to override or
supersede the corporate separateness of local entities. Responsibility for local action and accountability remains with the local ExxonMobil affiliate entities. Due to continual product
research and development, the information contained herein is subject to change without notification. Typical Properties may vary slightly.
© 2007 Exxon Mobil Corporation. All rights reserved.
3 of 3
Issue March 2007
ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS

Operating instructions
Model 13 6300/1-5.6/1.4 12500/2-2.8/0.7
Please don’t use the hoist

before all operators have
carefully read this manual
and have signed the form on
its rear cover.
Inhaltsverzeichnis
1 Safety advice................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Advice for the use of electric chain hoists........................................................................................................ 3
1.2 European Regulations ..................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Spare parts...................................................................................................................................................... 4
2 Technical overview.......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Assembly possibilities...................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Schematic sketch of the load chain configuration............................................................................................ 5
2.3 Sectional view ................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.4 Explanation of type designation....................................................................................................................... 6
3 Assembly......................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Mechanical assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.1 Hook tackle...................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.2 Hook block ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.3 Stationary suspended hoists - basic version ................................................................................................... 8
3.1.3.1 Suspension with suspension eye..................................................................................................................... 8
3.1.3.2 Suspension with single hole suspension eye................................................................................................... 8
3.1.3.3 Suspension with hook suspension................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.4 Gear ventilation ............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1.5 Mounting of the chain box ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.1.6 Fitting of the load chain – single fall version .................................................................................................. 11
3.1.7 Fitting of the load chain – double fall version................................................................................................. 12
3.1.8 Replacing the load chain, the chain guide and the hold down ....................................................................... 13
3.2 Electric connections ...................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Mains power .................................................................................................................................................. 15
3.2.2 Low voltage control 24V ................................................................................................................................ 15
3.2.3 Electric limit switch for lift limiting .................................................................................................................. 16
4 Electric chain hoist with electric trolley .......................................................................................................... 16

4.1 Mechanical assembly .................................................................................................................................... 17
4.2 Electric connection of the electric trolley........................................................................................................ 18
5 Tests ............................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Test when used according to BGV D8, section 23 (VBG 8, section 23) ........................................................ 18
5.2 Test when used according to BGV D6, section 25 (VBG 9, section 25) ........................................................ 18
5.3 Regular tests ................................................................................................................................................. 18
6 Directions and prohibitions for use ................................................................................................................ 19

6.1 Directions for use .......................................................................................................................................... 19
6.2 Prohibitions for use........................................................................................................................................ 19
7 Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................. 19
7.1 Test and maintenance works......................................................................................................................... 20
7.2 Maintenance and adjustment of the D.C. disk brake ..................................................................................... 21
7.2.1 Construction of the brake .............................................................................................................................. 21
7.2.2 Adjustment of the D.C. disk brake ................................................................................................................. 21
7.2.3 Electric control of the D.C. disk brake ........................................................................................................... 22
7.3 Sliding clutch ................................................................................................................................................. 22
7.3.1 Construction of the sliding clutch................................................................................................................... 22
7.3.2 Adjustment of the sliding clutch ..................................................................................................................... 23
7.4 Load chain..................................................................................................................................................... 23
7.4.1 Lubrication of the load chain before starting and during operation ................................................................ 23
7.4.2 Testing of the wear of the chain .................................................................................................................... 23
7.4.3 Measuring wear and replacing chain ............................................................................................................. 23
7.4.4 Measuring wear and replacing load hook ...................................................................................................... 24
7.5 Electric trolley ................................................................................................................................................ 24
7.5.1 Maintenance work on the electric trolley........................................................................................................ 24
7.5.2 Adjustment of the air gape of the trolley brake .............................................................................................. 24
1
8 Duty rate of an electric chain hoist (acc. to FEM 9.683) ................................................................................ 24
8.1 Short-time duty .............................................................................................................................................. 24
8.2 Intermittent duty............................................................................................................................................. 25
8.3 Example ........................................................................................................................................................ 25
9 Duty rate of the electric trolleys (acc. to FEM 9.683) ..................................................................................... 25
10 Strainer clamp for the control cable............................................................................................................... 25
11 Lubrication..................................................................................................................................................... 26
11.1 Lubrication of the gear................................................................................................................................... 26
11.2 Lubrication of the hook block and hook tackle............................................................................................... 26
11.3 Lubrication of the trolleys............................................................................................................................... 26
12 Measures to be taken at the end of the S.W.P. ............................................................................................. 26
2
1 Safety advice
1.1 Advice for the use of electric chain hoists
Electric chain hoists are designed to lift and to lower loads vertically and to travel horizontally with those lifted loads (with
trolleys). Every other mode of use is prohibited and the risk is on the operator’s responsibility. Especially if carrying out
prohibited operations (see chapter 6.2) you can get into life trouble.
Please ask the producer for any special mode of use in advance.
Using the hoist to carry people is strictly prohibited!
The modern design of the LIFTKET hoists guarantees safety and economic use.
The patented safety clutch system is located between motor and brake. This enables the brake to hold the
load without any power transmitted by the clutch. The brake acts directly onto the load via the gearbox by
using form fit elements only. The friction clutch does not transmit any load while brake is on.
Before first use please make sure, that all electrical wires are connected safely, that all wires are without
damages and that the whole equipment could be switched off by a main switch.
It is the responsibility of the operator to make sure that all suspension points of the hoist are calculated to
withstand the dynamic forces caused by the lifting equipment safely.
The chain hoist is usable when it is safely suspended and the outgoing chain can leave the hoist safely in
the relevant direction.
Therefore the container for the dead end of the chain outside the hoist must be big enough to allow the
chain coming out. If not, the chain can be trapped inside the hoist and can brake the casing of the hoist.
For use of the hoist in an aggressive environment – please consult the producer.
The following safety advice is issued for both the maintenance and the operation of the hoist and for most standard
uses. It may not necessarily cover all situations. If you are in any doubt, please contact your dealer. This manual will tell
you how to operate the hoist and how to handle its suspension or its loads safely.
It is compulsory to take care of the following safety advice. They may not be complete for each mode of use, please ask
the producer or your local service partner if any question came up.
You should keep this manual clean, complete and in a legible condition.
Neither the manufacturer nor dealer accept responsibility for any damage or lack of functionality due to the following:
• Carrying out inappropriate operations for an electric chain hoist
• Product modification without the express authorization of the manufacturer
• Inappropriate operation of the hoist
• Operational errors
• Failure to use the product as instructed in the manual
1.2 European Regulations
The basis for the assembly, first use, certification and maintenance of electric chain hoists are within Germany and within
the area of the European community, the following regulations, and all recommendations of this manual. Local legislation
and directives for different countries may apply in addition to the regulations as stated in this manual (Ger-
man/European).
Please pay particular attention to the rules for the prevention of accidents and the statutory regulations.
European Regulations
EG-Machine directive 98/37/EG
EG-Directive relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG
amended through 92/31/EWG, 93/68/EWG
EG-electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 2006/95/EG
BGV accident prevention regulations

BGV A1 Principles of prevention
BGV A3 (VBG 4) Electrical facilities and equipment
BGV D6 (VBG 9) BGV accident prevention regulation for use in crane systems
BGV D8 (VBG 8) BGV accident prevention regulation for electric winches, lifting and pulling equipment
BGR 500 (VBG 9a) Hoisting accessories
BGV B3 (VBG 121) Noise
BGG 905 (ZH 1/27) Principles for checking of cranes
3
Harmonized regulations
DIN EN ISO 12100-1 Safety of machinery; Basic terminology, methodology
DIN EN ISO 12100-2 Safety of machinery; Technical principles and specifications
EN 818-7 Short link chain for lifting purposes; Fine tolerance hoist chain, Grade T
EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems; General principles for design
EN 50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EN 60034-1 Rotating electrical machines; Rating and performance
EN 60034-5 Rotating electrical machines; Degrees of protection provided by the integral design of rotat-
ing electrical machines
EN 60204-32 Electrical equipment of machines; Requirements for hoisting machines
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP-Code)
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility, Immunity for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-3 Electromagnetic compatibility, Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-
industrial environments
EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility, Emission standard for industrial environments
Regulations and technical specifications

FEM 9.511 Rules for the design of series lifting equipment; Classification of mechanisms
FEM 9.683 Series lifting equipment; Selection of hoisting and travelling motors
FEM 9.751 Series lifting equipment; Power driven series hoist mechanisms; Safety
FEM 9.755 Serial hoist units; Measures for achieving safe working periods
The producers guarantee depends on consideration of these regulations and all of this manual.
Please pay attention to chapter 6 especially!

Other national regulations are valid for countries outside of the European community.
Maintenance work for hoisting equipment has to be carried out by trained and authorised people only. The
main switch has to be switched off before.
Authorised people have to have a theoretical training as well as experience in the field of cranes and hoists. They have
to have an excellent know-how of the special regulations and must be able to decide whether the lifting equipment is in a
safe working condition or not.
They have to fill in the forms of any maintenance work, repair work or test (for example: maintenance work on brake or
clutch).
The hoist has allowed only to be used by people who have complete knowledge of this manual; the manual should al-
ways available showing who has signed the form on the rear cover of this brochure.
1.3 Spare parts
Only original spare parts must be used. The producers guarantee is given for those spare parts only.
The producer cannot be held responsible for failures and breakdowns caused by use of not original or wrong spare parts.
4
2 Technical overview
2.1 Assembly possibilities
The simple building block system makes it easy to convert the electric chain hoists. This allows the choice of single or
double fall versions, stationary or mobile with push or electric trolleys, and the installation of greater hoisting and operat-
ing heights
electric trolley
suspension eye single hole

standard) suspension eye
(special)
hoisting gear
chain box with hook tackle with

safety chain rubber buffer
lift limiter
(limit stop)
with rubber buffer control pendant with
emergency stop
hook block
with rubber buffer
figure 1: assembly possibilities
2.2 Schematic sketch of the load chain configuration
Use manufacturer’s original parts only, as these meet the high stress and service life standards required.
hold down
chain sprocket wheel
chain guide
lift limiter
(limit stop)
hook tackle
hook block
2.1 single fall version 2.2 double fall version
figure 2: configuration of the load chain
5
2.3 Sectional view
part no. designation part no. designation
1 casing 11 pinion shaft III (without illustration)

2 gear cover 12 wheel IV (without illustration)
3 stator 13 pinion shaft V (without illustration)
4 rotor 14 pinion shaft VII
5 motor pinion shaft 15 wheel VI
6 motor flange B 16 wheel VIII
7 brake unit 17 sprocket wheel
8 fan 18 cover for low voltage control
9 fan screw 19 load chain
10 wheel II (without illustration) 20 chain guide and hold down
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
15
14
16
17
18
19
20
figure 3: Sectional view
2.4 Explanation of type designation
Example: model 13
type 12500 / 2 - 2.8 / 0.7
slow lifting speed (m/min)

main lifting speed (m/min)
number of falls
capacity (kg)
According to the Machine directive 98/37 EG you will find all the technical data in the technical documentation attached to
each hoist.
6
3 Assembly
Assembly work should only be carried out by trained specialists in accordance with BGV D8 sect. 24 (VBG 8 sect. 24).
3.1 Mechanical assembly
3.1.1 Hook tackle
The hook tackle used to attach loads for hoists in single fall version.
hook casing
4 pieces hex. socket cap
screws M12×60 DIN 912
cover for hook casing
load hook complete

(incl. hook nut, thrust ball bearing
and safety latch)
figure 4: assembly of the hook tackle for chain 16×45 mm
During maintenance work the condition of the load hook (wear and centre punch spacing, on page of hook certificate)
and of the rubber buffer has to be checked. Furthermore the condition of the pin, which secures the hook nut, the pres-
sure bearing and the safety latch have to be checked at regular intervals. If required the axial bearing has to be cleaned
and greased.
Attention! The hook nut of the load hook for the hook tackle is locked by using a safety pin rotated 90° to
the hook axis.
For the assembly of the hook tackle tighten the connection screws with the following torques:
hook tackle designation max. load capacity [kg] dimension of screws qty tightening torque [Nm]
hook tackle for chain 16×45 mm 6300 M12×60 DIN 912 4 50
table 1: connection screws with torques for the hook tackle
3.1.2 Hook block
The hook block used to attach the load in double fall version.
hook casing
4 pieces hex. socket cap screws
M12x50 DIN 912 sprocket wheel
bolt with plain bearing
locking pin
load hook complete

(incl. hook nut, thrust ball bearing
and safety latch
figure 5: assembly of the hook block for chain 16×45 mm
For the assembly of the hook block tighten the connection screws with the following torques:
hook tackle designation max. load capacity [kg] dimension of screws qty tightening torque [Nm]
hook block for chain 16×45 mm 12500 M12×50 DIN 912 4 50
table 2: connection screws with torques for the hook block
If maintenance work is carried out check the condition of all the hook parts according to chapter 3.1.1.
Attention! The hook nut of the load hook for the hook block is locked by using a safety pin rotated 90°
to the hook axis.
7
3.1.3 Stationary suspended hoists - basic version
3.1.3.1 Suspension with suspension eye
Assembly: The suspension eye, which forms part of the standard delivery, must be inserted into the
specially provided suspension holes on the electric chain hoist and bolted into place with the
two bolts. Use washers with the lock bolts and secure position with safety nuts.
suspension eye suspension eye

bolt
with blue arrow
blue arrow
safety nut
suspension holes
in the hoist casing
washer
figure 6: suspension with suspension eye
3.1.3.2 Suspension with single hole suspension eye
Assembly: The single hole suspension eye, which forms part of the standard delivery, must be inserted
into the specially provided suspension holes on the electric chain hoist and bolted into place
with the two bolts. Use washers with the lock bolts and secure position with safety nuts.
single hole bolt single hole suspension

suspension eye eye
safety nut
suspension holes in the

hoist casing
washer
figure 7: suspension with single hole suspension eye
Caution! The single hole eye must be assembled in such a way that the load centre for single fall or dou-
ble fall of chain has to be vertically in line with the suspension hole of the suspension eye. The
correct location is shown by the blue arrows on the suspension eye and on the hoist body which
have to be at the same side of the hoist.
If a hoist with a single hole eye has to be converted to a different number of load falls the single
hole eye has to be dismantled, turned by 180° degrees and to be refitted to the suspension
holes of the hoist.
8
configuration of the single hole suspension
eye for single fall operation
„blue arrow“,
symbol hook tackle
configuration of the single hole suspension

eye for double fall operation
„blue arrow“,
symbol hook block
„blue arrow“ on the chain hoist
load centre for single fall operation
load centre for double fall operation
figure 8: configuration of the single hole eye for conversion to a different number of falls
3.1.3.3 Suspension with hook suspension
Assembly: The hook suspension must be inserted into the specially provided suspension holes on the
electric chain hoist and bolted into place with the two bolts. Use washers with the lock bolts
and secure position with safety nuts.
Caution! When changing from single fall use to double fall use, do not forget to reverse the direction of
the suspension hook. The hook should be positioned directly above the load hook. The rele-
vant label on the suspension hook must be on the chain box side.
configuration of the configuration of the

hook suspension hook suspension
for single fall operation for double fall operation
bolt, washer and bolt, washer and safety

safety nut nut
Option:
The hook suspension
can be carried out
non-rotatable.
figure 9: hook suspension for chain 16×45 mm
9
3.1.4 Gear ventilation
Having completed the assembly, the tooth lock washer has to be placed under the oil filler plug (top side of casing) to
avoid oil leakage due to high pressure inside the gearbox. You will find this tooth lock washer fastened with a piece of self
adhesive tape next to the oil filler plug.
tooth lock washer
figure 10: tooth lock washer for gear ventilation
3.1.5 Mounting of the chain box
The mounting of the chain box has to be done according to figure 11.
At the bottom side of the chain hoist the two suspension blocks are mounted by means of 4 pieces hexagon socket head
cap screws M12×55 DIN 912. The chain box has to be suspended by a hexagon head bolt M20×180 DIN 931 and locked
by a self-locking nut.
The suspension chain for adjustment and saving of the chain box must be mounted as follows:
• The suspension chain has to be inserted into the chain pocket of the hoist casing and locked by an hexagon head
screw M8×30 DIN 933 with washer.
• The last link of the suspension chain (7x22) fits into the special seat of the chain box and has to be locked with a
screw M8x35 DIN 931 and a self-locking nut.
• Please make sure that the suspension chain is tighten and not twisted at all.
Caution! Ensure that the chain box is sufficient for the amount of chain you are using. The chain
dimension and capacity is shown on the side of the chain box.
Insert the chain end with lift limiter and its rubber buffer loosely into the chain box.
After running the entire chain length through the hoist into the chain box, check that the box is
not overloaded (see capacity mark at the chain box).
Do not overload the chain box!
Please make sure that any parts of the load hook unit cannot touch the chain box.
hexagon head screw

M8×30 DIN 933 with
washer
load chain
suspension chain
hexagon head bolt
M20×180 DIN 931 suspension block
with self-locking nut
hexagon head screw
16/10
M8×35 DIN 933
Kette 16×45
max. 10 m
chain box chain box
maximal
Kette / chain
figure 11: mounting of the chain box
10
3.1.6 Fitting of the load chain – single fall version
hold down
chain guide
sprocket wheel
pre-assembled piece of
chain (fit-up aid)
slotted connecting chain link

on chain box side
load chain load chain
lift limiter
hook tackle
figure 12: fitting of load chain for single fall version
Assembly guide:
1. The chain hoist is prepared with a small piece of chain (fit-up aid) on the sprocket wheel.
2. The slotted connecting chain link included in delivery has to be linked with the pre-assembled piece of chain always at
the side of the chain box. The load chain has to be linked with this connecting chain link too.
3. Insert the load chain by pressing the down button.
4. Remove the short piece of chain and the slotted connecting chain link.
5. Fit the hook tackle to the end of the load chain.
6. Lower the load hook to its final position.
7. Attach the lift limiter* to the 3. chain link of dead end fall.
8. Fit the chain box according to chapter 3.1.5.
9. Allow the chain running into the chain box and lubricate the whole chain length well.
Caution! When changing the load chain and converting to other numbers of falls never allow the chain
to come out of the casing completely, always pull in new chain or a short piece of chain with
the connecting piece. After having mounted the new load chain remove the short piece of
chain and connecting piece (pay attention to chapter 3.1.8!).
Let the dead end of the chain go into the chain box by pressing the up button and using the hoist motor to
prevent knots inside the chain box. Do not put the chain into the chain box directly by hand.
* Lift limiter
The lift limiter is designed to actuate the limit switch in the lower load hook position and to prevent that the
chain running out of the chain hoist.
In the unlikely event of a failed limit switch the lift limiter operates as an emergency stop and lets the
clutch slide. It is not allowed to use this emergency stop permanently.
11
3.1.7 Fitting of the load chain – double fall version
view motor sided

hold down
chain guide
sprocket wheel
pre-assembled piece of
chain (fit-up aid)
slotted connecting chain

link on chain box side
screws for axle axle support

suspension
chain suspension load chain
bolts for chain suspension lift limiter
load chain
hook block
figure 13: fitting of load chain for double fall version
Assembly guide:
1. Insert the load chain into the hoist casing as described in chapter 3.1.6.
2. Insert the load chain into the hook block with a special wire.
Caution! Ensure that the load chain is not twisted between the chain guide of the hoist and the hook
block. This would be dangerous. If it is not possible to fit the load chain according with figure
13 without being twisted one link has to be cut off.
4. Loosen the screws of the axle suspension.
5. Loosen the two bolts of the chain suspension.
6. Remove the chain suspension.
7. Put the chain coming out of the hook block into the pocket of the hoist without being twisted between the hook block
and the chain hoist.
8. Insert the chain suspension into the chain hoist again.
9. Secure the chain suspension with bolts.
10. Fit the axle suspension and tighten the two screws.
11. Check again that the chain is not twisted at all.
12. Lower the load hook to its final position.
13. Attach the lift limiter to the third chain link of the dead chain end.
14. Fit the chain box according to 3.1.5.
15. Allow the chain to run into the chain box by pressing the up button and lubricate the chain well.
Caution! Pay attention for assembly details in chapter 3.1.6!
12
3.1.8 Replacing the load chain, the chain guide and the hold down
The chain guide and the hold down must also be changed when the load chain is being replaced.
hold down
sprocket wheel
chain guide
(two parts)
chain suspension
screw for
screw for
bolt for chain sus-
bolt for chain sus-

chain guide
pension
axle of limit switches
for lift limiting
chain guide
pension
of chain (fit-up aid)

axle suspension
preassembled piece
chain link
slotted connecting
figure 14: replacing load chain, chain guide and hold down
For single fall operation
Dismantling the worn out chain
1. Remove the chain box (see chapter 3.1.5)

2. Loosen the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws M12x60 DIN 912 of the hook tackle and remove this.
3. Loosen the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws M12x60 DIN 912 of the lift limiter and remove this from
the dead end of the chain.
4. Fit the slotted connecting chain link to the end of the worn load chain and connect this to a short piece of
chain.
5. Remove the load chain by pressing the button until the short piece of chain has completely run into the
hoist.
6. Remove the worn load chain.
Replacing the chain guide and the hold down
7. Loosen the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws M6x75 DIN 912 and remove the cover of the low voltage
control.
8. Dismantle the shaft of the limit switches as follows:
⇒ Remove the 2 split pins 5x30.
⇒ Remove the retaining ring and the helical torsion spring.
⇒ Remove the shaft of the limit switches.
9. Remove the two hexagon socket head cap screws M16x120 DIN 912 of the chain guide in the compart-
ment of the low voltage control of the hoist.
10. Remove the chain guide (underside of the hoist casing).
11. Remove the hold down (press it out with a screw driver).
12. Insert the new hold down and the new chain guide.
The tightening torque of the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws M16x120 DIN 912 should not be more
than 60 Nm. - Insert the screws with new gasket rings!
13. Insert the shaft for the limit switches (see chapter 3.2.3)
14. Assemble the cover of the low voltage control.
Replacing the load chain
15. Fit the slotted connecting chain link to the pre-assembled piece of chain on the side of the chain box and
attach the new load chain on it.
16. Allow the load chain running in by pressing the down button.
18. Attach the hook tackle to the load chain.
19. Lower the load hook to the lowest position.
13
22. Allow the chain to run into the chain box by pressing the up button and lubricate the chain well.
Caution! If the chain has been completely removed the hoist for any reason, proceed as follows:
• Use a short piece of chain.
• Downrate the clutch setting to the minimum.
• Insert the pull-in wire into the cross chain hole until it move out on the opposite side.
• Beginning with a plane chain link, insert the chain end by means of the pull-in wire until it settles
down in the pocket of the sprocket wheel and insert it using the slow speed of the motor care-
fully.
For double fall operation
Dismantling the worn out chain
1. Remove the chain box (see chapter 3.1.5)

2. Remove the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws M6x20 DIN 912 and the axle suspension; remove the
chain suspension and second chain fall from the chain suspension, remove the hook block.
3. Loosen the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws M12x60 DIN 912 of the lift limiter and remove this from
the dead end of the chain.
4. Fit the slotted connecting chain link to the end of the worn load chain and connect this to a short piece of
chain.
5. Remove the load chain by pressing the button until the short piece of chain has completely run into the
hoist.
6. Remove the worn load chain.
Replacing the chain guide and the hold down
7. Loosen the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws M6x75 DIN 912 and remove the cover of the low voltage
control.
8. Dismantle the shaft of the limit switches as follows:
⇒ Remove the 2 split pins 5x30.
⇒ Remove the retaining ring and the helical torsion spring.
⇒ Remove the shaft of the limit switches.
9. Remove the two hexagon socket head cap screws M16x120 DIN 912 of the chain guide in the compart-
ment of the low voltage control of the hoist.
10. Remove the chain guide (underside of the hoist casing).
11. Remove the hold down (press it out with a screw driver).
12. Insert the new hold down and the new chain guide.
The tightening torque of the 2 hexagon socket head cap screws M16x120 DIN 912 should not be more
than 60 Nm. - Insert the screws with new gasket rings!
13. Insert the shaft for the limit switches (see chapter 3.2.3
14. Assemble the cover of the low voltage control.
Replacing the load chain
15. Fit the slotted connecting chain link to the pre-assembled piece of chain on the side of the chain box and
mount the new load chain on it.
16. Allow the load chain running in by pressing the down button.
18. Insert the load chain into the hook block with a special wire.
Caution! Ensure that the load chain is not twisted between the chain guide of the hoist and the hook
block. This would be dangerous. If it is not possible to fit the load chain according with figure 13 without
being twisted one link has to be cut off.
20. Das aus der Hakenflasche herausgezogene Kettenende entsprechend flach in die Kettentasche der
Kettenendbefestigung einlegen.
21. Kettenendbefestigung in das Gehäuse einschieben und mit Bolzen abstecken.
22. Nochmaliges Prüfen, dass Kette nicht verdreht ist.
23. Achshalter mit Zylinderschrauben befestigen.
24. Lower the load hook to the lowest position.
27. K Allow the chain to run into the chain box by pressing the up button and lubricate the chain well.
Caution! If the chain has been completely removed the hoist for any reason, proceed as follows:
• Use a short piece of chain.
• Downrate the clutch setting to the minimum.
• Insert the pull-in wire into the cross chain hole until it move out on the opposite side.
• Beginning with a plane chain link, insert the chain end by means of the pull-in wire until it settles
down in the pocket of the sprocket wheel and insert it using the slow speed of the motor care-
fully.
14
3.2 Electric connections
Electrical installation must comply with EN 60204 part 32 or relevant national regulations.
After having completed the installation check them in accordance to sections 20.2 and 20.3 of EN 60204
part 32 (Europe). Details on the control can be seen in the wiring diagram. The electric installation com-
plies with the currently valid EN 60204 part 32 (Europe).
3.2.1 Mains power
The mains current supply (main incoming line conductor) must be able to be disconnected at all poles by means of a
mains switch (in accordance with EN 60204-32 section 5.3).
Work on the electric installation may only be carried out by trained specialists and equipment must first be disconnected
from the current supply. In order to ensure the proper functionality of the hoist, the power must be connected to a clock-
wise (CW)-turning 3 phase AC supply. Connection has to be corrected if deviations occur. Power connection is correct,
when the hoist button for lifting is pressed and the hoist moves the load upwards.
Fuse (slowly blowing) at 400 V (3 phase) in front of the main switch is 16 A.
Check if the mains voltage agrees with that specified on the rating plate.
Connect mains current supply lines and control line in accordance with wiring diagram.
The L1, L2, L3 and PE terminals for the mains connection are located in the compartment of the low voltage
control of the hoist. Line 3 + PE (minimum cross section 1,5 mm²) are necessary for the connection.
After connecting, press button for lift. If the load moves downwards, interchange the L1 and L2 supply
cores. (Disconnect mains supply before!).
3.2.2 Low voltage control 24V
contactors
cable for trolley

motor supply
mains cable
4 G 1.52
rectifier A1
lifting motor
transformer T
fuses
primary/secondary F1/F2
cable for lifting
motor
terminals
limit switches control pendant
strainer clamp
figure 15: low voltage control
Control occurs in the control circuit which receives 24 Volts through a safety transformer. This safety transformer can
also be used for other primary voltages (reserve the terminal connections). On request other secondary voltages are
possible.
15
3.2.3 Electric limit switch for lift limiting
The electric chain hoist is provided with low voltage control and with electric limit switches for lift limiting in the highest
and lowest load hook position (see figure 15 and figure 16).
Please make sure during first operation that the lifting direction shown on the pendant control agrees to the
real hoist movements as this is absolutely necessary for the safe operation of the limit switches. (see 3.2.1).
The safe operation of the respective limit switches for lifting and lowering has to be checked.
limit switch
lowering
limit switch
lifting
adjust distance between

switch and actuator 0.5-1 0.5-1
hook tackle or
lift limiter
hook block
figure 16: electric limit switches for lift limiting
4 Electric chain hoist with electric trolley
Alle Fahrwerke sind geeignet für

• Schmale Träger nach DIN 1025 und Euronorm 24-62
• Mittelbreite I-Träger nach DIN 1025
• Breite I-Träger nach DIN 1025
Elastic bumpers level to the centre of the running wheels must be mounted as limit stops at each end of
the track.
Additionally the trolley can be fitted out with an electric cross-bar limit switch. Actuating bars at the travel-
ling girder must be installed by the user/customer.
The electric trolley for model 13 is not suitable for travelling through girder bends.
trolley motor
trolley connecting bolts
spacing washers
suspension eye
suspension bolts with self

locking nuts
figure 17: electric chain hoist with electric trolley
16
4.1 Mechanical assembly
The two trolley connecting bolts are to be fixed to the lateral boards so as to allow a space about two milli-
metres between the running wheel flange and the girder flange. The width is adjusted by inserting spacing
washers symmetrically (figure 18).
The suspension eye is mounted between the spacing bushes on the trolley connecting bolts.
To guarantee that the trolley can’t be assembled in a wrong position one side plate carries a safety bolt.
The self locking nuts M36x1.5 of the suspension bolts have to be tightened with a torque wrench and a
tightening torque of 560 Nm.
flange width
flange width + 16 mm
figure 18: adjustment of flange width
The hoist has to be fixed with the two suspension bolts Ø36 to the suspension eye. To secure the suspension bolts self
locking nuts M22x1.5 DIN 985 are provided.
After having completed the assembly a movement in the directions shown in figure 19 must still be possible.
top view von oben

Ansicht
figure 19: movement between chain hoist and electric trolley
17
4.2 Electric connection of the electric trolley
The contactors for switching the trolley motor are located in a special contactor box. This contactor box is assembled with
two hexagon socket head screws M8x16 DIN 933 on the motor side plate.
The connecting cable coming out of the contactor box of the electric trolley has to be connected to the terminals in the
chain hoist according to the wiring diagram. After having completed the installation work check the proper operation.
contactor box of
the electric trolley
connecting cable
chain hoist – trolley
low voltage control of

the hoisting gear
contactor box of
mains supply cable the lifting motor
connecting cable connecting cable

chain hoist – lifting chain hoist – lifting
motor motor
cable for control pen- cable for control

dant pendant
strainer clamp
figure 20: electrical connection of the trolley
Explanation of the trolley type designation:
example: EF N / 12500 4+16
EF- electric trolley flange width load capacity travelling speed

N, S1 in kg of the electric trolley
5 Tests
Use of the electric chain hoist is possible in accordance with: Accident prevention regulations for:
• Winches, lifting and pulling equipment BGV D8 (VBG 8) (according to German law)
• Cranes BGV D6 (VBG 9) (according to German law)
5.1 Test when used according to BGV D8, section 23 (VBG 8, section 23)
A trained specialist must test the equipment before starting operation for the first time and after extensive alterations.
5.2 Test when used according to BGV D6, section 25 (VBG 9, section 25)
An authorised person must test the cranes before starting operation for the first time and after extensive alterations. The
electric chain hoists are type approved.
5.3 Regular tests
• A trained specialist must test the equipment, cranes and supporting structures once a year. It may be necessary to
carry out tests more often if the operating conditions are very harsh, that means for example high percentage of use
with full load, dusty or aggressive environment, high duty rate, high number of operation cycles.
• Only an authorised person appointed by the BG - associations and experts from the Technical Control Association
(TÜV) are considered qualified to test cranes.
• Trained specialists are highly qualified specialist personnel or the manufacturer’s after-sales service personnel.
18
6 Directions and prohibitions for use
6.1 Directions for use
• The load may only be moved if it is slung securely and no person is standing near enough to be at risk
and when the operator has received an all clear signal from the person slinging the load (BGV D8,
section 29.1, paragraph 1 (VBG 8, section 29.1, paragraph 1)).
• All electric chain hoists are suitable for an environment temperature of –20°Celsius to +40°Celsius as
standard.
For use at higher environmental temperature the duty rate has to be reduced correspondingly.
• The standard protection class is IP 54.
• The motors are manufactured according to the requirement of Insulation Class F.
• The load must be placed vertically under the electric hoist before lifting.
• The motion directions are indicated with symbols on the control buttons.
• Do not turn the chain over edges.
• Consult the manufacturer or supplier, if the hoist is to be used in an aggressive environment (for instance acid or
alkaline or dusty environment or to transport inflammable or other dangerous loads).
• For use for molten metals and similar hazardous material - please ask the producer.
• Do not lower the double fall hook if the chain gets slack.
• Repair work has to be done only if mains supply is switched off and no load is suspended on the hook.
• After switching off the emergency stop the reason for this failure has to be found out by trained people and the hoist
can only be used if all possible failures are removed.
• Lifting the load from the ground has to be done with the lowest possible speed. Before doing this slack sling chains
or ropes have to be tightened carefully.
• Cranes in outdoor use require a roof for the park position.
6.2 Prohibitions for use
• Inching mode.
• Permanent use of the clutch during operation (Ultimate safety overload device only!)
• Transporting people.
• Using the hoist with people being underneath the load.
• Starting initial operation before an expert or a trained specialist has inspected the equipment.
• Moving loads heavier than the nominal load.
• Pulling loads which are tilted or dragging loads.
• Tearing off loads.
• Removing the cover of vessels which are under vacuum.
• Pulling at the control pendant or control cable even it is strainer-relieved.
• Carrying out repairs without disconnecting the current supply and without special knowledge.
• Using the load chain to sling the loads.
• Operation with twisted chain, caused by swivelled hook block or wrongly mounted chain end.
• Using a load chain, which is longer than the chain box capacity stated on the chain box (see chapter
3.1.5).
• Using the hoist with higher duty rate as marked on the specification plate.
• Using the hoist without having done the regular inspection.
• Operation after S.W.P. is exceeded.
• When the hoist with trolley is used at girders, which are lower than or equal to 2.5 m above working
platforms it is not allowed to grab on the trolley travel girder. Touching the chain during operation is not
allowed.
7 Maintenance
• Alle Wartungsarbeiten sind nur von sachkundigen Personen durchzuführen.
• The maintenance table (see table 3) lists the parts and functions to be tested and the necessary main-
tenance work. Defects have to be reported immediately to the owner. The owner is responsible to get
defects remedied by a trained specialist.
• Maintenance work may only be carried out if the electric chain hoist is not loaded and the main switch
is switched off so that the power supply is disconnected.
• Shorten the periods between maintenance works in very demanding operating conditions, e.g. multi-
shift operation, high number of switching actuation, poor environmental conditions.
19
Checking for wear
• Check suspension hook and load hook for deformation (measure punch spacing), rust and cracking
and check the overall condition.
• The chain sprocket in the hook block must be replaced if the running surface is worn by about 1 mm.
• Check the load chain according to 7.4.
• Replace rubber buffer if worn.
7.1 Test and maintenance works
Please note chapter 1.2!
Shorten the periods between maintenance works in very demanding operating conditions, e.g. multi-shift operation, high
number of switching actuation, poor environmental conditions.
check
daily 3 month yearly
visual check of the whole equipment ●

function check of the brake ●
of the lift limiter ●
maintenance and adjustment of the brake ●
of the clutch ●
wear of the load chain (acc. to chapter 7.4) ●
lubrication of the load chain ●
wear of the rubber buffer (visual check) ●
lubrication of the hook block and the hook tackle acc. to chapter 11.2 /
check the condition of the safety latch and of the pin, which prevent the ●
hook nut from loosening and chisel punch marks
universal checks of all screw fittings ●

of the hold down and the chain guide ●
safety devices ●
check of the condition and safe positioning of the chain box ●
check of the electric cables, control cables and control pendant ●
check of the trolleys and wheels ●
table 3: test and maintenance works
The electric chain hoist is designed in accordance with FEM 9.511. If the hoist is used under the condi-
tions of FEM 9.511, including the described frequency of maintenance works, the electric chain hoist must
be overhauled after 10 years.
20
7.2 Maintenance and adjustment of the D.C. disk brake
The D.C. disk brake needs very little maintenance.
7.2.1 Construction of the brake

6 5 16 2 15 1 14
10
7 9 11
figure 21: construction of the brake
Functional description
The anchor plate (2) is axially moveable and is pressed by the brake pressure springs (4) to the brake disc (9) with the
brake linings (7) and the basic plate (6) and provides the brake torque by that way. The brake linings (7) are vulcanised
on the brake disc (9) which is installed with positive locking by the key grooves of the coupling sleeve (11) with the motor
pinion shaft (10).
Between anchor plate (2) and magnetic coil (1) has to be an air gap of 0.4 mm.
By means of impressing a DC voltage on the magnetic coil the magnetic field produces an opposite power onto the an-
chor plate (2). Hence the anchor plate (2) will be pulled up to the magnet coil (1) against the pressure of the springs (4)
by closing the air gap (0.4 mm). The brake gets free. If the DC power is cut off, the anchor plate (2) moves back caused
by force of the pressure springs, the brake is closed and the load securely stopped.
7.2.2 Adjustment of the D.C. disk brake
See for this

figure 21!
The air gap between anchor plate (2) and magnetic coil (1) has to be checked when the power is cut of. It is factory set to
0.4 mm. After many lifting operations this air gap may increase caused by wear of the brake linings. If it is about 0.7 mm
the brake has to be readjusted as follows:
1. Disconnect the hoist from mains supply.

2. Remove the fan cap after loosening the screws.
3. Pull the dust protection ring (16) out of the groove in the magnetic coil and pull it over the magnetic coil
(1) to get access to the brake disc.
4. Remove the abrasive dust by using compressed air.
5. Pull the O-Ring (15) out of the groove and pull it over the magnetic coil (1) to get access to the air gap.
Once more remove the abrasive dust by using compressed air.
6. Check the thickness of the brake disc (9) with the vulcanised linings (minimum 9.5 mm).
If it is less than 9.5 mm the whole brake disc with brake linings has to be replaced.
7. Loosen the hexagon head screws (14) approximately a half turn. After about two adjustment procedures
these screws have to be replaced.
8. Tighten the hollow screws (5) approximately 1 mm towards the magnetic coil (1).
9. Tighten the hexagon head screws (14) as far as an air gap of 0.4 mm between the anchor plate (2) and
the magnetic coil (1) is reached (use a thickness gauge to check).
10. Turn the hollow screws (5) out of the magnetic coil until they press against the basic plate (6) again.
11. Tighten the hexagon head screws (14) again equally.
12. Double check the air gap again by using a thickness gauge.
21
Make sure that the air gap has the same size all around the brake, therefore it is necessary to
check the air gap at several points of the circumference.
13. If necessary readjust the air gap again.

14. Use a torque wrench to tighten the hexagon head screws (14) with a tightening torque of 10 Nm.
15. Refit the O-ring (15) and the dust protection ring (16) to the groove between magnetic coil and brake
disk. Put back the protection ring (16) into the groove of the magnetic coil (1).
16. Connect the cable with the plug.
17. Mount the fan cap.
18. Connect mains supply again.
19. Check for proper operation.
If stopping the lowering movement with nominal load there should be a slide of not more than two chain
links. The load should not stop immediately to avoid any impact stress.
7.2.3 Electric control of the D.C. disk brake
Mode of function
The disk brake is supplied through a rectifier circuit. It operates according to the fail safe principle. If there is a power
failure, the brake acts automatically so that the load is held securely in every position. To shorten the braking distance
the brake is operated in a DC circuit.
7.3 Sliding clutch
The sliding clutch is located between the motor and the brake so that the power from the brake to the load
is transmitted by gear parts in form-fitting connection. Even the clutch is seriously worn, the load will not
fall uncontrolled as the load can be held in every position by the brake. The clutch unit acts as a sliding
clutch with asbestos free linings.
The sliding clutch is an ultimate overload safety device and it is not allowed to use it permanently. That
means it is not allowed to run the hook block or the hook tackle or the lift limiter against the body of the
hoist to limit the lifting movement for standard operation as they are emergency limits only.
The lift limiting by the two limit switches, which are situated under the hoisting body, are operating limit
switches (see chapter 3.2.3).
7.3.1 Construction of the sliding clutch
17 18 19 20 21 10 20 19 18 17 22
24 25 23 26 27 28 29
figure 22: construction of the sliding clutch
The sliding clutch from two clutch hubs (17) which are connected with the motor shaft by one feather key at each side,
the clutch linings (18), two clutch discs (19) with two cylindrical bolts (20) with connect the rotor (12) with the clutch discs
(19). The pressure piece 1(22), the internal pressure bolt (24) with O- ring (25), the pressure piece 2 (23), the pressure
bush (26), the pressure spring (27), the fan (28) and the lock nut (29) are located on the motor shaft.
22
7.3.2 Adjustment of the sliding clutch
If the test is done using a spring balance the value of load for the clutch adjustment has to be approx. 30 %
higher.
1. Loosen the lock nut (29).

2. Compress the clutch spring sensitively by tightening the threaded bush with the fan (28) until the load is just lifted.
If turning the threaded bush clockwise the clutch torque will increased.
If turning the bush counter clockwise the clutch torque will decrease.
3. Lock the threaded bush using the lock nut (29) after having completed the adjustment.
4. Test the clutch setting once more by lifting the nominal load to the uppermost load position.
When adjusting the clutch by means of a crane scale or other adjusting device the clutch should not slip for
longer than 2 - 3 seconds.
7.4 Load chain
Hoist chains are means of carrying which require official approval. Therefore, it is important to observe the guidelines
issued by the trade association’s centre for accident prevention with regard to round steel chains in hoisting operation,
the guidelines for general inspection and test specifications in accordance with DIN 685, section 5, Nov 1981, the acci-
dent prevention regulations in BGV D8 (VBG 8 of April 1997) and in BGV D6 (VBG 9 of April 2001) (valid for Germany),
EN 818-7 (September 2002) or equivalent regulations in the respective country.
7.4.1 Lubrication of the load chain before starting and during operation
The links along the entire length of the load chain must be lubricated with a penetrating gear lubricant oil
before starting operation for the first time and during unloaded operation. Subsequent lubrication, whereby
the links must be cleaned first, depends on the degree of use and the operating conditions.
A dry-film lubricant, e.g. lubricating varnish, graphite powder, should be used when ambient influences are
conducive to wear (sand, emery).
7.4.2 Testing of the wear of the chain
The continuous monitoring of the load chain is compulsory according to DIN 685 section 5 and the accident
prevention regulations in BGV D8, section 27 (VBG 8, section 27). The load chain must be tested before
starting operation and after approx. 200 operating hours or 10,000 load cycles under normal conditions or
more often under harsh and severe conditions.
Testing must cover checking links, particularly at their points of contact, for wear, cracks, deformation and
other damages.
The chain must be replaced:

• if the nominal thickness at the points of contact is reduced by 10%,
• if the chain or a link is elongated by 5%, or an eleven links piece of chain is elongated by 2%
• if the links are rigid
The chain guide and hold-down must also be replaced with the chain.
Caution! Replacement of chain shall only be done if spare parts are obtained from the manufacturer or
his approved service agent.
7.4.3 Measuring wear and replacing chain
t dimension t = max. 47.3 measured over one chain link

dimension t = max. 504.9 measured over eleven chain links
dimension dm = minimal 0.9 d = 14.4
formula:
d1 d1 + d 2
dm =
2
d2
figure 23: measurement of chain dimensions
23
7.4.4 Measuring wear and replacing load hook
According to DIN 15401 part 1 the load hooks have to be replaced if the length between the chisel punch marks (dimen-
sion Y) widened more than 10 %. The permissible values are shown on the hook certificate in the Inspection and test
logbook.
7.5 Electric trolley
7.5.1 Maintenance work on the electric trolley
The checks and maintenance work on the electric trolley have to be done in accordance with table 3 of the
chapter 7.1.
7.5.2 Adjustment of the air gape of the trolley brake
If the brake linings are worn so that the air gap is about 0.9 mm it is necessary to adjust the gap.
3 rubber gasket (O-ring) procedure:
1 fan cover 1. Dismantle the cover (1).

2. Loosen the fan screws (2).
3. Remove the rubber gasket (3) and put a thick-
2 fan screws ness gauge 0.25 mm between plate (4) and
sticking plate (5).
4. Tighten the screw (6) so far that you can re-
6 screw move the thickness gauge easily.
5. Tighten the fan screws (2) symmetrically.
Tighten first the screws opposite the key
4 plate (torque 4-5.5 Nm).
6. Tighten the screw (6) again.
5 sticking plate 7. Remove the thickness gauge.
8. Assemble the fan cover (1).
9. Watch the test run of the trolley.
figure 24: construction of the trolley brake
8 Duty rate of an electric chain hoist (acc. to FEM 9.683)
The duty rate and the number of operating cycles for one s
hour must not be higher, than shown at the specification in m 1 lifting cycle
plate of the hoist or at a technical data table. (European running time period of rest running time period of rest
regulation FEM 9.683). lifting lowering
The duty rate, expressed as the cyclic duration factor
(c.d.f.) is the ratio of
running time to running time + period of rest
formula:
running time x 100%
c.d.f. =
running time + period of rest t in min
The duty rate is limited by the permissible temperature of the windings in the lifting motor. The running time is depending
on the necessary lifting height, lifting speed of the electric chain hoist and the number of lifting motions required for a
particular transport procedure (unloading trucks, feeding machines). It is difficult in practice to take note of the duty rate
during the lifting operation. We, therefore, give the following practical guidelines:
8.1 Short-time duty
The permissible operating period without cooling interval when operation starts and with a motor temperature of approx.
20° C is following:
duty rate duty group duty group operating period * acc. to FEM 9.683
[c.d.f. %] FEM 9.511 ISO 4301 (tB in min)
25 % 1 Bm M3 15
* The operating period tB of the chain hoists B13 is higher then required acc. to FEM 9.683.
table 4: duty rate for short time duty
This duty type is not permissible for the slower speed of the hoisting motor. After having reached the maximum running
time a break is required and the hoist can be further used in intermittent duty mode.
24
8.2 Intermittent duty
Depending on the c.d.f. of the hoist the following break is necessary:
duty rate break

[c.d.f. %] [min]
25% 3 times running time
table 5: duty rate for intermittent duty
8.3 Example
The electric chain hoist type 6300/1-5.6/1.4 should be lift loads of 6300 kg to a height of 3 m.
performance data: load capacity 6300 kg

lifting speed 5.6 m/min – main speed; 1.4 m/min – slow speed
duty rate 25 %ED – main speed; 10 %ED – slow speed
duty group of the hoist 1 Bm
At the beginning of the lifting operation the electric chain hoist has a temperature of approx. 20 °C.
3 m lifting + 3 m lowering
c.d.f = = 1 min, 4 sec. for each lifting cycle
5.6 m/min (lifting speed)
During the operation without break (short-time duty = max. 15 minutes without break acc. to FEM 9.683) max. 14 lifting
cycles are possible.
After 15 minutes of operating time, 3 minutes break for each minute of operating time must be taken (i.e. 3 times the
operating time). This break is usually necessary for slinging and taking off loads.
Caution! Cooling periods are imperative for extreme lifting heights (from 10 metres on).
Low lifting speed should only be used for precise lowering and lifting. It is not suitable when
greater lifting heights shall be driven through.
Option! To protect the lifting motor a thermal overload device is offered as an option.
9 Duty rate of the electric trolleys (acc. to FEM 9.683)
If the hoist is equipped with an electric trolley the operators have to take care of the duty rating of the trolley as well. This
especially applies to very long track systems.
electric trolley type duty rate running time

ED% (min) * The ratings are relevant for the
EF / EEF N/S1 4+16m/min 40/20% 30* fast travelling speed.
table 6: duty rate for electric trolley
10 Strainer clamp for the control cable
strainer clamp
for control cable
control cable The strainer clamp must be fixed in such a way

as to prevent any tensile forces affecting the
control cable. Pulling at the control pendant or
the control cable is not permitted.
figure 25: assembly of the strainer clamp
25
11 Lubrication
11.1 Lubrication of the gear
The gear is already filled with 2 litre oil by the manufacturer. The oil must be changed if the hoist is going to be over-
hauled. The oil has to be disposed in accordance with the law of environmental protection.
Use oil with a viscosity of 220 mm²/s at 40°C and for a temperature range from -20° to +40°C and.
Alternative oils are:
supplier oil designation

Castrol Alpha Zn 200
ESSO EP 200
Mobil Mobilgear 630
Shell Omala 220
ELF Reduktelf SP 220
BP XP 220 BP Energol GR
table 7
11.2 Lubrication of the hook block and hook tackle
Lubricate the anti-friction bearings on the hook and the chain sprocket after approx. 20,000 lifting cycles or
once a year, if in heavy use shorten the interval, use a special anti-friction bearing grease.
11.3 Lubrication of the trolleys
The geared wheels and the roller bearings of the electric trolleys have to be lubricated with grease once a
year or after 10,000 driving cycles, if in heavy use the interval has to be shortened.
12 Measures to be taken at the end of the S.W.P.
After the hoist or its components have reached the end of the S.W.P. the hoist or its components have to be overhauled
or to be taken finally out of operation.
The parts have to be disposed in accordance to the laws of environmental protection. Metals, rubber, plastics have to be
disposed or recycled separately.
26
The operators have been instructed how to use this hoist and have read the manual and especially the safety advice.
Name, Surname Date Signature
The advice contained in this manual is limited to such matters / facts which are necessary to ensure a safe operation
and maintenance of the industrial hoists, to be observed by appropriate skilled and qualified operators. Further informa-
tion about other operational conditions are not considered herewith.
In case of any deviations to the normal operations (such as unusual noise, vibrations, higher input current or frequently
blowing fuses) the hoist has to be taken out of operation. The area underneath the load has to be secured and blocked
off; a possible fault could result in danger to people or goods. The operator or owner of the hoist has to call a trained
specialist to repair the hoist.
HOFFMANN Fördertechnik GmbH Wurzen

Dresdener Straße 66-68 ● 04808 Wurzen ● BR Deutschland
Telefon: (03425) 89 24 – 0 ● Telefax: (03425) 89 24 – 99 ● E-Mail: sales@liftket.de ● Internet: http://www.liftket.de Ho 03/2007
27

211M MR 052 02 X009 0030

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

211M MR 052 02 X009 0030

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

1

1 Emisión para el Cliente Julio-2009 LSS IPG IPG

0 Emisión para revisión interna Mayo-2009 LSS IPG CAS ------

1.0. - Contactos …………………………………………………………………………………………….................. 3

2.0. - Introducción ………………………………………………………………………………......................... 6

3.0. - Objetivo .……………………………………………………………………………………............................ 9

4.0. - Características Técnicas del Equipo .......................................................... 10

5.0. - Instrucciones para la Instalación, Operación y Mantenimiento ................. 12

6.0. - Instrucciones de Seguridad y Prevención de Accidentes .......................... 42

7.0. - Anexos ……………………………………………………………………………………............................. 45

Tenga presente que, de no prestar atención a la información aquí entregada,

1.2. – Búsqueda de Información y Asistencia Técnica.

1.2.1. – Información de Contactos

► FLSmidth Minerals USA Inc. (Sede Mundial)

► FLSmidth Minerals Chile (Departamento de Ingeniería)

► FLSmidth Minerals Chile (Servicio al Cliente)

1.3. – Solicitud Repuestos

1.2.2. – Como identificar un repuesto en el listado de partes

b. - Número de Proyecto FLSmidth:

c. - Número del Listado de Partes:

Carro Mantenimiento Excéntrica Número 28010ME01LP01 Sección 01.01

PLANO Nº CODIGO PESO TOTAL

d. – Número del Elemento: Esto es esencialmente un número que determina la ubicación de

● Número de la Sección: Es un número de cuatro (4) dígitos de la forma “xx.yy” y

● Número de Página: Es un número de dos (2) dígitos de la forma “xx” que

● Número de Posición: Es un número de dos (2) dígitos en forma de “xx” y, está

Elemento: Bomba Hidráulica

El ítem está en la Sección número 01.01, en la hoja número 09 y en la posición 04.

La anterior información se entrega como un resumen de manejo rápido. Si usted necesita

La empresa “AkerSolutions” encargada de desarrollar el proyecto “ESPERANZA” propiedad de la

TAG DEL EQUIPO Nº CANT DESCRIPCION

Carro para el Mantenimiento de la Excéntrica de un

2.2. - Descripción General

Las dimensiones y pesos principales del Carro son:

Largo (incluido el pasillo de acceso) : 10.465 mm

DIMENSIONES GENERALES CARRO DE MANTENIMIENTO EXCENTRICA

Este manual está destinado a establecer las normas, especificaciones

Nuestra recomendación es cumplir con las normas y seguir los

4.0. - CARACTERISTICAS TECNICAS DEL EQUIPO

4.1. – Carro para el Mantenimiento de Excéntrica - TAG Nº: 211-ZM-001

4.2. – Características Técnicas de los Componentes Principales

4.2.1. - Trolley Motorizado 4.2.2. - Trolley Conducido

4.2.3. – Cilindros Hidráulicos 4.2.4. – Unidad Hidráulica

4.2. – Características Técnicas de los Componentes Principales (continuación)

4.2.5. – Huinche Hidráulico WH-0600 4.2.6. – Cilindro Freno Hidráulico

4.3.1. - Baliza 4.3.2. - Sirena

5.0. - INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

5.1. – Montaje del Carro

5.1.2.- Montaje en el Terreno

Antes de montar el equipo tenga en cuenta los siguientes aspectos:

Las instrucciones que a continuación se entregan son sugerencias dadas por

5.1.2.1. – Montaje de la Plataforma Inferior (Plano de Referencia Nº: 28010ME01MT1)

Listado de componentes de la Plataforma Inferior:

IT CODIGO COMPONENTE NOMBRE DEL COMPONENTE CANT

b. - Revise la nivelación de la plataforma usando un nivel óptico.

c. - Verifique la cuadratura de la plataforma midiendo la longitud de de la diagonales.

e. - Vuelva a revisar la nivelación y cuadratura de la plataforma. Si una de ellas o ambas se han

Figura Nº 1. - Vista Isométrica de la Plataforma Inferior Armada

- Nota importante: Después de haber soldado, se debe retocar con pintura

5.1.2.2. – Montaje de las Mesas Fijas y Cilindros Hidráulicos

1. - Coloque los cilindros en posición horizontal. Deje las perforaciones de llenado

3. - Instale el tapón nuevamente.